Wilkins, John, A discovery of a new world, 1684

Bibliographic information

Author: Wilkins, John
Title: A discovery of a new world
Year: 1684
City: London
Publisher: Gellibrand
Number of Pages: [5 Bl.], 160 S., [4 Bl.], 184 S. : Ill.

Permanent URL

Document ID: MPIWG:UQGMQSEM
Permanent URL: http://echo.mpiwg-berlin.mpg.de/MPIWG:UQGMQSEM

Copyright information

Copyright: Max Planck Institute for the History of Science (unless stated otherwise)
License: CC-BY-SA (unless stated otherwise)
Table of contents
1. Page: 0
2. Ex Libris James S. Dearden Rampside Page: 2
3. A DISCOVERY OF A New , OR, Page: 5
4. In Two Parts. Page: 5
5. The Fifth Edition Corrected and Amended. LONDON, Page: 5
6. The Epiſtle to the READER. Page: 7
7. The Propoſitions that are proved in this Diſcourſe. PROPOSITION I. Page: 10
8. PROP. II. Page: 10
9. PROP. III. Page: 10
10. PROP. IV. Page: 10
11. PROP. V. Page: 10
12. PROP. VI. Page: 10
13. PROP. VII. Page: 11
14. PROP. VIII. Page: 11
15. PROP. IX. Page: 11
16. PROP. X. Page: 11
17. PROP. XI. Page: 11
18. PROP. XII. Page: 11
19. PROP. XIII. Page: 11
20. PROP. XIV. Page: 11
21. The Firſt Book. That the MOON May be a WORLD. The Firſt Propoſition, by way of Preface. Page: 13
22. Sed vanus ſtolidis hæc omnia finxerit Error. Page: 18
23. Solis lunæq; labores. Page: 19
24. Cum fruſtra reſonant æra auxiliaria Lunæ. Page: 20
25. Una laboranti poterit ſuccerrere Lunæ. Page: 20
26. Gantus & è cælo poſſunt deducere Lunam. Page: 20
27. Cantus & ſi curru lunam deducere tentant, Et facerent, ſi non æra repulſa ſonant. Page: 21
28. PROP. II. That a Plurality of Worlds doth not contradict any Principle of Reaſon or Faith. Page: 26
29. Æſtuas infelix auguſto limite mundi. Page: 28
30. PROP. III. That the Heavens do not conſiſt of any ſuch pure Matter, which can priviledge them from the like Change and Corruption, as theſe Inferiour, Bodies are liable unto. Page: 39
31. Necnon Oceano paſci phæbumque polumq; Gredimus. Page: 42
32. PROP. IV. That the Moon is a Solid, Compacted, Opacous Body. Page: 50
33. PROP. V. That the Moon hath not any Light of her own. Page: 55
34. PROP. VI. That there is a World in the Moon, bath been the direct Opinion of many Ancient, with ſome Modern Mathematicians, and may probably de deduc’d from the Tenents of others. Page: 64
35. PROP. VII. That thoſe Spots and brighter parts, which by our ſight may be diſtinguiſhed in the Moon, do ſhew the difference betwixt the Sea and Land, in that other World. Page: 74
36. PROP. VIII. The Spots repeſent the Sea, and the brighter parts the Land. Page: 80
37. PROP. IX. That there are high Mountains, deep Vallies, and ſpacious Plains in the Body of the Moon. Page: 89
38. PROP. X. That there is an Atmo-ſphæra, or an Orb of groſs, Vaporous Air, immediately encompaſſing the body of the Moon. Page: 104
39. PROP. XI. That as their World is our Moon, ſo our World is their Moon. Page: 108
40. Provehimur portu, terræque urbeſque recedunt. Page: 110
41. PROP. XII. Page: 124
42. PROP. XIII. Page: 136
43. PROP. XIV. Page: 147
44. FINIS. Page: 172
45. A DISCOURSE Concerning a Rem Planet. Tending to prove That ’tis probable our EARTH is one of the PLANETS. The Second Book. By John Wilkins, late L. Biſhop of Cheſter. Page: 173
46. LONDON: Printed by J. D. for John Gellibrand, at the Golden Ball in St. Paul’s Church-Yard. M.DC.LXXXIV. Page: 173
47. To the Reader. Page: 175
48. PROP. I. Page: 179
49. PROP. II. Page: 179
50. PROP. III. Page: 179
51. PROP. IV. Page: 179
52. PROP. V. Page: 179
53. PROP. VI. Page: 180
54. PROP. VII. PROP. VIII. PROP. IX. PROP. X. Page: 180
55. That the EARTH May be a PLANET. PROP. I. Page: 181
56. PROP. II. Page: 201
57. PROP. III. Page: 215
58. PROP. IV. Page: 236
59. PROP. V. That the Scripture, in its proper conſtru-ction, does not any where affirm the Immobility of the Earth. Page: 246
60. PROP. VI. That there is not any Argument from the Words of Scripture, Principles of Na-ture, or Obſervations in Aſtronomy, which can ſuſſiciently evidence the Earth to be in the Gentre of the Uni-verſe. Page: 258
61. PROP. VII. Tis probable that the Sun is in the Gentre of the World. Page: 279
62. PROP. VIII. That there is not any ſufficient reaſon to prove the Earth incapable of thoſe mo-tions which Copernicus aſcribes un-to it. Page: 286
63. Provebimur portu, terræque, verbeſq; recedunt. Page: 288
64. PROP. IX. That it is more probable the Earth does move, than the Sun or Heavens. Page: 321
65. PROP. X. That this Hypotheſis is exactly agreeable to common appearances. Page: 342
66. Quicunq; ſolam mente præcipiti petit Page: 360
67. Brevem replere non valentis ambitum, # Pudebit aucti nominis. Page: 361
68. FINIS. Page: 364
1
[Empty page]
211[Handwritten note 1]22[Handwritten note 2]
Ex Libris
James
S. Dearden
Rampside
333[Handwritten note 3]
4
[Empty page]
544[Handwritten note 4]
A
DISCOVERY

OF
A
New
,
OR
,
A DISCOURSE Tending
to
prove, that ’tis Probable there
may
be another Habitable WORLD
in
the MOON.
With a Diſcourſe concerning the Proba-
bility
of a Paſſage thither.
Unto which
is
Added, A Diſcourſe concerning a
New
Planet, Tending to Prove, That
’tis
Probable Our Earth is one of the
Planets
.
In Two Parts.
By John Wilkins, late Lord Biſhop of
Cheſter
.
The Fifth Edition Corrected and Amended.
LONDON,
Printed by J. Rawlins for John Gellibrand,
at
the Golden-Ball in St.
Pauls Church-
Yard
.
MDCLXXXIV.
655[Handwritten note 5]66[Handwritten note 6]77[Handwritten note 7]
7
The Epiſtle to the READER.
IF amongſt thy leiſure hours, thou canſt
ſpare
any for the pernſal of this diſcourſe,
and
doſt look to find ſomewhat in it which
may
ſerve for thy Information and Benefit:
let me then adviſe thee to come unto it with
an
equal Mind, not ſwayed by Prejudice, but
indifferently
reſolved to Aſſent unto that
Truth
which upon Deliberation ſhall ſeem
moſt
probable unto thy Reaſon, and then I
doubt
not, but either thon wilt agree with me
in
this Aſſertion, or at leaſt not think it to
be
as far from Truth, as it is from common
Opinion
.
Two Cautions there are which I would wil-
lingly
Admoniſh thee of in the Beginning.
I. That thou ſhouldſt not here look to find
any
Exact, Accurate Treatiſe, ſince this
Diſcourſe
was but the Fruit of ſome Lighter
Studies
, and thoſe too budled up in a ſhort
time
, being firſt thought of, and finiſhed in
the
ſpace of ſome few Weeks, and therefore
you
cannot in Reaſon Expect, that it ſhould be
ſo
poliſhed, as perhaps, the Subject would re-
quire
, or the leiſure of the Author might have
done
it.
8The Epiſtle to the Reader.
2. To remember that I promiſe only pro-
bable
Arguments for the Proof of this Opini-
on
, and therefore you muſt not look that every
Conſequence
ſhould be of an undeniable De-
pendance
, or that the Truth of each Argu-
ment
ſhould be Meaſured by its Neceſſity.
I
grant
, that ſome Aſtronomical Appearances
may
poſſibly be ſolved otherwiſe than here
they
are.
But the thing I aim at is this,
that
probably they may be ſo Solved, as I
have
here ſet them down:
Which, if it be
granted
( as I think it muſt) then I doubt
not
, but the indifferent Reader will find
ſome
Satisfaction in the main thing that is
to
be Proved.
Many Ancient Philoſophers of the better
Note
, have formerly defended this Aſſertion,
which
I have here laid down;
and it were
to
be wiſhed, that ſome of us would more ap-
ply
our Endeavors unto the Examination of
theſe
Old Opinions, which though they have
for
a long time lain neglected by others, yet
in
them may you find many Truths well wor-
thy
your Pains and Obſervation.
’Tis a
falſe
Conceit for us to think, that amongſt the
Ancient
Variety and ſearch of Opinions, the beſt
hath
ſtill prevailed.
Time (ſaith the Lear-
ned
Verulam) ſeems to be of the Nature of
a
River or Stream, which carrieth down to
us
that which is Light or blown up, but
9The Epiſtle to the Reader. etb that which is Weighty and Solid.
It is my Deſire, that by the Occaſion of this
Diſcourſe
, I may raiſe up ſome more Active
Spirit
to ſearch after other hidden and un-
known
Truths.
Since it muſt needs be a great
Impediment
unto the Growth of Sciences, for
Men
ſtill ſoto Plod on upon beaten Principles,
as
to be afraid of entertaining any thing that
may
ſeem to contradict them.
An unwilling-
neſs
to take ſuch things into Examinati-
on
, is one of thoſe Errours of Learning in
theſe
times obſerved by the judicions Veru-
lam
.
Lueſtionleſs, there are many ſeeret
Truths
, which the Ancients have paſſed
over
, that are yet left to make ſome of our
Age
Famous for their Diſcovery.
If by this Occaſion I may provoke any Rea-
der
to an Attempt of this Nature, I ſhall
think
my ſelf Happy, and this Work Succeſs-
ful
,
Farewell.
10
The Propoſitions that are proved in
this
Diſcourſe.
PROPOSITION I.
THat the ſtrangeneſs of this Opinion is no Suffi-
cient
Reaſon why it ſhould be Rejected, be-
cauſe
other certain Truths have been formerly eſtee-
med
ridiculous, and great Abſurdities entertai-
ned
by common conſent.
By way of Preface.
PROP. II.
That a Plurality of Worlds does not contradict
any
Principle of Reaſon or Faith.
PROP. III.
That the Heavens do not conſiſt of any ſuch
pure
matter which can priviledge them from the
like
change and Gorruption, as theſe inferiour Bo-
dies
are liable unto.
PROP. IV.
That the Moon is a Solid, Gompacted, Opacious
Body
.
PROP. V.
That the Moon hath not any Light of her own.
PROP. VI.
That there is a World in the Moon, bath been
the
direct Opinion of many Ancients, with ſome
Modern
Mathematicians, and may probably be
deduced
ſrom the Tenents of others.
11
PROP. VII.
That thoſe Spots and brighter Parts, which by
our
Sight may be diſtinguiſbed in the Moon, do
ſhew
the difference betwixt the Sea and Land in
that
other World.
PROP. VIII.
That the Spots repreſents the Sea, and the
brighter
parts the Land.
PROP. IX.
That there are bigh Mountains, deep Vallies,
and
ſpacious plains in the Body of the Moon.
PROP. X.
That there is an Atmo-ſphæra, or an Orb of
groſs
Vaporous Air, immediately encompaſſing the
Body
of the Moon.
PROP. XI.
That as their World is our Moon, ſo our World
is
their Moon.
PROP. XII.
That ’tis probable there may be ſuch Meteors
belonging
to that World in the Moon, as there are
with
us.
PROP. XIII.
That ’tis probable there may be Inhabitants in
this
other World;
but of what kind they are, is
uncertain
.
PROP. XIV.
That ’tis poſſible for ſome of our Poſterity to
find
out Gonveyance to this other World, and if
there
be Inhabitants there, to have Commerce
with
them.
12Books ſold by John Gellibrand.
BAudrandi Geographia ordine litterarum
diſpoſita
, 2 Vol.
Paris 1682. Folio.
Franciſci de le Boe Sylvii opera Medica cum
Collegio
Noſocomico, Geneva, 1681.
Folio.
Diemerbroeck Anatomia, in Quarto.
Zodiacus Medico-Gallicus in Tribus Tomis
pro
Tribus Annis, Quarto.
Plutarchs Morals Tranſlated from the
Greek
by ſeveral Hands into Engliſh, Octavo.
Biſhop Wilkins Diſcourſe of Prayer and
Preaching
, in Octavo.
------Mathematical Magick, in Octavo.
-----Sermons upon ſeveral Occaſions be-
fore
the King, to which is added a Diſcourſe
concerning
the Beauty of Providence, by the
ſame
Author, in Octavo.
Sir William Temples Obſervations upon
the
Low-Countries, in Octavo.
-----Miſcellanea, in Oetavo.
Sir John Temples Hiſtory of the Iriſh Re-
bellion
, in Octavo.
Lucius Florus cum Notis Johan. Min-Ellii,
in
Twelves.
Virgillii Maronis Opera cum Notis Johan.
Min-Ellii, in Twelves.
13
The Firſt Book.
That
the
MOON

May
be a
WORLD
.
The Firſt Propoſition, by way of Preface.
That the ſtrangeneſs of this Opinion is no ſuffici-
ent
reaſon why it ſhould be rejected, becauſe
other
certain Truths have been formerly eſtee-
med
ridiculous, and great Abſurdities entertai-
ned
by common Gonſent.
THere is an earneſtneſs and hungring after
Novelty
, which doth ſtill adhere unto
all
our Natures, and it is part of that
Primitive
Image, that wide Extent and infi-
nite
Capacity at firſt created in the Heart of
Man
.
For this, ſince its depravation in Adam,
perceiving
it ſelf altogether emptyed of any
good
, doth now catch after every new Thing,
conceiving
that poſſibly it may find Satisfaction
among
ſome of its fellow Creatures.
But our
Enemy
the Devil (who ſtrives ſtill to
142That the Moon may be a World. our Gifts, and beat us with our own Wea-
pons
) hath ſo contriv’d it, that any Truth doth
now
ſeem diſtaſtful for that very Reaſon, for
which
Errour is entertain’d:
Novelty. For
let
ſome upſtart Hereſie be ſet abroach, and
preſently
there are ſome out of a curious Hu-
mour
;
others, as if they watched an occaſion of
ſingularity
, will take it up for Canonical, and
make
it part of their Creed and Profeſſion;
whereas ſolitary Truth cannot any where find
ſo
ready Entertainment;
but the ſame Novel-
ty
which is eſteemed the Commendation of
Errour
, and makes that acceptable, is counted
the
fault of Truth, and cauſes that to be Re-
jected
.
How did the incredulous World gaze at Co-
lumbus
;
when he promiſed to diſcover ano-
ther
part of the Earth, and he could not for
a
long time, by his Confidence, or Argu-
ments
, induce any of the Chriſtian Princes, ei-
ther
to aſſent unto his Opinion, or to go to the
charges
of an Experiment?
Now if be, who
had
ſuch good grounds for his Aſſertion, could
find
no better Entertainment among the wiſer
ſort
, and upper end of the World;
’tis not
likely
then that this Opinion which I now deli-
ver
, ſhall receive any thing from Men of theſe
Days
, eſpecially our Vulgar Wits, but Miſ-
belief
and Deriſion.
It hath always been the unhappineſs of new
Truths
in Philoſophy, to be derided by thoſe
that
are ignorant of the cauſes of things, and
rejected
by others, whoſe perverſeneſs ties
them
to the contrary Opinion, Men whoſe en-
vious
Pride will not allow any new thing
153That the Moon may be a World. Truth, which they themſelves were not the
firſt
Inventors of.
So that I may juſtly expect
to
be accuſed of a Pragmatical Ignorance, and
bold
Oſtentation;
eſpecially ſince for this O-
pinion
, Xenophanes, a Man whoſe Authority
was
able to add ſome Credit to his Aſſertion,
could
not eſcape the like Cenſure from others.
For Natales Comes ſpeaking of that Philoſo-
pher
, and this his Opinion, ſaith thus, Nonnulli
11Mytholog.
lib
. 3. c. 17
ne nihil ſciſſe videantur, aliqua nova monſtr a in
Philoſophiam
introducunt, ut alicujus rei inven-
tores
fuiſſe apparent.
‘Some there are, who leſt
they might ſeem to know nothing, will bring
up monſtrous abſurdities in Philoſophy, that
ſo afterward they may be famed for the In-
vention of ſomewhat.
The ſame Author
doth
alſo in another place accuſe Anaxagoras
of
Folly for the ſame Opinion.
Eſt enim non
22Lib. 7. c. 1 ignobilis gradus ſtultitiæ, vel ſineſcias quid dicas,
tamen
velle de rebus propoſitis hanc vell illam par-
tem
ſtabilire.
’Tis none of the worſt kinds of
Folly
, boldly to affirm one ſide or other when
a
Man knows not what to ſay.
If theſe Men were thus cenſur’d, I may juſt-
ly
expect to be derided of moſt, and to be be-
lieved
by few or none;
eſpecially ſince this
Opinion
ſeems to carry in it ſo much ſtrange-
neſs
, and contradiction to the general conſent
of
others.
But however, I am reſolved that
this
ſhall not be any diſcouragement, ſince I
know
that it is not common Opinion that can
either
add or detract from the Truth.
For,
1. Other Truths have been formerly eſtee-
med
altogether as ridiculous as this can be.
164That the Moon may be a World.
2. Groſs abſurdities have been entertain’d
by
general Opinion.
I ſhall give an Inſtance of each, that ſo I
may
the better prepare the Reader to conſider
things
without a Prejudice, when he ſhall ſee
that
the common Oppoſition againſt this which
I
affirm, cannot any way derogate from its
Truth
.
1. Other Truths have been formerly accoun-
ted
as ridiculous as this.
I ſhall ſpecifie that
of
the Antipodes, which have been denyed,
and
laught at by many wiſe Men and great
Scholars
, ſuch as were Herodotus, Chryſoſtom,
11Vid. Foſeph.
Acaſto
de
nat
. novi
Grbis
lib. 1.
cap
. 1.
Auſtin, Lactantius, the Venerable Bede, Lucre-
tius
the Poet, Procopius, and the Voluminous
Abulenſis
, together with all thoſe Fathers or
other
Authors who denyed the roundneſs of
the
Heavens.
Herodotus counted it ſo horri-
ble
abſurdity, that he could not forbear laugh-
ing
to think of it.
Γελῶ δρῶο γῆς {πρι}ύδ(ου}ς γ{ρἀ} ψαν-
τας
, {πο}λλ{οὺ}ς ἤδη {καὶ} {οὐ} δένα νόον {χο}ντας {ὀξ}ηγ{οα} {μέν}ον ὂι
’Ωκεαοόντε
ρεόντα γ{ρά} Φ{ου}σι, πέ{ρι}ξ τ{ὴν} τε γ{ὴν} {οῦ}οαν
κυκλοτ
ερέα ὤς \’δπὸ τόρν{ου}.
‘I cannot chooſe but laugh
(ſaith he) to ſee ſo many Men venture to de-
‘ſcribe
the Earths Compaſs, relating thoſe
‘things
that are without Senſe, as that the Sea
‘flows
about the World, and that the Earth it
‘ſelf
is as round as an Orb.
But this great Ig-
norance
is not ſo much to be admired in him,
as
in thoſe Learneder Men of later times, when
all
Sciences began to flouriſh in the World.
Such were St. Chryſoſtome, who in his 14 Ho-
mily
upon the Hebrews, doth make a challenge
to
any Man that ſhall dare to defend, that the
Heavens
are Round, and not rather as a Tent.
175That the Moon may be a World. Thus likewiſe St. Auſtin, who cenſures that
Relation
of the Antipodes to be an incredible
11De civit.
Dei
lib. 16
cap
. 9.
Fable;
and with him agrees the Eloquent
Lactantius
, Quid illi qui eſſe contrarios veſtigiis
noſtris
Antipodes putant?
num aliquid loquuntur?
22Inſtiſtur,
l
. 3.
c
. 24.
aut eſt quiſpiam tam ineptus qui credat eſſe homi-
nes
, quorum veſtigia ſunt ſuperiora quâm capita?
aut ibi quæ apud nos jacent inverſa pendere? fru-
ges
&
arbores deorſum verſus creſcere, pluvias &
nives
, &
grandinem ſurſum verſus cadere in ter-
ram
?
& miratur aliquis hortos penſiles inter ſep-
tem
mira narrari, quum Pbiloſophi, &
agros &
maria
, &
urbes & montes penſiles ſaciunt, & c.
‘What
(ſaith he) are they that think there are
‘Antipodes
, ſuch as walk with their Feet
‘againſt
ours?
do they ſpeak any likelyhood?
‘or
is there any one ſo fooliſh as to believe
‘that
there are Men whoſe Heels are higher
‘than
their Heads?
that things which with us
‘do
lye on the ground, do hang there?
that
‘the
Plants and Trees grow downwards?
that
‘the
Hail, and Rain, and Snow fall upwards
‘to
the Earth?
and do we admire the hanging
‘Orchards
amongſt the ſeven Wonders, where-
‘as
here the Philoſophers have made the Field
‘and
Seas, the Cities and Mountains hanging?

What
ſhall we think (ſaith he in Plutarch) that
Men
do cling to that place like Worms, or
hang
by the Claws as Cats?
Or if we ſup-
poſe
a Man a little beyond the Center to be
digging
with a Spade;
is it likely (as it muſt
be
according to this Opinion) that the Earth
which
he looſened, ſhould of it ſelf aſcend up-
wards
?
or elſe ſuppoſe two Men with their
middles
about the Center, the Feet of the
186That the Moon may be a World. being placed where the Head of the other is,
and
ſo two other Men croſs them, yet all theſe
Men
thus ſituated according to this Opinion,
ſhould
ſtand upright, and many other ſuch groſs
conſequences
would follow (ſaith he) which a
falſe
Imagination is not able to fancy as poſſi-
ble
.
Upon which Conſiderations, Bede alſo
denies
the being of any Antipodes, Neque enim
11De ratione
temporum
.
Cap
. 32.
Antipodarum ullatenus fabulis accommodandus aſ-
ſenſus
.
‘Nor ſhould we any longer aſſent to the
‘Fable
of Antipodes.
So alſo Lucretius the
Poet
ſpeaking of the ſame Subject, ſays,
Sed vanus ſtolidis hæc omnia finxerit Error.
22De nat. re-
rum
, Lib. 1
That ſome idle fancy feigned theſe, for Fools
to
believe.
Of this Opinion was Procopius
Gazæus
, but he was perſwaded to it by ano-
33Coment. in
1
. Cap. Gen.
ther kind of Reaſon;
for he thought that all
the
Earth under us was ſunk into the Water,
according
to the ſaying of the Pſalmiſt, He
44Pſal. 24. 2. hath founded the Earth upon the Seas;
and
therefore
he accounted it not inhabited by any.
Nay, Toſtatus a Man of later Years, and gene-
ral
Learning, doth alſo confidently deny that
there
are any ſuch Antipodes, though the
Reaſon
which he urges for it, be not ſo abſurd
55Comment, in
1
. Geniſ.
as the former;
For the Apoſtles, ſaith he, tra-
velled
through the whole habitable World,
but
they never paſſed the Equinoctial;
and if
you
anſwer that they are ſaid to go through
all
the Earth, becauſe they went through all
the
known World, he replies, that this is not
ſufficient
, ſince Chriſt would have all Men to
be
ſaved, and come to the Knowledge of his
661 Tim. 2. 4. Truth, and therefore it is requiſite that
197That the Moon may be a World. ſhould have Trave@ed thither alſo, if there had
been
any Inhabitants;
eſpecially ſince he did ex-
preſly
command them to go &
Teach all Nations,
and
Preach the Goſpel through the whole World,
and
therefore he thinks, that as there are no
11Mat. 28. 16. Men, ſo neither are there Seas, or Rivers, or any
other
conveniency for Habitation.
’Tis com-
monly
related of one Virgliius, that he was Ex-
22Aventinus
Annal
Boi-
orum
lib. 3
communicated and Condemned for a Heretick
by
Zachary Biſhop of Rome, becauſe he was
not
of the ſame Opinion.
But Baronius ſays,
becauſe
he thought there was another habita-
33Annal Ec-
cleſ
. A. D.
748
.
ble World within ours.
However, you may
well
enough diſcern in theſe examples, how
confident
many of theſe great Scholars were
in
ſo groſs an Error, how unlikely, what in-
credible
thing it ſeemed to them, that there
ſhould
be any Antipodes:
and yet now this
Truth
is as certain and plain, as Senſe or De-
monſtration
can make it.
This then which I
now
deliver, is not to be rejected, though it
may
ſeem to contradict the common Opinion.
2. Groſs abſurdities have been entertained
by
general conſent.
I might Inſtance in many
remarkable
examples, but I will only ſpeak
of
the ſuppoſed Labour of the Moon in her
Eclipſes
, becauſe this is neareſt to the chieſ
matter
in hand, and was received as a common
Opinion
amongſt many of the Antients, inſo-
much
that from hence they ſtiled the Eclipſes
by
the name of πὰθη Paſſions, or in the Phraſe
of
the Poets
Solis lunæq; labores.
And therefore Plutarch ſpeaking of a
208That the Moon may be a World. Eclipſe, relates, that at ſuch time it was a
cuſtom
amongſt the Romans (the moſt civil and
Learned
People of the World) to ſound Braſs
Inſtruments
, and hold great Torches toward
the
Heaven.
Τῶν δε Ρωμαίων (ὤσπερ {ἐστὶ}ν ἐνομισ {μέν}ον)
χαλκ
{οῦ} τε τατό γι;
ὰνακαλ{ου} μένων τοφῶς ἀυτῆς {καὶ} πυ{ρὰ}
11In vita
Paul
. Æ-
mil
.
πολλὰ δαλοῖς {καὶ} δαοτίν ἀνε{χό}ντων πρός {οὐ}ῥοανον.
For
by
this means they ſuppoſed the Moon was
much
eaſed in her Labours, and therefore
Ovid
calls ſuch loud Inſtruments the Auxilia-
ries
or helps of the Moon.
Cum fruſtra reſonant æra auxiliaria Lunæ.
22Metam.
Lib
. 4.
And therefore the Satyriſt too, deſcribing a
loud
Scold, ſays, ſhe was able to make noiſe
enough
to deliver the labouring Moon.
Una laboranti poterit ſuccerrere Lunæ.
33Juven.
Sat
. 6.
Now the reaſon of all this their Ceremony,
was
, becauſe they feared the World would
fall
aſleep, when one of its Eyes began to
wink
, and therefore they would do what they
could
by loud Sounds to rouſe it from its drow-
ſineſs
, and keep it awake, by bright Torches,
to
beſtow that Light upon it which it began to
lofe
.
Some of them thought hereby to keep the
Moon
in her Orb, whereas other wiſe ſhe would
have
fallen down upon the Earth, and the
World
would have loſt one of its Lights;
for
the
credulous People believed, that Inchanters
and
Witches could bring the Moon down,
which
made Virgil ſay,
Gantus & è cælo poſſunt deducere Lunam.
219That the Moon may be a World.
And thoſe Wizzards knowing the times of her
Eclipſes
, would then threaten to ſhew their
Skill
, by pulling her out of her Orb.
So that
when
the ſilly Multitude ſaw that ſhe began to
look
red, they preſently feared they ſhould
loſe
the benefit of her Light, and therefore
made
a great noiſe that ſhe might not hear the
ſound
of thoſe Charms, which would other-
wiſe
bring her down;
and this is rendred for a
reaſon
of this cuſtom by Pliny and Propertius:
11Nat. Hiſt.
Lib
. 2. c. 12
Cantus & ſi curru lunam deducere tentant,
Et facerent, ſi non æra repulſa ſonant.
Plutarch gives another reaſon of it, and he
ſays
, ’tis becauſe they would haſten the Moon
out
of the dark ſhade wherein ſhe was involv’d,
that
ſo ſhe might bring away the Souls of thoſe
Saints
that inhabit within her, which cry out
by
reaſon they are then deprivd of their won-
ted
Happineſs, and cannot hear the Muſick
of
the Spheres, but are forced to behold the
torments
and wailing of thoſe damned Souls
which
are repreſented to them as they are
tortur’d
in the Region of the Air.
But whether
this
or whatever elſe was the meaning of this
Superſtition
, yet certainly ’twas a very ridi-
culous
cuſtom, and bewrayed a great ignorance
of
thoſe ancient times;
eſpecially ſince it was
not
only received by the vulgar, ſuch as were
Men
of leſs Note and Learning, but believed
alſo
by the more Famous and Wiſer ſort, ſuch
as
were thoſe great Poets, Steſichorus and Pir-
dar
.
And not only amongſt the more ſottiſh
Heathens
, who might account that Planet to
be
one of their Gods;
but the Primitive
2210That the Moon may be a World. ſtians alſo were in this kind guilty, which made
Ambroſe
ſo tartly to rebuke thoſe of his time,
when
he ſaid, Tum turbatur carminibus Globus
Lunæ
, quando calicibus turbantur &
oculi.
‘When your Heads are troubled with Cups,
‘then
you think the Moon to be troubled with
‘Charms
.
And for this reaſon alſo did Maximus a Biſh-
op
, write a Homily againſt it, wherein he ſhew-
11Turinenſ.
Epiſc
.
ed the abſurdity of that fooliſh Superſtition.
I
remember
that Ludovicus Vives relates a more
ridiculous
ſtory of a People that impriſoned
an
Aſs for drinking up the Moon, whoſe
Image
appearing in the Water, was covered
with
a Cloud as the Aſs was drinking, for
which
the poor Beaſt was afterwards brought
to
the Bar to receive a Sentence according to
his
deſerts, where the grave Senate being ſet
to
examin the matter, one of the Council (per-
haps
wiſer than the reſt) riſes up, and out of
his
deep judgement, thinks it not fit that their
Town
ſhould loſe its Moon, but that rather
the
Aſs ſhould be cut up, and that taken out
of
him;
which ſentence being approved by
the
reſt of thoſe Politicians, as the ſubtileſt
way
for the concluſion of the matter, was ac-
cordingly
performed.
But whether this Tale
were
true or no, I will not queſtion;
howe-
ver
, there is abſurdity enough in that former
Cuſtom
of the Ancients, that may confirm
the
Truth to be proved, and plainly declare
the
inſufficiency of common opinion to add
true
Worth or Eſtimation unto any thing.
So
that
from that which I have ſaid, may be ga-
thered
thus much.
2311That the Moon may be a World.
1. That a new Truth may ſeem abſurd and
impoſſible
, not only to the Vulgar, but to
thoſe
alſo who are otherwiſe Wiſe Men and
excellent
Schollars;
and hence it will follow,
that
every new thing which ſeems to oppoſe
common
Principles, is not preſently to be re-
jected
, but rather to be pry'd into by a dili-
gent
enquiry, ſince there are many things which
are
yet hid from us, and reſerv’d for future
Diſcovery
.
2. That it is not the commonneſs of an Opi-
nion
that can priviledge it for a Truth;
the
wrong
way is ſometime a well beaten Path,
whereas
the right way (eſpecially to hidden
Truths
) may be leſs trodden, and more ob-
ſcure
.
True indeed, the ſtrangeneſs of this Opi-
nion
will detract much from its Credit;
but
yet
we ſhould know that nothing is in it ſelf
ſtrange
, ſince every Natural Effect has an equal
dependance
upon its Cauſe, and with the like
neceſſity
doth follow from it;
ſo that ’tis our
Ignorance
which makes things appear ſo;
and
hence
it comes to paſs, that many more Evi-
dent
Truths ſeem incredible to ſuch who know
not
the cauſes of things:
you may as ſoon
perſwade
ſome Country Peaſants, that the
Moon
is made of Green-Cheeſe (as we ſay)
as
that ’tis bigger than his Cart-Wheel, ſince
both
ſeem equally to contradict his ſight, and
he
has not reaſon enough to lead him far-
ther
than his Senſes.
Nay, ſuppoſe (ſaith Plu-
tarch
) a Philoſopher ſhould be Educated in
ſuch
a ſecret place, where he might not ſee
either
Sea or River, and afterwards ſhould
2412That the Moon may be a World. brought out where one might ſhew him the
great
Ocean, telling him the quality of that
Water
, that it is brackiſh, ſalt, and not pota-
ble
, and yet there were many vaſt Creatures
of
all Forms living in it, which make uſe of
that
water as we do of the Air, queſtionleſs
he
would laugh at all this, as being monſtrous
Lies
and Fables, without any colur of Truth.
Juſt ſo will this Truth, which I now deliver,
appear
unto others;
becauſe we never dreamt
of
any ſuch matter as a World in the Moon;

becauſe
the State of that place hath as yet been
vail
'd from our Knowledge, therefore we can
ſcarcely
aſſent to any ſuch matter.
Things
are
very hardly received which are altogether
ſtrange
to our Thoughts and our Senſes.

The
Soul may with leſs difficulty be brought
to
believe any abſurdity, when as it has for-
merly
been acquainted with ſome Colours and
Probabilities
for it;
but when a new, and un-
heard
of Truth ſhall come before it, though it
have
good Grounds and Reaſons, yet the un-
derſtanding
is aſraid of it as a ſtranger, and
dares
not admit it into his Belief, without a
great
deal of Reluctancy and Tryal.
And be-
ſides
, things that are not manifeſted to the
Senſes
, are not aſſented unto without ſome
Labour
of Mind, ſome Travel and Diſcourſe
of
the underſtanding;
and many lazy Souls
had
rather quietly repoſe themſelves in an eaſie
Errour
, than take Pains to ſearch out the
Truth
.
The ſtrangeneſs then of this Opinion
which
I now deliver, will be a great hindrance
to
its belief, but this is not to be reſpected by
reaſon
it cannot be helped.
I have ſtood
2513That the Moon may be a World. longer in the Preface, becauſe that Prejudice
which
the meer Title of the Book may beget,
cannot
eaſily be removed without a great deal
of
preparation, and I could not tell otherwiſe
how
to rectifie the Thoughts of the Reader
for
an impartial Survey of the following Diſ-
courſe
.
I muſt need confeſs, though I had often
thought
with my ſelf that it was poſſible there
might
be a World in the Moon, yet it ſeem'd
ſuch
an uncouth Opinion, that I never durſt
diſcover
it, for fear of being counted ſingular,
and
ridiculous;
but after having read Plutarch,
Gallileus
, Keplar, with ſome others, and find-
ing
many of my own Thoughts confirmed by
ſuch
ſtrong Authority, I then concluded that
it
was not only poſſible there might be, but
probably
there was another habitable World
in
that Planet.
In the proſecuting of this Aſſer-
tion
, I ſhall firſt endeavour to clear the way
from
ſuch doubts as may hinder the ſpeed or
eaſe
of farther progreſs;
and becauſe the Sup-
poſitions
imply'd in this Opinion, may ſeem to
contradict
the Principles of Reaſon and Faith,
it
will be requiſite that I firſt remove this Scru-
ple
, ſhewing the conformity of them to both
theſe
, and proving thoſe Truths that may make
way
for the reſt, which I ſhall labour to perform
in
the Second, Third, Fourth, and Fifth Chap-
ters
, and then proceed to conform ſuch Pro-
poſitions
, which do more directly belong to
the
main point in Hand.
2614That the Moon may be a World.
PROP. II.
That a Plurality of Worlds doth not contradict any
Principle
of Reaſon or Faith.
TIS reported of Ariſtotle, that when he
ſaw
the Books of Moſes, he commended
for
ſuch a Majeſtick Style, as might become
a
God, but withal, he cenſur'd that manner
of
Writing to be very unfit for a Philoſopher:
becauſe there was nothing prov'd in them,
but
matters were deliver'd, as if they would
rather
command, than perſwade Belief.
And
?
tis obſervd that he ſets down nothing himſelf,
but
he confirms it by the ſtrongeſt Reaſon that
may
be found, there being ſcarce an Argu-
ment
of force for any Subject in Philoſophy,
which
may not be picked out of his Writings;

and
therefore ’tis likely, if there were in Rea-
ſon
a neceſſity of one only World, that he
would
have found out ſome ſuch neceſſary
proof
as might confirm it:
Eſpecially ſince he
Labours
for it ſo much in two whole Chap-
ters
.
But now all the Arguments which he
himſelf
urges in this Subject, are very weak,
and
far enough from having in them any con-
vincing
Power.
Therefore ’tis likely that a
Plurality
of Worlds doth not contradict any
Principle
of Reaſon.
However, I will ſet
down
the two chief of his Arguments from his
own
Works, and from them you may gueſs
the
force of the other.
The firſt is this, ſince every heavy Body
11Ibid. doth naturally tend downwards, and
2715That the Moon may be a World. Light Body upwards, what a hudling and con-
fuſion
muſt there be, if there were two pla-
ces
for Gravity, and two places for Lightneſs:
for it is probable that the Earth of that other
World
would fall down to this Centre, and ſo
mutually
the Air and Fire here aſcend to thoſe
Regions
in the other, which muſt needs much
derogate
from the Providence of Nature, and
cauſe
a great diſorder in his Works.
But ratio
bæc
eſt minimè firma, (ſaith Zancby.)
And if
11De operibus
Dei
. part 2.
lib
2. cap. 2
you well confider the nature of Gravity, you
will
plainly ſee there is no ground to fear any
ſuch
Confuſion;
for Heavineſs is nothing elſe
but
ſuch a quality as cauſes a Propenſion in its
Subject
to tend downwards towards its own
Centre
;
ſo that for ſome of that Earth to
come
hither, would not be ſaid a Fall, but
an
Aſcenſion, ſince it moved from its own
place
;
and this would be impoſſible (ſaith Ru-
vio
) becauſe againſt Nature, and therefore
no
more to be feared, than the falling of the
22De Cœle. 1.
I
. c. 9. 9.1.
Heavens.
If you reply, that then according to this
there
muſt be more Centres of Gravity than
one
;
I anſwer, ’Tis very probable there are,
nor
can we well Conceive what any piece of
the
Moon would do, being ſever'd from the
reſt
in the free and open Air, but only return
unto
it again.
Another Argument he had from his Maſter
33Metaphyſ.
l
. 12. c. 1.
Diog
. Laer.
lib
. 2.
Plato, that there is but one World, becauſe
there
is but one firſt Mover, God.
Infirma etiam eſt bæc ratio (ſaith Zancby) and
we
muſt juſtly deny the Conſequence, ſince a
Plurality
of Worlds doth not take away
2816That the Moon may be a World. Unity of the firſt Mover. Ut enim forma ſub-
11Nic. Hill. de
Philoſopb
.
Epic
. par-
tic
. 379.
ſtantialis, ſic primum efficiens apparentem ſolum
modo
multiplicitatum induit per ſignatum mate-
riam
(ſaith a Country-Man of ours.)
As the
ſubſtantial
form, ſo the efficient cauſe hath on-
ly
an appearing Multiplicity from its particu-
lar
Matter.
You may ſee this point more
largely
handled, and theſe Arguments more
fully
anſwered by Plutarch in his Book (why
Oracles
are ſilent) and Jacob Garpentarius in
his
Comment on Alcinous.
But our Oppoſites, the Interpreters them-
ſelves
(who too often do jurare in verba ma-
giſtri
) will grant that there is not any Strength
in
theſe Conſequences, and certainly then ſuch
weak
Arguments could not convince that wiſe
Philoſopher
, who in his other Opinions was
wont
to be ſwayed by the Strength and Pow-
er
of Reaſon:
wherefore I ſhould rather think
that
he had ſome by-reſpect, which made him
firſt
aſſent unto this Opinion, and afterwards
ſtrive
to prove it.
Perhaps it was becauſe he
feared
to diſpleaſe his Scholar Alexander, of
22Plutarcb.
de
tranq.
onim
.
whom ’tis related that he wept to hear a Diſ-
putation
of another World, ſince he had not
then
attained the Monarchy of this;
his reſt-
leſs
wide Heart would have eſteemed this
Globe
of Earth not big enough for him, if
there
had been another, which made the Sa-
tyriſt
ſay of him,
33Juvenal.
Æſtuas infelix auguſto limite mundi.
‘That he did Vex himſelf, and ſweat in his
‘deſires
, as being Pend up in a narrow Room,
‘when
he was Confin'd but to one World.
2917That the Moon may be a World. Before he thought to ſeat himſelf next the
Gods
:
but now when he had done his beſt,
he
muſt be content with ſome Equal, or per-
haps
Superiour Kings.
It may be, that Ariſtotle was moved to this
Opinion
, that he might thereby take from
Alexander
the occaſion of this Fear and Diſ-
content
;
or elſe, perhaps Ariſtotle himſelf was
as
loth to hold the Poſſibility of a World
which
he could not diſcover, as Alexander was
to
hear of one which he could not Conquer.
’Tis likely that ſome ſuch by-reſpect moved
him
to this Opinion, ſince the Arguments he
urges
for it, are confeſt by his Zealous Fol-
lowers
and Commentators, to be very ſlight
and
frivolous, and they themſelves grant, what
I
am now to prove, that there is not any Evi-
dence
in the Light of natural Reaſon, which
can
ſufficiently manifeſt that there is but one
World
.
But however ſome may Object, would it
not
be inconvenient and dangerous to admit
of
ſuch Opinions that do deſtroy thoſe Princi-
ples
of Ariſtotle, which all the World hath ſo
long
Followed?
This queſtion is much controverted by ſome
11Apologia
pro
Galilæo.
of the Romiſb Divines;
Campanella hath Writ
a
Treatiſe in defence of it, in whom you may
ſee
many things worth the Reading and No-
tice
.
To it I anſwer, That this Poſition in Philo-
ſophy
, doth not bring any Inconvenience to
the
reſt, ſince ’tis not Ariſtotle, but Truth that
ſhould
be the Rule of our Opinions, and if
they
be not both found together, we may
3018That the Moon may be a World. to him, as he ſaid to his Maſter Plato, ἀμφοῖν
{γὰ}ρὄνται φιλοιν, ὅσιν {ωρο}τιμᾶν τὴνἀλή θ{ει}ν ‘Though
11Ethic. l. 1.
c
. 9.
‘Plato were his Friend, yet he would rather
‘adhere
to Truth, than him.
I muſt needs grant, that we are all much
beholden
to the Induſtry of the Ancient Philo-
ſophers
, and more eſpecially to Ariſtotle, for
the
greater part of our Learning;
but yet ’tis
not
Ingratitude to ſpeak againſt him, when he
oppoſeth
Truth;
for then many of the Fathers
would
be very Guilty, eſpecially Juſtin, who
hath
writ a Treatiſe purpoſely againſt him.
But ſuppoſe this opinion were falſe, yet ’tis
not
againſt the Faith, and ſo it may ſerve for
the
better confirmation of that which is True;
the Sparks of Errour, being forced out by
Oppoſition
, as the Sparks of Fire by the ſtrike-
ing
of the Flint and Steel.
But ſuppoſe too,
that
it were Heretical, and againſt the Faith,
yet
may it be admitted with the ſame Privi-
ledge
as Ariſtotle, from whom many more
dangerous
Opinions have proceeded;
as, That
the
World is Eternal, That God cannot have
while
to look after theſe Inferiour things;

That
after Death there is no Reward or Pu-
niſhment
, and ſuch like Blaſphemies, which
ſtrike
directly at the Fundamentals of our Re-
ligion
.
So that it is juſtly to be wondred, why
ſome
ſhould be ſo Superſtitious in theſe Days,
as
to ſtick cloſer unto him, than unto Scripture,
as
if his Philoſophy were the only Foundation
of
all Divine Truths.
Upon theſe Grounds, both St. Vincentius,
and
Serafinus de firmo (as I have ſeen
3119That the Moon may be a World. quoted) think, That Ariſtotle was the Viol
of
Gods Wrath, which was poured out upon
the
Waters of Wiſdom, by the Third Angel;
But for my part, I think the World is much
11Rev. 16. 4. beholden to him for all its Sciences.
But yet
’twere
a ſhame for theſe later Ages to reſt our
Selves
meerly upon the Labours of our Fore-
Fathers
, as if they had informed us of all things
to
be known;
and when we are ſet upon their
Shoulders
, not to ſee further than they them-
ſelves
did.
’Twere a Superſtitious, a lazy
Opinion
, to think Ariſtotle's Works the Bounds
and
Limits of all humane Invention, beyond
which
there could be no poſſibility of reaching.
Certainly there are yet many things left to diſ-
covery
, and it cannot be any inconvenience
for
us, to maintain a new Truth, or rectifie
an
ancient Errour.
But the poſition (ſay ſome) is directly againſt
Scripture
, for
1. M@ſes tells us but of one World, and his
Hiſtory
of the Creation had been very imper-
fect
, if God had made another.
2. Saint John ſpeaking of Gods Works, ſays,
he
made the World in the ſingular Number,
and
therefore there is but one:
’tis the Argu-
22Part. 1. Q.
47
. Art. 3.
ment of Aquinas, and he thinks that none
will
oppoſe it, but ſuch who with Democritus,
eſteem
ſome blind Chance, and not any wiſe
Providence
to be the Framet of all things.
3. The Opinion of more Worlds has in
Ancient
times been accounted a Hereſie, and
33Annal.
Eccl
. A. D.
748
.
Baronius affirms, that for this very reaſon Vir-
gilius
was caſt out of his Biſhoprick, and Ex-
communicated
from the Church.
3220That the Moon may be a World.
4. A Fourth Argument there is urged by
Aquinas
;
if there be more Worlds than one,
then
they muſt either be of the ſame, or of a
divers
Nature;
but they are not of the ſame
kind
;
for this were needleſs, and would argue
11Ibid. an Improvidence, ſince one could have no
more
perfection than the other;
not of divers
kinds
, for then one of them would not be cal-
led
the World or Univerſe, ſince it did not
contain
univerſal perfection.
I have cited this
Argument
, becauſe it is ſo much ſtood upon
by
Julius Gæſar la Galla, one that has purpoſe-
ly
writ a Treatiſe againſt this Opinion which
22DePhanom.
in
orbe Lu-
na
.
I now deliver;
but the Dilemma is ſo blunt,
that
it cannot cut on either ſide;
and the Con-
ſequences
ſo weak, that I dare truſt them
without
an Anſwer.
And (by the way) you
may
ſee this later Author in that place, where
he@
endeavours to prove a neceſſity of one
World
, doth leave the chief matter in Hand,
and
take much needleſs pains to diſpute againſt
Democritus
, who thought, that the World
was
made by the caſual concourſe of Atoms in
a
great Vacuum.
It ſhould ſeem, that either
his
cauſe, or his Skill was weak, or elſe he
would
have ventur'd upon a ſtronger Adver-
ſary
.
Theſe Arguments which I have ſet
down
, are the chiefeſt which I have met with
againſt
this Subject;
yet the beſt of theſe hath
not
force enough to endanger the Truth that
I
have deliver'd.
Unto the two firſt, it may be anſwer'd, that
the
Negative Authority of Scripture is not
prevalent
in thoſe things which are not the
Fundamentals
of Religion.
3321That the Moon may be a World.
But you'l reply, though it do not neceſſa-
rily
conclude, yet ’tis probable, if there had
been
another World, we ſhould have had ſome
notice
of it in Scripture.
I anſwer, ’tis as probable that the Scripture
ſhould
have informed us of the Planets, they
being
very remarkable parts of the Creation;
and yet neither Moſes, nor Job, nor the Pſalms,
(the places moſt frequent in Aſtronomical Ob-
ſervations
) nor any other Scripture mention
any
of them, but the Sun and Moon.
Be-
cauſe
the difference betwixt them and the
other
Stars, was known only to thoſe who
were
Learned Men, and had skill in Aſtrono-
my
.
As for that expreſſion in Job רקב וביןי
11Job. 38. 7. the Stars of the Morning, it is in the plural
Number
, and therefore cannot properly be
applyed
to Venus.
And for that in Iſaiab ליגת
22Iſa. 14. 12. ’tis confeſſed to be a word of obſcure Interpre-
tation
, and therefore is but by gueſs Tranſla-
ted
in that Senſe.
It being a true and com-
mon
Rule, that Hebræi rei ſideralis minime
33From@nd.
Veſta
. t. 3.
cap
. 2.
So
2 Reg.
23
. 5.
מולות

Which
is
interpre-
ted
both
for
the
Plannets

and
for the
12
Signs.
curioſi cœleſtium nominum penuriâ laborant.
The
Fews
being but little skilled in Aſtronomy,
their
Language does want proper Expreſſions
for
the Heavenly Bodies, and therefore they
are
fane ſometimes to attribute the ſame name
unto
divers Conſtellations.
Now if the Holy Ghoſt had intended to re-
veal
unto us any Natural Secrets, certainly
he
would never have omitted the mention of
the
Planets, Zuorum motu nibil eſt quod de
Conditoris
ſapientiâ teſtatur Evidentius apud eos
44Keplar. in-
troduct
. in
Mart
.
qui capiunt.
Which do ſo evidently ſet forth
the
Wiſdom of the Creator.
And
3422That the Moon may be a World. you muſt know, that ’tis beſide the Scope of
the
Old Teſtament or the New, to diſcover
any
thing untous concerning the Secrets in Phi-
loſopy
;
’tis not his intent in the New Teſta-
ment
, ſince we cannot conceive how it might
any
way belong either to the Hiſtorical, Exe-
getical
, or Prophetical parts of it;
nor is it
his
intent in the Old Teſtament, as is well ob-
ſerv
'd by our Country-Man, Mr.
WRIGHT,
11In Epiſt. ad
Gilber
.
Non Moſis aut Prophetarum inſtitutam fuiſſe vi-
detur
Mathematicas aliquas aut Phyſicas ſubtili-
tates
promulgare, ſed ad vulgi captum &
loquen-
di
morem, quemadmodum nutrices infantulis ſo-
lent
, ſeſe accommodare.
’Tis not the endeavour
of
Moſes, or the Prophets, to diſcover any
Mathematical
or Philoſophical Subtilties,
but
rather to accommodate themſelves to Vul-
gar
Capacities, and ordinary Speech, as Nur-
ſes
are wont to uſe their Infants.
True in-
deed
, Moſes is there to handle the Hiſtory of
the
Creation.
But ’tis certain (ſaith Calvin)
that
his purpoſe is to treat only of the viſible
22Calvin in
1
Gen.
form of the World, and thoſe parts of it,
which
might be moſt eaſily underſtood by the
Ignorant
and Ruder ſort of People, and there-
fore
we are not thence to expect the diſcovery
of
any Natural Secret.
Artes reconditas aliun-
de
diſcat qui volet;
hic Spiritus Dei omnes ſi-
mul
ſine exceptione docere voluit.
As for more
hidden
Arts, they muſt be looked for elſe-
where
;
the Holy Ghoſt did here intend to in-
ſtruct
all without exception.
And therefore
’tis
obſerved, That Moſes does not any where
meddle
with ſuch matters as were very hard to
be
conceiv'd;
for being to inform the
3523That the Moon may be a World. People, as well as others, he does it after a
vulgar
way, as it is commonly noted, decla-
ring
the Original chiefly of thoſe things which
are
obvious to the Senſe, and being ſilent of
other
things, which then could not well be
apprehended
.
And therefore Pererius propo-
11Com. in
1
Gen. 11.
ſing the queſtion, why the Creation of Plants
and
Herbs is mentioned, but not of Mettals
and
Minerals?
Anſwers. Quia iſtarum rerum generatio eſt
vulgo
occulta &
ignota. Becauſe theſe things
are
not ſo commonly known as the other;
and he adds, Moſes non omnia, ſed manifeſta
omnibus
enarranda ſuſcipit.
Moſes did not in-
tend
to relate unto us the beginnings of all
all
things, but thoſe only which are moſt evi-
dent
unto all Men.
And therefore too, Aqui-
22Part. 1. 2.
68
. Art, 3.
nas obſerves, that he writes nothing of the
Air
, becauſe that being inviſible, the People
knew
not whether there were any ſuch Body
or
no.
And for this very reaſon St. Ferom alſo
33Epiſt. 139-
ad
Cypri.
So
Pererives
in
2 Gen.
thinks, that there is nothing expreſt concerning
the
Creation of Angels, becauſe the rude and
ignorant
Vulgar were not ſo capable of appre-
hending
their Natures.
And yet notwith-
ſtanding
, theſe are as remarkable parts of the
Creation
, and as fit to be known as another
World
.
And therefore the Holy Ghoſt too,
uſes
ſuch vulgar Expreſſions, which ſet things
forth
rather as they appear, than as they are,
as
when he calls the Moon one of the greater
44Gen. 1, 16 Lights, whereas ’tis the leaſt that we can ſee
in
the whole Heavens.
So afterwards ſpeaking
55Gen. 11.
Mala
. 3. 10.
of the great Rain which drowned the World,
he
ſays, The Windows of Heaven
3624That the Moon may be a World. opened, becauſe it ſeem'd to come with that
11Sir Walter
Raleigh
c. 7.
Sect
. 6.
Violence, as if it were poured out from Win-
dows
in the Firmament.
And in reference to this, a Drowth is de-
ſcrib
'd in ſundry other places, by the 22Deut. 11
17
.
1
Reg. 3.
35
.
Luk
. 4. 25.
being ſhut up.
So that the Phraſes which the
Holy
Ghoſt ſhews, concerning theſe things, are
not
to be underſtood in a literal Senſe;
but ra-
ther
as vulgar Expreſſions;
and this Rule is
ſet
down by Saint Auſtin, where ſpeaking con-
cerning
that in the Pſalm, who ſtretched the
331. 2. in Gen.
Pſal
. 1 36. 6
Earth upon the Waters, he Notes, that when
the
Words of Scripture ſhall ſeem to contra-
dict
common Senſe or Experience, there, are
they
to be underſtood in a qualified Senſe, and
not
according to the Letter.
And ’tis obſerv'd,
that
for want of this Rule, ſome of the Anci-
ents
have faſtned ſtrange Abſurdities upon the
Words
of the Scripture.
So Saint Ambroſe
44Hexamer
lib
. 2.
Item
Baſil.
Hom
3. in
Geneſ
.
Wiſd
. 2. 4.
17
. 5.
Ecclus
. 43.
3
, 4.
eſteem'd it a Hereſie to think, that the Sun and
Stars
were not very Hot, as being againſt
the
Words of Scripture, Pſalm 19.
6. where
the
Pſalmiſt ſays, that there is nothing that is
hid
from the Heat of the Sun.
So others
there
are that would prove the Heavens not
to
be Round, out of that place, Pſal.
104. 2. He
ſtretched
out the Heavens like a Curtain.
So
Procopius
alſo was of Opinion, that the Earth
55Com. in c. 1.
Gen
.
was founded upon the Waters;
Nay, he made
it
part of his Faith, proving it out of Pſal.
24. 2. He hath founded the Earth upon the Seas,
and
eſtabliſhed it upon the Floods.
Theſe and
ſuch
like Abſurdities have followed, when
Men
look for the Grounds of Philſophy in the
Words
of Scripture.
So that, from
3725That the Moon may be a World. hath been ſaid, I may conclude, that the ſilence
of
Scripture, concerning any other World, is
not
ſufficient Argument to prove that there is
none
.
Thus for the two firſt Arguments.
Unto the third, I may anſwer, That this
very
Example is quoted by others, to ſhew
the
Ignorance of thoſe Primitive Times, who
did
ſometimes condemn what they did not
underſtand
, and have often cenſur'd the Law-
ful
and undoubted Parts of Mathematicks for
Heretical
, becauſe they themſelves could not
perceive
a reaſon of it.
And therefore their
Practice
, in this particular, is no fufficient Te-
ſtimony
againſt us.
But laſtly, I anſwer to all the above nam'd
Objections
, That the Term (World) may be
taken
in a double Senſe, more Generally, for
the
whole Univerſe, as it implies in it the
Elementary
and Æthereal Bodies, the Stars
and
the Earth.
Secondly, more particularly,
for
an inferiour World conſiſting of Elements.
Now the main Drift of all theſe Arguments
is
to confute a Plurality of Worlds in the firſt
Senſe
;
and if there were any ſuch, it might,
perhaps
, ſeem ſtrange, that Moſes, or St.
John
ſhould
either not know, or not mention its
Creation
.
And Virgilius was condemned for
this
Opinion, becauſe he held, quòd ſit alius
mundus
ſub terra, aliuſque Sol &
Luna, (as Ba-
ronius
) That within our Globe of Earth, there
was
another World, another Sun and Moon,
and
ſo he might ſeem to exclude this from the
Number
of the other Creatures.
But now there is no ſuch danger in this Opi-
nion
, which is here deliver'd, ſince this World
is
ſaid to be in the Moon, whoſe Creation is
particularly
expreſt.
3826That the Moon may be a World.
So that in the firſt ſenſe, Iyield, that there
is
but one World, which is all that the Argu-
ments
do prove;
but underſtand it in the ſe-
cond
ſenſe, and ſo I affirm, there may be more,
nor
do any of the above named Objections
prove
the contrary.
Neither can this Opinion derogate from the
Divine
Wiſdom (as Aquinas thinks) but rather
Advance
it, ſhewing a Gompendium of Provi-
dence
, that could make the ſame Body a
World
, and a Moon;
a World for Habitation,
and
a Moon for the uſe of others, and the Or-
nament
of the whole Frame of Nature.
For as
the
Members of the Body ſerve not only for
the
Preſervation of themſelves, but for the
Uſe
and Convenience of the whole, as the
Hand
protects the Head, as well as ſaves its
11Cuſanus de
doct
. igner.
1
. 2. c. 12.
ſelf;
ſo is it in the parts of the Univerſe,
where
each one may ſerve as well for the
Converſation
of that which is within it, as the
Help
of others without it.
Merſennus a late Jeſuit, Propoſing the Queſti-
on
, whether or no the opinion of more Worlds
22Comment.
in
Gen.
Qu
, 19.
Art
. 2.
than one, be Heretical, and againſt the Faith?
He anſwers it negatively, becauſe it does not
Contradict
any expreſs place of Scripture, or
Determination
of the Church.
And though
(ſaith he) it ſeems to be a raſh Opinion, as be-
ing
againſt the Conſent of the Fathers;
yet, if
this
Controverſie be chiefly Philoſophical, then
their
Authorities are not of ſuch Weight.
Un-
to
this it may be added, that the conſent of the
Fathers
is prevalent only in ſuch Points as were
firſt
controverted amongſt them, and then ge-
nerally
decided one way, and not in ſuch
3927That the Moon may be a World. particulars as never fell under their Examinati-
on
and Diſpute.
I have now in ſome Meaſure, ſhewed that
a
Plurality of Worlds does not contradict any
Principle
of Reaſon, or place of Scripture,
and
ſo clear'd the firſt part of that Suppoſition
which
is imply'd in the Opinion.
It may next be enquir'd, whether ’tis poſſi-
ble
there may be a Globe of Elements in that
which
we call the Æthereal parts of the Uni-
verſe
;
for if this (as it is according to the
common
Opinion) be priviledged from any
Change
or Corruption, it will be in vain then
to
imagin any Element there;
and if we would
have
another World, we muſt then ſeek out
ſome
other place for its Scituation.
The third
Propoſition
therefore ſhall be this,
PROP. III.
That the Heavens do not conſiſt of any ſuch pure
Matter
, which can priviledge them from the
like
Change and Corruption, as theſe Inferiour,
Bodies
are liable unto.
IT hath been often queſtioned amongſt the
Ancient
Fathers and Philoſophers, what
kind
of matter that ſhould be, of which the
Heavens
are Fram'd.
Some think they conſiſt
of
a Fifth Subſtance, diſtinct from the Four
Elements
, as Ariſtotle holds, and with him
11De Cælo.
l
. 1. c. 2.
ſome of the late School-Men, whoſe ſubtile
Brains
could not be content to Attribute to
thoſe
vaſt Glorious Bodies but common Mate-
rials
, and therefore they themſelves had
4028That the Moon may be a World. rather take pains to prefer them to ſome extra-
ordinary
Nature;
whereas notwithſtanding,
all
the Arguments they could invent, were
not
able to convince a neceſſity of any ſuch
Matter
, as is confeſt by their own ſide.
It
11Colleg. con-
nimb
. de
cælo
. t. 1. c. 2
q
. 6. art. 3
were much to be deſir'd, that theſe Men had
not
in other Caſes, as well as this, Multiply-
ed
things without neceſſity, and as if there
had
not been enough to be known in the Se-
crets
of Nature, have ſpun out new Subjects
from
their own Brains, to find more Work
for
Future Ages;
I ſhall not mention their
Arguments
, ſince ’tis already confeſt, that they
are
none of them of any neceſſary conſequence:
and beſides you may ſee them ſet down in any
of
the Books de Cælo.
But it is the general Conſent of the Fathers,
and
the Opinion of Lumbard, that the Hea-
vens
conſiſt of the ſame matter with theſe
Sublunary
Bodies.
St. Ambroſe is ſo confident
of
it, that he eſteems the contrary a Hereſie.
22In Hexam.
lib
. 4.
True indeed, they differ much among them-
ſelves
, ſome thinking them to be made of
Fire
, others of Water, and others of both;
but herein they generally agree, that they are
all
fram'd of ſome Element or other.
Which
Dioniſius
Garthuſianus collects from that place
33Enarrat. in
Geneſ
. art.
EO
.
in Geneſis, where the Heavens are mention'd
in
their Creation, as divided only in diſtance
from
the Elementary Bodies, and not as being
made
of any new Matter.
To this purpoſe
others
Cire the Derivation of the Hebrew
word
מושש, quaſi שמ ibi &
מומ aquæ, or quaſi
שע
ignis &
מומ. Becauſe they are fram'd
out
of theſe Elements.
But concerning
4129That the Moon may be a World. you may ſee ſundry Diſcourſes more at large
11In opere 6.
dierum
.
diſput
. 5.
In
lib. de
Mundi

conſtit
.
in Ludovicus Molina, Euſebius Nirembergius,
with
divers others.
The Venerable Bede
thought
the Planets to conſiſt of all the four
Elements
;
and ’tis likely that the other parts
are
of an Aerous Subſtance, as will be ſhewed
after
wards;
however, I cannot now ſtand to re-
cite
the Arguments for either;
I have only
urged
theſe Authorities to countervail Ariſtotle,
and
the School-Men, and the better to make
way
for a proof of their Corruptibility.
The next thing then to be enquir'd after, is,
222 Pet. 3. 12 whether they be of a corruptible Nature, not
whether
they can be deſtroyed of God;
for
this
, Scripture puts out of doubt.
Nor whether or no in a long time they
would
wear away and grow worſe;
for from
33By Doctor
Hakewell
.
Ap
. l. lib. 2.
any ſuch Fear they have been lately priviledg-
ed
.
But whether they are capable of ſuch
changes
and viciſſitudes, as this inferiour
World
is lyable unto?
The two chief Opinions concerning this,
have
both erred in ſome extremity, the one
ſide
going ſo far from the other, that they
have
both gone beyond the Right, whilſt
Ariſtotle
hath oppos'd the Truth, as well as the
Stoicks
.
Some of the Ancients have thought, that
the
Heavenly Bodies have ſtood in need of
44Plutarch
de
plac.
philoſ
. l. 2.
c
. 17.
Nat
. Hiſt.
l
. 2. c. 9.
Nat
. quæſt.
lib
. 2. c. 5.
Nouriſhment from the Elements, by which
they
were continually Fed, and ſo had divers
Alterations
by reaſon of their Food?
Fathered on Heraclitus, followed by that great
Naturaliſt
Pliny, and in general attributed to all the Stoicks.
You may ſee Seneca
4230That the Moon may be a World. to this purpoſe in theſe Words. Ex illâ ali-
menta
omnibus animalibus, omnibus ſatis, omnibus
ſtellis
dividuntur, hinc proſertur quo fuſtineantur
tot
Sidera tam exercitata, tam avida per diem,
noctemque
, ut in opere, ita in paſtu.
Speaking
of
the Earth, he ſays, from thence it is that
Nouriſhment
is divided to all the Living
Creatures
, the Plants and the Stars;
hence
were
ſuſtain'd ſo many Conſtellations, ſo La-
borious
, ſo Greedy, both Day and Night, as
well
in their Feeding as Working.
Thus alſo
Lucan
Sings,
Necnon Oceano paſci phæbumque polumq;
Gredimus
.
Unto theſe Ptolomy alſo, that Learn'd Egyp-
11@ Apoſtel. tian, ſeem'd to agree, when he affirms that
the
Body of the Moon is moiſter, and cooler
than
any of the other Planets, by reaſon of
the
Earthly Vapours that are exhaled unto it.
You ſee theſe Ancients thought the Heavens
to
be ſo far from this imagined Incorruptibili-
ty
, that rather like the weakeſt Bodies they
ſtood
in need of ſome continual Nouriſhment,
without
which they could not ſubſiſt.
But Ariſtotle and his Followers were ſo far
22De Cælo.
l
. 1. c. 3.
from this, that they thought thoſe Glorious
Bodies
could not contain within them any ſuch
Principles
as might make them lyable to the
leaſt
Change or Corruption;
and their Chief
Reaſon
was, becauſe we could not in ſo long
a
ſpace diſcern any alteration amongſt them;
But to this I anſwer.
1. Suppoſing we could not, yet would it
not
hence follow that there were none, as
4331That the Moon may be a World. ſelf in effect doth confeſs in another place;
for ſpeaking concerning our knowledge of the
Heavens
, he ſays, ’tis very imperfect and diffi-
11De cælo. l. 2
cap
. 3. 1
cult, by reaſon of the vaſt diſtance of thoſe
Bodies
from us, and becauſe the Changes
which
may happen unto them, are not either
Big
enough, or frequent enough to fall with-
in
the Apprehenſion and Obſervation of our
Senſes
;
no wonder then if he himſelf be deceiv'd
in
his Aſſertions concerning theſe Particulars.
But yet, in this he Implies, that if a Man were
nearer
to theſe Heavenly Bodies, he would be
a
fitter Judge, to decide this Controverſie than
himſelf
.
Now its our Advantage, that by
the
help of Galileus his Glaſs, we are advanc'd
nearer
unto them, and the Heavens are made
more
Preſent to us than they were before.

However
, as it is with us where there be ma-
ny
Viciſſitudes and Succeſſions or things, tho’
the
Earth abideth for ever:
So likewiſe may it
be
amongſt the Planets, in which tho’ there
ſhould
be divers Alterations, yet they them-
ſelves
may ſtill continue of the ſame Quantity
and
Light.
2. Though we could not by our Senſes ſe@
ſuch
Alterations, yet our Reaſon might per-
haps
ſufficiently convince us of them.
Nor
can
we well conceive how the Sun ſhould re-
flect
againſt the Moon, and yet not produce
ſome
Alteration of Heat.
Diogenes the Phi-
loſoper
was hence perſwaded, that theſe
Scorching
Heats had Burnt the Moon into the
Form
of a Pumice ſtone.
3. I anſwer, that there have been ſome Al-
terations
obſerv'd there;
Witneſs thoſe
4432That the Moon may be a World. mets which have been ſeen above the Moon.
As alſo thoſe Spots or Clouds that Encompaſs
the
Body of the Sun, amongſt which, there
is
a frequent Succeſſion by a Corruption of
the
Old, and a Generation of New.
So that
though
Ariſtotle's Conſequence were ſufficient,
when
he prov'd that the Heavens were not
Corruptible
, becauſe there have not any
Changes
been diſcover'd in them:
yet this
by
the ſame Reaſon muſt be as prevalent, that
the
Heavens are Corruptible, becauſe there
have
been ſo many Alterations obſerv'd there;

But
of theſe, together with a farther Confir-
mation
of this Propoſition, I ſhall have occa-
ſion
to ſpeak afterwards;
In the mean Space,
I
will refer the Reader to that Work of Shei-
nar
, a late Jeſuit, which he Titles his Roſa
Urſina
, where he may ſee this Point concern-
11Lib. 4. par.
2
. cap. 24.
35
.
ing the Coruptibility of the Heavens, largely
Handled
, and ſufficiently conſirm'd.
There are ſome other things, on which I
might
here take an occaſion to enlarge my
ſelf
;
but becauſe they are directly Handled
by
many others, and do not immediately be-
long
to the chief matter in hand;
I ſhall there-
fore
reſer the Reader to their Authors, and
Omit
any large Proof of them my ſelf, as
deſiring
all poſſible Brevity.
1. The firſt is this: That there are no ſolid
Orbs
.
If there be a Habitable World in the
Moon
(which I now affirm) it muſt follow,
that
her Orb is not Solid as Ariſtotle ſuppos'd;
and if not hers, why any of the other. I ra-
ther
think that they are all of a Fluid (per-
haps
Aerous) Subſtance.
Saint Ambroſe,
4533That the Moon may be a World. Saint Baſil did endeavour to prove this out of
11Iſa. 51. 6.
Ant
. lect.
l
. 1. c. 4.
Hiſt
. nat.
l
. 2. c.11.13.
that place in Iſaiab, where they are compar'd
to
Smoak, as they are both quoted by Rhodi-
ginus
.
Euſebius Nicrembergius doth likewiſe
from
that place confute the Solidity and In-
corruptibility
of the Heavens, and cites for
the
ſame Interpretation the Authority of Eu-
22In lib. ſup.
Gen
. ad lit.
ſtachius of Antioch;
and St. Auſtin, I am ſure,
in
one place ſeems to aſſent unto this Opinion,
though
he does oſten in his other Works con-
tradict
it.
If you eſteem the Teſtimony of the Ancient
Fathers
, to be of any great Force or Conſe-
quence
in a Philoſophical Diſpute, you may
ſee
them to this Purpoſe in Sixtus Senenſis lib.
5. Biblioth. annot. 14. The chief Reaſons,
that
are commonly urg'd for the Confirmati-
on
of it, are briefly theſe Three.
1. From the Altitude of divers Comets,
which
have been obſerv'd to be above the
Planets
, through whoſe Orbs (if they had
been
Solid, there would not have been any
Paſſage
.
To theſe may be added thoſe leſſer
Planets
lately diſcover'd about Fupiter and
Saturn
, for which Aſtronomers have not yet
fram
'd any Orbs.
2. From that uncertainty of all Aſtronomi-
cal
Obſervations, which will follow upon the
Suppoſition
of ſuch Solid Spheres.
For then
we
ſhould never diſcern any Star but by a mul-
titude
of Refractions, and ſo conſequently we
would
not poſſibly find their true Scituations
either
in reſpect of us, or in regard of one ano-
ther
;
ſince whatever the Eye diſcerns by a
Refracted
Beam, it apprehends to be in
4634That the Moon may be a World. other place then wherein it is. But now this
would
be ſuch an Inconvenience, as would
quite
ſubvert the grounds and whole Art of
Aſtronomy
, and therefore is by no means to
be
admitted.
Unto this it is commonly Anſwer'd, that
all
thoſe Orbs are equally Diaphanus, though
not
of a continued quantity.
We reply, that
ſuppoſing
they were, yet this cannot hinder
them
from being the Cauſes of Refraction,
which
is produc'd as well by the Diverſity of
Superſicies
, as the different Perſpicuity of Bo-
dies
.
Two Glaſſes put together, will cauſe a
divers
Refraction from another ſingle one,
that
is but of Equal Thickneſs and Perſpicu-
ity
.
3. From the different Height or the ſame
Planet
at ſeveral times.
For if according to
the
uſual Hypotheſis, there ſhould be ſuch di-
ſtinct
, Solid Orbs, then it would be impoſſi-
ble
that the Planets ſhould intrench upon one
anothers
Orbs, or that two of them at ſeveral
Times
ſhould be above one another, which
notwithſtanding
hath been prov'd to be ſo by
later
Experience.
Tycho hath obſerv'd, that
Venus
is ſometimes nearer than the Sun or Mer-
cury
, and ſometimes farther off than both;
which appearances Regiomontanus himſelf does
Acknowledge
, and withal, does confeſs that
they
cannot be reconciled to the common Hy-
potheſis
.
But for your better Satisſaction herein, I
ſhall
refer you to the above nam'd Scheiner,
in
his Roſa Urſina, in whom you may ſee both
Authorities
and Reaſon, very Largely
4735That the Moon may be a World. Diſtinctly ſet down for this Opinion. For
the
better Confirmation of which he adjoins
alſo
ſome Authentical Epiſtles of Fredericus
Gæſius
Lyncæus, a Noble Prince, written to
Bellarmine
, containing divers Reaſons to the
ſame
purpoſe.
You may alſo ſee the ſame
Truth
ſet down by Fohannes Pena, in his Pre-
face
to Euclids Opticks, and Chriſtoph.
Roth-
manus
, both who thought the Firmament to
11De ſtella.
15
. 72. l. 1.
c
. 9.
be only Air:
and though the Noble Tycho do
Diſpute
againſt them, yet he himſelf holds,
Quod
propius ad veritatis penetralia accedit hæc
opinio
, quam Ariſtotelica vulgariter approbata,
quæ
cælum pluribus realibus atque imperviis orbi-
bus
citra rem replevit.
‘That this Opinion
comes nearer to the Truth, than the common
one of Ariſtotle, which hath to no purpoſe
filled the Heavens with ſuch real and Imper-
vious Orbs.
2. There is no Element of Fire, which
muſt
be held with this Opinion here deliver'd;
for if we ſuppoſe a World in the Moon, then
it
will follow, that the Sphere of Fire, either
is
not there where it is uſually placed in the
Concavity
of his Orb, or elſe that there is no
ſuch
thing at all, which is moſt probable,ſince
there
are not any ſuch Solid Orbs, that by
their
ſwift Motion might Heat and Enkindle
the
adjoyning Air, which is imagined to be
the
Reaſon of that Element.
The Arguments
that
are commonly urged to this purpoſe, are
theſe
.
1. That which was beſore alledged concer-
ning
the Refractions which will be caus'd by
a
different Medium.
For if the Matter of
4836That the Moon may be a World. Heavens be of one Thickneſs, and the Element
of
Fire another, and the upper Region of Air
diſtinct
from both theſe, and the Lower Re-
gion
ſeveral from all the reſt, there would
then
be ſuch a Multiplicity of Refractions, as
muſt
neceſſarily deſtroy the Certainty of all
Aſtronomical
Obſervations.
All which In-
conveniences
might be avoided, by ſuppoſing
(as we do) that there is only one Orb of Va-
porous
Air which encompaſſes our Earth, all
the
reſt being Æthereal, and of the ſame per-
ſpicuity
.
2. The Scituation of this Element does no
112. way agree with Ariſtotle's own Principles ;
or that common Providence of Nature, which
we
may diſcern in ordinary Matters.
For if
the
Heavens be without all Elementary Qua-
lities
, as is uſually ſuppoſed, then it would be
a
very incongruous thing for the Element of
Fire
to be placed immediately next unto it:

Since
the Heat of this is the moſt Powerful
and
Vigorous Quality that is amongſt all the
reſt
;
And Nature in her other Works, does
not
join Extreams, but by ſomething of a mid-
dle
Diſpoſition.
So in every Frame of our
Bodies
, the Bones which are of a hard Sub-
ſtance
, and the Fleſh of a ſoft, are not joined
together
but by the Interceſſion of Membranes
and
Griſſels, ſuch as being of a middle Na-
ture
may fitly come betwixt.
3. ’Tis not conceivable for what Uſe or Be-
223. nefit there ſhould be any ſuch Elements in that
Place
, and certain it is, that Nature does not
do
any thing in Vain.
4. Betwixt two Extreams there can be but
334.
4937That the Moon may be a World. one Medium, and thereſore between thoſe
two
Oppoſite Elements of Earth and Water,
it
may ſeem more convenient to place only
the
Air, which ſhall partake of Middle Qua-
lities
different from both.
5. Fire does not ſeem ſo properly and di-
115 rectly to be oppos'd to any thing as Ice;
and
if
the one be not an Element, why ſhould the
other
?
If you object that the Fire which we com-
monly
uſe, does always tend upwards.
I an-
ſwer
, This cannot prove that there is a natu-
ral
place for ſuch an Element, ſince our Ad-
verſaries
do grant, that culinary and elementary
Fire
are of different kinds.
The one does
Burn
, Shine, and Corrupt its Subjects;
the
other
diſagrees from it in all theſe reſpects:
And therefore from the Aſcent of the one, we
cannot
properly infer the Being or Scituation
of
the other.
But for your further Satisfaction herein,
you
may peruſe Gardan;
Foannes Pena that
Learned
Frenchman, the Noble Tycho, with
divers
others, who have purpoſely Handled
this
Propoſition.
3. I might add a Third, viz. that there is no
223 Muſick of the Spheres;
for if they be not
Solid
, how can their Motion cauſe any ſuch
Sound
as is Conceiv'd?
I do the rather meddle
with
this, becauſe Plutarch ſpeaks as if a Man
might
very conveniently hear that Harmony,
if
he were an Inhabitant in the Moon.
But I
gueſs
that he ſaid this out of Incogitancy, and
did
not well conſider theſe neceſſary Conſe-
quences
which depend upon his Opinion.
5038That the Moon may be a World. However, the World would have no great
Loſs
in being depriv'd of this Muſick, unleſs
at
ſome times we had the priviledge to hear
it
:
Then indeed Philo the Jew thinks it would
ſave
us the Charges of Dyet, and we might
11De ſomniis. Live at an eaſier Rate, by feeding on the Ear
only
, and receiving no other Nouriſhment;
and for this very Reaſon (ſays he) was Moſes
Enabled
to tarry Forty Days and Forty Nights
in
the Mount without eating any thing, be-
cauſe
he there heard the Melody of the Hea-
vens
.
-Riſum teneatis. I know this Muſick
hath
had great Patrons, both Sacred and Pro-
phane
Authors,ſuch as Ambroſe, Bede, Boetius,
Aneſelme
, Plato, Cicero, and others;
but be-
cauſe
it is not now, I think, Affirm'd by any,
I
ſhall not therefore beſtow eìther Pains or
Time
in arguing againſt it.
It may ſuffice that I have only Named theſe
Three
laſt, and for the two more neceſſary,
have
referred the Reader to others for ſatis-
faction
.
I ſhall in the next place Proceed to
the
Nature of the Moons Body, to know whe-
ther
that be Capable of any ſuch Conditions,
as
may make it poſſible to be Inhabited, and
what
thoſe Qualities are wherein it more near-
ly
Agrees with our Earth.
PROP. IV.
That the Moon is a Solid, Compacted, Opacous
Body
.
I Shall not need to ſtand long in the Proof of
this
Propoſition, ſince it is a Truth
5139That the Moon may be a World. agreed on by the General Conſent of the moſt,
and
the beſt Philoſophers.
1. It is Solid, in Opoſition to Fluid, as is the
Air
;
for how otherwiſe could it beat back
the
Light which it receives from the Sun?
But here it may be Queſtioned, whether
or
no the Moon beſtow her light upon us, by
the
Reflection of the Sun-beams from the Su-
perficies
of her Body, or elſe by her own illu-
mination
?
Some there are who affirm this
11a De Cælo
l
. 2.com.49.
b
Ante le-
ction
.li. 20.
c
. 4.
c
De pbæ-
nom
. Lunæ
c
. II.
latter part.
So (a) Averroes, (b) Gælius Rho-
diginus
, (c) Fulius Gæſar &
c. And their Rea-
ſon
is, becauſe this Light is diſcern'd in many
Places
, whereas thoſe Bodies which give
Light
by Reflexion, can there only be percei-
ved
where the Angel of Reflexion is Equal
to
the Angel of Incidence, and this is only in
one
place, as in a Looking Glaſs, thoſe Beams
which
are reflected from it, cannot be percei-
ved
in every place where you may ſee the
Glaſs
, but only there where your Eye is pla-
ced
on the ſame Line whereon the Beams are
Reſlected
.
But to this I anſwer, That the Argument
will
not hold of ſuch Bodies, whoſe Superfi-
cies
, is full of Unequal parts and Giboſities
as
the Moon is.
Wherefore ’tis as well the
more
probable, as the more common Opini-
on
, that her Light proceeds from both theſe
Cauſes
, from Reflexion and Illumination;
nor doth it herein differ from our Earth, ſince
that
alſo hath ſome Light by Illumination:

for
how otherwiſe would the Parts about us
in
a Sun-ſhine Day appear ſo Bright, when as
the
Rays of Reflexion cannot Enter into our
Eye
?
5240That the Moon may be a World.
For the better Illuſtration oſ this, we may
conſider
ſeveral ways whereby divers Bodies
are
enlightned.
Either as Water, by admit-
ting
the Beams into its Subſtance;
or as Air
and
thin Clouds, by Tranſmitting their Rays
quite
thorow their Bodies;
or as thoſe things
which
are of an Opacous Nature, and ſmooth
Superficies
, which reflect the Light only in
one
place;
or elſe, as thoſe things which are
of
an Opacous Nature, and Rugged Superſi-
cies
, which by a kind of Circumfluous Re-
flexion
, are at the ſame time Diſcernable in
many
places, as our Earth, and the Moon.
2. It is Compact, and not a Spungey and
112 Porous Subſtance.
But this is denyed by (a)
Diogenes
, (b) Vitellio, (c) Reinoldus, and ſome
22a Plut. de
pla
. phil.
l
. 2. c. 13.
b
Opt.lib.4.
c
Com. Pur-
bac
. Theo.p.
164
.
other, who held the Moon to be of the ſame
kind
of Nature as a Pumice-Sone;
and this,
ſay
they, is the reaſon why in the Suns Eclipſes
there
appears within her a duskiſh ruddy Co-
lour
, becauſe the Sun Beams being Refracted
in
paſſing through the Pores of her Body, muſt
neceſſarily
be Repreſented under ſuch a Co-
lour
.
But I Reply, if this be the Cauſe of her
Redneſs
, then why doth ſhe not appear under
the
ſame Form when ſhe is about a Sextile Aſ-
pect
, and the Darkned part of her Body is
Diſcernable
?
for then alſo do the ſame Rays
paſs
through Her, and therefore in all likely-
hood
ſhould produce the ſame Effect;
and
notwithſtanding
thoſeBeams are then diverted
from
us, that they cannot enter into our Eyes
by
a ſtraight Line, yet muſt the Colour ſtill
remain
Viſible in her Body.
And beſides,
5341That the Moon may be a World. cording to this Opinion, the ſpots would not
always
be the ſame, but divers, as the vari-
ous
diſtance of the Sun requires.
Again, if
the
Sun Beams did paſs through Her, why
then
hath ſhe not a Tail (ſaith Scaliger) as the
11Scaliger
Exer
cit. 80.
ſect
. 18.
Comets?
why doth ſhe appear in ſuch an ex-
act
Round?
and not rather Attended with a
long
Flame, ſince it is meerly this Penetration
of
the Sun Beams, that is uſually Attributed
to
be the Cauſe of Beards in Blaſing Stars.
3. It is Opacous, not Tranſparent or Dia-
223 phanous, like Chryſtal or Glaſs, as Empedo-
33Plut. de fæ-
cie
Lunæ.
cles thought, who held the Moon to be a
Globe
of pure Congeal'd Air, like Hail inclo-
ſed
in a Sphere of Fire;
for then,
1. Why does ſhe not always appear in the
Full
?
ſince the Light is Diſperſed through all
her
Body.
2. How can the Interpoſition of her
44Thucid.
Livii
.
Plut
. de fd
cie
Lunæ.
Body ſo Darken the Sun, or cauſe ſuch great
Eclipſes
as have turned Day into Night, that
have
diſcover'd the Stars, and Frighted the
Birds
with ſuch a ſudden Darkneſs, that they
fell
down upon the Earth, as is related in di-
vers
Hiſtories.
And thereſore Herodotus tel-
ling
of anEclipſe which fell in Xerxes's time, de-
ſcribesitthus
, ἥλι {ος} ἐκλιπῶ, τὴυ {κ}τ{οῦ} {οὐ}ραν{οῦ} ὲδρην
55Herodot. l.
7
. c. 37.
ἀφανὴς {ἦν}.
The Sun leaving its wonted Seat in
the
Heavens, Vaniſhed away ;
all which argues
ſuch
a great Darkneſs, as could not have been,
if
her Body had been Perſpicuous.
Yetſome
there
are who Interpret all theſe Relations to
be
Hyberbolical Expreſſions;
and the Noble
Tycho
thinks it naturally impoſſible that any
Eclipſe
ſhould cauſe ſuch Darkneſs;
5442That the Moon may be a World. the Body of the Moon can never Totally co-
ver
the Sun.
However in this he is ſingular,
all
other Aſtronomers (if I may believe Kep-
lar
) being on the Contrary Opinion, by Rea-
ſon
the Diameter of the Moon does for the
moſt
part appear Bigger to us than the Di-
ameter
of the Sun.
But here Fulius Gœſar once more puts in to
11De phœ-
nom
. Lunœ
c
. 11.
hinder our Paſſage.
The Moon (ſaith he) is
is
not altogether Opacous, becauſe ’tis ſtill
of
the ſame Nature with the Heavens, which
are
incapable of total Opacity:
and his Reaſon
is
, becauſe Perſpicuity is an inſeparable Acci-
dent
of thoſe purer Bodies;
and this he thinks
muſt
neceſſarily be granted;
for he ſtops there,
and
Proves no further;
but to this he Defers
an
Anſwer, till he hath made up his Argument.
We may frequently ſee, that her Body
does
ſo Eclipſe the Sun, as our Earth does
the
Moon.
And beſides, the Mountains that
are
obſerv'd there, do caſt a Dark Shadow
behind
them, as ſhall be ſhewed afterwards.
22Prop. 9. Since then the like Interpoſition of them both,
doth
produce the like Effect, they muſt ne-
ceſſarily
be of the like Natures, that is, alike
Opacous
, which is the thing to be ſhewed;
and
this
was the reaſon (as Interpreters gueſs) why
Ariſtotle
Affirmed the Moon to be of the
33In lib. de
animalib
.
Earths Nature, becauſe of their Agreement
in
Opacity, whereas all the other Elements,
ſave
that, are in ſome meaſure Perſpicuous.
But, the greateſt Difference which may
ſeem
to make our Earth altogether unlike
the
Moon, is, becauſe the one is a Bright
Body
, and hath Light of its own, and
5543That the Moon may be a World. other a Groſs, Dark Body, which cannot
Shine
at all.
’Tis requiſite therefore that in
the
next place I clear this doubt, and ſhew that
the
Moon hath no more Iight of her own than
our
Earth.
PROP. V.
That the Moon hath not any Light of her own.
TWas the fancy of ſome of the Jews, and
more
eſpecially of Rabbi Simeon, that the
Moon
was nothing elſe but a Contracted Sun,
11Toſtatus in
I
Gen.
Hyeron
. de
Sancta
fide.
Hebrœo-
maſt
.12.c.4.
and that both thoſe Planets at their firſt Cre-
ation
, were equal both in Light and quantity.
For, becauſe God did then call them both
great
Lights, therefore they inferred that
they
muſt be both equal in bigneſs.
But a while
after
(as the Tradition goes) the Ambitious
Moon
put up Her Complaint to God againſt
the
Sun, ſhewing that it was not fit there ſhould
be
two ſuch great Lights in the Heavens;
a
Monarchy
would beſt become the place of Or-
der
and Harmony.
Upon this, God Comman-
ded
Her to contract her ſelf into a Narrower
compaſs
;
but ſhe being much diſcontented
hereat
, replies, What! becauſe I have ſpoken
that
which is Reaſon and Equity, muſt I there-
fore
be diminiſhed;
This Sentence could not
chuſe
but much trouble Her;
and for this Rea-
ſon
was ſhe in great diſtreſs and grief for a long
ſpace
, but that her Sorrow might be ſome
way
pacified, God bid her be of good Cheer,
becauſe
her Priviledges and Charter ſhould
be
greater than the Suns;
he ſhoulld appear in
the
Day time only, ſhe both in the Day
5644That the Moon may be a World. Night; but her Melancholly being not ſatis-
fied
with this, ſhe replied again, That that alaſs
was
no benefit;
for in the Day time, ſhe
ſhould
be either not ſeen, or not noted.
Where-
fore
, God to Comfort Her up, promiſed, that
his
People the Iſraelites ſhould Celebrate all
their
Feaſts and Holy Days by a Computation
of
her Months;
but this being not able to
Content
Her, ſhe has looked very Melancholly
ever
ſince;
however ſhe hath ſtill reſerved
much
light of her own.
Others there were, that did think the Moon
to
be a Round Globe;
the one half of whoſe
Body
was of a bright Subſtance, the other half
being
dark;
and the divers Converſions of
thoſe
ſides towards our Eyes, cauſed the Variety
of
her apperances:
of this Opinion was Beroſus,
as
he is cited by Vitruvius;
and St. 11Lib. 9.
Archite-
cturœ
.
thought it was probable enough.
But this fancy
is
almoſt equally abſurd with the former, and
22Narratio
Pſalmorum
.
item
.ep. 119
both of them ſound rather like Fables, than
Philoſophical
Truths.
You may Commonly ſee
how
this latter does Contradict frequent and
eaſie
experience;
for ’tis obſerved, that that
ſpot
which is perceiv'd about her middle, when
ſhe
is in the Encreaſe, may be diſcern'd in the
ſame
place when ſhe is in the Full:
whence it
muſt
follow, that the ſame part which was be-
fore
darkened, is after inlighten'd, and that the
one
part is not always Dark, and the other
Light
of it ſelf.
But enough of this, I would
be
loth to make an Enemy, that I may after-
wards
overcome him, or beſtow time in Pro-
ving
that which is already granted, I
5745That the Moon may be a World. now, that neither of them hath any Patrons,
and
therefore need no Confutation.
’Tis agreed upon by all ſides, that this
Planet
receives moſt of her Light from the
Sun
;
but the cheif controverſie is, whether
or
no ſhe hath any of her own?
The greater
Multitude
affirm this.
Gardan amongſt the reſt
11De Subt il,
lib
. 4.
is very confident of it, and he thinks that if any
of
us were in the Moon at the time of her
greateſt
Eclipſe, Lunam aſpiceremus non ſecus ac
innumeris
cereis ſplendidiſſimis accenſis atque in
eas
oculis defixis cœcutiremus.
‘We ſhould
‘perceive
ſo great a Brightneſs of our own,
‘that
would blind us with the meer Sight, and
‘when
ſhe is enlightned by the Sun, then no
‘Eagles
Eye (if there were any there) is able
‘to
look upon her.
This Gardan ſays, and he
does
but ſay it, without bringing any Proof
for
its Confirmation.
However I will ſet
down
the Arguments that are uſually urged
for
this Opinion, and they are taken either from
Scripture
, or Reaſon;
from Scripture is urged
that
Place, 1 Gor.
15. where it is ſaid, There
is
one Glory of the Sun, and another Glory of the
Moon
.
Ulyſſes Albergettus urges that in Math. 24.
20. σελ{ήν}η {οὐ} δωσ{ετ} τὸ φέ{γγ} {ος} ἀυτῆς The Moon
ſhall
not give her Light:
therefore (ſays he)
ſhe
hath ſome of her own.
But to theſe we may eaſily Anſwer, that
the
Glory and Light there ſpoken of, may be
ſaid
to be hers, though it be derived, as you
may
ſee in many other Inſtances.
The Arguments from Reaſon are taken ei-
ther
,
1. From that Light which is Diſcern'd
5846That the Moon may be a World. her, when there is a total Eclipſe of her own
Body
, or of the Sun.
2. From the Light which is Diſcerned in
the
Darker part of her Body, when ſhe is but
a
little Diſtant from the Sun.
1. For when there are any total Eclipſes,
there
appears in her Body a great redneſs, and
many
times Light enough to cauſe a remarka-
ble
ſhade, as common Experience doth ſuffi-
ciently
manifeſt:
but this cannot come from
the
Sun, ſince at ſuch times either the Earth or
her
own body ſhades her from the Sun-Beams;
therefore it muſt proceed from her own Light.
2. Two or three Days after the new
Moon
, we may preceive Light in her whole
Body
, whereas the Rays of the Sun reflect but
upon
a ſmall part of that which is Viſible;
therefore ’tis likely that there is ſome Light
of
her own.
In anſwering to theſe Objections, I ſhall
firſt
ſhew, that this Light cannot be her own,
and
then declare that which is the true Reaſon
of
it.
That it is not her own, appears,
1. Becauſe then ſhe would always retain
it
, but ſhe has been ſometimes altogether In-
viſible
, when as not withſtanding ſome of the
fixed
Stars of the fourth or fifth Magnitude
11Keplar.
epit
.
Aſtron
. cap.
l
. 6. p. 5.
ſect
. 2.
might eaſily have been diſcerned cloſe by her,
As
it was in the year 1620.
2. This may appear likewiſe from the Va-
riety
of it at divers times;
for ’tis commonly
Obſerv
'd that ſometimes ’tis of a brighter,
ſometimes
of a darker Appearance;
now Red-
der
, and at another time of a more
5947That the Moon may be a World. Colour. The Obſervation of this Variety in di-
vers
Eclipſes, you may ſee ſet down by Keplar,
11Opt. A-
ſtron
. c. 7.
num
. 3.
and many others.
But now this could not be,
if
that Light were her own, that being con-
ſtantly
the ſame, and without any Reaſon of
ſuch
an Alteration:
So that thus I may argue.
If there were any Light proper to the Moon,
then
would that Planet appear Brighteſt when
ſhe
is Eclipſed in her Perige being neareſt to
to
the Earth, and ſo conſequently more Ob-
ſcure
and Duskiſh when ſhe is in her Apoge,
or
fartheſt from it;
the Reaſon is, becauſe the
nearer
any Enlightned Body comes to the
Sight
, by ſo much the more ſtrong are the
Species
, and the better perceiv'd.
This Se-
quel
is granted by ſome of our Adverſaries,
and
they are the very Words of Noble Tycho,
22De nova
ſtella
. lib. 1.
c
. 10.
Si Luna genuino gauderet lumine, utique cum in
umbra
terre eſſet, illud non emitteret, ſed evi-
dentiùs
exereret;
omne enim lumen in tenebris,
plus
ſplendit cum alio majore fulgore non prœpe-
ditur
.
If the Moon had any Light of her own,
then
ſhe would not loſe it in the Earths Sha-
dow
, but rather ſhine more Clearly, ſince eve-
ry
Light appears greater in the Dark, when
it
is not hindred by a more perſpicuous Bright-
neſs
.
But now the Event falls out clean contrary,
33Reinhold
Co
mment.
in
Purb.
Tbeor
. pag.
164
.
(as Obſervation doth manifeſt, and our Op-
poſites
themſelves do grant) the Moon appea-
ring
with a more reddiſh and clear Light when
ſhe
is Eclipſed, being in her Apoge or fartheſt
diſtance
, and a more blackiſh Iron Colour
when
ſhe is in her Perige, or neareſt to us,
therefore
ſhe hath not any Light of her own.
6048That the Moon may be a World. Nor may we think that the Earth's Shadow
can
Cloud the proper Light of the Moon from
Appearing
, or take away any thing from her
Inherent
Brightneſs;
for this were to think a
Shadow
to be a Body, an Opinion altogether
misbecoming
a Philoſopher, as Tycho grants
in
the fore-cited place, Nec umbra terrœ corpo-
reum
quid eſt, aut denſa aliqua ſubſtantia, ut Lu-
lumen obtenebrare poſſit, atque id viſui noſtro
prœripere
, ſed eſt quœdam privatio luminis ſola-
ris
, ob interpoſitum opacum corpus terrœ.
Nor
is
the Earth's ſhadow any Corporal thing,
or
thick ſubſtance, that it can Cloud the
Moons
Brightneſs, or take it away from our
Sight
;
but it is a meer privation of the Suns
Light
by reaſon of her Interpoſition of the
Earth
's Opacous Body.
3 If ſhe had any Light of her own, then
that
would in it ſelf be either ſuch a ruddy
Brightneſs
as appears in the Eclipſes, or elſe
ſuch
a Leaden Duskiſh Light as we ſee in the
Darker
parts of her Body, when ſhe is a little
paſt
the Conjunction.
(That it muſt be one
of
theſe, may follow from the Oppoſite Ar-
guments
) but it is neither of theſe;
therefore
ſhe
hath none of her own.
1. ’Tis not ſuch a ruddy Light as appears in
Eclipſes
;
for then why can we not ſee the
like
redneſs, when we may diſcern the Ob-
ſcure
parts of the Moon?
You will ſay, perhaps, that then the near-
neſs
of that greater Light takes away that Ap-
pearance
.
I Reply, this cannot be; for then why does
Mars
ſhine with his wonted Redneſs,
6149That the Moon may be a World. he is near to the Moon? or why cannot her
greater
Brightneſs make him appear White as
the
other Planets?
nor can there be any reaſon
given
why that greater Light would repreſent
her
Body under a falſe Colour.
2. ’Tis not ſuch a duskiſh leaden light as we
ſee
in the darker part of her Body, when ſhe
is
about a Sextile Aſpect diſtant from the Sun,
for
then why does ſhe appear red in the Eclip-
ſes
, ſince meer ſhade cannot cauſe ſuch Variety?
for ’tis the nature of Darkneſs by its Oppoſiti-
on
, rather to make things appear of a more
White
and clear Brightneſs than they are in
themſelves
;
Or if it be the ſhade, yet thoſe
parts
of the Moon are then in the ſhade of her
Body
, and therefore in Reaſon ſhould have the
like
Redneſs.
Since then neither of theſe
Lights
are hers, it follows that ſhe hath none
of
her own.
Nor is this a ſingular Opinion,
11Somn. Scip.
l
. 1. c. 20.
Lect
. antiq.
l
. 1. c. 15.
In
lib. de
natur
. re-
rum
.
but it hath had many Learned Patrons;
ſuch
as
Macrobius, who being for this Quoted of
Rhodiginus
, he calls him vir reconditiſſimœ ſci-
entiœ
, a Man who knew more than ordinary
Philoſophers
, thus commending the Opinion
in
Credit of the Author.
To him aſſents the
Venerable
Bede, upon whom the Gloſs hath
22De 4
Coœvis
Q.
4
Art. 21.
this Compariſon.
As the Looking Glaſs re-
preſents
not any Image within it ſelf unleſs it
receive
ſome from without;
ſo the Moon hath
33Exercit.
62
.
not any Lighr but what is beſtowed by the
44Epitom.
Aſtron
.
l
. 4. p. 2.
Sun.
To theſe agr@ed Albertus Magnus, Scaliger, Mœſtin, Keplar, and more55Epit. A-ſtro.Cop.l.6.
part
. 5. ſect.
2
.
eſpecially Malapertius, whoſe Words are more pat to the purpoſe than others, and there-
fore
I ſhall ſet them down as you may find
6250That the Moon may be a World. in his Preface to his Treatiſe concerning the
Auſtriaca
ſydera;
Luna, Venus, & Mercurius,
terreſtris
&
humidœ ſunt ſubſtati ideoquœ de ſuo
non
lucere, ſicut nec terra.
The Moon, Venus,
and
Mercury, ſaith he, are of an Earthly and
moiſt
Subſtance, and therefore have no more
Light
of their own, than the Earth hath.
Nay,
ſome
there are, who think (though without
Ground
) that all the other Stars do receive that
Light
whereby they appear Viſible to us, from
the
Sun:
So Ptolomy, Iſidore Iſpalenſis, 11Originum
l
. 3. c. 60.
Albertus Magnus, and Bede;
much more then muſt the Moon ſhine with a borrowed
22D; Cœlo.
1
. 2:
Light.
But enough of this. I have now ſufficient-
33Deratio-
ne
tempor.
c
. 4.
ly ſhewed what at the firſt I promis'd, that
this
Light is not proper to the Moon.
It re-
44Item Plinie
lib
. 2. ca. 6.
mains in the next place, that I tell you the true
Reaſon
of it.
And here I think ’tis probable
55Hugo de
Sancto
Vi-
ctore
.
that the Light which appears in the Moon at
the
Eclipſes, is nothing elſe but the ſecond
66Annot. in
Gen
. 6.
Species of the Suns Rayes which paſs through
the
ſhadow into her Body:
and from a mix-
ture
of this ſecond Light with the Shadow
ariſes
that redneſs which at ſome times appears
unto
us.
I may call it Lumen crepuſculinum,
the
Aurora of the Moon, or ſuch a kind of
Bluſhing
Light, that the Sun cauſes when it
is
near its riſing, when he beſtows ſome ſmall
Light
upon the thicker Vapours.
Thus we
ſee
commonly the Sun being in the Horizon,
and
the Reflexion growing Weak, how his
Beams
make the Waters appear very Red.
The Moabites in Fehoram's time, when they
772 King. 3.
22
.
Roſe Early in the Morning, and beheld
6351That the Moon may be a World. Waters afar off, miſtook them for Blood. Et
cauſa
hujus eſt quia radius ſolaris in Aurora con-
112 Queſt. in
hoc
cap.
traiht quondam rubedinem, propter vapores cam-
buſtos
manentes circa ſuperficiem terrœ, per quos
raàii
tranſeunt, &
ideo cum repercutiantur in
aqua
ad oculos noſtros, trahunt ſecum eundem rubo-
borem
, &
faciunt apparere locum aquarum, in quo
eſt
repercuſſio, eſſe rubrum, ſaith Toſtatus.
The
Reaſon
is, becauſe of his Rays, which being
in
the lower Vapours, thoſe do convey an im-
perfect
mixed Light upon the Waters.
Thus
the
Moon being in the Earth's Shadow, and
the
Sun Beams which are round about it, not
being
able to come directly unto her Body, yet
ſome
ſecond Rays there are, which paſſing
through
the ſhadow, make her appear in that
ruddy
colour:
So that ſhe muſt appear bright-
eſt
when ſhe is Eclipſed, being in her Apoge,
or
greateſt diſtance from us, becauſe then the
cone
of the Earths ſhadow is leſs, and the
Refraction
is made through a narrower
Medium
.
So on the contrary, ſhe muſt be
repreſented
under a more Dark and Obſcure
form
when ſhe is Eclipſed, being in her Peri-
ge
or neareſt to the Earth, becauſe then ſhe is
Involv
'd in a greater ſhadow, or bigger part
of
the cone, and ſo the Refraction paſſing
through
a greater Medium, the Light muſt
needs
be Weaker which doth proceed from it.
If you ask now, what the Reaſon may be of
that
Light which we Diſcern in the Darker
part
of the New Moon?
I anſwer, ’tis Re-
flected
from our Earth, which returns as great
a
Brightneſs to that Planet, as it receives from
it
.
This I ſhall have occaſion to Prove after-
ward
.
6452That the Moon may be a World.
I have now done with theſe Propoſitions
which
are ſet down to clear the paſſage, and
conſirm
the Suppoſitions implyed in the Opi-
nion
;
I ſhall in the next place proceed to a
more
direct Treating of the chief matter in
Hand
.
PROP. VI.
That there is a World in the Moon, bath been
the
direct Opinion of many Ancient, with ſome
Modern
Mathematicians, and may probably
de
deduc’d from the Tenents of others.
SInce this Opinion may be ſuſpected of Sin-
gularity
, I ſhall firſt confirm it by ſuffici-
ent
Authority oſ divers Authors, both Anci-
ent
and Modern, that to I may the better clear
it
from the prejudice either of an Upſtart Fan-
cy
, or an obſelute Error.
This is by ſome at-
tributed
to Orpheus, one of the moſt Ancient
Greek
Poets.
Who ſpeaking of the Moon,
ſays
thus, τί πσλλ αςεα, πολλα μίλα ορα
11Plut. de
place
. phil.
l
. 2. c. 13.
That it hath many Mountains, and Cities, and
Houſes
in it.
To him aſſented Anaxagoras,
Democritus
, and Heraclides, all who, thought
22Ibid. c. 23. it to have ſirm ſolid Ground, like to our Earth,
33Diog.
Laert
. l- 2.
& l. 9.
containing in it many large Fields, Champion
Grounds
, and divers Inhabitants.
Of this Opinion likewiſe was Xenophanes,
as
he is cited for it by Lactantius;
though that
Father
, perhaps, did miſtake his meaning
44Divin. Inſt.
lib
. 3. c. 23.
whilſt he relates it thus, Dixit Xenophanes, in-
tra
concavum Lunæ eſſe aliam terram, &
ibi ali-
ud
genus hominum ſimili modo vivere ſicut
6553That the Moon may be a World. in hac terra, & c. As if he had conceived the
Moon
to be a great hollow Body, in the midſt
oſ
whoſe Concavity, there ſhould be another
Globe
oſ Sea and Land, inhabited by Men, as
as
our Earth is.
Whereas it ſeems to be
more
likely by the Relation of others, that
this
Philoſophers Opinion is to be underſtood
in
the ſame Senſe, as it is here to be prov’d.
True indeed, the Father condemns this Aſſer-
tion
as an equal Abſurdity to that of Anaxaga-
ras
, who affirm’d the Snow to be black:
but
no
wonder, for in the very next Chapter, it is
that
he does ſo much deride the Opinion of
thoſe
who thought there were Antipodes.
So
that
his ignorance in that particular, may per-
haps
diſable him from being a Competent
Judge
in any other like point in Philoſophy.

Upon
theſe agreed Pythagoras, who thought
that
our Earth was but one of the Planets
which
mov’d round about the Sun, (as Ari-
11De Cælo.
l
. 2. cap. 13.
ſtotle relates of him) and the Pythagoreans in
general
did affirm, that the Moon was alſo Ter-
reſtrial
, and that ſhe was Inhabited as this low-
er
World;
That thoſe living Creatures and
Plants
which are in her, exceed any of the
like
kind, with us in the ſame proportion, as
22Plut. ibid.
cap
. 30.
their Days are longer than ours, viz.
by 15.
times. This Pythagoras was eſteem’d by all of a
moſt
Divine Wit, as appears eſpecially by his
valuation
amongſt the Romans, who being com-
manded
by the Oracle to erecta Statue to the
wiſeſt
Græcian, the Senate determin’d Pythago-
ras
to be meant, preferring him in their Judge-
33Plin. Nat.
Hiſt
. l. 34,
cip
. 6.
ment before the Divine Socrates, whom their
Gods
pronounc’d the Wiſeſt.
Some
6654That the Moon may be a World. him a Few by Birth; but moſt agree that he
was
much Converſant amongſt the Learneder
ſort
and Prieſts of that Nation, by whom he
was
inform’d of many Secrets, and, perhaps,
this
Opinion which he vented afterwards in
Greece
, where he was much oppos’d by Ariſto-
tle
in ſome worded Diſputations, but never
conſuted
by any ſolid Reaſon.
To this Opinion of Pythagoras did Plato alſo
aſſent
, when he conſider’d that there was the
like
Eclipſe made by the Earth;
and this, that
11Plat. de
conviviis
,
Macrob
.
Somn
.
Scip
. lib. I.
c
. II.
it had no Light of its own, it was ſo full of
ſpots
.
And therefore we may oſten read in
him
, and his followers, of an ætherea terra, and
lunares
populi, An Æthereal Earth, and Inha-
biters
in the Moon;
but aſterwards this was
mix’d
with many ridiculous Fancies:
For
ſome
of them conſidering the Myſteries im-
plied
in the number 3, concluded that there
muſt
neceſſarily be a Trinity of Worlds, where-
of
the firſt of this is ours;
the ſecond in the
Moon
, whoſe Element of Water is repreſen-
ted
by the Sphere of Mercury, the Air by Ve-
nus
, and the Fire by the Sun.
And that the
whole
Univerſe might the better end in Earth
as
it began, they have contriv’d it, that Mars
ſhall
be a Sphere of the Fire, Fupiter oſ Air,
Saturn
of Water;
and above all theſe, the
Elyſian
Fields, ſpacious and pleaſant places ap-
pointed
for the Habitation of thoſe unſpotted
Souls
, that either never were impriſoned in,
or
elſe now have freed themſelves from any
Commerce
with the Body.
Scaliger ſpeaking
of
this Platonick Fancy, quæ in tres trientes
22Exercit.
62
.
mundum quaſi aſſem diviſit, thinks
6755That the Moon may be a World. on enough, to ſay, ’tis Plato’s. However, for
the
ſirſt part of this Aſſertion, it was aſſented
unto
by many others, and by Reaſon oſ the
Groſſneſs
and inequality of this Planet, ’twas
frequently
call’d quaſi terra cœleſtis, as being
11De facie
Lunæ
.
eſteem’d the Sedement, and more imperfect
part
of thoſe purer Bodies;
you may ſee this
Prov’d
by Plutarch, in that delightful Work
22Inſtit. ad
diſcp
. Plat.
Cœl
. Rho-
dig
. l. I c.4.
which he properly made for the Conſirmation
of
this particular.
With him agreed Alcinous
and
Plotinus, later Writers.
Thus Lucian alſo in his Diſcourſe of a Jour-
ney
to the Moon, where though he does ſpeak
many
things out of Mirth and in a jeſting man-
ner
:
yet in the beginning of it he does inti-
mate
that it did contain ſome ſerious Truths
concerning
the real Frame oſ the Univerſe.
The Cardinal Guſanus and Fornandus Brunus
33Cuſa. de
doct
.ign. l. 2.
cap
. 12.
held a particular World in every Star, and
therefore
one of them Deſigning our Earth, he
ſays
, it is Stella quædam nobilis, quæ lunam &

calorem
&
influentiam babet aliam, & diverſam
ab
omnibus aliis ſtellis;
‘A Noble Star, having
a diſtinct Light, Heat, and Infiuence from
44Philoſ.
Epicur
.
part
. 434.
all the reſt.
Unto this Nichol. Hill, a Coun-
try
Man of ours, was enclin’d, when he ſaid,
Aſtrea
terræ natura probabilis eſt:
‘That ’tis
probable the Earth hath a Starry Nature.
But the Opinion which I have here deliver’d
55In Theſi.
bus
.
was more directly prov’d by Mæſlin, 66Diſſerta-
tio
cum
Nunc
.
77Nuncius
Syderius
.
Keplar, Galileus, each of them late Writers, and famous Men for their ſingular Skill in A-
ftronomy
.
Keplar calls this World by the Name
of
Levania, from the Hebrew Word תגבל,
which
ſigniſies the Moon, and our Earth by
88Somn. Aſtr.
6856That the Moon may be a World. the name of Volva à volvendo, becauſe it does
by
reaſon of its Diurnal Revolution appear
unto
them conſtantly to turn round, and there-
fore
he ſtyles thoſe who live in that Hemi-
ſphere
which is towards us, by the Title of
Subvolvani
, becauſe they enjoy the ſight of
this
Earth;
and the others Privolvani, quia
ſunt
privati conſpectu volvæ, becauſe they
are
depriv’d oſ this priviledge.
But Fulius
Cæſar
, whom I have above Quoted, ſpea-
king
oſ their Teſtimony whom I cite for this
Opinion
, viz.
Keplar and Galilæus, Aſſirms
that
to his Knowledge they did but jeſt in thoſe
things
which they Write concerning this, and
11De phæ-
nom
. Lunæ.
6
. 4.
as for any ſuch World, he aſſuredly knows
they
never ſo much as dreamt oſ it.
But I had
rather
believe their own Words, than his pre-
tended
Knowledge.
’Tis true indeed, in ſome things they do but
triſle
, but for the main Scope oſ thoſe Diſ-
courſes
, ’tis as manifeſtly they ſeriouſly meant
it
, as any indifferent Reader may eaſily diſ-
cern
;
As for Galilæus, ’tis evident he did ſet
down
his own Judgement and Opinion in theſe
things
;
otherwiſe, ſure Campanella ( a Man
as
well acquainted with his Opinion, and per-
haps
his Perſon, as Cæſar was) would never
have
writ an Apology for him.
And beſides,
’tis
very likely iſ it had beeen but a Jeſt, Ga-
lilæus
would never have ſuffer’d ſo much for it,
as
Report ſaith, afterwards he did.
And as for Keplar, I will only refer the
Reader
to his own words as they are ſet down
in
the Preface to the Fourth Book oſ his Epi-
tome
, where his purpoſe is to make an
6957That the Moon may be a World. logy for the ſtrangeneſs of thoſe Truths that
he
was there to deliver;
amongſt which, there
are
divers things to this purpoſe concerning
the
Nature of theMoon.
He profeſſes that
he
did not publiſh them, either out of a hu-
mour
oſ Contradiction, or deſire of Vain-glo-
ry
, or in a Jeſting way, to make himſelf, or
others
merry, but after a conſiderate and ſo-
lemn
manner, for the diſcovery of the Truth.
Now as for the knowledge which Cæſar pre-
tends
to the contrary, you may gueſs what it
was
by his ſtrange conſidence in other Aſſerti-
ons
, &
his boldneſs in them may well derogate
11cap. 7. from his Credit in this.
For ſpeaking of Pto-
lomy’s
Hypotheſis, he pronounces this Verdict,
Impoſſibile
eſt excentricorum &
epicyclorum poſiti-
tio
, nec aliquis eſt ex Mathematicis adeo ſtultus
qui
veram illam exiſtimet.
‘The poſition of
Excentricks and Epicycles is altogether im-
poſſible, nor is there any Mathematician ſuch
a Fool as to think it true.
I ſhould gueſs he
could
not have knowledge enough to maintain
any
other Hypotheſis, who was ſo ignorant in
Mathematicks
, as to deny, any good Author
held
this.
For I would fain know, whether
there
were never any that thought the Hea-
vens
to be ſolid Bodies, and that there
were
ſuch kinds of Motion, as is by thoſe
feigned
Orbs ſupplyed;
if ſo, Gæſar la Galla
was
much miſtaken.
I think his Aſſertions
are
equally true, that Galilæus and Keplar did
not
hold this, and that there were none which
ever
held that other.
Thus much for the
Teſtimony
of thoſe who were directly of this
Opinion
.
7058That the Moon may be a World.
But, in my following Diſcourſe, I ſhall moſt
inſiſt
on the Obſervation of Galilæus, the In-
ventor
of that Famous Perſpective, whereby
we
may diſcern the Heavens hard by us;
where-
by
thoſe things which others have formerly
gueſt
at, are manifeſted to the Eye, and plain-
ly
diſcover’d beyond exception or doubt;
of
which
admirable invention, theſe latter Ages of
the
World may juſtly Boaſt, and for this, ex-
pect
to be Celebrated by Poſterity.
’Tis re-
lated
of Eudoxus, that he wiſhed himſelf burnt
with
Phaeton, ſo he might ſtand over the Sun
to
contemplate itsNature;
had he liv’d in theſe
days
, he might have enjoyed his wiſh at an ea-
ſier
rate, and ſcaling the Heavens by this Glaſs,
might
plainly have diſcern’d what he ſo much
deſir’d
.
Keplar conſidering thoſe ſtrange diſ-
coveries
which this Perſpective had made,
could
not chooſe but cry out in a Πρ ηοΠ ποΠΗα &

Rapture
of Admiration, O multiſcium &
quo-
11De macula
in
ſole obſer.
vis ſceptro pretioſus perſpicillum! an qui te dexte-
tenet, ille non dominus conſtituatur operum Dei?
And Foannes Fabricius, an Elegant Writer,
ſpeaking
oſ the ſame Glaſs, and for this In-
vention
, preferring our Age beſore thoſe for-
mer
Times of greater Ignorance, ſays thus;

Adeo
ſumus ſuperiors veteribus, ut quam illi car-
minis
magici pronunciatu demiſſam repreſentâſſe
putantur
, nos non tantum innocenter demittamus,
ſed
etiam familiari quodam intuitu ejus quaſi con-
ditionem
intueamur.
‘So much are we above
the Ancients, that whereas they were fain
by their Magical Charms to repreſent the
Moons approach, we cannot only bring her
lower with a greater Innocence, but may
7159That the Moon may be a World. ſo with a more familiar view behold her
Condition.
And becauſe you ſhall have no
occaſion
to queſtion the Truth oſ thoſe Expe-
riments
, which I ſhall afterwards urge from
it
;
I will therefore ſet down the Teſtimony
of
an Enemy, and ſuch a Witneſs hath always
been
accounted prevalent:
you may ſee it in the
above
nam’d Cæſar la Galla, whoſe Words
are
theſe:
Mercureum caduceum geſtantem, cœ-
11De phœ-
nom
. cap. 1.
leſtia nunciare, &
mortuorem animas ab inferis
revocare
ſapiens finxit antiquitas.
Galilæum
verò
novum Fovis interpretem Teleſcopio caduceo
inſtructum
Sydera aperire, &
veterum Philoſo-
phorum
manes ad ſuperosrevocare ſolere noſtra ætas
videt
&
admiratur. ‘Wiſe Antiquity Fabled
Mercury carrying a Rod in his hand, to relate
News from Heaven, and call back the Souls
of the Dead;
but it hath been the happineſs
of our Induſtrious Age to ſee and admire Ga-
lilæus, the new Embaſſador of the Gods, fur-
niſhed with his Perſpective to unfold the Na-
ture oſ the Stars, and awaken the Ghoſts of
the Ancient Philoſophers.
So worthily and
highly
did theſe Men eſteem of this excel-
lent
Invention.
Now, if you would know what might be
done
by this Glaſs, in the ſight of ſuch things as
were
nearer to hand, the ſame Author will
tell
you, when he ſays, that by it thoſe things
which
could ſcarce at all be diſcern’d by the
22Ibid. c. @@. Eye, at the diſtance of a Mile and a half, might
plainly
and diſtinctly be perceiv’d for 16 Italian
Miles
, and that as they were really in them-
ſelves
, without any Tranſpoſition or falſifying
at
all.
So that what the Ancient Poets
7260That the Moon may be a World. feign to put in a Fable, our more happy Age
hath
found out in a Truth, and we may diſcern
with
theſeEyes whichGalilæus hath beſtow’d as
far
upon us, as Lynceus could with thoſe which
the
Poets attributed unto him.
But if you yet
doubt
, whether all theſe Obſervations were
true
, the ſame Author may conſirm you, when
he
ſays they were ſhewed, Non uni aut alteri,
ſed
quam plurimis, neque gregariis hominibus, ſed
11cap. I. præcipuis atque diſciplinis omnibus, necnon Ma-
thematicis
&
Opticis prœceptis optimè inſtructis
ſedulâ
ac diligenti inſpectione.
‘Not to one or
two, but to very many, and thoſe not ordi-
nary Men, but to thoſe who were well vers’d
in Mathematicks and Opticks, and that not
with a meer glance, but with a ſedulous and
diligent Inſpection.
And leaſt any ſcruple
might
remain unanſwer’d, or you might think
the
Men who beheld all this, tho’ they might
be
skilful, yet they came with credulous minds,
and
ſo were more eaſie to be deluded:
He
adds
, that it was ſhewed, Viris qui ad experi-
menta
hæc contradicendi animo acceſſerant.
‘To
22cap. 5. ſuch as were come with a great deal of Pre-
judice, and an intent oſ Contradiction.
Thus
you
may ſee the certainty of thoſe Experiments
which
were taken by this Glaſs.
I have ſpoken
the
more concerning it, becauſe I ſhall borrow
many
things in my farther Diſcourſe, from
thoſe
Diſcoveries which were made by it.
I have now Cited ſuch Authors both Anci-
ent
and Modern, who have directly maintain’d
the
ſame Opinion.
I told you you likewiſe in
33See the fe-
cond
Book.
1
Prop.
the Propoſition, that it might probably be de-
duc’d
from the Tenents of others:
ſuch
7361That the Moon May be a World. Ariſtarchus, Philolæus, and Copernicus, with
many
other later Writers, who aſſented unto
their
Hypotheſis;
ſo Foach. Rhelicus, David
Origanus
Lansbergius, Guil.
Gilbert, and (iſ I
11Apologia
pro
Galli-
læo
.
may believe Campanella) Innumeri alii Angli &

Galli
, Very many others, both Engliſh and
French
, all who affirm’d our Earth to be one
of
the Planets, and the Sun to be the Centre of
all
, about which the Heavenly Bodies did
move
.
And how horrid ſoever this may ſeem
at
firſt, yet is it likely enough to be true, nor
is
there any Maxim or Obſervation in Op-
ticks
(ſaith Pena) that can diſprove it.
Now iſ our Earth were one of the Planets,
(as it is according to them) then why may not
another
of the Planets be an Earth.
Thus have I ſhewed you the Truth oſ this
Propoſition
.
Before I proceed farther, ’tis
requiſite
that I inform the Reader, what Me-
thod
I ſhall follow in the proving of this chief
Aſſertion
, that there is a World in the Moon.
The Order by which I ſhall be guided, will
be
, that which Ariſtotle uſes in his Book, De
Mundo
, (if that Book were his.)
Firſt, Πξι τμ άν alp2; μτñ of thoſe chief parts
which
are in it;
not the Elementary and Æthe-
real
(as he doth there) ſince this doth not be-
long
to the preſent Queſtion, but of the Sea
and
Land, &
c. Secondly, Πρτ άμτιυτ παυΠν, of
thoſe
things which are Extrinſical to it, as the
Seaſons
, Meteors, and Inhabitants.
7442That the Moon may be a World.
PROP. VII.
That thoſe Spots and brighter parts, which by
our
ſight may be diſtinguiſhed in the Moon,
do
ſhew the difference betwixt the Sea and
Land
, in that other World.
FOr the clear proof of this Propoſition,
I
ſhall firſt reckon up and refute the Opi-
nions
of others, concerning the matter and
form
of thoſe Spots, and then ſhew the Pro-
bability
of this Aſſertion, and how agreeable
it
is to that Truth, which is moſt commonly
receiv
'd;
As for the Opinions of others, con-
cerning
theſe, they have been very many;
I
will
only reckon up thoſe which are common
and
remarkable.
Some there are that think thoſe ſpots do
not
ariſe from any deformity of the parts, but
a
deceit of the Eye, which cannot at ſuch a
diſtance
diſcern an equal Light in the Planet;
but theſe do but only ſay it, and ſhew not any
reaſon
for the proof of their Opinion:
Others
think
, that there are ſome Bodies betwixt the
11So Bede in
l
. de Mund.
conſtit
.
Sun and Moon, which keeping off the Light
in
ſome parts, do by their Shadow produce
theſe
ſpots which we there diſcern.
Others would have them to be the Figure
of
the Seas or Mountains, here below:
repre-
ſented
there as in a Looking-Glaſs.
But none
of
theſe Fancies can be true, becauſe the Spots
are
ſtill the ſame, and not varied according to
the
difference of places;
and beſides, Gardon
22De ſubtil.
lib
. 3.
thinks it is impoſſible that any image
7563That the Moon may be a World. be conveyed ſo far, as there to be repreſented
unto
us, at ſuch a diſtance.
But ’tis common-
ly
related of Pythagor as, that he by writing
what
he pleas'd in a Glaſs, by the reflexion of
the
ſame Species, would make thoſe Letters to
appear
in the Circle of the Moon, where they
ſhould
be Legible by any other, who might
at
that time be ſome Miles diſtant from him.
. Agrippa affirms this to be poſſible, 11Occulta.
Philoſ
. l. I.
cap
. 6.
the way of performing it not unknown to him-
ſelf
, with ſome others in his time.
It may be
that
Biſhop Goodwine did by the like means
perform
thoſe ſtrange Concluſions, which he
profeſſes
in his Nuncius inanimatus, where he
pretends
, that he can inform his Friends of
what
he pleaſes, though they be an hundred
Miles
diſtant, forte etiam, vel milliare milleſi-
mum
, (they are his own Words) and perhaps
a
Thouſand, and all this in a little ſpace, quick-
er
than the Sun can move.
Now, what conveyance there ſhould be, for
ſo
ſpeedy a paſſage, I cannot conceive, unleſs
it
be carried with the light, than which we
know
not any thing quicker;
But of this only
by
the way;
however, whether thoſe Ima-
ges
can be repreſented ſo or not, yet certain it
is
, thoſe ſpots are not ſuch Repreſentations.
Some think, that when God had at firſt Crea.
ted
too much Earth, to make a perfect Globe,
not
knowing well where to beſtow the reſt, he
placed
it in the Moon, which ever ſince hath
ſo
darkned it in ſome parts;
but the impiety
of
this is ſufficient confutation, ſince it ſo much
detracts
from the Divine Power and Wiſ-
dom
.
7665That the Moon may be a World.
The Stoicks held that Planet to be 11Plut. Fe
placit
. phil.
l
2. c. 25.
ed by Fire and Air, and in their Opinion, the
Variety
of its Compoſition cauſed her ſpots;
being not aſhamed to ſtile the ſame Body a
Goddeſs
, calling it Diana, Minerva, &
c. and
yet
affirm it to be an impure Mixture of
Flame
and Smoke, and Fuliginous Air.
But this Planet cannot conſiſt of Fire (ſaith
Plutarch
) becauſe there is not any Fewel to
maintain
it.
And the Poets therefore have
fained
Vulcan to be lame, becauſe he can no
more
ſubſiſt without Wood or other Fewel,
than
a Lame Man without a Staff.
Anaxagor as thought all the Stars to be of an
Earthly
Nature, Mixed with ſome Fire;
and
as
for the Sun, he affirmed it to be nothing
elſe
but a ſieryStone;
for which later Opinion
22Foſephus
l
. 2. com.
App
. Au-
guſte
de ci-
vit
. Dei.
l
. 18. c. 41.
the Athenians ſentenc'd him to Death, thoſe
Zealous
Idolaters counting it a great Blaſphe-
my
to make their God a Stone, whereas not-
withſtanding
, they were ſo ſenſeleſs in their
adoration
of Idols, as to make a Stone their
God
.
This Anaxagor as affirm'd the Moon to
be
more Terreſtrial than the other Planets,
but
of a greater Purity than any thing here
below
, and the Spots, he thought, were no-
thing
elſe, but ſome cloudy parts, intermin-
gled
with the Light which belonged to that
Planet
;
but I have above deſtroyed the Sup-
poſition
on which this Fancy is grounded.
Pli-
ny
thinks they ariſe from ſome droſſie ſtuff,
33Nat. Hiſt.
l
. 2. c. 9.
mixed with that moiſture which the Moon
attracts
unto her ſelſ;
but he was of their Opi-
nion
, who thought the Stars were nouriſhed
by
ſome Earthly Vapours, which you
7765That the Moon may be a World. commonly ſee refuted in the Gommentators on
the
Books de Gælo.
Vitellio and Reinoldus, Affirm the Spots to
11Opt. lib. 9.
comment
.
in
Pnrb.
pag
. 164.
be the Thicker parts of the Moon, into which
the
Sun cannot Infuſe much Light;
and this
(ſay they) is the Reaſon why in theSuns Eclip-
ſes
, the Spots and Brighter parts, are ſtill in ſome
meaſure
Diſtinguiſhed, becauſe the Sun Beams
are
not able ſo well to Penetrate through thoſe
Thicker
, as they may through the Thinner
parts
of that Planet.
Of this Opinion alſo was
Gæſar
la GaHa, whoſe Words are theſe, The
Moon doth there appear Cleareſt, where ſhe
is Tranſpicious, not only through the Superfi-
22Ex'qua par-
te
luna eſt
tranſpicua

non
ſolum
ſecundum

ſuperficiem

ſed
etiam
ſecundum

ſubſtantiam

eatenus
cla-
ra
, ex qna
autem
parte
opaca
eſt
eatenus
ob-
ſcura
vide-
tur
. De Phæ-
nom
. eap. II.
Albert
.
mag
. de
Coævis

Q
. 4. Art.
12
.
Colleg
. Con.
cies, but the Subſtance alſo, and there ſhe
ſeems ſpotted, where her Body is moſt Opa-
cous
.
The ground of this his Aſſertion, was,
becauſe
he thought the Moon did receive and
beſtow
her Light by Illumination only, and not
at
all by reſlexion;
but this, together with the
ſuppoſed
Penetration of the Sun-Beams, and
the
Perſpicuity of the Moons Body, I have
above
Anſwered and Refuted.
The more Common and general Opinion, is,
that
the Spots are the Thinner parts of the
Moon
, which are leſs able to reflect the Beams
that
they receive from the Sun, and this is moſt
agreeable
to reaſon;
for if the Stars are there-
fore
brighteſt, becauſe they are Thicker, and
more
Solid than their Orbs, then it will follow,
that
thoſe parts of the Moon which have leſs
Light
, have alſo leſs Thickneſs.
It was the
Providence
of Nature (ſay ſome) that ſo con-
trived
that Planet to have theſe Spots within
it
;
for ſince that is neareſt to thoſe lower
7866That the Moon may be a World. dies which are ſo full of deformity, ’tis requiſite
that
it ſhould in ſome meaſure agree with them,
and
as in this inferiour World, the higher Bo-
dies
are the moſt compleat, ſo alſo in the Hea-
vens
, Perfection is aſcended unto by degrees,
and
the Moon being the loweſt, muſt be the
leaſt
pure, and therefore Philo the Jew, Interpre-
11De ſomniis. ting Jacobs Dream, concerning the Ladder, doth
in
an Allegory ſhew, how that in the Fabrick
of
the World, all things grow perfecter, as they
grow
higher, and this is the reaſon (ſaith he)
why
the Moon doth not conſiſt of any pure ſim-
ple
matter, but is mixed with Air, which ſhews
ſo
darkly within her Body.
But this cannot be a Sufficient reaſon; for
though
it were true, that Nature did frame
every
thing perfecter, as it was higher, yet is it
as
true, that Nature frames every thing fully
perfect
for that Office to which ſhe intends it.
Now, had ſhe intended the Moon meerly to re-
flected
the Sun-beams, and give light, the ſpots
then
had not ſo much argued herProvidence, as
her
unskilfulneſs and overſight, as if in the haſt
of
her work, ſhe could not tell how to make
22Scalig. ex-
ercit
. 62.
that Body exactly fit, for that Office, to which
ſhe
intended it.
’Tis likely then, that ſhe had ſome other end
which
moved her to produce this variety, and
this
in all probability was her intent to make
it
a fit Body for Habitation, with the ſameCon-
veniences
of Sea and Land, as this Inferiour
world
doth partake of.
For ſince the Moon is
ſuch
a Vaſt, ſuch aSolid and Opacous Body, like
our
Earth (as was above proved) why may
it
not be probable, that thoſe thinner
7967That the Moon may be a World. thicker parts appearing in her, do ſhew the
difference
betwixt the Sea and Land in that
other
World?
and Galilæus doubts not, but
that
if our Earth were viſible at the ſame di-
ſtance
, there would be the like appearance of it.
If we conſider the Moon as another habi-
table
Earth, then the appearances of it will
be
altogether exact, and beautiful, and may
argue
unto that, it is fully accompliſhed for
all
thoſe ends to which Providence did appoint
it
.
But conſider it barely as a Star or Light,
and
then there will appear in it much imper-
fection
and deformity, as being of an impure
dark
ſubſtance, and ſo unfit for the Office of
that
Nature.
As for the Form of thoſe Spots, ſome of
the
Vulgar think, they repreſent a Man, and
the
Poetsgueſs, ’tis the Boy Endymion, whoſe
Company
ſhe Loves ſo well, that ſhe carries
him
with her;
others will have it only to be
the
Face of a Man, as the Moon is uſually pi-
ctured
;
but Albertus thinks rather, that it re-
11Euſebius
Nicremb
.
Hiſt
. Na.
l
. 8. c. 19.
preſents a Lyon, with his Tail towards the
Eaſt
, and his Head the Weſt, and ſome others
have thought it to be very much like a Fox, and certainly, ’tis as much like a Lyon, as that
in
the Zodiake, or as Urſa major is like a Bear.
I ſhould gueſs, that it repreſents one of
theſe
, as well as another, and any thing elſe,
as
well as any of theſe, ſince ’tis but a ſtrong ima-
gination
, which fancies ſuch Images, as School
Boys
uſually do, in the marks of a Wall, where-
as
there is not any ſuch ſimilitude in the ſpots
themſelves
, which rather like our Sea, in re-
ſpect
of the Land, appears under a rugged
8068That the Moon may be a World. confuſed Figure, and doth not repreſent any
diſtinct
Image, ſo that both in reſpect of the
matter
, and the Form, it may be probable e-
nough
, that thoſe ſpots and brighter parts may
ſhew
the diſtinction betwixt the Sea and Land
in
that other World.
PROP. VIII.
The Spots repeſent the Sea, and the brighter parts
the
Land.
WHen I firſt compar'd the Nature of our
Earth
and Water, with thoſe appearan-
ces
in the Moon;
I concluded contrary to the
Propoſition
, that the brighter Parts repreſented
the
Water, and the Spots the Land;
of this
Opinion
likewiſe was Keplar at the firſt.
But
my
ſecond Thoughts, and the reading of others,
11Opt. Aſtro.
c
. 6. num. 9.
Diſſert
.
cum
nuncio
Gal
.
have now convinced me (as after he was) of
the
Truth of that Propoſition which I have
now
ſet down.
Before I come to the Confir-
mation
of it, I ſhall mention thoſe Scruples,
which
at firſt made me doubt the Truth of this
Opinion
.
1. It may be Objected, ’tis Probable, if there
be
any ſuch Sea and Land as ours, that it bears
ſome
Proportion and Similitude with ours, but
now
this Propoſition takes away all Likeneſs
betwixt
them.
For whereas the Superficies of
our
Earth is but the Third part of the whole
Surface
in the Globe.
Two Parts being over-
22Exercit.
39
.
ſpread with the Water (as Scaliger Obſerves)
yet
here, according to this Opinion, the Sea
ſhould
be leſs than the Land, ſince there is
8169That the Moon may be a World. ſo much of the Beſpotted, as there is of the En-
lightned
parts, wherefore ’tis Probable, that
there
is no ſuch thing at all, or elſe, that the
Brighter
parts are the Sea.
2. The Water, by Reaſon of the Smoothneſs
of
its Superficies, ſeems better able to Reflect
the
Sun-Beams than the Earth, which in moſt
Places
is ſo full of Ruggedneſs of Graſs and
Trees
, and ſuch like Impediments of Reflexion;
and beſides, common Experience ſhews, that the
Water
Shines with a greater and more Glori-
ous
Brightneſs than the Earth;
therefore it
ſhould
ſeem that the Spots are the Earth, and
the
Brighter parts the Water.
But to the Firſt
it
may be Anſwered.
1. There is no great Probability in this
Conſequence
, that becauſe ’tis ſo with us, there-
fore
it muſt be ſo with the parts of the Moon,
for
ſince there is ſuch a Difference betwixt
them
in Divers other Reſpects, they may not
perhaps
Agree in this.
2. That Aſſertion of Scaliger is not by all
11De Meteo.
ris
. l. s. c. 1.
Art
. 1.
granted for a Truth.
Fromundus, with others,
think
, that the Superficies of the Sea and Land,
in
ſo much of the World as is already Diſcover-
ed
, is equal, and of the ſame Extenſion.
3. The Orb of Thick and Vaporous Air
which
incompaſſes theMoon, makes the Bright-
er
parts of that Planet appear bigger than in
themſelves
they are;
as I ſhall ſhew after-
wards
.
To the Second it may be Anſwered, that
though
the Water be of a ſmooth Superficies,
and
ſo may ſeem moſt fit to Reverberate the
Light
, yet becauſe ’tis of a Perſpicuous
8270That the Moon may be a World. therefore the Beams muſt Sink into it, and can-
not
ſo ſtrongly and clearly be reflected.
Sicut
in
ſpeculo ubi plumbum abr aſum fuerit, ſaith Gar-
dan
, as in Looking-glaſſes where part of the
Lead
is raſed off, and nothing left behind to
Reverberate
the Image, the ſpecies muſt there
paſs
through, and not back again;
ſo it is
where
the Beams penetrate and ſink into the
ſubſtance
of the Body, there cannot be ſuch an
immediate
and ſtrong Reflexion, as when they
are
beat back from the Superficies, and there-
fore
the Sun cauſes a greater Heat by far upon
the
Land than upon the Water.
Now as for
that
Experiment where it is ſaid, that the wa-
ters
have a greater brightneſs than the Land:
I anſwer, ’tis true only there where they re-
preſent
the Image of the Sun or ſome bright
Cloud
, and not in other places, eſpecially if
we
look upon them at any great diſtance, as is
very
plain by common Obſervation.
And ’tis certain, that from any high Moun-
tain
the Land does appear a great deal brighter
than
any Lake or River.
This may yet further be illuſtrated by the
ſimilitude
of a Looking-glaſs hanging upon a
Wall
in the Sun-ſhine, where, if the Eye be
not
placed in the juſt line of Reflexion from
the
Glaſs, ’tis manifeſt that the Wall will be
of
a brighter appearance than the Glaſs.
True
indeed
in the Line of Reflexion, the Light of
the
Glaſs is equal almoſt unto that which comes
immediately
from the Sun it ſelf;
but now
this
is only in one particular place, and ſo is
not
like that Brightneſs which we diſcern in
the
Moon, becauſe this does appear
8371That the Moon may be a World. in ſeveral Scituations, like that of the Wall
which
does ſeem bright as well from every
place
as from any one.
And therefore the
ruffneſs
of the Wall, or (as it is in the Obje-
ction
) the ruggedneſs of our Earth is ſo far from
being
a hindrance of ſuch a Reflexion as there
is
from the Moon, that it is rather required as
a
neceſſary condition unto it.
We may con-
ceive
that in every rough Body there are, as
it
were, innumerable ſuperficies, diſpoſed un-
to
an innumerable diverſity of Inclinations.
Ita ut nullus ſit locus; ad quem non pertingant
11Galilæus
Syſtem
. col@@
I
.
plurimi radii reflexi a plurimis ſuperficieculis, per
omnem
corporis ſcabri radiis luminoſis percuſſi ſu-
perficiem
diſperſis.
So that there is not any
place unto which there are not ſome Beams
reflected from theſe divers Superficies, in
the ſeveral parts of ſuch a rugged Body.
But
yet
(as I ſaid before) the Earth does receive a
great
part of its Light by illumination, as well
as
by Reflexion.
So that notwithſtanding thoſe Doubts, yet
this
Propoſition may remain True, that the
Spots
may be the Sea, and the Brighter parts
the
Land.
Of this Opinion was Plutarch: unto
22De facie
lun
.
Dbſſertatis

Nunc
. Syd.
him Aſſented Keplar and Galilæus, whoſe
words
are theſe, Si quis veterum Pythægoreo-
rum
ſententiam exuſcitare velit, lunam ſcilicet eſſe
quaſi
tellurem alteram, ejus pars lucidior terrenam
ſuperficiem
, obſcurior vero aqueam magis congruè
repreſentet
.
Mihi autem dubium fuit nunquam
terreſtris
globi à longè conſpecti, atque aradiis ſo-
laribus
perfuſi, terream ſuperficiem clariorem, ob-
ſcuriorem
vero aqueam ſeſe in conſpectum daturam.
If any Man have a mind to Renew the
8472That the Moon may be a World. on of the Phythagoreans, that the Moon is an
other Earth, then her Brighter parts may fitly
Repreſent the Earths Superficies, and the
Darker part the Water:
and for my part, I
never Doubted but that our Earthly Globe
being Shined upon by the Sun, and beheld at
a great Diſtance, the Land would appear
Brighteſt, and the Sea more Obſcurely.
The
Reaſons may be.
1. That which I urged about the foregoing
Chapter
, becauſe the Water is the Thinner part,
and
therefore muſt give leſs Light.
Since the Stars and Planets, by Reaſon of
their
Brightneſs, are Uſually concluded to be
the
Thicker parts of her Orb.
2. Water is in it ſelf of a Blacker Colour
11In lib. de
coloribus
(ſaith Ariſtotle) and therefore more Remote
from
Light than the Earth.
Any parts of the
Ground
being Moiſtened with Rain, does Look
much
more Darkly than when it is Dry.
3. ’Tis obſerved that the ſecondary Light
of
the Moon (which afterwards is proved to
proceed
from our Earth) is ſenſibly brighter
unto
us, for two or three days before the
Conjunction
, in the morning when ſhe appears
Eaſtward
, then about the ſame time after the
Conjunction
, when ſhe is ſeen in the Weſt.
The Reaſon of which muſt be this, becauſe
that
part of the Earth which is oppoſite to
the
Moon in the Eaſt, has more Land in it
than
Sea.
Whereas on the contrary, the Moon
when
ſhe is in the Weſt, is ſhined upon that
part
of our Earth where there is more Sea.

than
Land, from whence it will follow with
good
probability that the Earth does caſt a
greater
Light than the Water.
8573That the Moon may be a World.
4. Becauſe Obſervation tells us, that the
ſpotted
parts are always ſmooth, and equal,
having
every where an equality of Light when
once
they are enlightned by the Sun, whereas
the
brighter parts are full of rugged Gibboſi-
ties
and Mountains, having many Shades in
them
, as I ſhall ſhew more at large afterwards.
That in this Planet there muſt be Seas,
Campanella
indeavours to prove out of Scrip-
ture
, interpreting the Waters above the Firma-
11Apologia pro
Galilæo
.
ment ſpoken in Geneſis, to be meant of the Sea
in
this World.
For (ſaith he) ’tis not likely
that
there are any ſuch waters above the
Orbs
to moderate that Heat which they re-
ceive
from their ſwift Motion (as ſome of the
Fathers
think.)
Nor did Moſes mean the An-
22Vide Iron.
Epiſt
. ad
Pammachi-
um
. Con-
feſſion
. l. 13.
c
. 32. Re-
tracted
. lib.
2
. Retr.
cap
. 6.
gels which may be called Spiritual Waters, as
Origen
and Auſtin would have it, for both theſe
are
rejected by general conſent:
Nor could
he
mean any Waters in the ſecond Region, as
moſt
Commentators interpret it:
For firſt,
there
is nothing but Vapors, which tho’ they
are
afterwards turned into Water, yet while
they
remain there, they are only the matter
of
that Element, which may as well be Fire,
or
Earth, or Air.
Secondly, thoſe Vapours
are
not above the Expanſum, but in it.
So that
he
thinks there is no other way to ſalve all,
but
by making the Planets ſeveral Worlds with
Sea
and Land, with ſuch Rivers and Springs
as
we have here below:
Eſpecially ſince Eſdras
332 Eſdr. 4.7 ſpeaks of the Springs above the Firmament.
But I cannot agree with him in this, nor do I
think
that any ſuch thing can be proved out of
Scripture
.
8674That the Moon may be a World.
Before I proceed to the next Poſition, I ſhall
firſt
anſwer ſome Doubts which might be
made
againſt the generality of this Truth,
whereby
it may ſeem impoſſible that there
ſhould
be either Sea or Land in the Moon;
for ſince ſhe moves ſo ſwiftly as Aſtronomers
obſerve
, why then does their nothing fall from
her
, or why doth ſhe not ſhake ſomething out
by
the celerity of her Revolution;
I anſwer,
you
muſt know that the Inclination of every
heavy
Body to its proper Centre, doth ſuffici-
ently
tye it unto its place;
ſo that ſuppoſe any
thing
were ſeparated, yet muſt it neceſlarily
return
again.
And there is no more danger of
their
Falling into our World, than there is
Fear
our falling into the Moon.
But there are many Fabulous Relations of
ſuch
things as have dropped thence.
There is
a
Tale of the Nemean Lyon that Hercules ſlew,
11Vide Guli.
Nubrigenſ
.
de
rebus.
Anglicæ
.
lib
. 1.
which firſt ruſhing among the Herds out of
his
unknown Den in the Mountain of Gytheron
in
Bæotia, the credulous People thought he was
ſent
from the Goddeſs the Moon.
And if a
Whirlwind
did chance to ſnatch any thing up,
and
afterwards Rain it down again, the igno-
rant
multitude were apt to believe that it
dropt
from Heaven.
Thus Avicenna relates
a
Story of a Calf which fell down in a Storm,
the
Beholders thinking it a Moon-Calf, and
that
it fell thence.
So Gardan Travelling up-
on
the Apennine Mountains, a ſudden Blaſt
took
off his Hat, which if it had been car-
ryed
far, he thinks the Peaſants, who had per-
ceiv
'd it to fall, would have ſworn it had
Rained
Hats.
After ſome ſuch manner,
8775That the Moon may be a World. ny of our Prodigies come to paſs, and the
People
are willing to believe any thing, which
they
may relate to others as a very ſtrange and
wonderful
Event.
I doubt not but the Trojan
Palladium
, the Roman Minerva, and our La-
dies
Church at Loretto, with many ſacred Re-
liques
preſerv'd by the Papiſts might drop
from
the Moon as well as any of theſe.
But it may be again Objected, ſuppoſe there
were
a Bullet ſhot up in that World, would
not
the Moon run away from it;
before it
could
fall down, ſince the Motion of her Bo-
dy
(being every day round our Earth) is far
ſwifter
than the other, and ſo the Bullet muſt
be
left behind, and at length fall down to us?
To this I anſwer.
1. If a Bullet could be ſhot ſo far till it
it
came to the Circumference of thoſe things
which
belong to our Centre, then it would
fall
down to us.
2. Though there were ſome Heavy Body
a
great Height in that Air, yet would the Mo-
tion
of that Magnetical Globe to which it did
belong
by an attractive Virtue, ſtill hold it
within
its convenient diſtance, whether their
Earth
moved or ſtood ſtill, yet would the
ſame
Violence caſt a Body from it equally far.
That I may the plainer expreſs my meaning,
I
will ſet down this Diagram.
8876That the Moon may be a World. 1[Figure 1]
Suppoſe this Earth was A, which was to
move
in the Circle C.
D. and let the Bullet
be
ſuppos'd at B.
within its proper Verge; I
ſay
, whether this Earth did ſtand ſtill or move
ſwiftly
towards D.
yet the Bullet would ſtill
keep
at the ſame diſtance by reaſon of that mag-
netick
Vertue of the Centre (if I may ſo ſpeak)
whereby
all things within its Sphere are attra-
cted
with it.
So that the Violence to the bul-
let
, being nothing elſe but that whereby ’tis
remov’d
from its Centre, therefore an equal
violence
can carry a Body from its proper place,
but
at an equal diſtance, whether or no this
Earth
where its Centre is, does ſtand ſtill or
move
.
The Impartial Reader may find ſufficient ſa-
tisfaction
for this, and ſuch other Arguments
as
may be urg'd againſt the Motion of
8977That the Moon may be a World. Earth, in the Writings of Gopernicus and his
Followers
, unto whom, for Brevities ſake, I
will
refer them.
PROP. IX.
That there are high Mountains, deep Vallies, and
ſpacious
Plains in the Body of the Moon.
THough there are ſome, who think Moun-
tains
to be a deformity to the Earth, as
if
they were either beat up by the Floud, or
elſe
caſt up like ſo many Heaps of Rubbiſh
left
at the Creation;
yet if well confider’d,
they
will be found as much to conduce to the
Beauty
and Conveniency of the Univerſe, as
any
of the other parts.
Nature (ſaith Pliny)
purpoſely
framed them for many excellent uſes:
partly to tame the Violence of greater Rivers,
to
ſtrengthen certain Joynts within the Veins
and
Bowels of the Earth, to break the Force
of
the Seas Inundation, and for the ſafety of
the
Earths Inhabitants, whether Beaſts or Men.

That
they make much for the Protection of
Beaſts
, the Pſalmiſt teſtifies, The high Hills
11Pſal. 104.
v
. 18.
are a refuge for the wild Goats, and the Recks for
the
Gonies.
The Kingly Prophet had likewiſe
learned
the ſafety of theſe by his own Experi-
ence
, when he alſo was fain to make a Moun-
tain
his Refuge from the Fury of his Maſter
Saul
, who perſecuted him in the Wilderneſs.
True indeed, ſuch places as theſe keep their
Neighbours
poor, as being moſt barren, but
yet
they preſerve them ſafe, as being moſt
ſtrong
;
witneſs our unconquered Wales
9078That the Moon may be a World. Scotland, whoſe greateſt protection hath been
the
natural Strength of their Country, ſo For-
tified
with Mountains, that theſe have always
been
unto them ſure Retreats from the Vio-
lence
and Oppreſſion of others.
Wherefore
a
good Author doth rightly call them Natures
Bul-warks
, caſt up at God Almighties own
charges
, the ſcorns and curbs of victorious
Armies
;
which made the Barbarians in Gurtius
ſo
confident of their own ſafety, when they
were
once retir'd into an acceſſable Mountain,
that
when Alexanders Legat had brought them
to
a Parley, and perſwading them to yield, told
them
of his Maſters Victories, what Seas and
Wilderneſſes
he had paſſed;
they replyed, that
all
that might be, but could Alexander fly too?
Over the Seas he might have Ships, and over
the
Land Horſes, but he muſt have Wings be-
fore
he could get up thither.
Such ſafety did
thoſe
barbarous Nations conceive in the Moun-
ttins
whereunto they were retired.
Certainly
then
ſuch uſeful parts were not the effects of
Mans
Sin, or produced by the Worlds Curſe,
the
Flood, but rather at firſt created by the
Goodneſs
and Providence of the Almighty.
This Truth is uſually concluded from theſe
and
the like Arguments.
1. Becauſe the Scripture it ſelf, in the De-
ſcription
of that general Deluge, tells us, it
overflowed
the higheſt Mountains.
2. Becauſe Moſes, who writ long after the
Flood
, does yet give the ſame Deſcription
of
places and Rivers, as they had before;
which could not well have been, if this had
made
ſo ſtrange an Alteration.
9179That the Moon may be a World.
3. ’Tis evident that the Trees did ſtand as
before
.
For otherwiſe Noah could not ſo well
have
concluded, that the Waters were abated
from
this reaſon, becauſe the Dove brought
an
Olive Leaf in her Mouth, when ſhe was
ſent
forth the ſecond time:
whereas had the
Trees
been rooted up, ſhe might have taken
it
the firſt time, from one of them as it was
floating
on the top of the Waters.
Now if
the
Motion of the Waters was not ſo violent
as
to ſubvert the Trees, much leſs was it able
to
caſt up ſuch vaſt heaps as the Mountains.
4. When the Scripture doth ſet forth unto
us
the Power and Immenſity of God by the va-
riety
or Uſefulneſs of the Creatures which he
hath
made, amongſt the reſt it doth often men-
tion
the Mountains, Pſal.
104. 9. item 148. 9. Iſai.
40. 12. And therefore ’tis probable they were
created
at the firſt.
Unto this I maght add,
that
in other places Divine Wiſdom, in ſhew-
ing
of its own Antiquity, ſaith, that he was
11Prov. 8. 25.
Pſal
. 90. 2.
From the beginning, before the Earth or the Moun-
tains
were brought forth.
5. If we may truſt the Relations of Antiqui-
22Foſeph. Ant.
lib
. 1. c. 3.
ty, there were many Monuments left undefa-
ced
after the Flood.
So that if I intend to prove that the Moon is
fuch
a Habitable World as this is;
’tis requi-
ſite
that I ſhew it to have the ſame Convenien-
ces
of Habitation as this hath;
and here if
ſome
Rabbi or Chymick were to handle the
point
, they would firſt prove it out of Scrip-
ture
, from that place in Moſes his Bleſſing,
where
he ſpeaks of the ancient Mountains and
laſting
Hills, Deut.
33. מלוע תועבגו מרק
9280That the Moon may be a World. for having immmediately before mentioned
thoſe
Bleſſings which ſhould happen unto Fo-
ſeph
by the Influence of the Moon, he does pre-
ſently
exegetically iterate them in Bleſſing him
with
the chief things in the ancient Mountains
and
laſting Hills;
you may alſo ſee the ſame
expreſſion
uſed in Jacobs Bleſſing of Joſeph.
11Gen. 49. 26.
But however we may deal pro or con in Phi-
loſophy
, yet we muſt not be too bold with Di-
vine
Truths, or bring Scripture to Patronize
any
Fancy of our own, though perhaps it be
Truth
.
I am not of their Mind who think it
a
good Courſe to confirm Philoſophical Se-
crets
from the letter of the Scripture, or by a-
buſing
ſome obſcure Text in it.
Methinks it
ſavors
too much of that melancholly humour
of
the Chymicks, who, aiming in all their Stu-
dies
at the making of Gold, do perſwade them-
ſelves
, that the moſt learned and ſubtile of the
Ancient
Authors, in all their obſcure places,
do
mean ſome ſuch ſenſe as may make
to
their purpoſe.
And hence it is that they
derive
ſuch ſtrange Myſteries from the Fables
of
the Poets, and can tell you what great ſecret
it
was that Antiquity did hide under the Ficti-
on
of Jupiter being turned into a Showre of
Gold
:
of Mercury's being made the Interpre-
ter
of the Gods:
of the Moons deſcending to
the
Earth for the Love of Endymion:
with
ſuch
ridiculous Interpretations of theſe and the
like
Fables, which any reaſonable conſidering
Man
cannot conceive to proceed from any,
but
ſuch as are diſtracted.
No leſs Fantaſtical
in
this kind are the Jewiſh Rabbies, amongſt
whom
is not any Opinion, whether in Nature
9381That the Moon may be a World. Policy, whether true or falſe, but ſome of them,
by
a Cabaliſtical Interpretation can Father it
upon
a dark place of Scripture, or (if need be)
upon
a Text that is clean contrary.
There be-
ing
not any abſurdity ſo groſs and incredible,
for
which theſe Abuſers of the Text, will not
find
out an Argument.
Whereas, ’tis the more
natural
way, and ſhould be obſerved in all Con-
troverſies
, to apply unto every thing, the pro-
per
proofs of it;
and when we deal with Phi-
loſophical
Truths, to keep our ſelves within
the
Bounds of Humane Reaſon and Authority.
But this by the way. For the better proof
of
this Propoſition, I might here Cite the Te-
ſtimony
of Diodorus, who thought the Moon
to
be full of rugged places, velut terreſtribus
tumultis
ſupercilioſam;
but he erred much in
ſome
Circumſtances of this Opinion, eſpecial-
ly
where he ſays, there is an Iſland amongſt
the
Hyperboreans, wherein thoſe Hills may
to
the Eye be plainly diſcover'd;
and for this
reaſon
Gælius calls him a Fabulous Writer.
11Lect. aut.
l
. 1. c. 15.
But you may ſee more expreſs Authority for
the
Proof of this in the Opinions of Anaxago-
22Plut. de
plac
. l. 2. c.
25
.
ras and Democritus, who held that this Planet
was
full of Champion Grounds, Mountains
and
Vallies.
And this ſeemed likewiſe proba-
ble
unto Auguſtinus Nifus, whoſe words are
theſe
:
Forſitan non eſt remotum dicere lunæ par-
33De calo.l. 2.
part
. 49.
tes eſſe diverſas, veluti ſunt partes terræ, quarum
aliæ
ſunt valloſæ, aliæ montoſæ, ex quarum diffe-
rentia
effici poteſt facies illa lunæ;
nec eſt rationi
diſſonum
, nam luna eſt corpus imperfecte Sphæ-
ricum
, cum ſit corpus ab ultimo cœlo elongatum,
ut
ſupra dixit Ariſtoteles.
‘Perhaps, it
9482That the Moon may be a World. ‘not be amiſs to ſay that the parts of the Moon
‘were
divers, as the parts of the Earth, where-
‘of
ſome are Vallies, and ſome Mountains,
‘from
the difference of which, ſome ſpots in
‘the
Moon may proceed;
nor is this againſt
‘Reaſon
;
for that Planet cannot be perfectly
‘Spherical
, ſince ’tis ſo remote a Body from
‘the
firſt Orb, as Ariſtotle had ſaid before.
You may ſee this Truth aſſented unto by Blan-
11De Mundi
fab
. pars. 3
c
. 4.
canus the Jeſuite, and by him confirmed with
divers
Reaſons.
Keplar hath obſerved in the
Moons
Eclipſes, that the Diviſion of her en-
22Aſtron.
Opt
. c. 6.
num
. 9.
lightned part from the ſhaded, was made by
a
crooked unequal Line, of which there can-
not
be any probable cauſe conceiv'd, unleſs it
did
ariſe from the ruggedneſs of that Planet;
for it cannot all be produc'd from the ſhade of
any
Mountains here on Earth, becauſe theſe
would
be ſo leſſened before they could reach
ſo
high in a Conical Shadow, that they would
not
be at all ſenſible unto us (as might eaſily
be
demonſtrated) nor can it be conceiv'd what
reaſon
of this difference there ſhould be in the
Sun
.
Wherefore there being no other Body
that
hath any thing to do in Eclipſes, we muſt
neceſſarily
conclude, that it is cauſed by varie-
ty
of parts in the Moon it ſelf, and what can
theſe
be but its Gibboſities ?
Now if you
ſhould
ask a reaſon why there ſhould be ſuch a
multitude
of theſe in that Planet, the ſame
Keplar
ſhall jeſt you out an anſwer.
Suppoſing
(ſaith he) that thoſe Inhabitants are bigger than
any
of of us in the ſame proportion, as their
days
are longer than ours, viz.
by Fifteeen
times
it may be, for want of Stones to erect
9583That the Moon may be a World. vaſt Houſes as were requiſite for their Bodies,
they
are fain to dig great and round hollows in
the
Earth, where they may both procure water
11Kep. ap-
pend
. Sele-
nogra
.
for their Thirſt, &
turning about with the ſhade,
may
avoid thoſe great Heats which other wiſe
they
would be liable unto, or if you will give
Gæſar
la Galla leave to gueſs in the ſame man-
ner
, he would rather think that thoſe Thirſty
Nations
caſt up ſo many, and ſo great heaps of
Earth
in digging of their Wine Cellars;
but
22Nuncius
Sydereus
.
this only by the way.
I ſhall next produce Eye-witneſs of Galelæus,
on
which I moſt of all depend for the proof of
this
Propoſition, when he beheld the new Moon
through
his perſpective, it appeared to him un-
der
a Rugged and Spotted Figure, ſeeming to
have
the darker and enlightned parts divided
by
a Tortuous Line, having ſome Parcels of
Light
at a good diſtance from the other;
and
this
difference is ſo remarkable, that you may
eaſily
perceive it through one of thoſe ordina-
ry
Perſpectives, which are commonly ſold a-
mongſt
us;
but for your better apprehending
of
what I deliver, I will ſet down the Figure
as
I find it in Galilæus.
9684That the Moon may be a World. 2[Figure 2]
Suppoſe ABCD to repreſent the appea-
rance
of the Moons Body being in a Sextile,
you
may ſee ſome brighter parts Separated at
a
pretty diſtance from the other, which can be
nothing
elſe but a Reflexion of the Sun-Beams,
upon
ſome parts that are higher than the reſt,
and
thoſe Obſcure Gibboſities which ſtand our
towards
the enlightened parts, muſt be ſuch
Hollow
and Deep Places, whereto the Rays
cannot
Reach.
But when the Moon is got far-
ther
off from the Sun, and come to that fulneſs
as
this Line BD doth repreſent her under, then
do
theſe parts alſo receive an equalLight, excep-
ting
only that difference which doth appear be-
twixt
their Sea and Land.
And if you do
9785That the Moon may be a World. ſider how any Rugged Body would appear, be-
ing
enlightned, you would eaſily conceive that
it
muſt neceſſarily ſeem under ſome ſuch Gib-
bous
unequal form, as the Moon is here repre-
ſented
.
Now for the Infallibility of theſe ap-
pearances
, I ſhall refer the Reader to that which
hath
been ſaid in the Sixth Propoſition.
But Gæſar la Galla affirms, that all theſe
appearances
may conſiſt with a plainSuperficies,
if
we ſuppoſe the parts of the Body to be ſome
of
them Diaphanous, and ſome Opacous;
and
if
you Object, that the Light which is convey'd
to
any Diaphanous part in a plain Superficies,
muſt
be by a continued Line, whereas here there
appear
many brighter parts among the Obſcure
at
ſome diſtance from the reſt.
To this he
anſwers
, it may ariſe from ſome Secret Con-
veyances
and Channels within her Body, that
do
conſiſt of a more Diaphanous matter, which
being
covered over with an Opacous Superfi-
cies
, the Light paſſing through them, may break
out
a great way off;
whereas the other parts
betwixt
, may ſtill remain Dark.
Juſt as the
River
Aretbuſa in Sicily, which runs under
ground
for a great way, and afterwards breaks
out
again.
But becauſe this is one of the cheifeſt
Fancies
, whereby he thinks he hath fully an-
ſwered
the Argument of this Opininion;
I will
therefore
ſet down his anſwer in his own words
leſt
the Reader might ſuſpect more in them,
than
I have expreſſed.
Non eſt impoſſible cæcos
11cap. II. ductus diaphani &
perſpicui corporis, ſed opacd
ſuperficie
protendi, uſque in diapbanam aliquam ex
profundoin
ſuperficiem emergentem partem, per quos
ductus
lume inlongo poſt modum interſticio
9886That the Moon may be a World.& c. But I reply, if the Superficies betwixt
theſe
two enlightened parts, remain dark be-
cauſe
of its Opacity, then would it always be
dark
, and the Sun could not make it partake of
Light
, more than it could of Perſpicuity.
But
this
contradicts all Experience, as you may ſee
in
Galilæus, who affirms, that when the Sun
comes
nearer to his Oppoſition, then, that
which
is betwixt them both, is enlightned as
well
as either.
Nay, this oppoſes his own Eye-
witheſs
, for he confeſſes himſelf, that he ſaw this
by
the glaſs.
He had ſaid before, that he came
to
ſee thoſe ſtrange Sights diſcovered by Gali-
læus
his glaſs, with an intent of Contradiction,
and
you may read that confirmed in the weak-
neſs
of this anſwer, which rather bewrays an
Obſtinate
, then a perſwaded Will;
for other-
wiſe
ſure he would never have undertook to
have
deſtroyed ſuch certain proofs with ſo
groundleſs
a Fancy.
That Inſtance of Galilæus, would have been
11Syſt. mundi
eoll
. 1.
a better Evaſion, had this Author been Acquan-
ted
with it;
who might then have compared
the
Moon to that which we call Mother of
Pearl
, which though it be moſt Exactly Poliſhed
in
the Superficies of it;
yet will ſeem unto the
Eye
as if there were divers Swellings and Ri-
ſings
in its ſeveral parts.
But yet this neither
would
not well have ſhifted the Experiment
of
the Perſpective.
For theſe rugged parts do
not
only appear upon one ſide of the Moon, but
as
the Sun does turn about in Divers Places, ſo
do
they alſo caſt their ſhadow.
When theMoon
is
in her Increaſe, then do they caſt their ſha-
dows
to the Eaſt.
When ſhe is in the
9987That the Moon may be a World. and the Sun on the other ſide of her, then like-
wiſe
may we Diſcover theſe brighter Parts
caſting
their ſhadows Weſtward.
Whereas in
the
full Moon there are none of all theſe to be
feen
.
But it may be Objected, that ’tis almoſt Im-
poſſible
, and altogether Unlikely, that in the
Moon
there ſhould be any Mountains ſo high,
as
thoſe Obſervations make them.
For do but
Suppoſe
, according to the common Principles,
that
the Moons Diameter unto the Earths, is
very
neer to the Proportion of 2 to 7.
Suppoſe
withall
that theEarthsDiameter contains about
7000
.
Italian Miles, and the Moons 2000. (as is
commonly
granted.)
Now Galilæus hath Ob-
ſerved
, that ſome parts have been Enlightned,
when
they were the Twentieth part of the Di-
ameter
diſtant from the common term of Illu-
mination
.
From whence, it muſt neceſſarily
follow
, that there may be ſome Mountains in
the
Moon, ſo high, that they are Able to caſt a
ſhadow
a 100 Miles off.
An opinion that ſounds
like
a Prodigy or a Fiction, wherefore ’tis likely
that
either thoſe Appearances are cauſed by
ſomewhat
elſe beſides Mountains, or elſe thoſe
are
fallibleObſervations, from whence may fol-
low
ſuch Improbable, Inconceiveable Conſe-
quences
.
But to this I anſwer:
1. You muſt Conſider the height of the
Mountains
is but very little, if you compare
them
to the Length of their ſhadows.
Sir Walter
11Hiſt. l. 1.c.
7
. Sect. 11.
Rawleigh Obſerves, that the Mount Atbos, now
called
Lacas, caſt its ſhadow 300 Furlongs, which
is
above 37 Miles;
and yet that Mount is
10088That the Moon may be a World. of the Hegheſt. Nay, Solinus (whom I ſhould
11Pely. biſtor.
6
. 21.
rather believe in this kind) affirms, that this
Mountain
gives his ſhadow quite over the Sea,
from
Macedon to the Iſle of Lemnos, which is
700
Furlongs, or 84 Miles, and yet according
to
the common Reckoning, it doth ſcarce reach
4
Miles up wards, in its Perpendicular height.
2. I affirm, that there are very high Moun-
tains
in the Moon.
Keplar and Galilæus think,
that
they are higher than any which are upon
our
Earth.
But I am not of their Opinion in this,
becauſe
I ſuppoſe they go upon a falſe Ground,
whilſt
they Conceive, that the higheſt Moun-
tain
upon the Earth is not above a Mile Per-
pendicular
.
Whereas ’tis the common Opinion, and found
true
enough by Obſervation, that Olympus,
Atlas
, Taurus and Emus, with many others, are
much
above this height.
Tenariffa in the
Canary
Iſlands, is commonly related to be
above
8 Miles Perpendicular, and about this
height
(ſay ſome) is the Mount Perjacaca in
America
.
Sir Walter Rawleigh ſeems to 22Hiſt. l.1.c.
7
. Sect. 11.
Meteor
. l.
I
. c. II.
that the higheſt of theſe is near 30 Miles up-
right
.
nay, Ariſtotle ſpeaking of Gaucaſus in
Aſia
, affirins it to be Viſible for 560 Miles, as
ſome
Interpreters find by Computation;
from
which
it will follow, that it was 78 Miles Per-
pendicularly
high, as you may ſee confirm'd by
Facobus
Mazonius, and out of him in Blancanus
33Comparatio
Ariſt
. cum.
Platone
.
Sect
3.c.5.
Expoſt
. in
loc
Math.
Arlis
loc.
148
.
the Jeſuit.
But this Deviates from the truth,
more
in Exceſs, than the other doth in defect.
However, though theſe in the Moon are
not
ſo high asſome amongſt us;
yet certain
it
is they are of a great height, and ſome
10189That the Moon may be a World. them at the leaſt four Miles Perpendicular.
This I ſhall prove from the Obſervation of Ga-
lilæus
, whoſe Glaſs can ſhew to the ſenſe a
proof
beyond exception;
and certainly that
Man
muſt be of a moſt timorous Faith, who
dares
not believe his own Eye.
By that Perſpective you may plainly diſ-
cern
ſome enlightned parts (which are the
Mountains
) to be diſtant from the other about
the
twentieth part of the Diameter.
From
whence
it will follow, that thoſe Mountains
muſt
neceſſarily be at the leaſt, four Italian
Miles
in height.
3[Figure 3]
For let B D E F be the Body of the Moon,
A
B C will be aRay or Beam of the Sun, which
enlightens
a Mountain at A, and B is the point
of
Contingency;
the diſtance betwixt A and
B
muſt be ſuppos'd to be the twentieth part
of
the Diameter, which is an 100 Miles, for
ſo
far are ſome enlightned parts ſever'd from
the
common term of Illumination.
Now
10290That the Moon may be a World. Aggregate of the quadrate from A B a
Hundred
, and B G a 1000.
will be 1010000.
unto which the Quadrat ariſing from A G
muſt
be equal;
according to the 47th Propoſi-
tion
in the ſirſt Book of Elements.
There-
fore
the whole Line A G is ſomewhat more
than
104.
and the diſtance betwixt H A muſt
be
above four Miles, which was the thing to
be
prov'd.
But it may be again Objected, if there be
ſuch
rugged parts, and ſo high Mountains, why
then
cannot we diſcern them at this diſtance ?
why doth the Moon appear unto us ſo exactly
round
, and not rather as a Wheel with Teeth.
I anſwer, by reaſon of too great a diſtance;
For if the whole Body appear to our Eye ſo
little
, then thoſe parts which bear ſo ſmall a
proportion
to the whole, will not at all be ſen-
ſible
.
But it may be replyed, if there were any
ſuch
remarkable Hills, why does not the Limb
of
the Moon appear like a Wheel with Teeth,
to
thoſe who look upon it through the great
Perſpective
, on whoſe Witneſs you ſo much
depend
?
Or what reaſon is there that ſhe ap-
pears
as exactly round through it, as ſhe doth
to
the bare Eye?
Certainly then, either there
is
no ſuch thing as you imagin, or elſe the
Glaſs
fails much in this Diſcovery.
To this I ſhall anſwer out of Galilæus.
1. You muſt know that there is not meer-
ly
one rank of Mountains about the edge of
the
Moon, but divers Orders, one Mountain
behind
another, and ſo there is ſomewhat to
hinder
thoſe void ſpaces, which otherwiſe, per-
haps
, might appear.
10391That the Moon may be a World.
Now, where there be many Hills, the
Ground
ſeems even to a Man that can ſee the
Tops
of all.
Thus when the Sea rages, and
many
vaſt Waves are lifted up, yet all may
appear
plain enough to one that ſtands at the
Shore
.
So where there are ſo many Hills, the
inequality
will be leſs remarkable, if it be diſ-
cern
'd at a diſtance.
2. Though there be Mountains in that part
which
appears unto us to be the Limb of the
Moon
, as well as in any other place, yet the
bright
Vapours hide their appearance:
for
there
is an Orb of thick vaporus Air that doth
immediately
compaſs the Body of the Moon,
which
though it have not ſo great Opacity,
as
to terminate the Sight, yet being once en-
lightned
by the Sun, it doth repreſent the Bo-
dy
of the Moon under a greater form, and hin-
ders
our ſight from a diſtinct view of her true
Circumference
.
But of this in the next Chap-
ter
.
3. Keplar hath obſerv'd, that in the Solary
11Somn. Aſtr.
not
. 207.
Eclipſes, when the Rays may paſs through this
vaporous
Air, there are ſome Gibboſities to
be
diſcern'd in the Limb of the Moon.
I have now ſufficiently prov'd, that there
are
Hills in the Moon, and hence it may ſeem
likely
, that there is alſo a World;
for ſince
Providence
hath ſome ſpecial end in all its
Works
, certainly then theſe Mountains were
not
produc'd in vain;
and what more proba-
ble
meaning can we conceive there ſhould be,
than
to make that place convenient for Habi-
tation
?
10492That the Moon may be a World.
PROP. X.
That there is an Atmo-ſphæra, or an Orb of groſs,
Vaporous
Air, immediately encompaſſing the
body
of the Moon.
AS that part of our Air which is neareſt
to
the Earth, is of a thicker Subſtance
than
the other, by reaſon ’tis always mixed
with
ſome Vapours, which are continually
exhaled
into it.
So is it equally requiſit, that
if
there be a World in the Moon, that the Air
About
that, ſhould be alike qualified with
ours
.
Now, that there is ſuch an Orb of groſs
Air
, was firſt of all (for ought I can read)
obſerved
by Meſlin, afterwards aſſented unto
by
Keplar and Galilæus, and fince by Baptiſta
11Vide Euſeb.
Nierem
. de
Nat
. Hiſt.
l
. 2. c. 11.
Giſatus, Scheiner, with others, all of them con-
firming
it by the ſame Arguments which I
ſhall
only cite, and then leave this Propoſition.
1. ’Tis not improbable that there ſhould be
a
Sphere of groſſer Air about the Moon, be-
cauſe
'tis obſerv'd, that there are ſuch kind of
Evaporations
which proceed from the Sun it
ſelf
.
For there are diſcover'd divers movea-
ble
Spots, like Clouds, that do encompaſs his
Body
;
which thoſe Authors, who have been
moſt
frequently vers'd in theſe kind of Expe-
riments
and Studies, do conclude to be nothing
elſe
but Evaporations from it.
The Probabi-
lity
and Truth of which Obſervations may al-
22So A. D.
1547
.
April
24.
to
the 28.
ſo be inferr'd from ſome other appearances.
As,
1. It hath been obſerv'd, that the Sun hath
ſometimes
for the ſpace of four days
10593That the Moon may be a World. appeared as dull and ruddy almoſt as the Moon
in
her Eclipſes;
in ſo much that the Stars have
been
ſeen at Mid-day.
Nay, he hath been
conſtantly
darkned for almoſt a whole Year,
and
never ſhined, but with a kind of heavy and
duskiſh
Light, ſo that there was ſcarce heat
enough
to Ripen the Fruits.
As it was about
the
time when Gæſar was kill'd.
Which was
recorded
by ſome of the Poets.
Thus Virgil,
ſpeaking
of the Sun.
Ille etiam extincto miſeratus Gæſare Romam.
Gum caput obſcurâ nitidum ferrugine texit,
Impiaque
æternam timuerunt ſæcula noctem.

He
pitying Rome, when as great Cæſar dy'd,
His
Head within a mourning-vail did hide;

And
thus the wicked guilty World did fright
With
doubtful Fears of an Eternal Night.

Ovid
ſpeaking likewife of his Death,
--Solis
quoque triſtis Imago
Lurida
ſollicitis præbebat lumina terris.

--The
Suns ſad Image then
Did
yield a lowring light to fearful Men.
Now theſe appearances could not ariſe from
any
lower Vapour.
For then 1. They would
not
have been ſo univerſal as they were, being
ſeen
through all Europe;
or elſe 2. That Va-
pour
muſt have cover'd the Stars as well as the
Sun
, which yet notwitſtanding were plainly
diſcern
'd in the day time.
You may ſee this
Argument
illuſtrated in another the like caſe,
Chap
.
12. Hence then it will follow, that
this
Fuliginous matter, which did thus obſcure
the
Sun, muſt needs be very near his Body;
and if ſo, then, what can we more probably
gueſs
it to be, then Evaporations from it?
10694That the Moon may be a World.
2. ’Tis obſerv'd, that the Suns total Eclip-
ſes
, when there is no part of his Body diſcern-
able
, yet there does not always follow ſo great
a
darkneſs, as might be expected from his to-
tal
Abſence.
Now ’tis probable, that the rea-
ſon
is, becauſe theſe thicker Vapours, being
Enlightned
by his Beams, do convey ſome
Light
unto us, notwithſtanding the Interpoſiti-
on
of the Moon betwixt his Body and our
Earth
.
3. This likewife is by ſome gueſt to be the
Reaſon
of the Crepuſculum, or that light which
we
have before the Suns Rifing.
Now, if there be ſuch Evaporations from
the
Sun, much more then from the Moon,
which
does conſiſt of a more groſs and impure
ſubſtance
.
The other Arguments are taken
from
ſeveral Obſervations in the Moon her
ſelf
, and do more directly tend to the Proof
of
this Propoſition.
2. ’Tis obſerv'd, that ſo much of the Moon
as
is enlightned, is always part of her bigger
Circle
, than that which is darker.
The fre-
quent
Experience of others hath prov'd this,
and
an eaſie Obſervation may quickly confirm
it
.
But now this cannot proceed from any
other
cauſe ſo probable, as from this Orb of
Air
;
eſpecially when we confider how that
Planet
ſhining with a borrow'd Light, doth
not
ſend forth any ſuch Rays as may make her
Appearance
bigger than her Body.
3. When the Moon, being half enlightned,
begins
to cover any Star, if the Star be towards
the
obſcurer part, then may it by the Perſpe-
ctive
be diſcern'd, to be nearer unto the
10795That the Moon may be a World. tre of the Moon, than the outward Circumfe-
rence
of the enlightned part.
But the Moon
being
in the Full;
then does it ſeem to receive
theſe
Stars within its Limb.
4. Though the Moon do ſometimes appear
the
firſt day of her Change, when ſo much as
appears
enlightned, cannot be above the 80 part
of
her Diameter, yet then will the Horns
ſeem
at leaſt to be of a Fingers breadth in Ex-
tenſion
.
# Which could not be, unleſs the Air
about
it were illuminated.
5. ’Tis obſerv'd, in the Solary Eclipſes, that
there
is ſometimes a great Trepidation about
the
Body of the Moon, from which we may
likewife
argue an Atmo-ſphæra, ſince we can-
not
well conceive what ſo probable a cauſe
there
ſhould be of ſuch an appearance as this,
Quod
radii Solares à vaporibus Lunam ambien-
11Scheiner
Roſ
. Vrſ. l.
4
. pars. 2.
c
. 27.
tibus fuerint interciſi, that the Sun beams were
broken
and refracted by the Vapours that en-
compaſſed
the Moon.
6. I may add the like Argument taken from
another
Obſervation, which will be eaſily try-
ed
and granted.
When the Sun is Eclipſed,
we
diſcern the Moon as ſhe is in her own na-
tural
bigneſs;
but then ſhe appears ſomewhat
leſs
than when ſhe is in the Full, though ſhe
be
in the ſame place of her ſuppos'd Excen-
trick
and Epicycle;
and therefore Tycho hath
Calculated
a Table for the Diameter of the di-
vers
New Moons.
But now there is no reaſon
ſo
probable, to ſalve this appearance, as to
place
an Orb of thicker Air, near the Body
of
that Planet, which may be enlightned by
the
reſlected Beams, and through which
10896That the Moon may be a World. direct Rays may eaſily penetrate.
But ſome may object, that this will not
conſiſt
with that which was before deliver'd,
where
I ſaid, that the thinneſt parts had leaſt
Light
.
If this were true, how comes it to paſs then
that
this Air ſhould be as light as any of the
other
parts, when as ’tis the thinneſt of all?
I anſwer, if the Light be receiv'd by Re-
flexion
only, then the thickeſt Body hath moſt,
becauſe
it is beſt able to beat back the Rays;
but if the Light be receiv'd by Illumination
(eſpecially if there be an Opacous Body be-
hind
, which may double the Beams by Reſlecti-
on
) as it is here, then I deny not but a thin
Body
may retain much Light, and perhaps,
ſome
of thoſe Appearances which we take
for
Fiery Comets, are nothing elſe but a bright
Cloud
enlightned;
ſo that probable it is, there
may
be ſuch Air about the Moon;
and hence
it
comes to paſs, that the greater Spots are
only
viſible towards her middle parts, and
none
near the Circumference;
not, but that
there
are ſome, as well in thoſe parts, as elſe-
where
, but they are not there perceivable, by
reaſon
of thoſe brighter Vapours which hide
them
.
PROP. XI.
That as their World is our Moon, ſo our World is
their
Moon.
I Have already handled the firſt thing that I
Promiſed
, according to the Method
10997That the Moon may be a World. Ariſtotle uſes in in his Book de Mundo, and
ſhew
'd you the neceſſary parts that belong to
this
World in the Moon.
In the next place
’tis
requiſite that I proceed to thoſe things
which
are Extrinſecal unto it, as the Seaſons, the
Meteors
, and the Inhabitants.
1. Of the Seaſons;
And if there be ſuch a World in the Moon,
’tis
requiſite then that their Seaſons ſhould be
ſome
way Correſpondent unto ours, that they
ſhould
have Winter and Summer, Night and
Day
, as we have.
Now that in this Planet there is ſome Si-
militude
of Winter and Summer, is affirmed
11De gen.
animal
. l. 4.
21
.
by Ariſtotle himſelf, ſince there is one Hemiſ-
phere
that hath always Heat and Light, and
the
other that hath Darkneſs and Cold.
True
indeed
, their Days and Years are always
of
one and the ſame Length (unleſs we make
one
of their Years to be 19 of ours, in which
ſpace
all the Stars do Ariſe after the ſame Or-
22Golden
Number
.
der.)
But ’tis ſo with us alſo under the Poles,
and
therefore that great difference is not Suf-
ficient
to make it altogether unlike ours;
nor
can
we expect that every thing there ſhould be
in
the ſame manner as it is here below, as if
Nature
had no way but one to bring about her
Purpoſe
.
We have no Reaſon then to think
it
neceſſary that both theſe Worlds ſhould be
altogether
alike, but it may ſuffice if they be
Coreſpondent
in ſomething only.
However, it
may
be queſtioned whether it doth not ſeem to
be
againſt the Wiſdom of Providence, to make
the
Night of ſo great a Length, when they have
ſuch
a long time unfit for Work?
I
11098That the Moon may be a World. No; ſince ’tis ſo, and more with us alſo under
the
Poles;
and beſides, the general Length of
their
Night is ſomewhat abated in the Bigneſs
of
their Moon which is our Earth.
For this Re-
turns
as great a Light unto that Planet, as it
Receives
from it.
But for the better Proof of
this
, I ſhall firſt free the Way from ſuch Opi-
nions
as might otherwiſe hinder the ſpeed of a
clearer
Progreſs.
11Plut de.
fac
lunæ.
Plutarch, one of the chief Patrons of this
World
in the Moon, doth directly Contract
this
Propoſition, Affirming, that thoſe who
Live
there, may diſcern our World, as the
Dreggs
and Sediment of all other Creatures,
appearing
to them through Clouds and Foggy
miſts
, and that altogether Devoid of Light,
being
Baſe and unmoveable;
ſo that they
might
well imagine the Dark place of Damna-
tion
to be here Situate, and that they only were
the
Inhabiters of the World, as being in the
midſt
betwixt Heaven and Hell.
To this I may Anſwer, ’tis Probable that
Plutarch
ſpake this Inconſiderately, and with-
out
a Reaſon, which makes him likewife fall
into
another Abſurdity, when he ſays our Earth
would
appear Immovable;
whereas Queſtion-
leſs
, though it did not, yet would it ſeem to
Move
and theirs to ſtand Still, as the Land doth
to
a Man in a Ship;
according to that of the
Poet
.
Provehimur portu, terræque urbeſque recedunt.
And I doubt not but that the Ingenious Au-
thor
would eaſily have Recanted, if he
had
been but acquainted with thoſe
11199That the Moon may be a World. riences which Men of latter times have found
out
, for the Confirmation of this Truth.
2. Unto him aſſents Macrobius; whoſe
Words
are theſe;
Terra accepto ſolis lumine cla-
reſcit
tantummodò, non relucet.
‘The Earth is
11Somn. Scip.
l
. 1. c. 19.
by the Sun Beams made Bright, but not able
to Enlighten any thing ſo far.
And his Rea-
ſon
is, becauſe this being of a thick and Groſs
matter
, the light is terminated in its Superſicies,
and
cannot Penetrate into the Subſtance, where-
as
the Moon doth therefore ſeem ſo Bright to
us
, becauſe it receives the Beams within it ſelf.
But the Weakneſs of this Aſſertion, may be
eaſily
Maniſeſt by a common Experience;
po-
liſhed
Steel (whoſe Opacity will not give any
Admittance
to the Raies) reſlects a ſtronger
Heat
than Glaſs, and ſo Conſequently a greater
Light
.
3. ’Tis the general Conſent of Philoſophers,
that
the Reflection of the Sun-Beams from the
Earth
doth not reach much above half a
Mile
high, where they Terminate the firſt Re-
gion
, ſo that to Affirm they might aſcend to
the
Moon, were to ſay, there were but one
Region
of Air, which Contradicts the proved
and
received Opinion.
Unto this it may be Anſwered:
That it is indeed the common Conſent, that
the
Reſlection of the Sun-Beams reach only to
the
Second Region;
but yet ſome there are,
and
thoſe too, Philoſophers, of good Note,
who
thought otherwiſe.
Thus Plotinus is Cited
by
Cælius, ſi concipiat te in ſublimi quopiam mun-
22Ant. lect. l.
1
.c.4.
di loco, unde oculis ſubjiciatur terræ moles aquis
circumfuſa
, &
ſolis ſyderumq; radiis
112100That the Moon may be a World. non aliam proſecto viſam iri probabile eſt, qua@
qualis
modo viſatur lunaris globi ſpecies, ‘If you
‘conceive
your ſelf to be in ſome ſuch high
‘Place
, where you might Diſcern the whole
‘Globe
of the Earth and Water, when it was
‘Enlightened
by the Sun's Raies, ’tis Probable
‘it
would then Appear to you in the ſame
‘Shape
as the Moon doth now unto us.
So
Paulus
Foſcarinus.
Terra nihil ali@d eſt quam@
11In epiſt. ad
Sebaſt
.
Fant@mun
.
altera Luna, vel Stella, taliſq;
nobis appareret, ſiex
convenienti
elongatione eminus conſpiciretur, in
ipſaq
;
obſervari poſſent eadem aſpectuum varieta-
tes
, quæ in Lunâ apparent.
The Earth is no-
thing
elſe but another Moon or Star, and
would
appear ſo unto us if it were beheld at a
Convenient
Diſtance, with the ſame Changes,
and
Varieties as there are in the Moon.
Thus
22Fræfat. ad
Auſtriaca

ſyd
.
alſo Garolus Malapertius, whoſe words are
theſe
, Terra hæc noſtra, ſi in luna conſtituti
eſſemus
, ſplendida prorſus quaſi non ignobilis pla-
neta
, nobis appareret.
‘If we were placed in
‘the
Moon, and from thence beheld this Earth,
‘it
would appear unto us very Bright, like one
‘of
the Nobler Plannets.
Unto theſe doth
33Meteor.l.1.
c
.2. Art. 2.
Fromondus aſſent, when he ſays, Gredo equidem
quod
ſi oculus quiſpiam in orbe lunari foret, globum
terræ
&
aquæ inſtar ingentis ſyderis à ſole illuſtrem
conſpiceret
.
‘I believe that this Globe of Earth
‘and
Water would appear like ſome'great Star
‘to
any one, who ſhould Look upon it from
‘the
Moon.
Now this could not be, nor could
it
ſhine ſo Remarkably, unleſs the Beams of
Light
were Reflected from it.
And therefore
the
ſame Fromundus expreſly holds, that the firſt
Region
of Air is there Terminated, where
113101That the Moon may be a World. Heat cauſed by Reflection begins to Languiſh,
whereas
the Beams themſelves do paſs a great
way
farther.
The chief Argument which doth
moſt
plainly maniſeſt this Truth, is taken from
a
common Obſervation which may be eaſily
Tryed
.
If you behold the Moon a little before or
after
the Conjunction, when ſhe is in a Sextile
with
the Sun, you may diſcern not only the
part
which is enlightned, but the reſt alſo to
have
in it a kind of a duskiſh Light;
but if
you
chuſe out ſuch a Situation, where ſome
Houſe
or Chimney (being ſome 70 or 80 pa-
ces
diſtant from you) may hide from your Eye
the
enlightned Horns, you may then diſcern a
greater
and more remarkable ſhining in thoſe
parts
unto which the Sun-Beams cannot reach;
may there is ſo great a Light, that by the help
of
a good Perſpective you may diſcern its ſpots.

In
ſo much that Blancanus the Jeſuit ſpeaking
of
it, ſays, Hæc experientia ita me aliquando
11De mundi
fab
. p. 3.
c
. 3.
fefellit, ut in hunc fulgorem caſu ac repente inci-
dens
, exiftimarim novo quodam miraculo tempore
adoleſcentis
lunæ factum eſſe plenilunium.
‘This
‘Experiment
did once ſo deceive me, that hap-
‘pening
upon the ſight of this brightneſs upon
‘a
ſudden, I thought that by ſome new miracle
‘the
Moon had been got into her Full a little
‘after
her Change.
But now this Light is not proper to the
Moon
;
it doth not proceed from the Rays of
the
Sun which doth penetrate her Body, nor
is
it caus'd by any other of the Planets and Stars.
Therefore it muſt neceſſarily follow, that it
comes
from the Earth.
The two firſt of
114102That the Moon may be a World. I have already proved, and as for the laſt it is
confidently
affirm’d by Gælius, Quod ſi in diſ-
11Ant. Lect.
l
. 20. c. 5.
quiſitionem evocet quis, an lunari ſyderi lucem
fœnerent
planetæ item alii, aſſeveranter aſtruen-
dum
non fænerare.
‘If any ſhould ask whether
‘the
other Planets lend any Light to the
‘Moon
?
I anſwer, they do not. True indeed,
the
Noble Tycho diſcuſſing the reaſon of this
22Progym. 1. Light, attributes it to the Planet Venus;
and I
grant
that this may convey ſome Light to the
Moon
;
but that is not the cauſe of this where-
of
we now diſcourſe, is of it ſelf ſufficiently
plain
, becauſe Venus is ſometimes over the
Moon
, when as ſhe cannot convey any Light
to
that part which is turned from her.
It doth not proceed from the fixed Stars;
for then it would retain the ſame Light in E-
clipſes
, whereas the Light at ſuch times is
more
ruddy and dull.
Then alſo the Light of
the
Moon would not be greater or leſſer, ac-
cording
to its diſtance from the edge of the
Earths
ſhadow, ſince it did at all times equally
participate
this Light of the Stars.
In brief, this is neither proper to the Moon,
nor
does it proceed from any Penetration of
the
Sun’s Rays, or the ſhining of Venus, or the
other
Planets, or the fixed Stars.
Now be-
cauſe
there is no other Body in the whole Uni-
verſe
, ſave the Earth, it remains that this Light
muſt
neceſlarily be cauſed by that, which with
a
Juſt Gratitude re-pays the Moon ſuch Illu-
mination
as it receives from her.
And as Loving Friends, equally participate
of
the ſame Joy and Grief, ſo do the ſe mutual-
ly
partake of the ſame Light from the Sun,
115103That the Moon may be a World. the ſame Darkneſs from the Eclipſes, being
alſo
ſeverally helped by one another in their
greateſt
wants:
For when the Moon is in
Conjunction
with the Sun, and her upper part
receives
all the Light, then her lower Hemi-
ſphere
(which would otherwiſe be altogether
dark
) is enlightned by the Reſlexion of the
Sun-Beams
from the Earth.
When theſe two
Planets
are in Oppoſition, then that part of the
Earth
which could not receive any Light from
the
Sun-Beams, is moſt Enlightned by the
Moon
, being then in the Full;
and as ſhe doth
moſt
Illuminate the Earth when the Sun-Beams
cannot
, ſo the grateful Earth returns to her as
great
(nay greater) Light when ſhe moſt wants
it
;
ſo that always that viſible part of the Moon
which
receives nothing from the Sun, is en-
lightned
by the Earth, as is prov’d by Galiæ-
us
, with many more Arguments in that Trea-
tiſe
which he calls Syſtema mundi.
True in-
deed
, when the Moon comes to a quartile,
then
you can neither diſcern this Light, nor
yet
the darker part of her Body, and that for
a
double Reaſon.
1. Becauſe the nearer it comes to the Full,
the
leſs Light does it receive from the Earth,
whoſe
Illumination does always decreaſe in
the
ſame Proportion as the Moon does In-
creaſe
.
2. Becauſe of the Exuperancy of the Light
11Scal. exerc.
62
.
in the other parts.
Quippe illuſtratum medium
ſpeciem
recipit valentiorem, the clearer bright-
neſs
involves the Sight, as it is with thoſe of
Sound
;
and as the greater Noiſe drowns the
leſs
, ſo the brighter Objecthides that which
116104That the Moon may be a World. more obſcure. But as they do always in their
Mutual
Viciſſitudes participate of one anothers
Light
;
ſo alſo do they partake of the ſame
Defects
and Darkenings;
for when our Moon
is
Eclipſed, then is their Sun darkened;
and
when
our Sun is Eclipſed, then is their Moon
deprived
of its Light, as you may ſee affrmed
by
Meſlin.
Quod ſi terram nobis ex alto liceret
intueri
, quemadmodum deficientem lunam ex
11Epic. Aſtro
1
.4. part. 2.
longinque ſpectare poſſumus, videremus tempore
Eclipſis
ſolis terræ aliquam partem lumine ſolis
deficere
, eodem planè modo ſicut ex oppoſitio luna de-
ficit
.
‘If we might behold this Globe of Earth
‘at
the ſame diſtance, as we do the Moon in
‘her
Defect, we might diſcern ſome part of it
‘darkened
in the Suns Eclipſes, juſt ſo as the
‘Moon
is in hers.
For as our Moon is Eclip-
ſed
by the Interpoſition of our earth, ſo is their
Moon
Eclipſed by the Interpoſition of theirs.
The manner of this Mutual Illumination be-
twixt
theſe two you may plainly diſcern in this
Figure
following.
117105That the Moon may be a World. 4[Figure 4]
Where A repreſents the Sun, B the Earth,
and
C the Moon;
Now ſuppoſe the Moon C
to
be in a Sextile of Increaſe, when there
118106That the Moon may be a World. only one ſmall part of her Body enlightned,
then
the Earth B will have ſuch a part of its
viſible
Hemiſphere darkned, as is proportio-
nable
to that part of the Moon which is en-
lightned
;
and as for ſo much of the Moon, as
the
Sun-Beams cannot reach unto, it receives
Light
from a proportional part of the Earth
which
ſhines upon it, as you may plainly per-
ceive
by the Figure.
You ſee then that Agreement and Simili-
tude
which there is betwixt our Earth and the
Moon
.
Now the greateſt difference which
makes
them unlike, is this, that the Moon en-
lightens
our Earth round about, whereas our
Earth
gives Light to that Hemiſphere of the
Moon
which is viſible unto us, as may be cer-
tainly
gather’d from the conſtant appearance
of
the ſame ſpots, which could not thus come
to
paſs, if the Moon had ſuch a Diurnal mo-
tion
about its own Axis, as perhaps our
Earth
hath.
And though ſome ſuppoſe her
to
move in an Epicycle, yet this doth not ſo
turn
her Body round, that we may diſcern
both
Hemiſpheres;
for according to that Hy-
potheſis
(ſay they) the Motion of her Eccen-
centrick
doth turn her Face towards us, as
much
as the other doth from us.
But now, if any Queſtion what they do for
a
Moon who live in the upper part of her Bo-
dy
?
I anſwer, the ſolving of this, is the moſt
uncertain
and difficult thing that I know of,
concerning
this whole matter.
But yet unto me
this
ſeems a probable Conjecture.
That the upper Hemiſphere of the Moon
doth
receive a ſufficient Light from thoſe
119107That the Moon may be a World. nets about it; and amongſt theſe, Venus (it may
be
) beſtows a more eſpecial brightneſs, ſince
Galilæus
hath plainly diſcern’d, ſhe that ſuffers
the
ſame increaſes and decreaſes, as the Moon
hath
, and ’tis probable that this may be per-
ceived
there, without the help of a Glaſs, be-
cauſe
they are far nearer it than we.
When
Venus
(ſaith Keplar) lies down in her Perige,
or
lower part of her ſuppos’d Epicycle, then
is
ſhe in Conjunction with her Husband the
Sun
, from whom after ſhe hath departed for
the
ſpace of ten months, ſhe gets plenum ute-
rum
, and is in the Full.
But you’l reply, though Venus may beſtow
ſome
light when ſhe is over the Moon, and in
Conjunction
, yet being in Oppoſition ſhe is
not
viſible to them, and what ſhall they then
do
for Light?
I anſwer, then they have none, nor doth this
make
ſo great a difference betwixt thoſe two
Hemiſpheres
, as there is with us, betwixt the
places
under the Poles, and the Line.
And
beſides
,’tis conſiderable, that there are two kind
of
Planets.
1. Primary, ſuch whoſe proper Circles do
encompaſs
the Body of the Sun, whereof there
are
Six, Saturn, Fupiter, Mars, Geres, or the
Earth
, Venus, Mercury.
As in the Frontiſpiece.
2. Secondary, ſuch whoſe proper Circles
are
not about the Sun, but ſome of the other
primary
Planets.
Thus are there two about
Saturn
, four about Fupiter, and thus likewiſe
does
the Moon encompaſs our Earth.
Now
’tis
probable that theſe leſſer ſecondary Pla-
nets
, are not ſo accomodated with all
120108That the Moon may be a World. niences of Habitation, as the others that are
more
Principal.
But it may ſeem a very difficult thing to
conceive
, how ſo groſs and Dark a Body as
our
Earth, ſhould yield ſuch a clear Light as
proceeds
from the Moon;
and therefore Car-
11De Dog. ig.
l
. 3. c. 12.
dinal de Cuſa (who thinks every Star to be a ſe-
veral
World) is of Opinion, that the Light
of
the Sun is not able to make them appear ſo
bright
;
but the reaſon of their ſhining is, be-
cauſe
we behold them at a great diſtance
through
their Regions of Fire which do ſet a
ſhining
Luſtre upon thoſe Bodies that of them-
ſelves
are dark.
Unde ſi quis eſſet extra regio-
nem
ignis, terra iſta in circumferentia ſuæ regio-
nis
per medium ignis lucida ſtella appareret.
‘So
‘that
, if a Man were beyond the Region of
‘Fire
, this Earth would appear through that
‘as
a bright Star.
But if this were the only
Reaſon
, then would the Moon be freed from
ſuch
Increaſes and Decreaſes as ſhe is now lya-
ble
unto.
Keplar thinks that our Earth receives that
Light
whereby it ſhines, from the Sun, but
this
(ſaith he) is not ſuch an intended clear
brightneſs
as the Moon is capable of, and there-
fore
he gueſfes, that the Earth there is of a
more
choky ſoil, like the Iſle of Grete, and ſo
is
better able to reſlect a ſtronger Light, where-
as
our Earth muſt ſupply this Intention with
the
quantity of his Body.
But this I concieve
to
be a needleſs Conjecture, ſince our Earth,
if
all things were well conſider’d, will be
found
able enough to reflect as great a Light.
For,
121109That the Moon may be a World.
1. Conſider its Opacity; if you mark theſe
Sublunary
things, you ſhall perceive that a-
mongſt
them, thoſe that are moſt perſpicuous
are
not ſo well able to reverberate the Sun-
beams
, as the thicker Bodies.
The Rays paſs
ſingly
through a Diaphanous matter, but in an
Opacous
Subſtance they are doubled in their
Return
, and multiplyed by Reflection.
Now
if
the Moon and the other Planets can ſhine
ſo
clearly by beating back the Sun Beams, why
may
not the Earth alſo ſhine as well, which
agrees
with them in the cauſe of this Bright-
neſs
their Opacity?
2. Conſider what a clear Light we may diſ-
cern
reflected from the Earth in the midſt of
Summer
, and withal conceive how much
greater
that muſt be which is under the Line,
where
the Rays are more directly and ſtrongly
Reverberated
.
3. ’Tis conſiderable that though the Moon
does
in the Night time ſeem to be of ſo clear
a
Brightneſs, yet when we look upon it in the
Day
, it appears like ſome little whitiſh Cloud:
Not but that at both times, ſhe is of an equal
Light
in her ſelf.
The Reaſon of this diffe-
rence
is, becauſe in the Night we look upon
it
through a dark and obſcure medium, there
being
no other enlightned Body, whoſe bright-
neſs
may abate from this:
whereas in the day
time
, the whole Heavens round about it, are
of
an equal clearneſs, and ſo make it to appear
with
a weaker Light.
Now becauſe we can-
not
ſee how the enlightned parts of our Earth
do
look in the Night, therefore in comparing
it
with the Moon, we muſt not conſider
122110That the Moon may be a World. as ſhe is beheld through the advantage of a
dark
medium, but as ſhe ſeems in the day time:
Now, in any clear Sun-ſhine day, our Earth
does
appear as bright as the Moon, which at
the
ſame time does ſeem like ſome duskiſh
Cloud
(as any little Obſervation may eaſily
manifeſt
.)
Therefore we need not doubt but
that
the Earth is as well able to give Light, as
the
Moon.
To this, it may be added, that
thoſe
very Clouds, which in the day time
ſeem
to be of an equal Light to the Moon, do
in
the Evening become as dark as our Earth;

and
as for thoſe of them, which are looked
upon
at any great diſtance, they are often mi-
ſtaken
for the Mountains.
4. ’Tis conſiderable, that though the Moon
ſeem
to be of ſo great a Brightneſs in the Night,
by
reaſon of its nearneſs unto thoſe ſeveral ſha-
dows
which it caſts, yet is of it ſelf Weaker
than
that part of Twilight, which uſually we
have
for half an Hour after Sun-ſet, becauſe we
cannot
, till after that time, Diſcern any ſhadow
to
be made by it.
5. Conſider the great Diſtance at which
we
behold the Planets, for this muſt needs add
much
to their Shining ;
and therefore Guſanus
(in the above cited Place) thinks, that if a Man
were
in the Sun, that Planet would not appear
ſo
Bright to him, as now it doth to us, becauſe
then
his Eye could diſcern but little, whereas
here
, we may Comprehend the Beams as they
are
contracted in a narrow Body.
Keplar be-
holding
the Earth from a high Mountain, when
it
was Enlightened by the Sun, Confeſſes that
it
appeared unto him of an incredible
123111That the Moon may be a World. neſs, whereas then he could only ſee ſome
ſmall
parts of it;
but how much Brighter
would
it have appeared if he might in a direct
Line
behold the whole Globe of Earth, and
theſe
Rays gathered together?
So that if we
Conſider
that great Light which the Earth re-
ceives
from the Sun in the Summer, and then
Supoſe
we were in the Moon, where we might
ſee
the whole Earth hanging in thoſe vaſt
Spaces
, where there is nothing to Terminate
the
Sight, but thoſe Beams which are there
Contracted
into a little Compaſs;
I ſay, if we
do
well Conſider this, we may eaſily Conceive
that
our Earth appears as Bright to thoſe
other
Inhabitants in the Moon, as their doth
to
us.
But here it may be Objected, that with us,
for
many Days in the Year, the Heavens are ſo
overclouded
, that we cannot ſee the Sun at
all
, and for the moſt part, in our brighteſt
Days
, there are many ſcattered Clouds, which
ſhade
the Earth in ſundry Places;
ſo that in
this
Reſpect, it muſt needs be unlike the
Moon
and will not be able to yeild ſo clear,
unintermited
a Light, as it Receives from that
Planet
;
To this I Anſwer.
1. As for thoſe leſſer brighter Clouds
which
for the moſt part are Scattered up and
down
in the cleareſt Days, theſe can be no
Reaſon
why our Earth ſhould be of a Darker
appearance
, becauſe theſeClouds being near un-
to
the Earth, and ſo not Diſtinguiſhable at ſo
great
a Diſtance from it, and likewiſe being
Illuminated
on their back Parts by the
124112That the Moon may be a World. that ſhines upon them, muſt ſeem as Bright to
thoſe
in the Moon, as if the beams were Im-
mediately
Reflected from our Earth.
2. When theſe Clouds that are Interpoſed,
are
of any large Extention or great Opacity,
as
it is in extraordinary laſting and great Rains,
then
there muſt be ſome diſcernable alterati-
ons
in the Light of our Earth;
But yet this
does
not make it to differ from the Moon;
ſince it is ſo alſo with that Planet, as is ſhew-
ed
in the latter part of the next Chapter.
PROP. XII.
That’tis probable there may be ſuch Meteors belong-
# ing to that World in the Moon, as there are
# with us.
PLutarch Diſcuſſing this Point, Affirms, that
it
is not neceſſary there ſhould bethe ſame
means
of Growth and fructifying in both theſe
Worlds
, ſince Nature might in her Policy find
out
more ways than one, how to bring about
the
ſame Effect.
But however, he thinks it is
Probable
, that the Moon her ſelf ſendeth forth
warm
Winds, and by the ſwiftneſs of her mo-
tion
, there ſhould breath out a ſweet and com-
fortable
Air, pleaſant Dews, and gentle moi-
ſture
, which might ſerve for refreſhment and
nouriſhment
of the Inhabitants and Plants in
that
other World.
But ſince they have all things alike with
us
, as Sea and Land, and vaporous Air en-
compaſſing
both, I ſhould rather therefore
think
, that Nature there ſhould uſe the
125113That the Moon may be a World. way of producing Meteors, as ſhe doth with
us
(and not by a Motion, as Plutarch ſuppoſes)
becauſe
ſhe doth not love to vary from her
uſual
Operations without ſome extraordinary
impediment
, but ſtill keeps her beaten path,
unleſs
ſhe be driven thence.
One Argument whereby I ſhall manifeſt
this
Truth, may be taken from thoſe new
Stars
which have appeared in divers Ages of
the
World, and by their Paralax, have been
diſcern’d
to have been above the Moon, ſuch
as
was that in Gaſſiopeia, that in Sagitarius,
with
many others betwixt the Planets.
Hipar-
chus
in his time took ſpecial notice of ſuch as
11Plin. nat.
hiſt
. l. 2. c.
26
.
theſe, and therefore fancied out ſuch Conſtel-
lations
, in which to place the Stars, ſhewing
how
many there were in every Aſteriſm, that
ſo
afterwards, Poſterity might know, whe-
ther
there were any new Star produc’d, or
any
old one miſſing.
Now the nature of theſe
Comets
may probably manifeſt, that in this
other
World there are other Meteors alſo;
for theſe in all likelyhood are nothing elſe, but
ſuch
Evaporations cauſed by the Sun, from the
Bodies
of the Planets.
I ſhall prove this, by
ſhewing
the Improbabilities and Inconvenien-
ces
of any other Opinion.
For the better purſuit of this, ’tis in the
firſt
place requiſite, that I deal with our chief
Adverſary
, Gæſar la Galla, who doth moſt
directly
oppoſe that Truth which is here to be
prov’d
.
He endeavouring to confirm the In-
corruptibility
of the Heavens, and being there
to
ſatisfie the Argument which is taken from
theſe
Comets, he anſwers it thus:
Aut
126114That the Moon may be a World. mentum deſumptum ex paralaxi, non eſt efficax,
aut
ſi eſt efficax, eorum inſtrumentorum uſum de-
cipere
, vel ratione aſtri, vel medii, vel diſtantiæ,
aut
ergo erat in ſuprema parte aeris, aut ſi in cælo,
tum
forſan factum erat ex reflectione radiorum Sa-
turni
&
Foves, qui tunc in conjunctione fuerant.
Either the Argument from the Paralax is
not efficacious, or if it be, yet the uſe of the
Inſtruments might deceive, either in regard
of the Star, or the Medium, or the diſtance,
and ſo this Comet might be in the upper Re-
gions of the Air;
or if it were in the Hea-
vens, there it might be produc’d by the Re-
flection of the Rays from Saturn and Fupiter,
who were then in Conjunction.
You ſee
what
ſhifts he is driven to, how he runs up
and
down to many ſtartling Holes, that he may
find
ſome ſhelter, and inſtead of the ſtrength
of
reaſon, he anſwers with a multitude of
Words
, thinking (as the Proverb is) that he
may
uſe Hail, when he hath no Thunder.
Ni-
hil
turpius (ſaith Seneca) dubio &
incerto, pedem
11Epiſt. 95. modo referente, modo producente.
‘What can
there be more unſeemly in one that ſhould
be a fair diſputant, than to be now here, now
there, and ſo uncertain, that one cannot tell
where to find him?
He thinks there are not Cc-
mets
in the Heavens, becauſe there may be
many
other reaſons of ſuch appearances;
but
what
he knows not;
perhaps, he ſays, that Ar-
gument
from the Paralax is not ſufficient, or if
it
be, then there may be ſome deceit in the
22Vide Gali-
læum
. Syſt.
muudi
col-
loq
. 3.
Obſervation.
To this I may ſafely ſay, that he
may
juſtly be accounted a weak Methematician
who
miſtruſts the ſtrength of this Argument;
127115That the Moon may be a World. nor can he know much in Aſtronomy, who
underſtands
not the Paralax, which is a Foun-
dation
of that Science;
and I am ſure that he is
a
timerous Man, who dares not believe the
frequent
experience of his Senſes, or truſt to a
Demonſtration
.
True indeed, I grant ’tis poſſible, that the
Eye
, the Medium, and the diſtance may all
deceive
the Beholder;
but I would have him
ſhew
which of all theſe was likely to cauſe an
Errour
in this Obſervation?
Meerly to ſay they
might
be deceiv’d, is no ſufficient Anſwer;
for by this I may confute the poſitions of all
Aſtronomers
, and affirm the Stars are hard by
us
, becauſe ’tis poſſible they may be deceiv’d
in
their Obſerving diſtance.
But I forbear any
further
reply;
my opinion is of that Treatiſe,
that
either it was ſet forth purpoſely to tempt
a
Confutation, that he might ſee the Opinion
of
Galilæus confirm’d by others, or elſe it was
invented
with as much haſt and negligence as
it
was Printed, there being in it, almoſt as ma-
ny
Faults as Lines.
Others think, that theſe are not any new
Comets
, but ſome ancient Stars that were there
before
, which now ſhine with that unuſual
Brightneſs
, by reaſon of the interpoſition of
ſuch
Vapours, which do multiply their Light;
and ſo the Alteration will be here only, and
not
in the Heavens.
Thus Ariſtotle thought
the
appearance of the milky way was produ-
ced
:
For he held, that there were many lit-
tle
Stars, which by their Influence did conſtant-
ly
attract ſuch a Vapour towards that place of
Heaven
, ſo that it always appeared white.
128116That the Moon may be a World. by the ſame reaſon, may a brighter Vapour
be
the cauſe of theſe appearances.
But how probable ſoever this Opinion may
ſeem
, yet if well conſider’d, you ſhall find it
altogether
abſurd and impoſſible:
for,
1. Theſe Stars were never ſeen there before,
and
’tis not likely, that a Vapour being hard
by
us, can ſo multiply that Light, which could
not
before be at all diſcern’d.
2. This ſuppos’d Vapour cannot be either
contracted
into a narrow compaſs, or dilated
into
a broad.
1. It could not be within a little
ſpace
, for then that Star would not appear
with
the ſame multiplyed Light to thoſe in
other
Climates.
2. It cannot be a dilated Va-
pour
, for then other Stars which were diſcer-
ned
through the ſame Vapour, would ſeem as
big
as that;
this Argument is the ſame in ef-
fect
, with that of the Paralax, as you may ſee
in
this Figure.
5[Figure 5]
Suppoſe AB to be a Hemiſphere of one
Earth
, CD to be the upper part of the high-
eſt
Region, in which there might be either a
contracted
Vapour, as G, or elſe a dilated one;
129117That the Moon may be a World. as HI. Suppoſe EF likewiſe to repreſent half
the
Heavens, wherein was this appearing Co-
met
at K.
Now I ſay, that a contracted Va-
pour
, as G, could not cauſe this appearance,
becauſe
an Inhabitant at M could not diſcern
the
ſame Star with the brightneſs, but perhaps
another
at L, betwixt which the Vapour is di-
rectly
interpoſed.
Nor could it be cauſed by a
dilated
Vapour, as HI, becauſe then all the
Stars
that were diſcern’d through it, would be
perceiv’d
with the ſame brightneſs.
’Tis neceſſary therefore that the cauſe of this
appearance
ſhould be in the Heavens.
And this
is
granted by the moſt and beſt Aſtronomers.
But, ſay ſome, this doth not argue any natural
Alteration
in thoſe purer Bodies, ſince ’tis pro-
bable
that the Concourſe of many little Va-
gabond
Stars, by the Union of their Beams
may
cauſe ſo great a Light.
Of this Opinion
were
Anaxagor as and Zeno amongſt the Anci-
ents
, and Baptiſta Giſatus, Blancanus, with
others
amongſt our modern Aſtronomers.
For,
ſay
they, when there happens to be a Con-
courſe
of ſome few Stars, then do many others
fly
unto them from all the parts of Heaven like
ſo
many Bees unto their King.
But 1. ’Tis not
likely
that amongſt thoſe which we count the
fixed
Stars, there ſhould be any ſuch uncertain
Motions
, that they can wander from all parts
of
the Heavens, as if Nature had neglected
them
, or forgot to appoint them a determi-
nate
Courſe.
2. If there be ſuch a Conſlux
of
theſe, as of Bees to their King, then what
reaſon
is there, that they do not ſtill tarry with
it
, that ſo the Comet may not be diſſolv’d ?
130118That the Moon may be a World. But enough of this. You may commonly ſee
11Clavius in
ſphæram
.
cap
. 1.
it confuted by many other Arguments.
Others
there
are, who affirm theſe to be ſome new
created
Stars, produc’d by an extraordinary
ſupernatural
Power.
I anſwer, true indeed,
’tis
poſſible they might be ſo, but however,
’tis
not likely they were ſo, ſince ſuch appea-
rances
may be ſalved ſome other way;
where-
fore
to fly unto a miracle for ſuch things, were
a
great Injury to Nature, and to derogate
from
her skill;
an Indignity miſ-becoming
a
Man who profeſſes himſelf to be a Philoſo-
pher
.
Miraculum (ſays one) eſt ignorantiæ Aſy-
lum
, a Miracle often ſerves for the Recepta-
cle
of a lazy Ignorance;
which any induſtrious
Spirit
would be aſham’d of, it being but an
idle
way to ſhift off the Labour of any further
ſearch
.
But here’s the miſery of it, we firſt
tye
our ſelves unto Ariſtotle’s Principles, and
then
conclude that nothing can contradict ’em,
but
a Miracle;
whereas ’twould be much bet-
ter
for the Commonwealth of Learning, if
we
would ground our Principles rather upon
the
frequent experiences of our own, than the
bare
Authority of others.
Some there are who think, that theſe Co-
mets
are nothing elſe, but Exhalations from
our
Earth, carryed up into the higher parts of
the
Heaven.
So Peno, Rothmannus & Galilæus.
But this is not poſſible, ſince by Computation
22Tycho Pro-
gym
. l. 1.
c
. 9.
’tis found, that one of them is above 300 times
bigger
than the wholeGlobe of Land &
water.
Others therefore have thought that they did
proceed
from the Body of the Sun, and that
Planet
only is Gometarum officina, unde
131119That the Moon may be a World. emiſſarii & exploratores emmitterentur brevi ad
ſolem
redituri:
The Shop or Forge of Comets
from
whence they were ſent, like ſo many Spies,
that
they might in ſome ſhort ſpace return
again
.
But this cannot be, ſince if ſo much
matter
had proceeded from him alone, it would
have
made a ſenſible Diminution in his Body.
The Noble Tycho therefore thinks, that they
conſiſt
of ſome ſuch Fluider parts of the Hea-
ven
, as the Milky way is framed of, which be-
@ing
condenſt together, yet not attaining to the
conſiſtency
of a Star, is in ſome ſpace of time
arify’d
again into its wontedNature.
But this is
not
likely;
becauſe the appearance of the
Milky
way does not ariſe from ſome Fluider
parts
of the Heaven (as he ſuppoſes) but from
11Fromond.
Meteor
.
the Light of many leſſer Stars which are there-
22l. 2. c. 5.
art
. 2.
abouts And therefore it is uſually thus deſcri-
@ed
.
Via lactea nihil aliudeſt quam innumerabiles
33Item Veſtæ
tract
. 5. c.2.
@ellarum fixarum greges qui confuſo &
pallenti
@umine
tractum illum inalbant.
The Milky way is
nothing
elſe but the Pale and Confuſed Light
of
many leſſer Stars, whereby ſome parts of the
Heaven
are made to appear white.
And beſide, what likely cauſe can we con-
@eive
of this Condenſation, unleſs there be ſuch
@ualities
there, as there are in our Air, and then,
why
may not the Planets have the like quali-
@ies
as our Earth ?
and if ſo, then ’tis more pro-
able
, that they are made by the Ordinary
way
of Nature, as they are with us, and conſiſt
of
ſuch Exhalations from the Bodies of the
@lanets
, as being very much rarified, may be
@rawn
up, through the Orb of groſs Vaporous
Air
, that incompaſſes them.
Nor is this a
132120That the Moon may be a World. lar Opinion; but it ſeemed moſt likely to
Gamillus
Glorioſus.
Th. Gampanella, Fromondus,
11De Comet.
l
. 5. c. 4.
Apol
. pro
Galil
.
Meteor
. l.
3
.c.2.Art. 6.
with ſome others.
But if you ask, whither
ſhall
all theſe Exhalations return?
I Anſwer,
every
one into his own Planet.
If it be again
Objected
, that then there will be ſo many
Centers
of Gravity, and each ſeveral Planet
will
be a diſtinct World;
I reply, we have not
like
probability concerning the reſt;
but yet,
perhaps
all of them are ſo, except the Sun, tho
Guſanus
, &
ſome others, think, there is one alſo;
22Lectant.
Fuſt
. l.3. c.
23
.
and later times have diſcovered ſome leſſer
Clouds
moving round about him.
But as for
Saturn
he hath two Moons on each ſide.
Fupiter
hath
four, that Incircle him with their Motion,
which
are likewiſe Eclipſed by the Interpoſiti-
on
of his Body, as the Moon is of our Earth.
Venus is obſerv’d to increaſe and decreaſe as
the
Moon.
And this perhaps hath been noted
by
former Ages, as may be gueſt by that Re-
lation
of St.
Auſtin out of Varro. Mars
33De Civit.
Dei
. l. 21.
cap
. 8.
and all the reſt, derive their Light from the
the
Sun.
Concerning Mercury, there hath
been
little or no Obſervation, becauſe, for the
moſt
part, he lies hid under the Sun-Beams,
and
ſeldom appears by himſelf.
But when he
does
, yet the compaſs of his Body is ſo little,
and
his Light of ſo clear a brightneſs, by rea-
ſon
of his nearneſs to the Sun, that the Per-
ſpective
cannot make the ſame Diſcoveries
upon
him, as from the reſt.
So that if you conſider their Quantity, their
Opacity
, or theſe other Diſcoveries, you ſhall
find
it probable enough, that each of them
may
be a ſeveral World.
Eſpecially,
133121That the Moon may be a World. every one of them is allotted to a ſeveral Orb,
and
not altogether in one, as the fixed Stars
ſeem
to be.
But this would be too much for
to
vent at the firſt:
the chief thing at which
I
now aim in this Diſcourſe, is to prove that
there
may be one in the Moon.
It hath been before confirm’d, that there
was
a Sphere of thick vaporous Air encom-
paſſing
the Moon, as the firſt and ſecond
Regions
do this Earth.
I have now ſhewed,
that
thence ſuch Exhalations may pro-
ceed
as do produce the Comets:
Now from
hence
it may probably follow, that there may
be
Wind alſo and Rain, with ſuch other Me-
teors
, as are common amongſt us.
This Con-
ſequence
is ſo dependent, that Fromondus dares
not
deny it, though he would (as he confeſſes
11De meteor.
l
. 3. c. 23
Art
. 6.
himſelf) for if the Sun be able to exhale from
them
ſuch Fumes as may cauſe Comets, why
not
ſuch as may cauſe Winds, why not then
ſuch
alſo as may cauſe Rain, ſince I have above
ſhewed
, that there is Sea and Land, as with
us
?
Now Rain ſeems to be more eſpecially
requiſite
for them, ſince it may allay the Heat
and
Scorchings of the Sun, when he is over
their
Heads.
And Nature hath thus provided
for
thoſe in Peru, with the Other Inhabitants
under
the Line.
But if there be ſuch great and frequent Al-
terations
in the Heavens, why cannot we dif-
cern
them ?
I Anſwer:
1. There may be ſuch, and we not able to
perceive
them, becauſe of the weakneſs of
our
Eye, and the diſtance of thoſe places
134122That the Moon may be a World. us; they are the Words of Fienus (as they
are
quoted by Fromondus in the above cited
place
) poſſunt maxime permutationes in cælo fieri
etiamſi
a nobis non conſpiciantur;
hoc viſus noſtri
debilitas
&
immenſa cœli diſtantia faciunt. And
unto
him aſſents Fromondus himſelf, when a
a
little after he ſays, Si in ſphæris planetarum
degeremus
, plurima forſan cœleſtium nebularum
vellera
toto æthere paſſim diſperſa videremus,
quorum
ſpecies jam eveneſcit nimiâ ſpatii interca
pedine
.
‘If we did live in the Spheres of the
Planets, we might there perhaps diſcern ma-
ny great Clouds diſperſed through the whole
Heavens, which are not viſible by reaſon of
this great diſtance.
2. Mæſlin and Keplar affirm, that they have
ſeen
ſome of theſe Alterations.
The Words
of
Mæſlin are theſe (as I find them cited) In
eclipſi
lunari veſpere Dominicæ Palmarum Anni
11Differt. 2.
cum
nunc.
Galil
.
item
Somn.
Aſtron
.notd
ultima
.
1605.
in corpore lunæ verſus Boream, nigricans
quædam
macula conſpecta fuit, obſcurior cætero
toto
corpore, quod candentis ferri figuram repre-
ſentabat
;
dixiſſes nubila in multam regionem ex-
tenſa
pluviis &
tempeſiuoſis imbribus gravida,
cujuſmodi
ab excelſorum montium jugis in humi-
liora
convallium loca videre non raro contingit.
In that Lunary Eclipſe which happened in the
Even of Palm-Sunday, in the year 1605.
there
was a certain blackiſh ſpot diſcern’d in the
Northerly part of the Moon, being darker
than any other place of her Body, and repre-
ſenting the colour of red hot Iron;
You
might conjecture that it was ſome dilated
Cloud, being pregnant with Showres;
for
thus do ſuch lower Clouds appear from the
tops of high Moun tains.
135123That the Moon may be a World.
And a little before this Paſſage, the ſame
Author
ſpeaking of that vaporous Air about
the
Moon, tells us, Quod circumfluus ille ſplendor
diverſis
temporibus apparet limpidior plus minuſve
That
it does at divers times appear of a diffe-
rent
Clearneſs, ſometimes more, and ſome-
times
leſs;
which he gueſſes to ariſe from the
Clouds
and Vapours that are in it.
Unto this I may add another Teſtimony of
Bapt
.
Giſatus, as he is quoted by Nicrembergi-
us
, grounded upon an Obſervation taken 23
Years
after this of Mæſlin, and Writ to this
Euſeb
.
Nieremberg. in a Letter by that diligent
and
judicious Aſtronomer.
The Words of it
run
thus;
Et quidem in eclipſi nuper a ſolari quæ
11Hiſt. Nat.
l
. 2. c. II.
fuit ipſo de natali Ghriſti, obſervavi clari in luna
ſoli
ſuppoſita, quidpiam quod valde probat id ipſum
quod
Gometæ quoque &
maculæ ſolares urgent, nem-
pe
cælum non eſſe á tenuitate &
variationibus ae-
ris
exemptum;
nam circalunam adverti eſſe ſphæ-
ram
ſeu orbem quendam vaporoſum, non ſecus at-
que
circum terram, adeoque ſicut ex terra in ali-
quam
uſque ſphæram vapores &
exhalationes expi-
rant
, ita quoque ex luna.
‘In that late Solary
Eclipſe which happened on Chriſtmas Day,
when the Moon was juſt under the Sun, I
plainly diſcern’d that in her, which may clear-
ly confirm what the Comets and Suns Spots
do ſeem to prove, viz.
that the Heavens are
not ſolid, nor freed from thoſe Changes which
our Air is liable unto;
for, about the Moon
I perceiv’d ſuch an Orb, a vaporous Air, as
that is which doth encompaſs our Earth;
and
as Vapours and Exhalations are raiſed from
our Earth into this Air, ſo are they alſo from
the Moon.
136124That the Moon may be a World.
You ſee what probable Grounds and plain
Teſtimonies
I have brought for the Confirma-
tion
of this Propoſition:
many other things
in
this behalf might be ſpoken, which for bre-
vity
ſake I now omit, and paſs unto the next.
PROP. XIII.
That ’tis probable there may be Inhabitants in this
# other World, but of what kind they are, is un-
# certain.
I Have already handled the Seaſons, and Me-
teors
belonging to this new World;
’tis
requiſite
that in the next place I ſhould come
unto
the third thing which I promis’d, and ſay
ſomewhat
of the Inhabitants;
concerning
whom
there might be many difficult Queſtions
raiſed
;
as whether that place be more inconve-
nient
for Habitation than our World (as Kep-
lar
thinks;)
whether they are the ſeed of Adam,
whether
they are there in a bleſſed eſtate, or
elſe
what means there may be for their Salva-
tion
?
with many other ſuch uncertain Enqui-
ries
, which I ſhall willingly omit, leaving it
to
their Examination who have more leiſure
and
Learning for the ſearch of ſuch particulars.
Being for mine own part content only to ſet
down
ſuch Notes belonging unto theſe, which
I
have obſerv’d in other Writers.
Gum tota
illa
regio nobis ignota ſit, remanent inbabitatores
11De doct. ig-
nor
antia.
l
.2.c. 12.
illi ignoti penitus, ſaith Guſanus;
Since we know
not
the Regions of that place, we muſt be al-
together
ignorant of the Inhabitants.
There
hath
not yet been any ſuch diſcovery
137126That the Moon may be a World. ning theſe, upon which we may build a cer-
tainty
, or good probability:
well may we
gueſs
at them, and that too very doubtfully,
but
we can know nothing;
for, if we do hardly
gueſs
aright at things which be upon Earth, if
11Wiſd. with labour we do find the things that are at hand,
How
then can we ſearch out thoſe things that are
in
Heaven?
What a little is that which we
know
, in reſpect of thoſe many matters con-
tain’d
within this great Univerſe?
This whole
Globe
of Earth and Water, though it ſeem
to
us to be of a large Extent, yet it bears not
ſo
great a proportion unto the whole Frame
of
Nature, as a ſmall Sand doth unto it;
and
what
can ſuch little Creatures as we diſcern,
who
are tyed to this point of Earth?
or what
can
they in the Moon know of us?
If we under-
ſtand
any thing (ſaith Eſdras) ’tis nothing but
that
which is upon the Earth;
and he that dwel-
222 Eſd. 4.
21
.
leth above in the Heavens may only underſtand
the
things that are above in the height of the
Heavens
.
So that ’twere a needleſs thing for us to
ſearch
after any particulars;
however, we may
gueſs
in the general that there are ſome Inhabi-
tants
in that Planet:
for why elſe did Provi-
dence
furniſh that place with all ſuch Conve-
niences
of Habitation as have been above de-
clar’d
?
But you will ſay, perhaps; is there not too
great
and intollerable a Heat, ſince the Sun is
their
Zenith every Month, and doth tarry there
ſo
long before he leaves it.
I Anſwer,
I. This may, perhaps, be remedyed (as
138127That the Moon may be a World. is under the Line) by the frequency of Mid-
day
Showres, which may cloud their Sun, and
cool
their Earth.
2. The equality of their Nights doth much
temper
the ſcorching of the Day;
and the ex-
tream
Cold that comes from the one, requires
ſome
ſpace before it can be diſpelled by the
other
;
ſo that the Heat ſpending a great while
before
it can get the Victory, hath not after-
wards
much time to rage in.
Wherefore not-
withſtanding
this doubt, yet that place may re-
main
habitable.
And this was the Opinion of
the
Cardinal de Guſa, when ſpeaking of this
Planet
, he ſays, Hic locus Mundi eſt habitatio
hominum
&
animolium atque vegetabilium.
11De doct.
ign
. l. 2.
c
. 12.
This part of the World is inhabited by Men,
and Beaſts, and Plants.
To him aſſented
Gampanella
;
but he cannot determine whether
they
were Men, or rather ſome other kind of
creatures
.
If they were men, then he thinks they
could
not be infected with Adam's Sin;
yet
perhaps
, they had ſome of their own, which
might
make them liable to the ſame Miſery
with
us, out of which, it may be, they were
deliver’d
by the ſame means as we, the Death
of
Chriſt;
and thus he thinks that place of
the
Epheſians may be Interpreted, where the
Apoſtle
ſays, God gathered all things together in
Ghriſt
, both which are in Earth, and which are
22Epheſ. 1.
10
.
in the Heavens:
So alſo that of the ſame Apo-
ſtle
to the Coloſſians, where he ſays, that it
pleaſed
the Father to reconcile all things unto him-
33Col. I. 20. ſelf by Ghriſt, whether they be things on Earth,
or
things in Heaven.
But I Dare not jeſt with Divine Truths,
139126That the Moon may be a World. apply theſe places according as fancy Directs:
As I think this Opinion doth not any where
Contradict
Scripture:
ſo I think likewiſe, that
it
cannot be Proved from it.
Wherefore Gam-
panella’s
Second Conjecture may be more Pro-
bable
, that the Inhabitants of that World, are
not
Men as we are, but ſome other kind of
Creatures
which Bear ſome Proportion, and
Likeneſs
to our Natures.
Or it may be, they
are
of a quite Different Nature from any thing
here
Below, ſuch as no Imagination can De-
ſcribe
;
our Underſtandings being Capable on-
ly
of ſuch things as have Entered by our Senſes,
or
elſe ſuch Mixed Natures as may be Com-
poſed
from them.
Now, there may be ma-
ny
other Species of Creatures beſide thoſe that
are
already known in the World;
there is a
great
Chaſme betwixt the Nature of Men and
Angels
;
It may be the Inhabitants of the Pla-
nets
are of a Middle Nature between both
theſe
.
’Tis not Improbable that God might
Create
ſome of all Kinds, that ſo he might
more
Compleatly Gloriſie himſelf in the
Works
of his Power and Wiſdom.
Guſanus too, thinks they differ from us in ma-
ny
reſpects;
I will ſet down his words as they
may
be found in the above Cited place, Suſpi-
camur
in regione ſolis magis eſſe ſolares, claros &

illuminatos
intellectuales habitatores, ſpiritualiores
etiam
quàm in lunâ ubi magis lunatici, &
in terra
magis
materiales, &
craſſi, ut illi intellectualis na-
turæ
ſolares ſint multum in actu &
parum in poten-
tia
, terreni verò magis in potentia, &
parum in
actu
, lunares in medio fluctuantes.
Hoc quidem
opinamur
ex influentia ignili ſolis, aquatica
140128That the Moon may be a World.& aerea lunæ, & gravidine usateriali terræ, &
conſimiliter
de aliis ſtellarum regionibus, ſuſpican-
tes
nullam habitationibus carere, quaſi tot ſint par-
tes
particulares mundiales unius aniverſi, quot ſunt
ſtellæ
quærum non eſt numerus, niſi apud eum qui
omnia
in numero creavit.
‘We may conjecture (ſaith he) the Inhabi-
tants of the Sun are like to the nature of that
Planet, more clear and bright, more intel-
lectual than thoſe in the Moon where they
are nearer to the Nature of that duller Pla-
net, and thoſe of the Earth being more groſs
and
material than either, ſo that theſe Intelle-
ctual Natures in the Sun, are more form than
matter, thoſe in the Earth more matter than
form, and thoſe in the Moon betwixt both.
This we may gueſs from the fiery influence
of the Sun, the watery and aerous influence
of the Moon, as alſo the material Heavineſs
of the Earth.
In ſome ſuch manner likewiſe
is it with the Regions of the-other Stars;
for
we conjecture that none of them are without
Inhabitants, but that there are ſo many par-
ticular Worlds and parts of this one Univerſe,
as there are Stars, which are innumerable, un-
leſs it be to him who Created all things in
Number.
For he held that the Stars were not all in
one
equal Orb as we commonly ſuppoſe;
but
that
ſome were ſar higher than others, which
made
them appear leſs;
and that many others
were
ſo far above any of theſe, that they were
altogether
inviſible unto us.
An Opinion which
(as I conceive) hath not any great probability
for
it, nor certainty againſt it.
141129That the Moon may be a World.
The Prieſt of Saturn relating to Plutarch
(as he feigns it) the nature of theſe Selenites,
told
him, they were of divers diſpoſitions,
ſome
deſiring to live in the lower parts of the
Moon
, where they might look downwards
upon
us, while others were more ſurely moun-
ted
aloft, all of them ſhining like the Rays of
the
Sun, and as being Victorious, are Crow-
ned
with Garlands made with the Wings of
Euſtathia
or Gonſtancie.
It hath been the Opinion amongſt ſome of
the
Ancients, that their Heavens and Elyſian
Fields
were in the Moon where the Air is moſt
quiet
and pure.
Thus Socrates, thus Plato, with
11Nat. Com.
l
. 3. c. 19
his Followers, did eſteem this to be the place
where
thoſe purer Souls inhabit, who are
freed
from the Sepulcher, and Contagion of
the
Body:
And by the Fable of Geres, con-
tinually
wandring in ſearch of her Daughter
Proſerpina
, is meant nothing elſe but the long-
ing
deſire of Men, who live upon Geres Earth,
to
attain a place in Proſerpina, the Moon Hea-
ven
.
Plutarch alſo ſeems to aſſent unto this; but
he
thinks moreover, that there are two places
of
happineſs anſwerable to thoſe two parts
which
he fancies to remain of a Man when he
is
Dead, the Soul and the Underſtanding;
the
Soul
he thinks is made of the Moon;
and as
our
Bodies do ſo proceed from the Duſt of this
Earth
, that they ſhall return to it hereafter;
ſo our Souls were generated out of that Pla-
net
, and ſhall be reſolved into it again;
where-
as
the underſtanding ſhall aſcend unto the Sun,
out
of which it was made, where it ſhall
142131That the Moon may be a World. ſeſs an Eternity of well-being, and far greater
happineſs
than that which is enjoyed in the
Moon
.
So that when a Man dies, if his Soul
be
much polluted, then muſt it wander up and
down
in the middle region of the air, whereHell
is
, &
there ſuffer unſpeakable torments for thoſe
Sins
whereof he is guilty.
Whereas the Souls of
better
Men, when they have in ſome ſpace of
time
been purged from that Impurity which
they
did derive from the Body, then do they
return
into the Moon, where they are poſſeſt
with
ſuch a Joy, as thoſe Men feel who pro-
feſs
holy Myſteries, from which place, ſaith
he
, ſome are ſent down to have the Superin-
tendence
of Oracles, being diligent either in
the
preſervation of the good, either from, or
in
, all perils, and the prevention of puniſhment
of
all wicked Actions;
but if in theſe Em-
ployments
they miſ-behave themſelves, then
are
they again to be impriſoned in a Body, o-
therwiſe
they remain in the Moon, till their
Souls
be reſolv’d into it, and the underſtan-
ding
being clear’d from all impediments, aſ-
cends
to the Sun which is its proper place.
But
this
requires a diverſe ſpace of time, according
to
the divers afſections of the Soul.
As for
thoſe
who have been retir’d and honeſt, addi-
cting
themſelves to a ſtudious and quiet Life,
theſe
are quickly preferred to a higher Happi-
neſs
.
But as for ſuch who have buſied them-
ſelves
in many Broils, or have been vehement
in
the proſecution of any Luſt, as the Ambiti-
ous
, the Amorous, the wrathful Man, theſe ſtill
retain
the glimpſes and Dreams of ſuch things
as
they have perform’d in their Bodies,
143130That the Moon may be a World. makes them either altogether unfit to remain
there
, where they are, or elſe keeps them long
ere
they can put off their Souls.
Thus you ſee
Plutarch’s
Opinion concerning the Inhabitants
and
Neighbours of the Moon, which (accor-
ding
to the manner of the Academicks) he de-
livers
in a third Perſon;
you ſee he makes
that
Planet an inferiour kind of Heaven,
and
though he differ in many Circumſtan-
ces
, yet doth he ceſcribe it to be ſome ſuch
place
as we ſuppoſe Paradiſe to be.
You ſee
likewiſe
his Opinion concerning the place
of
the damned Spirits, that it is in the middle
Region
of the Air;
and in neither of theſe is
he
ſingular, but ſome more late and Orthodox
Writers
have agreed with him.
As for the
place
of Hell, many think it may be in the Air,
as
well as any where elſe.
True indeed, St. Auſtin affirms that this
11De Civit.
Dei
. l. 22.
c
. 16.
place cannot be diſcover’d;
but others there
are
who can ſhew the Situation of it out of
Scripture
;
ſome holding it to be in another
World
without this, becauſe our Saviour calls
it
{Χomi2;
}τ{ος} {ὀξ}ωτι{ρο}υ outward darkneſs. But the
22Mat. 25.
30
.
moſt will have it placed towards the Centre
of
our Earth, becauſe ’tis ſaid, Chriſt deſcen-
ded
into the lower parts of the Earth;
and
33Eph. 4. 9. ſome of theſe are ſo confident, that this is its
Situation
, that they can deſcribe you its big-
neſs
alſo, and of what Capacity it is.
Francis
Ribera
in his Comment on the Revelations,
ſpeaking
of thoſe Words, where ’tis ſaid, that
44Rev.14.20. the blood went out of the Wine-preſs, even unto the
Horſes
Bridles by the ſpace of one Thouſand Six
Hundred
Furlongs, interprets them to be
144132That the Moon may be a World. of Hell, and that number expreſſes the Dia-
meter
of its Concavity, which is 200 Italian
11De Morib.
div
. l. 13. c.
24
.
Miles;
But Leſſius thinks that this Opinion
gives
them too much Room in Hell, and there-
fore
he gueſſes that ’tis not ſo wide;
for (faith
he
) the Diameter of one League being cubi-
cally
multiplyed, will make a Sphere capable
of
800000 Millions of damaed Bodies, allow-
ing
to each ſix Foot in the Square;
whereas,
ſays
he, ’tis certain, that there ſhall not be
one
hundred thouſand Milions in all that ſhall
be
damned.
You ſee the bold Jeſuit was care-
ful
that every one ſhould have but room enough
in
Hell, and by the ſtrangeneſs of the Con-
jecture
, you may gueſs that he had rather be
abſurd
, than ſeem either uncharitable or igno-
rant
.
I remember there is a Relation in Pliny,
how
that Dionyſidorous a Mathematician, be-
ing
Dead, did ſend a Letter from this place to
ſome
of his Friends upon Earth, to certifie
them
what diſtance there was betwixt the
Centre
and Superficies:
he might have done
well
to have prevented this Controverſie, and
inform’d
them the utmoſt capacity of the place.
However, certain it is, that that number can-
not
be known;
and probable it is, that the place
is
not yet determin’d, but that Hell is there
where
there is any tormented Soul, which may
be
in the Regions of the Air, as well as in the
Centre
:
and therefore perhaps it is, that the
Devil
is ſtyled the Prince of the Air.
But this
only
occaſionally, and by reaſon of Plutarch’s
Opinion
concerning thoſe that are round about
the
Moon;
as for the Moon it ſelf, he eſteems
22Cur ſilent
eracula
.
it to be a lower kind of Heaven, and
145133That the Moon may be a World. fore in another place he calls it a Terreſtrial
Star
, and an Olympian and Celeſtial Earth;
anſwerable, as I conceive, to the Paradiſe of
the
School-Men.
And, that Paradiſe was ei-
ther
in, or near the Moon, is the Opinion of
ſome
later Writers, who deriv’d it in all like-
lyhood
, from the Aſſertion of Plato, and per-
haps
this of Plutarch.
Toſtatus lays this Opini-
on
upon Iſiodor, Hiſpalenſis, and the Venerable
11SirW. Raw.
l
.1.c. 3 ſect.
7
.
In
geneſ.
Bede;
and Pererius Fathers it upon Strabus and
Rabanus
his Maſter.
Some would have it to
be
ſituated in ſuch a place as could not be diſ-
cover’d
, which caus’d the Pen-man of Eſdras
to
make it a harder matter to know the out-go-
ings
of Paradiſe, than to weigh the weight of the
Fire
, or meaſure the blaſts of the Wind, or call
222 Eſdr.4.7. again a day that is paſt.
But notwithſtanding
this
, there be ſome others, who think, that it
is
on the Top of ſome high Mountain under
the
Line;
and theſe interpreted the Torrid
Zone
to be the flaming Sword whereby Para-
diſe
was guarded.
’Tis the conſent of divers
others
, that Paradiſe is ſituated in ſome high &

eminent
place.
So Toſtatus, Eſt etiam Paradiſus ſi-
tu
altiſſima, ſupra omnem terræ altitudinem.
’Pa-
‘radiſe
is ſituated in ſome high place above
‘the
Earth;
and therefore in his Comment up-
on
the 49 of Geneſis, he underſtands the Bleſ-
33In Genef. ſing of Jacob, concerning the everlaſting Hills
to
be meant of Paradiſe, and the Bleſſing it
ſelf
to be nothing elſe but a Promiſe of Chriſts
coming
, by whoſe Paſſion the Gates of Para-
diſe
ſhould be opened.
Unto him aſſented
Rupertus
, Scotus, and moſt of the other School-
Men
, as I find them cited by Pererius, and
146134That the Moon may be a World. of him in Sir Walter Rawleigh. Their Reaſon
11Comment.
in
2 Gen.
v
. 8.
L
. 1. c. 3.
ſect
. 6. 7.
was this:
becauſe in probability, this place
was
not overflowed by the Flood, ſince there
were
no Sinners there, which might draw that
Curſe
upon it.
Nay, Toſtatus thinks, that the
Body
of Enoch was kept there;
and ſome of
the
Fathers, as Tertullian and Auſtin have af-
firmed
, that the bleſſed Souls were reſerv’d in
that
place till the day of Judgement, and
therefore
’tis likely that it was not overflow’d
by
the Flood;
it were eaſie to produce the
unanimous
conſent of the Fathers, to prove
that
Paradiſe is yet really exiſtent.
Any dili-
gent
peruſer of them may eaſily obſerve how
they
do generally interpret the Paradiſe where-
to
Saint Paul was wrapt, and that wherein our
222 Cer.12.4.
Luke
23.
43
.
Saviour promiſed the Thieſ ſhould be with
him
, to be locally the ſame where our firſt
Parents
were baniſhed.
Now there cannot be
any
place on Earth deſign’d where this
ſhould
be:
and therefore ’tis not altogether
improbable
that it was in this other World.
And beſides, ſince all Men ſhould have went
Naked
if Adam had not Fell, ’tis requiſite
therefore
that it ſhould be ſituated in ſome
ſuch
place where it might be priviledged from
the
Extremeties of Heat and Cold.
But now
this
could not be (they thought) ſo conveni-
ently
in any lower, as it might in ſome higher
Air
.
For theſe and ſuch like Conſiderations
have
ſo many affirm’d that Paradiſe was in a
high
elevated place.
Which ſome have con-
ceived
could be no where but in the Moon.
For it could not be in the top of any Moun-
tain
;
nor can we think of any other Body
147135That the Moon may be a World. parated from this Earth, which can be a more
convenient
place for Habitation than this Pla-
net
;
therefore they concluded it was there.
It could not be on the Top of any Moun-
tain
.
1. Becauſe we have Expreſs Scripture, that
11Gen. 7.19. the Higheſt of them was Overflowed.
2. Becauſe it muſt be of a greater Exten-
ſion
, and not ſome ſmall Patch of Ground,ſince
’tis
likely all Men ſhould have Lived there, if
Adam
had not Fell.
But for a Satisfaction of
the
Arguments, together with a Farther Dif-
couſe
of Paradiſe, I ſhall Refer you to thoſe
who
have Written Purpoſely upon this Sub-
ject
.
Being content for my own part to have
ſpoken
ſo much of it;
as may Conduce to ſhew
the
Opinion of others Concerning the Inhabi-
tants
of the Moon;
I dare not my ſelf Affirm
any
thing of theſe Selenites, becauſe I know
not
any Ground whereon to Build any Proba-
ble
Opinion.
But I think that Future Ages
will
Diſcover more;
and our Poſterity, Per-
haps
, may Invent ſome means for our better
Acquaintance
with theſe Inhabitants.
PROP. XIV.
That ’tis Poſſible for ſome of our Poſterity, to find
# out a Conveyance to this other World, and if
# there be Inhabitants there, to have Commerce
# with them.
ALL that hath been ſaid, Concerning the
People
of the New World, is but Con-
jectural
, and full of Uncertainties;
nor can
148136That the Moon may be a World. ever look for any Evident or more Probable
Diſcoveries
in this kind.
unleſs there be ſome
hopes
of Inventing means for our Conveyance
thither
.
The Poſſibility of which, ſhall be the
Subject
of our Enquiry in this laſt Propoſition.
And, if we do but Conſider by what Steps
and
Leaſure, all Arts do uſually riſe to their
Growth
, we ſhall have no cauſe to Doubt why
this
alſo may not hereafter be found out
amongſt
other Secrets.
It hath Conſtantly yet
been
the Method of Providence, not preſent-
ly
to ſhew us all, but to Lead us on by De-
grees
, from the Knowledg of one thing to an-
other
.
’T was a great While, ere the Planets were
Diſtinguſhed
from the fixed Stars, and ſome
time
after that, ere the Morning and Evening
Star
were Found to be the ſame.
And in greater
ſpace
(I doubt not) but this alſo, and other as
Excellent
Myſteries will be Diſcovered.
Time,
who
hath always been the Father of new
Truths
, and hath revealed unto us many things,
which
our Anceſtors were Ignorant of, will
alſo
Manifeſt to our Poſterity, that which we
now
deſire, but cannot know.
Veniet tempus
(ſaith Seneca) quo iſt a quæ nunc latent, in lucem
11Nat. Qu.
l
.7.cap. 25.
dies extrahet, &
longioris ævi diligentia. Time
will
come, when the Indeavours of after Ages,
ſhall
bring ſuch things to Light as now lie hid
in
Obſcurity.
Arts are not yet come to their
Solſtice
.
But the Induſtry of Future Times,
Aſſiſted
with the Labours of their Fore-Fa-
thers
, may reach that Height which we could
not
Attain to.
Veniet tempus quo poſteri noſlri
nos
tam aperta neſciſſe mirentur.
As we
149137That the Moon may be a World. wonder at the Blindneſs of our Anceſtors, who
were
not able to Diſcern ſuch things, as ſeem
Plain
and Obvious unto us, ſo will our Poſte-
rity
, Admire our Ignorance in as Perſpicuous
matters
.
In the firſt Ages of the World the Iſlanders
thought
themſelves either to be the only dwel-
lers
upon Earth, or elſe if there were any
other
, they could not poſſibly conceive how
they
might have any Commerce with them,
being
ſever’d by the deep and broad Sea.
But after times found out the Invention of
Ships
, in which notwithſtanding, none but
ſome
bold, daring Men durſt venture, accor-
ding
to that of the Tragœdian.
11Sen. Med.
act
. 1.
Vide
hora
Od
. 3.
Fuvenal
.
ſat
. 12.
Claud
.
præf
. ad 1.
lib
. de rap.
Preſer
.
Audax nimium qui freta primus
Rate tam fragili perfida rupit.
Too bold was he, who in a Ship ſo frail,
Firſt
ventur’d on the treacherous Waves to ſail.
And yet now, how eaſie a thing is this even
to
a timorous and cowardly Nature?
And
queſtionleſs
, the Invention of ſome other
means
for our Conveyance to the Moon, can-
not
ſeem more incredible to us, than this did
at
firſt to them, and therefore we have no juſt
reaſon
to be diſcouraged in our hopes of the
like
ſucceſs.
Yea, but (you will ſay) th@re can be no ſai-
ling
thither, unleſs that were true which the
Poets
do but feign, that ſhe made her Bed in
the
Sea.
We have not now any Drake, or
Columbus
to Undertake this Voyage, or any
Dædalus
to Invent a Conveyance through the
Air
.
I Anſwer, Though we have not, yet
150138That the Moon may be a World. may not Succeeding times, Raiſe up ſome Spirits
as
Eminent for new Attemps and Strange In-
ventions
, as any that were before them?
’Tis
the
Opinion of Keplar, that as ſoon as the art
11Diſſerta.
cum
Nun.
Sider
.
of Flying is Found out, ſome of their Nation
will
make one of the firſt Colonies, that ſhall
Tranſplant
into that other World.
I Suppoſe,
his
Appropriating this Preheminence to his
own
Country-Men, may ariſe from an Over-
partial
Affection to them.
But yet thus far
I
Agree with him, That when ever that Art
is
Invented, or any other, wherby a Man may
be
Conveyed ſome Twenty Miles high, or
thereabouts
, then, ’tis not altogether Improba-
ble
that ſome or other may be Succeſsful in
this
Attempt.
For a better Clearing of which, I ſhall firſt
lay
Down, and then Anſwer thoſe Doubts that
may
make it ſeem utterly Impoſſible.
Theſe are Chiefly Three.
The Firſt, taken from the Natural Heavi-
neſs
of a Mans Body, whereby it is made Un-
fit
for the Motion of Aſcent, together with
the
Vaſt Diſtance of that Place from us.
2. From the Extream Coldneſs of the Æthe-
real
Air.
3. The Extream Thinneſs of it.
Both which muſt needs make it Impaſſible,
though
it were but as many Single Miles thi-
ther
, as it is Thouſands.
For the Firſt, Though it were Suppoſed
that
a Man could Fly, yet we may well think
he
would be very Slow in it, ſince he hath ſo
Heavy
a Body, and ſuch a one too, as Nature
did
not Principally Intend, for that kind
151139That the Moon may be a World. Motion. ’Tis uſually Obſerved, that amongſt
the
Variety of Birds, thoſe which do moſt
Converſe
upon the Earth, and are Swifteſt in
their
running, as a Pheaſant, Partridge, &
c. to-
gether
with all Domeſtical Fowl, are leſs able
for
Flight, than others, which are for the moſt
part
upon the Wing, as a Swallow, Swift, &
c.
and therefore we may well think, that Man
being
not naturally endowed with any ſuch
Condition
as may enable him for this Motion,
and
being neceſſarily tyed to a more eſpecial
Reſidence
on the Earth, muſt needs be ſlower
than
any Fowl, and leſs able to hold out.
Thus
it
is alſo in Swimming;
which Art, though it
be
grown to a good Eminence, yet he that is
beſt
skilled in it, is not able, either for conti-
nuance
, or ſwiftneſs, to equal a Fiſh;
becauſe
he
is not naturally appointed to it.
So that
though
a Man could Fly, yet he would be ſo
ſlow
in it, and ſo quickly weary, that he could
never
think to reach ſo great a Journey as it is
to
the Moon.
But Suppoſe with all, that he could Fly as
Faſt
, and Long, as the Swifteſt Bird:
yet it
cannot
Poſſibly be Conceived, how he ſhould
ever
be able to paſs through ſo vaſt a Diſtance
as
there is betwixt the Moon\and our Earth.
For this Planet, according to the common
Grounds
, is uſually Granted to be at the Leaſt,
52
Semidiameters of the Earth from us.
Reck-
oning
for each Semidiameter 3456 Engliſh
Miles
, of which the whole ſpace will be about
179712
.
So that though a Man could Conſtantly keep
on
in his Journey thither by a Strait
152140That the Moon may be a World. tho’ he could Fly a Thouſand Mile in a Day;
yet he would not Arrive thither under 180
Days
, or Half a Year.
And how were it Poſſible for any to Tarry
ſo
long without Dyet or Sleep?
1. For Diet. I Suppoſe there could be no
11Prop. 3. Truſting to that Fancy of Philo the Few (men-
tioned
before) who thinks, that the Muſick of
the
Sphears ſhould Supply the ſtrength of Food.
Nor can we well Conceive, how a Man
ſhould
be Able to Carry ſo much Luggage
with
him, as might ſerve for his Viaticum in ſo
Tedious
a Journey.
2. But if he could: yet he muſt have ſome
time
to Reſt and Sleep in.
And I believe he
ſhall
Scarce find any Lodgings by the Way.
No Inns to Entertain Paſſengers, nor any Ca-
ſtles
in the Air (unleſs they be Inchanted ones)
to
Receive Poor Pilgrims or Errant Knights.

And
ſo Conſequently, he cannot have any
Poſſible
hopes of Reaching thither.
Notwithſtanding all which Doubts, I ſhall
lay
down this Poſition.
That Suppoſing a Man could Fly, or by any
other
means, raiſe himſelf Twenty Miles up-
wards
, or thereabouts, it were Poſſible for him
to
come unto the Moon.
As for thoſe Arguments of the firſt kind, that
ſeem
to overthrow the Truth of this, they
Proceed
upon a wrong Ground.
Whilſt they
Suppoſe
, that a Condenſed Body, in any place
of
the Air, would always Retain in it a ſtrong
Inclination
of Tending Down-wards, towards
the
Centre of this Earth.
Whereas ’tis more
probable
, that if it were but ſomewhat
153141That the Moon may be a World. this Orb of vaporous Air, it might there reſt
immovable
, and would not have in it any pro-
penſion
to this motion of Deſcent.
For the better illuſtration of this, you muſt
know
, that the heavineſs of a body, or (as
11De cælo
lib
.4.cap.1.
Ariſtotle defines it) the proneneſs of it to tend
down
unto ſome Centre, is not any abſolute
quality
intrinſical unto it, as if, whereever the
body
did retain its Eſſence, it muſt alſo retain
this
quality:
or as if Nature had emplanted in
every
condenſed Body Appetitionem centri, &

fugam
extremitatis.
Such a Love to the Cen-
tre
, and hatred to the Extremities.
Becauſe
one
of theſe being leſs than a quantity, and the
other
no more, cannot have any power of At-
traction
or Diſpulſion in them.
According to
that
common principle, Quantitatis nulla eſt
efficacia
.
But now the true nature of Gravity is this.
22A magne-
tical
natu-
ral
axtra-
ction
.
So
Keplar
Somn
.
Aſtron
. N.
66
.
Coper
. l. 1.
cap
. 26.
Foſcarin
in
epiſt
. ad
Sebaſt
.
Fantonum
.
’Tis ſuch a reſpective mutual deſire of Union,
whereby
condenſed Bodies, when they come
within
the Sphere of their own Vigour, do
naturally
apply themſelves, one to another by
Attraction
or Coition.
But being both with-
out
the reach of eithers Virtue, they can ceaſe
to
move, and though they have general Apti-
tude
, yet they have not any preſent Inclinati-
on
or proneneſs to one another.
And ſo con-
ſequently
, cannot be ſtiled heavy.
The meaning of this will be clearly Illuſtra-
ted
by a Simtlitude.
As any light Body
(ſuppoſe the Sun) does ſend forth his Beams
in
an orbicular form;
ſo likewiſe any magneti-
cal
Body, for inſtance, a round Load-ſtone does
33Gilbert de
Maguete
.
l
. 2. cap. 7.
caſt abroad his magnetical Vigour in a Sphere.
Thus.
154142That the Moon may be a World. 6[Figure 6]
Where ſuppoſe the inward Circle at A to
repreſent
the Loadſtone, and the outward one
betwixt
B C, the Orb that does terminate its
Virtue
.
Now any other Body that is like affected
coming
within this Sphere, as B, will preſent-
ly
deſcend towards the Centre of it, and in
that
reſpect may be ſtiled heavy.
But place
it
without the Sphere, as C, and then the de-
ſire
of Union ceaſeth, and ſo conſequently the
Motion
alſo.
To apply then what hath been ſaid. This
great
Globe of Earth and Water, hath been
proved
by many Obſervations, to participate
of
magnetical properties.
And as the Load-
ſtone
does caſt forth its own vigour round about
its
Body, in a Magnetical compaſs:
So likewiſe
does
our Earth.
The difference is, that it is
another
kind of affection which cauſes the uni-
on
betwixt the Iron and Load-ſtone, from that
which
makes Bodies move unto the Earth.
The former is ſome kind of nearneſs and
155143That the Moon may be a World. militude in their Natures, for which Philoſo-
phy
as yet has not found a particular Name.
The latter does ariſe from that peculiar quali-
ty
, whereby the Earth is properly diſtinguiſh-
ed
from the other Elements, which is its con-
denſity
.
Of which the more any thing does
participate
, by ſo much the ſtronger will be
the
deſire of Union to it.
So Gold and
other
Metals, which are moſt cloſe in their
Compoſition
, are likewiſe moſt ſwiſt in their
motion
of deſcent.
And tho’ this may ſeem to be contradicted
by
the inſtance of Metals, which are of the
ſame
weight, when they are melted, and when
they
are hard:
As alſo of Water, which does
not
differ in reſpect of Gravity, when it is
frozen
, and when it is Fluid:
yet we muſt
know
, that Mettals are not rarified by melting,
but
mollified.
And ſo too, for frozen Wa-
ters
, they are not properly condenſed, but con-
gealed
into a harder ſubſtance, the parts being
not
contracted cloſer together, but ſtill poſſeſ-
ſing
the ſame Extention.
But yet (I ſay) ’tis
very
probable, that there is ſuch a Sphere
about
the Earth, which does terminate its
power
of attracting other things unto it.
So
that
ſuppoſe a Body to be placed within the li-
mits
of this Sphere, and then it muſt needs
tend
downwards, towards the Centre of it.
But on the contrary, if it be beyond this com-
paſs
, then there can be no ſuch mutual Attra-
ction
;
and ſo conſequently, it muſt reſt im-
moveable
from any tuch motion.
For the farther confirmation of this, I ſhall
propoſe
two pertinent Obſervations.
156144That the Moon may be a World.
The firſt taken in the preſence of many Phy-
ſitians
, and related by an Eminent Man in that
Profeſſion
, Hieron.
Fracaſtorius. There being
11Lib de
Simpath
.
& Antip.
cap
. 7.
divert Needles provided of ſeveral kinds, like
thoſe
in a Mariners Chart, they found, that
there
was an attractive power, not only in the
magnet
;
but that Iron alſo and Steel, and Sil-
ver
did each of them draw its own Mettle.
Whence he concludes, Omne trahit quod ſibi ſi-
22Vid. Bapt.
Maſul
. ex-
er
. Acad.
de
attract.
exer
. 4.
mili eſt.
And as theſe peculiar likeneſſes, have
ſuch
a mutual efficacy;
ſo ’tis probable, that
this
more general qualification of condenſity,
may
be the cauſe, why things ſo affected deſire
Union
to the Earth.
And tho’ ’tis likely that
this
would appear betwixt two leſſer conden-
ſed
Bodies, (as ſuppoſe two pieces of Earth)
if
they were both placed at Liberty in the
Æthereal
Air, yet being near the Earth, the
ſtronger
ſpecies of this great Globe does as it
were
drownd the leſs.
’Tis a common experiment, that ſuch a lump
of
Ore or Stone, as being on the ground, can-
not
be moved by leſs than ſix men, being in
the
bottom of a deep mine, may be ſtirred by
two
.
The reaſon is, becauſe then ’tis encom-
paſſed
with attractive Beams, there being ma-
33Nat. Hiſt.
Cent
. 1.
exper
. 33.
ny above it, as well as below it.
Whence we
may
probably infer (ſaith the Learned Veru-
lam
) ‘that the Nature of Gravity, does work
but weakly, alſo far from the Earth;
becauſe
the appetite of Union in denſe Bodies, muſt
be more dull in reſpect of diſtance.
As
we
may alſo conclude from the motion of
Birds
, which riſe from the ground but heavi-
ly
, tho’ with much labour;
whereas being
157145That the Moon may be a World. high, they can keep themſelves up, and ſoar a-
bout
by the meer extenſion of their Wings.
Now the Reaſon of this difference, is not (as
ſome
falſly conceive) the depth of the Air un-
der
them.
For a Bird is not heavier when
there
is but a foot of Air under him, than when
there
is a Furlong.
As appears by a Ship in
the
Water, (an inſtance of the ſame nature)
which
does not ſink deeper, and ſo conſequent-
ly
is not heavier, when it has but five Fathom
depth
, than when it has Fifty.
But the true
reaſon
is, the weakneſs of the deſire of Uni-
on
in Denſe Bodies at a diſtance.
So that from hence, there might be juſt oc-
caſion
to Tax Ariſtotle and his Followers, for
Teaching
, that heavineſs is an abſolute quality
of
it ſelf, and really diſtinct from condenſity:
whereas ’tis only a Modification of it, or ra-
ther
, another Name given to a condenſed Bo-
dy
, in reference to its Motion.
For if it were abſolute, then it ſhould al-
ways
be inherent in its Subject, and not have
its
Eſſence depend upon the Bodies being here
or
there.
But it is not ſo. For,
1. Nothing is heavy in its proper place, ac-
cording
to his own principle, Nibil grave eſt
in
ſuo loco.
And then,
2. Nothing is heavy, which is ſo far diſtant
from
that proper Orb to which it does belong,
that
it is not within the reach of its Virtue.
As
was
before confirm’d.
But unto this it may be objected. Though a
Body
being ſo plac’d, be not heavy in in actu ſe-
cundo
;
yet it is in actu primo: becauſe it re-
tains
in it an inward proneneſs to move
158146That the Moon may be a World. wards, being once ſevered from its proper
place
.
And this were reaſon enough, why
the
quality of heavineſs ſhould have an abſo-
lute
being.
I anſwer, This diſtinction is only appliable
to
ſuch natural Powers as can ſuſpend their
Acts
;
and will not hold in Elementary Qua-
lities
, whoſe very Eſſence does neceſſarily re-
quire
an exerciſe of the ſecond Act, as you
may
eaſily diſcern by an Induction of all the
reſt
.
I cannot ſay, that Body has in it the qua-
lity
of Heat, Coldneſs, Drineſs, Moiſture,
Hardneſs
, Softneſs, &
c. Which for the preſent
has
not the ſecond Act of theſe qualities.
And
if
you mean by the eſſence of them, a Power
unto
them:
why, there is not any natural bo-
dy
but has a Power to them all.
From that which hath been ſaid concerning
the
Nature of Gravity, it will follow, That if a
man
were above the Sphere of this Magnetical
Virtue
, which proceeds from the Earth, he
might
there ſtand as firmly as in the open Air,
as
he can now upon the ground:
And not on-
ly
ſo, but he may alſo move with far greater
ſwiftneſs
, than any living Creatures here be-
low
, becauſe then he is without all Gravity,
being
not attracted any way, and ſo conſequent-
ly
will not be liable to ſuch impediments, as
may
in the leaſt manner reſiſt that kind of Mo-
tion
which he ſhall apply himſelf unto.
If you yet enquire, how we may conceive
it
poſſible, that a condenſed Body ſhould not
be
heavy in ſuch a place.
I anſwer, by the ſame reaſon, as a Body is
not
heavy in its proper place.
Of this I will
ſet
down two Inſtances.
159147That the Moon may be a World.
1. When a Man is in the bottom of a deep
River
, tho’ he have over him a multitude of
heavy
Waters, yet he is not burdened with
the
weight of them.
And though another Bo-
dy
, that ſhould be but of an equal Gravity,
with
theſe Waters, when they are taken out,
would
be heavy enough to preſs him to death;
yet notwithſtanding whilſt they are in the
Channel
, they do not in the leaſt manner cruſh
him
with their Load.
The reaſon is, becauſe
they
are both in their right places;
and ’tis
proper
for the Man being the more condenſed
Body
, to be lower than the Waters.
or ra-
ther
thus, becauſe the body of the Man does
more
nearly agree with the Earth, in this affe-
ction
, which is the ground of its attraction,
and
therefore doth more ſtrongly attract it,
than
the waters that are over it.
Now, as in
ſuch
a caſe, a body may loſe the Operation
of
its Gravity, which is, to move, or to preſs
downwards
:
So may it likewiſe, when it is
ſo
far out of its place, that this attractive
Power
cannot reach unto it.
’Tis a pretty Notion to this purpoſe, menti-
oned
by Albertus de Saxonia, and out of him
11Phyſ. l. 3.
Q
. 6. art. 2.
by Francis Mendoca;
that the Air is in ſome
22Viridar.
l
. 4. Prob.
47
.
part of it Navigable.
And that upon this Sta-
tick
Principle;
any Braſs or Iron Veſſel (ſup-
poſe
a Kettle) whoſe ſubſtance is much hea-
vier
than that of the Water, yet being filled
33Vide Arch.
l
. de inſi-
dentibus
.
bumido
.
with the lighter Air, it will ſwim upon it, and
not
ſink.
So ſuppoſe a Cup, or Wooden Veſ-
ſel
, upon the outward borders of this Elemen-
tary
Air, the Cavity of it being filled with
Fire
, or rather Æthereal Air, it muſt
160148That the Moon may be a World. ſarily upon the ſame ground remain ſwimming
there
, and of it ſelf can no more fall, than any
Empty
Ship can ſink.
’Tis commonly granted, that if there were
a
hole quite through the Centre of the Earth,
though
any heavy Body (as ſuppoſe a Milſtone)
were
let fall into it, yet when it came into
rhe
place of the Centre, it would there reſt
immoveable
in the Air.
Now, as in this caſe,
its
own condenſity cannot hinder, but that it
may
reſt open Air, when there is no other
place
, to which it ſhould be attracted:
So nei-
ther
could it be any impediment unto it, if it
were
placed without the Sphere of the Earths
Magnetical
Vigor, where there ſhould be no
Attraction
at all.
From hence then (I ſay) you may conceive,
that
if a Man were beyond this Sphere, he
might
there ſtand as firmly in the Open Air,
as
now upon the Earth.
And if he might
ſtand
there, why may he not alſo go there?
And if ſo; then there is alſo a a poſſibility
likewife
of having other Conveniences for
Travelling
.
And here ’tis conſiderable, that ſince our
bodies
will then be devoid of Gravity, and
other
Impediments of Motion;
we ſhall not
at
all ſpend our ſelves in any Labour, and ſo
conſequently
not much need the Reparation
of
Dyet:
But may perhaps live altogether
without
it, as thoſe Creatures have done;
who by Reaſon of their ſleeping for many days
together
, have not ſpent any Spirits, and ſo
not
wanted any Food:
which is commonly
related
of Serpents, Crococodiles, Bears,
161149That the Moon may be a World. kows, Swallows, and ſuch like. To this pur-
poſe
Mendoca reckons up divers ſtrange 11Viridiar.
lib
. 4. prob.
24
.
lations.
As that of Epimendies, who is ſtory-
ed
to have ſlept 75 Years.
And another of a
Ruſtick
in Germany, who being accidentally
covered
with a Hay-Rick, ſlept there for all
Autumn
, and the Winter following, without
any
Nouriſhment.
Or, if this will not ſerve, yet why may
not
a Papiſt faſt ſo long, as well as Ignatius
or
Xaverius?
Or if there be ſuch a ſtrange
Efficacy
in the Bread of the Euchariſt, as their
miraculous
Relations do attribute unto it:
why
then
, that it may ſerve well enough, for their
Viaticum
.
Or, if we muſt needs Feed upon ſomething
elſe
, why may not Smells nouriſh us?
22De facie
in
Luna.
and Pliny, and divers other Ancients, tell us of a Nation in India that lived only upon plea-
33Nat. hiſt.
lib
. 7. ca. 3.
ſing Odors.
And ’tis the common Opinion of
Phyſitians
, that theſe do ſtrangely both ſtreng-
then
and repair the Spirits.
Hence was it that
Demooritus
was able for divers days together
44Diog. La-
ert
. lib. 1.
ca
. 9.
to feed himſelf with the meer ſmell of Hot
Bread
.
Or if it be neceſſary that our Stomachs muſt
receive
the Food:
why then, ’tis not impoſſi-
ble
, that the purity of the Æthereal Air, be-
ing
not mixed with any improper Vapours,
may
be ſo@agreeable to our Bodies, as to yield
us
a ſufficient Nouriſhment;
according to that
of
the Poet;
----------Veſcitur aur â
55VirgilÆthereâ-------------
’T was an old Platonick Principle, that
162150That the Moon may be a World. is in ſome part of the World ſuch a place
where
Men might be plentifully nouriſh’d by
the
Air they breath;
which cannot more pro-
perly
be aſſign’d to any one particular, than to
the
Æthereal Air above this.
I know ’tis the common Opinion, that no
Element
can prove Aliment, becauſe ’tis not
11Arriſt. de
Senſ
. cap. 5.
proportionate to the Bodies of living Crea-
tures
which are compounded.
But,
1. This Æthereal Air is not an Element’; and
tho’
it be purer, yet ’tis perhaps of a greater
agreabieneſs
to man’s Nature and Conſtitution.
2. If we conſult experience and the credible
Relations
of others, we ſhall find it probable
enough
that many things receive Nouriſhment
from
meer Elements.
Firſt, for the Earth; Ariſtotle and 22The Earth thoſe two great Naturaliſts, tell us of ſome
33Hiſt.
Anima
.
lib
. 8. cap. 5.
Creatures that are fed only with this.
And it
was
the Curſe of the Serpent, Gen.
3. 14. Up-
44Hiſt. l. 10.
cap
. 72.
on thy body ſhalt thou go, and duſt ſhalt thou eat all
the
days of thy life.
So likewiſe for the Water. Albertu Mag- nus ſpeaks of a man who lived ſeven Weeks
55The water together by the meer Drinking of water.
66De Anim.
lib
. 7.
Rondoletius (to whoſe diligence theſe later
times
are much beholden for ſundry Obſerva-
77De Piſc.
l
. 1. cap. 12.
tions concerning the Nature of Aquatils) af-
firms
, that his Wife did keep a Fiſh in a Glaſs
of
water, without any other Food, for three
Years
;
in which ſpace it was conſtantly aug-
mented
, till at firſt it could not come out of
the
place at which it was put in, and at length
was
too big for the Glaſs it ſelf, though that
were
of a large capacity.
Gardan tells us of
163151That the Moon may be a World. worms that are bred & nouriſh’d by the Snow,
11Subtil. l. 9. from which being once ſeparated, they dye.
Thus alſo is it with the Air, which we may
well
conceive does chiefly concur to the nou-
22The Air. riſhing of all Vegitables.
For if their Food
were
all ſucked out from the Earth, there
muſt
needs be then ſome ſenſible decay in the
ground
by them;
eſpecially, ſince they do eve-
ry
year renew their Leaves and Fruits:
which
being
ſo many, and ſo often, could not be produ-
ced
without abundance of nouriſhment.
To
this
purpoſe is the experiment of Trees cut
down
, which will of themſelves put forth
Sprouts
.
As alſo that of Onyons, and the Sem-
per-vive
, which will ſtrangely ſhoot forth,
and
grow as they hang in the open Air.
Thus
likewiſe
is it with ſome Senſible Creatures;
the Camelion (ſaith Pliny and Solinus) 33Hiſt. li. 8
cap
. 33.
Polyhiſter
.
cap
. 53.
meerly nouriſhed by this:
And ſo are the
Birds
of Paradiſe, Treated of by many;
which reſide conſtantly in the Air, Nature
44Lop. hiſt.
Ind
. Occid.
cap
. 96.
Majolus

Colleq
. 3.
baving not beſtowed upon them any Legs, and
therefore
they are never ſeen upon the ground,
but
being dead.
If you ask, how they multi-
ply
?
’tis anſwer’d, they lay their Eggs on the
55’Tis likely
that
theſe
Birds
do
chiefly
re-
ſide
in the
Æthereal

Air
, where
they
are
nouriſhed

and
up-
held
.
backs of one anather, upon which they ſit till
their
Young Ones be fledg’d.
Rondoletius from the Hiſtory of Hermolaus Barbarus tells
us
of a Prieſt (of whom one of the Popes had
the
cuſtody) that lived Forty years upon meer
Air
.
As alſo of a Maid in France, and another
in
Germany, that for divers years together did
feed
on nothing but this:
Nay, he affirms, that
he
himſelf had ſeen one, who lived till Ten
66De Piſ-
cibus
. lib. 1.
cap
. 13.
years of Age without any nouriſhment.
164152That the Moon may be a World. may find moſt of theſe, and ſome other Exam-
ples
to this purpoſe, gather’d together by Mendo-
ca
Virida.
lib. 4. Prob. 23, 24. Now, if this Ele-
mentary
Air which is mixed with ſuch Impro-
per
Vapors, may Accidentally Nouriſh ſome
Perſons
;
Perhaps then, that pure Æthereal Air
may
of it ſelf be more natural to our Tempers.
But if none of theſe Conjectures may Satisfie;
yet there may Happily be ſome Poſſible means
for
the Conveiance of other Food, as ſhall be
ſhewed
afterwards.
Again, ſeeing we do not then Spend our
ſelv
s in any Labour, we ſhall not, it may be,
need
the Refreſhment of Sleep.
But if we do,
we
cannot deſire a Softer Bed than the Air,
where
we may Repoſe our ſelves Firmly and
Safely
as in our Chambers.
But here you may ask, whether there be any
means
for us to know, how far this Sphere of
the
Earths Vertue does Extend it ſelf?
I anſwer, ’tis probable that it does not reach
much
farther than that Orb of thick vaporous
Air
, that incompaſſeth the Earth;
becauſe ’tis
likely
the Sun may exhale ſome Eartthly Va-
porous
Air, that incompaſſeth the Earth;
be-
cauſe
’tis likely the Sun may exhale ſome
Earthly
Vapors, near unto the utmoſt bounds
of
the Sphere allotted to them.
Now there are divers ways uſed by Aſtrono-
mers
, to make the altitude of this Vaporous
Air
.
As,
1. By obſerving the height of that Air which
cauſeth
the Grepuſculum, Twi-light;
for the
finding
of which, the Antients uſed this means:
As ſoon as ever they could Diſcern the Air
165153That the Moon may be a World. the Eaſt to be altered with the leaſt Light,
they
would by the Situation of the Stars
find
how many degrees the Sun was below the
Horizon
, which was uſually about 18.
From
whence
they would eaſily conclude, how high
that
Air muſt be above us, which the Sun could
ſhine
upon, when he was 18 Degrees below
us
.
And from this obſervation it was conclu-
11Vitel. l. 10;
Theo
. 7.
ded to be about 52 Miles high.
But in this Concluſion, the Antients were
much
deceived, becauſe they proceeded on a
wrong
ground, whilſt they ſuppoſed that the
ſhining
of the Suns direct Rays upon the Air
was
the only reaſon of Grepuſculum;
whereas
22Keplar. Ep.
Coper
. l. 1.
part
. 3.
’tis certain that there are many other things
which
may alſo concur to the cauſing of it.
As,
1. Some bright Clouds below the Horizon,
which
being illuminated by the Sun, may be
the
means of conveying ſome Light to our Air,
before
the direct Rays can touch it.
2. The often refraction of the Rays, which
ſuffer
a frequent Repercuſſion from the Cavi-
ty
of this Sphere, may likewiſe yield us ſome
Light
.
3. And ſo may the Orb of enlightned Air
compaſſing
the Sun, part of which muſt riſe
before
his Body.
2. The ſecond way whereby we may more
ſurely
ſind the Altitude of this groſſer Air, is
by
taking the higheſt Cloud:
which may be
done
, 1.
Either as they uſe to meaſure the
Altitude
of things that cannot be approached
unto
, viz.
by two Stations, when two Perſons
ſhall
at the ſame time, in ſeveral places, ob-
ſerve
the Declination of any Cloud from
166154That the Moon may be a World. Vertical point. Or, which is the more eaſie
11Stevinnius
Geog
. l. 3.
prop
. 3.
way, when a man ſhall chooſe ſuch a Station,
where
he may at ſome diſtance, diſcern the
place
on which the Cloud does caſt its ſhadow,
and
withal does obſerve, how much both the
Cloud
and the Sun decline from the Vertical
point
.
From which he may eaſily conclude
the
true Altitude of it, as you may more plain-
ly
conceive, by this following Diagram.
7[Figure 7]
Where A B is a perpendicular from the cloud,
G
the Station of him that meaſures, D the place
where
the ſhadow of the Cloud doth fall.
The inſtrument being directed from the Sta-
tion
G, to the Cloud at A, the perpendicular
will
ſhew the Angle B A G.
Then letting the
Sun
ſhine through the ſights of your Inſtru-
ment
, the perpendicular of it will give the
Angle
B A D.
After wards having meaſured
22Pitiſc. Tri-
gon
.
the diſtance G D by paces, you may, according
to
the common Rules, find the height B A.
But if without making the Obſervation, you
would
know of what Altitude the higheſt of
33Subt. l.
17
.
theſe are found by Obſervation;
Gardan an- ſwers, not above two miles; Keplar, not 44Epit. Co-
per
. l. 1. p. 3.
1600 Paces, or thereabouts.
167155That the Moon may be a World.
3. Another way to find the height of this Va-
porous
Air, is, by knowing the difſerence of
Altitude
, which it cauſeth, in refracting the
Beams
of any Star near the Horizon.
And from
this
Obſervation alſo, it is uſually concluded to
be
about two or three miles high.
But now you muſt not conceive, as if the
Orb
of Magnetical Vigor, were bounded in
an
exact Superficies, or, as if it did equally
hold
out juſt to ſuch a determinate Line, and
no
further.
But as it hath been ſaid of the firſt
Region
, which is there terminated, where the
Heat
of Reflection does begin to Languiſh:
So
likewiſe
is it probable, that this Magnetical
Vigor
does remit of its degrees proportionably
to
its diſtance from the Earth, which is the cauſe
of
it:
and therefore though the thicker Clouds
may
be elevated no higher, yet this Orb may
be
continued in weaker degrees a little beyond
them
.
We will ſuppoſe it (which in all like-
lyhood
is the moſt) to be about Twenty Miles
high
.
So that you ſee the former Theſis remains
probable
, that if a Man could but fly, or by
any
other means get Twenty Miles upwards, it
were
poſſible for him to reach unto the Moon.
But it may be again Objected: Tho’ all this
were
true;
though there were ſuch an Orb of
Air
which did terminate the Earths vigour:
and tho’ the heavineſs of our Bodies could not
hinder
our paſſage, through the vaſt ſpaces of
the
Æthereal Air;
yet thoſe two other Impe-
diments
may ſeem to deny the poſſibility of
any
ſuch Voyage.
1. The extream coldneſs of that Air. If ſome
of
our higher Mountains for this reaſon be
168156That the Moon may be a World. habitable; much more then will thoſe places
be
ſo, which are farther from any cauſe of
Heat
.
2. The extream thinneſs of it, which may
make
it unfit for Expiration.
For if in ſome
Mountains
(as Ariſtotle tells us of Olimpus, and
11In Gen.
adliteram
.
li
. 3. cap. 2.
out of him St.
Auſtin) the Air be ſo thin that Men cannot draw their Breath, unleſs it
were
through ſome moiſtned Spunges;
much
more
then muſt that Air be thin, which is more
remotely
Situated from the Cauſes of Impuri-
ty
and mixture.
And then beſide, the Refra-
ction
that is made by the vaporous Air incom-
paſſing
our Earth, may ſufficiently prove that
there
is a great difference betwixt the Æthereal
Air
and this, in reſpect of Rarity.
To the firſt of theſe I anſwer, that tho’ the
ſecond
Region, be naturally endowed with ſo
much
Coldneſs as may make it fit for the pro-
duction
of Meteors;
yet it will not hence fol-
low
, that all that Air above it, which is not ap-
pointed
for the like purpoſe, ſhould partake
of
the ſame Condition:
But, it may ſeem more
probable
that this Æthereal Air, is freed from
having
any quality in the extreams.
And this
may
be confirmed from thoſe common Argu-
ments
, which are uſually brought to prove
22Meteor.
lib
. 1. c. 2.
art
. 1.
the warmneſs of the third Region.
As you
may
ſee in Fromundus, and others who Treat of that Subject.
’Tis the Aſſertion of Pererius, that the ſe-
33Comment.
in
Gen. 1. 8
cond Region is not cold meerly for this reaſon,
becauſe
it is diſtant from the Ordinary cauſes of
Heat
, but becauſe it was actually made ſo at the
firſt
, for the condenſing of the Clouds, and
169157That the Moon may be a World. production of other Meteors that were there
to
be generated;
which (as I conceive) might
be
ſufficiently confirmed from that Order of
the
Creation obſerved by Moſes, who tells us
that
the Waters above the Firmament (by
which
, in the greateſt probability, we are to
underſtand
the Clouds in the ſecond Region)
were
made the ſecond day, Gen.
1. 7, 8. Whereas
the
Sun it ſelf, whoſe Reflection is the cauſe
of
Heat, was not created till the fourth day,
ver
.
16. 19.
To the other Objection, I anſwer, that tho’
the
Air in the ſecond Region, where by reaſon
of
its coldneſs there are many thick Vapours,
do
cauſe a great Refraction;
yet ’tis probable
that
the Air which is next the Earth, is ſome-
times
, and in ſome places, of a far greater
thinneſs
, nay, as thin as the Æthereal Air it
ſelf
;
ſince ſometimes there is ſuch a ſpecial
Heat
of the Sun, as may rarifie it in an emi-
nent
degree;
and in ſome dry places, there are
no
groſs impure Exhalations to mix with it.
But here it may be objected. If the Air in
the
ſecond Region were more Condenſed and
heavy
than this wherein we breath, then that
muſt
neceſſarily tend downwards and poſſeſs the
lower
place.
To this ſome Anſwer, That the hanging of
the
Clouds in the open Air, is no leſs than a
Miracle
.
They are the Words of Pliny. Quid
mirabilius
aquis in cælo ſtantibus?
what more
11Hiſt. l. 31.
cap
. 1.
wonderful thing is there, than that the Waters
ſhould
ſtand in the Heavens?
Others prove this
from
the Derivation of the word םומש from
תאש
ſtupeſcere and םומ aquæ:
Becauſe the
170158That the Moon may be a World. ters do hang there after ſuch a ſtupendious in-
conceivable
manner;
which ſeems likewiſe to
be
favoured by Scripture, where ’tis mentio-
ned
as a great Argument of Gods Omnipoten-
cy
, that he holds up the Clouds from falling.
He binds up the Waters in his thick Glouds, and
11Job. 26. 8. the Glouds is not rent under them.
But that which unto me ſeems full ſatisfacti-
on
againſt this doubt, is this Conſideration;
that the natural vigor, whereby the Earth doth
attract
denſe bodies unto it, is leſs efficacious
at
a diſtance:
and therefore a Body of leſs
denſity
, which is near unto it, as ſuppoſe, this
thin
Air wherein we breath, may naturally be
lower
in its Scituation, than another of a grea-
ter
condenſity that is farther off;
as ſuppoſe,
the
Clouds in the ſecond Region.
And tho
the
one be abſolutely, and in it ſelf more fit
for
this Motion of deſcent;
yet, by reaſon of
its
diſtance, the Earths magnetical Virtue can-
not
ſo powerfully work upon it.
As for that Relation of Ariſtotle; if it were
true
;
yet it does not prove this Air to be al-
together
impoſſible, ſince moiſtned Spunges
might
help us againſt its thinneſs:
but ’tis more
likely
, that he took it upon Truſt, as he did
ſome
other Relations concerning the height of
of
the Mountains, wherein ’tis evident, that
he
was groſly miſtaken.
As where he tells us
of
Gaucaſus, that it caſt its ſhadow 560 Miles.
22Meteor.
l
. 1. c. 11.
And this Relation being of the ſame nature, we
cannot
ſafely truſt unto him for the Truth of it.
If it be here enquired; what means there
may
be conjectur’d, for our aſcending beyond
the
Sphere of the Earths Magnetical Vigor.
171159That the Moon may be a World.
I anſwer, 1. ’Tis not perhaps impoſſible, that a man
may
be able to Fly, by the application of Wings to his
own
body;
as Angels are pictur’d, as Mercury and Dæda-
lus
are feigned, and as hath been attempted by divers,
particularly
by a Turk in Conſtantinople, as Busbequius relates.
2. If there be ſuch a great Ruck in Madagaſcar, as 11Mr. Bur.
ton
.
cus Polus the Venetian mentions, the Feathers in whoſe
Wings
are twelve Foot long, which can ſoop up a Horle
22Melanch.
pa
. 2. ſect. 2
mem
. 3.
and his Rider, or an Elephant, as our Kites do a Mouſe;
why then ’tis but teaching one of theſe to carry a man, and
he
may ride up thither, as Ganimed does upon an Eagle.
33Lib. 3.
c
. 40.
3. Or if neither of theſe ways will ſerve; yet I do ſeri-
only
, and upon good grounds, affirm it poſſible to make a
Flying
Chariot;
in which a Man may ſit, and give ſuch a
motion
unto it, as ſhall convey him through the Air.
And
this
perhaps might be made large enough to carry divers
Men
at the ſame time, together with Food for their Via-
ticum
, and commodities for Traffick.
It is not the bigneſs
of
any thing in this kind, that can hinder its motion, if
the
raotive Faculty be anſwerable thereunto.
We ſee a
great
Ship ſwims as well as a ſmall cork, and an Eagle flies
in
the Air as well as a little gnat.
This Engine may be contrived from the ſame Principles
by
which Architas made a wooden Dove, and Regiomontanus
a
wooden Eagle.
I conceive it were no difficult matter (if a man had lei-
ſure
) to ſhew more particularly the means of compoſing it.
The perfecting of ſuch an Invention, would be of ſuch ex-
cellent
uſe, that it were enough, not only to make a man
Famous
, but the Age alſo where he lives.
For beſides the
ſtrange
diſcoveries that it might occaſion in this other
World
, it would be alio of inconceivable advantage for
Travelling
, above any other conveyanee that is now in uſe.
So that notwithſtanding all theſe ſeeming impoſſibilities,
’tis
likely enough, that there may be a means invented of
Journying
to the Moon;
and how happy ſhall they be,
that
are firſt ſucceſsful in this attempt?
--------Fæliceſque animæ, quas nubila ſupra,
Et
turpes fumos, plenumque vaporibus orbem,
Inſeruit
cælo ſancti ſcintilla Promethei.
Having thus finiſhed this Diſcourſe, I chanced upon a
late
fancy to this purpoſe under the feigned Name of Do-
mingo
Gonſales, written by a late Reverend and Learned
Biſhop
:
In which (beſides ſundry partlculars wherein
172160That the Moon may be a World. later Chapter did unwittingly agree with it) there is de-
liver’d
a pleaſant and well contriv’d Fancy concerning a
Voyage
to this other World.
He ſuppoſeth that there is a natural and uſual paſſage
for
many creatures betwixt our Earth and this Planet.
Thus
he
ſays;
thoſe great multitudes of Locuſts wherewith
divers
Countries have been deſtroyed, do proceed from
thence
.
And if we peruſe the Authors who treat of them,
we
ſhall find that many times they fly in numberleſs
Troops
, or Swarms, and for ſundry days together before
they
fall, are ſeen over thoſe places in great high Clouds,
fuch
as coming nearer, are of extenſion enough to obſcure
the
day, and hinder the light of the Sun.
From which,
together
with divers other ſuch Relations, he concludes, that
’tis
not altogether improbable, they ſhould proceed from
the
Moon.
Thus likewiſe he ſuppoſes the Swallows,
Cuckoes
, Nightingales, with divers other Fowl, which are
with
us only half a year, to fly up thither, when they go
from
us.
Amongſt which kind, there is a wild Swan in
the
Eaſt Indies, which at certain Seaſons of the year do
conſtantly
take their flight thither.
Now this Bird being
of
a great Strength, able to continue for a long Flight;
as alſo going uſually in Flocks, like our Wild Geeſe; he
ſuppoſeth
that many of them together, might be thought
to
carry the weight of a Man;
eſpecially, if an Engine
were
ſo contriv’d (as he thinks it might) that each of them
ſhould
bear an equal ſhare in the burden.
So that by this
means
, ’tis eaſily conceivable, how once a year a man might
finiſh
ſuch Voyage;
going along with theſe Birds at the
beginning
of Winter, and again returning with them at
the
Spring.
And here, one that had a ſtrong Fancy, were better able
to
ſet forth the great benefit and Pleaſure to be had by ſuch
a
Journey.
And that whether you conſider the ſtrangeneſs
of
the Perſons, Language, Art, Policy, Religion of thoſe
Inhabitants
, together with the new Traffick that might be
brought
thence, In brief, do but conſider the pleaſure
and
profit of thoſe later Diſcoveries in America, and we
muſt
needs conclude this to be inconceiveably beyond it.
But ſuch Imaginations as theſc, I ſhall leave to the Fancy
of
the Reader.
----------- Sic itur ad aſtra.
Reptet humi quicunque velit -------------
Cœlo reſtat iter, cœlo tentabimus ire.
FINIS.
173
A DISCOURSE
Concerning
a
Rem
Planet.
Tending
to prove
That
’tis probable our EARTH
is
one of the PLANETS.
The Second Book.
By John Wilkins, late L. Biſhop of Cheſter.
Dignares eſt Contemplatione, ut ſciamus in quo re-
# rum ſtatu ſcimus:
pigerimam ſortiti, an velo-
# ciſſimam ſedem:
circa nos Dens omnia, an nos
# agat.
Sen. Nat. Queſt. lib. 7. cap. 2.
LONDON:
Printed
by J. D. for John Gellibrand, at
the
Golden Ball in St. Paul’s Church-
Yard
. M.DC.LXXXIV.
174
[Empty page]
175
To the Reader.
NOt to trouble you with an
Invective
againſt thoſe mul-
titudes
of Pamphlets which
are
every day preſt into the World;
or an Apologie, why this was pub-
liſhed
amongſt the reſt (the uſual
Matter
for ſuch kind of Epiſtles):

Let
me in brief preadmoniſh you
ſomething
concerning the chief
Scope
and Manner of this follow-
ing
Diſcourſe.
1. ’Tis not the purpoſe of it, to
ſet
down an exact Treatiſe of this
kind
of Aſtronomy;
but rather to
remove
thoſe common Prejudices,
which
uſually deter Men from tak-
ing
any Argument tending this way,
into
their conſiderations.
For we
may
obſerve, that in thoſe Points
which
are cried down by the
176To the Reader general Opinion, Men do for the
moſt
part reſt themſelves in the
ſuperficial
knowledg of things, as
they
ſeem at their firſt appearan-
ces
, thinking they can ſay enough
to
any Paradox, againſt which they
can
urge the moſt obvious and eaſy
Objections
;
and therefore ſeldom
or
never ſearch into the depth of
theſe
Points, or enter into any ſeri-
ous
impartial examination of thoſe
grounds
on which they are bot-
tom
'd.
Which as it muſt needs be a
great
hindrance to the proficiency
of
all kind of Learning;
ſo more
eſpecially
is it in this particular.
We might diſcern a greater come-
lineſs
and order in this great Fa-
brick
of the World, and more eaſily
underſtand
the Appearances in A-
ſtronomy
, if we could with indif-
ferency
attend to what might be
ſaid
for that Opinion of Copernicus,
which
is here defended.
177To the Reader
2. For the Manner. It is not
maintained
with ſuch Heat and
Religion
, as if every one that reads
it
, were preſently bound to yield up
his
aſſent:
But as it is in other
Wars
, where Victory cannot be had,
Men
muſt be content with Peace:
So likewiſe is it in this, and ſhould
be
in all other Philoſophical Con-
tentions
.
If there be nothing able to
convince
and ſatisfy the indifferent
Reader
, he may ſtill enjoy his own
Opinion
.
All Men have not the
ſame
way of apprehending things;

but
according to the variety of their
Temper
, Cuſtom, and Abilities,
their
Underſtandings are ſeverally
faſhioned
to different Aſſents:

Which
had it been but well conſi-
dered
by ſome of our hot 11Fromond.
Al
Roſſe.
ſaries, they would not have ſhewed
more
violence in oppoſing the Per-
ſons
againſt whom they write, than
ſtrength
in confuting the Cauſe.
178To the Reader
’Tis an excellent Rule to be ob-
ſerved
in all Diſputes, That Men
ſhould
give ſoft Words and hard
Arguments
;
that they would not ſo
much
ſtrive to vex, as to convince an
Enemy
.
If this were but diligently
practiſed
in all Caſes, and on all
ſides
, we might in a good meaſure
be
freed from thoſe Vexations in
the
ſearch of Truth, which the wiſe
Solomon
, by his own experience did
ſo
much complain of:
Eccleſ. 1. 18.
In much Wiſdom there is much Grief;
and
he that increaſeth Knowledg, in-
creaſeth
Sorrow.
To conclude: Tho there ſhould
be
nothing in this Diſcourſe con-
ducible
to your Information and
Benefit
;
yet it may ſerve in the
Peruſal
, as it did in the Compoſure,
for
the recreation of ſuch leiſure
hours
, as may conveniently be ſpa-
red
from more weighty Employ-
ments
.
Farewel.
179
The Propositions that
are
inſiſted on in this Diſcourſe.
PROP. I.
THat the ſeeming Novelty and Singularity
# of this Opinion, can be no ſufficient Rea-
# ſon to prove it Erroneus.
PROP. II.
That the places of Scripture, which ſeem to in-
# timate the Diurnal Motion of the Sun, or
# Heavens, are fairly capable of another in-
# terpretation.
PROP. III.
That the Holy Ghoſt, in many places of Scrip-
# ture, does plainly conform his Expreſſions to
# the Error of our Conceits, and does not ſpeak,
# of ſundry things as they are in themſelves, but
# as they appear unto us.
PROP. IV.
That divers learned men have fallen into great
# Abſurdities, whilſt they have looked for the
# Grounds of Philoſophy from the Words of
# Scripture.
PROP. V.
That the words of Scripture, in their
180The Table. # and ſtrict conſtruction, do not any where af-
# firm the Immobility of the Earth.
PROP. VI.
That there is not any Argument from the words
# of Scripture, Principles of Nature, or Ob-
# ſervations in Aſtronomy, which can ſuffici-
# ently evidence the Earth to be in the Centre
# of the Univerſe.
PROP. VII.
’Tis probable that the Sun is in the Centre of
# the World.
PROP. VIII.
That there is not any ſufficient reaſon to prove
# the Earth incapable of thoſe Motions which
# Copernicus aſcribes unto it.
PROP. IX.
That it is more probable the Earth does move,
# than the Heavens.
PROP. X.
That this Hypotheſis is exactly agreeable to
# common Appearances.
181(1)
That the
EARTH

May
be a
PLANET
.
PROP. I.
That the ſeeming Novelty and Singularity
# of this Opinion, can be no ſufficient
# Reaſon to prove it Erroneous.
IN the ſearch of Theological Truths, it
is
the ſafeſt method, firſt of all to look
unto
Divine Authority;
becauſe that
carries
with it as clear an evidence to
our
Faith, as any thing elſe can be to our
Reaſon
.
But on the contrary, in the exami-
nation
of Philoſophical points, it were a pre-
poſterous
courſe to begin at the
1822That the earth may be a Planet and Opinion of others, and then afterwards
to
deſcend unto the Reaſons that may be
drawn
from the Nature and Eſſence of the
things
themſelves:
Becauſe theſe inartificial
Arguments
(as the Logicians call them) do
not
carry with them any clear and convin-
cing
evidence;
and therefore ſhould come
after
thoſe that are of more neceſſary depen-
dance
, as ſerving rather to confirm, than re-
ſolve
the Judgment.
But yet, ſo it is, that in thoſe points which
are
beſides the common Opinion, Men are
carried
away at the firſt by the general cry,
and
ſeldom or never come ſo far as to ex-
amine
the reaſons that may be urged for
them
.
And therefore, ſince it is the purpoſe
of
this diſcourſe to remove thoſe prejudices
which
may hinder our Judgment in the like
caſe
, ’tis requiſit that in the firſt place there
be
ſome ſatisfaction given to thoſe Argu-
ments
that may be taken from the Authori-
ty
of others.
Which Arguments are inſiſted on by our
adverſaries
with much heat and violence.
What (ſay they) ſhall an upſtart Novel-
ty
thruſt out ſuch a Truth as hath paſſed by
ſucceſſive
Tradition through all Ages of the
World
?
And hath been generally entertain-
ed
, not only in the Opinion of the vulgar,
11Alex.
Roſſ
. de
Terræ

motu
, co@-
træ
Lan@b.
lib
. 1. ſect.
1
. cap. 10
but alſo of the greateſt Philoſophers and
moſt
Learned Men?
Shall we think that amongſt the multitude of thoſe who in ſeve-
ral
times have been eminent for new inven-
tions
and ſtrange diſcoveries, there was none
1833That the Earth may be à Planet. able to find out ſuch a Secret as this, beſides
ſome
fabulous Pythagoreans, and of late Co-
pernicus
?
Is it poſſible that the World ſhould
laſt
for above five thouſand years together,
and
yet the Inhabitants of it be ſo dull and
ſ@upid
, as to be unacquainted with its mo-
tion
?
Nay, ſhall we think that thoſe excel-
lent
Men, whom the Holy Ghoſt made uſe
of
in the penning of Scripture, who were
extraordinarily
inſpired with ſupernatural
Truths
, ſhould notwithſtanding be ſo groſ-
ly
ignorant of ſo common a matter as this?
Can we believe, if there were any ſuch thing,
that
foſhua, and fob, and David, and Solo-
mon
, &
c. ſhould know nothing of it? Cer-
tainly
it muſt needs argue a ſtrong aſſectati-
on
of Singularity, for a Man to take up any
groundleſs
fancy againſt ſuch antient and
general
Authority.
I anſwer: As we ſhould not be ſo fondly
conceited
of our ſelves, and the extraordina-
ry
Abilities of theſe preſent Ages, as to think
every
thing that is antient to be abſolute:
Or, as if it muſt needs be with Opinions, as
it
is with Clothes, where the neweſt is for
the
moſt part beſt.
So neither ſhould we be ſo
ſuperſtitiouſly
devoted to Antiquity, as to
take
up every thing for Canonical, which
drops
from the pen of aFather, or was appro-
ved
by the conſent of the Antients.
’Tis an
excellent
ſaying, Δ{εἶ} ἐλευ θέριον ἐιν{αι} τũ 11Alcinous μη Τ μέλλοτα φιλοσοφ{εἶ}ν It behoves every
one
in the ſearch of Truth, always to preſerve
aPhiloſophical
liberty:
Not to be ſo
1844That the Earth may be a Planet. to the Opinion of any Man, as to think what
ever
he ſays to be infallible.
We muſt la-
bour
to find out what things are in them-
ſelves
by our own experience, and a through
examination
of their natures, not what an-
other
ſays of them.
And if in ſuch an im-
partial
enquiry, we chance to light upon a
new
way, and that which is beſides the com-
mon
rode, this is neither our fault, nor our
unhappineſs
.
Not our fault, becauſe it did not ariſe from
Singularity
or Affectation.
Not our unhap-
pineſs
, becauſe it is rather a Priviledge to be
the
firſt in finding out ſuch Truths, as are not
diſcernable
to every common eye.
If No-
velty
ſhould always be rejected, neither
would
Arts have arrived to that perfection
wherein
now we enjoy them, nor could we
ever
hope for any future Reformation:
Though all Truth be in it ſelf Eternal; yet
in
reſpect of Mens Opinions, there is ſcarce
any
ſo antient, but had a beginning, and was
once
accounted a Novelty;
and if for this
reaſon
it had been condemned as an errour,
what
a general darkneſs and ignorance
would
then have been in the World, in com-
pariſon
of that light which now abounds;

according
to that of the Poet:
Quod ſi tam Antiquis Novitas inviſa 11 Horæt.
lib
. 2. ep. 1.
Quam nobis, quid nunc eſſet vetus aut quid habe-
Quodlegerent
tereretq;
viritim publicus uſus? (ret,
If
our Forefathers had but hated thus,
All
that were new, what had been old to us?
1855That the Earth may be a Planet. Or, how might any thing confirmed be,
For
publick uſe, by its Antiquity?
But for more full ſatisfaction of all thoſe
ſcruples
that may ariſe from the ſeeming
Novelty
or Singularity of this Opinion, I
ſhall
propoſe theſe following conſiderations.
Suppoſe it were a Novelty: Yet ’tis in
11Conſid. 1. Philoſophy, and that is made up of nothing
elſe
;
but receives addition from every days
experiment
.
True indeed, for Divinity we
have
an infallible rule that do’s plainly in-
form
us of all neceſſary Truths;
and there-
fore
the Primitive Times are of greater Au-
thority
, becauſe they were nearer to thoſe
holy
Men who were the Pen-Men of Scrip-
ture
.
But now for Philoſophy, there is no
ſuch
reaſon:
Whatever the School-Men
may
talk;
yet Ariſtotle’s works are not
neceſſarily
true, and he himſelf hath by ſuf-
ficient
Arguments proved himſelf to be lia-
ble
unto errour.
Now in this caſe, if we
ſhould
ſpeak properly, Antiquity does con-
ſiſt
in the old age of the World, not in the
youth
of it.
In ſuch Learning as may be in-
creaſed
by freſh experiments and new diſ-
co
eries:
’Tis we are the Fathers, and of
more
Authority than former Ages;
becauſe
we
have the advantage of more time than
they
had, and Truth (we ſay) is the Daugh-
ter
of Time.
However, there is nothing
in
this Opinion ſo Magiſterially propoſed,
but
the Reader may uſe his own liberty;
and if all the reaſons conſidered
1866That the Earth may be a Planet. do not ſeem convincing unto him he may
freely
reject it.
In thoſe natural points which carry with
them
any doubt or obſcurity, it is the ſafeſt
way
to ſuſpend our aſſents:
And though we
may
diſpute pro or con;
yet not to ſettle our
Opinion
on either ſide.
In weighing the Authority of others, ’tis
11Conſid. 2. not their multitude that ſhould prevail, or
their
skill in ſome things that ſhould make
them
of credit in every thing, but we ſhould
examine
what particular inſight and experi-
ence
they had in thoſe times for which they
are
cited.
Now ’tis plain, that Common
People
judge by their ſenſes;
and therefore
their
voices are altogether unfit to decide
any
Philoſophical doubt, which cannot well
be
examined or explained without Diſcourſc
and
Reaſon.
And as for the ancient Fathers,
though
they wereMen very eminent for their
holy
lives and extraordinary skill in Divini-
ty
;
yet they were moſt of them very Igno-
rant
in that part of Learning which con-
cerns
this Opinion, as appears by many of
their
groſs miſtakes in this kind, as that con-
cerning
the Antipodes, &
c. and therefore it
is
not their Opinion neither, in this buſineſs,
that
to an indifferent ſeeker of Truth will be
of
any ſtrong Authority.
But againſt this it is objected, that 22 Alex.
Roſſ
. l. 1.
ſect
. c. 8.
inſtance of the Antipodes does not argue any
ſpecial
Ignorance in theſe Learned Men:
Or,
that
they had leſs skill in ſuch human
1877That the Earth may be a Planet. than others; ſince Ariſtotle himſelf, and Pli-
ny
did deny this as well as they.
I anſwer:
1. If they did, yet this do’s make more
to
the preſent purpoſe:
For if ſuch great
Scholars
, who were ſo eminent for their
knowledge
in natural things, might yet not-
withſtanding
be groſly miſtaken in ſuch
matters
as are now evident and certain:
Why then we have no reaſon to depend
upon
their aſſertions or Authorities, as if
they
were infallible.
2. Though theſe great Naturaliſts, for
want
of ſome experience were miſtaken in
that
Opinion, whileſt they thought no place
was
habitable but the temperate Zones;
yet
it
cannot be from hence inferred, that they
denied
the poſſibility of Antipodes:
Since theſe
are
ſuch Inhabitants as live oppoſite unto us
in
the other temperate Zone;
and ’twere an
abſurd
thing to imagin that thoſe who lived
in
different Zones, can be Antipodes to one a-
nother
;
and argues that a Man did not un-
derſtand
, or elſe had forgotten that common
diſtinction
in Geography, wherein the relation
of
the Worlds Inhabitants unto one another,
are
reckoned up under theſe three heads;
An-
tæci
, Periæci, and Antipodes.
But to let this
paſs
:
’tis certain, that ſome of the Fathers did
deny
the being of any ſuch, upon other more
abſurd
grounds.
Now if ſuch as Chryfoſtom,
Lactantius
, &
c. who were noted for great
Scholars
, and ſuch too as flouriſhed in theſe
latter
times, when all human Learning
1888That the Earth may be a Planet. more generally profeſt, ſhould notwithſtand-
ing
be ſo much miſtaken in ſo obvious a mat-
ter
:
Why then may we not think that thoſe
Primitive
Saints, who were the Pen-Men of
Scripture
, and eminent above others in their
time
for Holineſs and Knowledge, might yet
be
utterly Ignorant of many Philoſophical
Truths
, which are commonly known in theſe
days
?
’Tis probable, that the Holy Ghoſt
did
inform them only with the knowledge
of
thoſe things whereof they were to be the
Pen-Men
, and that they were not better
skilled
in points of Philoſophy than others.
There were indeed ſome of them who were
ſupernaturally
indowed with human Learn-
ing
;
yet this was, becauſe they might there-
by
be fitted for ſome particular ends, which
all
the reſt were not appointed unto:
Thus
Solomon
was ſtrangely gifted with all kind of
knowledge
, in a great meaſure, becauſe he
was
to teach us by his own experience the
11Eccl. 1. 18. extreme Vanity of it, that we might not ſo
ſettle
our deſires upon it, as if it were able
to
yield us contentment.
So too the Apoſtles
were
extraordinarily inſpir’d with the
knowledge
of Languages, becauſe they were
to
preach unto all Nations.
But it will not
hence
follow, that therefore the other Holy
Pen-Men
were greater Scholars than others.
’Tis likely that Job had as much human
Learning
as moſt of them, becauſe his Book
i
, more eſpecially remarkable for lofty ex-
preſſions
, and diſcourſes of Nature;
and
yet
’tis not likely that he was
1899That the Earth may be a Planet. with all thoſe myſteries which later Ages
have
diſcovered;
becauſe when God would
convince
him of his own Folly and Igno-
rance
, he propoſes to him ſuch queſtions, as
to
him were altogether unanſwerable;
which
notwithſtanding
, any ordinary Philoſopher
in
theſe days might have reſolved:
As you
may
ſee at large in the thirty eighth Chap-
ter
of that Book.
The occaſion was this: Job having 11 Cap. 1 fore deſired that he might diſpute with the
Almighty
concerning the uprightneſs of his
own
ways, and the unreaſonableneſs of thoſe
aſſlictions
which he underwent, do’s at length
obtain
his deſire in this kind;
and God vouch-
ſafes
in this thirty eighth Chapter, to ar-
gue
the caſe with him.
Where he do’s ſhew
Job
how unfit he was to judge of the ways
of
Providence, in diſpoſing of Bleſſings and
Afflictions
, when as he was ſo Ignorant in
ordinary
matters, being not able to diſcern
the
reaſon of natural and common events.
As why the Sea ſhould be ſo bounded
22 V. 8. 10
11
.
from overflowing the Land?
What is
the
breadth of the Earth?
What is the 33Ver. 18.
Ver. 22.
ſon of the Snow or Hail?
What was the
44 V.28, 29. cauſe of the Rain or Dew, of Ice and Froſt, and the like.
By which queſtions, it ſeems
Job
was ſo utterly puzled, that he is fain af-
terwards
to humble himſelf in this acknow-
ledgment
:
I have uttered that I 55C. 42. 3. not, things too wonderful for me, which I knew
not
:
Wherefore I abhor my ſelf, and repent in
duſt
and aſhes.
19010That the Earth may be a Planet.
So that ’tis likely theſe Holy Men had not
theſe
human Arts by any ſpecial inſpiration,
but
by inſtruction and ſtudy, and other or-
dinary
means;
and therefore Moſes his skill
in
this kind is called the Learning of the E-
11Acts 7. 22. gyptians.
Now becauſe in thoſe times all Sci-
ences
were taught only in a rude and imper-
fect
manner;
therefore ’tis likely that they
alſo
had but a dark and confuſe apprehenſi-
on
of things, and were liable to the common
errours
.
And for this reaſon is it, why 22 Joſb cap.
10
. Queſt
19
.
status ( ſpeaking of Joſhua’s bidding the
Moon
ſtand ſtill as well as the Sun) ſays
Quod
forte erat imperitus circa Aſtrorum do-
ctrinam
, ſentiens ut vulgares ſentiunt:
That
perhaps
he was unskilful in Aſtronomy, ha-
ving
the ſame groſs conceit of the Heavens,
as
the vulgar had.
From all which it may be
inferred
, that the Ignorance of ſuch good
Men
, and great Scholars concerning theſe
Philoſophical
points, can be no ſufficient rea-
ſon
, why after examination we ſhould deny
them
, or doubt of their Truth.
’Tis conſiderable, that in the rudiments
33Conſid. 3. and firſt beginnings of Aſtronomy, and ſo in
ſeveral
Ages after, this Opinion hath found
many
Patrons, and thoſe too Men of eminent
note
and Learning.
Such was more eſpecial-
ly
Pythagoras, who was generally and highly
eſteemed
for his divine wit, and rare inven-
tions
;
under whoſe myſterious ſayings,
there
be many excellent Truths to be diſ-
covered
.
But againſt his Teſtimony, it is
19111That the Earth may be a Planet. objected; If Pythagoras were of this Opi-
11 Alex.
Roſſ
. l. 2. ſc.
2
. c. 10.
nion, yet his Authority ſhould not be of any
credit
, becauſe he was the Author of many
other
monſtrous abſurdities.
To this I anſwer: If a Mans errour in ſome
particulars
ſhould take away his credit for
every
thing elſe, this would aboliſh the force
of
all human Authority;
for humanum eſt er-
rare
.
Secondly, ’tis probable that many of
Pythagoras’s
ſayings which ſeem ſo abſurd,
are
not to be underſtood according to their
letter
, but in a myſtical ſenſe.
2. But he objects again, that Pythagor as
was
not of this Opinion;
and that for two
reaſons
:
Firſt, becauſe no Antient Author
that
he had read aſcribes it unto him.
Second-
ly
, it is contradictory to his other Opinions,
concerning
the Harmony that was made by
the
motion of the Heavens;
which could not
conſiſt
with this other of the Earth’s moti-
on
.
To the FirſtI anſwer: The Objector could
not
chuſe but know that this Aſſertion is by
many
Antient Authors aſcribed to that ſect,
whereof
Pythagoras was the chief.
He might
have
ſeen it expreſly in Ariſtotle himſelf:
22 De Calo.
lib
. 2. c. 13.
Οί @ υ @γέγουσι@π@μέὑτου μέσου
π~ρ
@ύχ,τ τε γιω~ ε,υ @ @ωυ ου@υ κύκλω
φερο
μζύιω ιρ@ τὸ μέσου, νύκτα τε κμέ-
ραυ
ποιν.
In which the Philoſopher does compendi-
ouſly
reckon up the three chief particu-
lars
implyed in the Opinion of the Pythago-
rians
.
Firſt, the Suns being in the Centre
19212That the Earth may be a Planet. the World. Secondly, the Earth’s annual
motion
about it, as being one of the Planets:
Thirdly, its diurnal revolution, whereby it
cauſed
day and night.
To his ſecond reaſon I anſwer: Firſt, that
Pythagor
as thought the Earth to be one of
the
Planets (as appears by Ariſtotle’s Teſti-
mony
concerning him) and to move amongſt
the
reſt.
So that his Opinion concerning
the
motion of the Heavens, is not inconſiſt-
ent
with that of the Earth.
Secondly,
but
as for the Coeleſtial Harmony, he might
perhaps
under this myſtical expreſſion,
according
to his uſual Cuſtom, ſhadow forth
unto
us that mutual proportion and Har-
monical
conſent, which he did conceive in
the
ſeveral bigneſs, diſtance, motions of
the
Orbs.
So that notwithſtanding theſe ob-
jections
, it is evident that Pythagor as was of
this
Opinion, and that his Authority may add
ſomewhat
for the confirmation of it.
Unto
him
aſlented Ariſtarchus Samius, who 11 Archi-
uredes
de
arena
nu-
mero
.
ſhed about 280 years before the Birth of our
Saviour
, and was by reaſon of this Opinion,
arraigned
for Prophanefs and Sacriledge by
the
Areopagites, becauſe he had blaſphemed
the
Deity of Veſta, affitming the Earth to
move
.
To them agreed Philolaus, Her aclides,
Pontius
, Nicetas, Syracuſanus, Ecphantus, Lu-
cippus
, and Plato himſelf (as ſome think.)
o
likewiſe
Numa Pompilius, as Plut arch relates
it
in his Life;
who in reference to this Opini-
on
, built the Temple of Veſta round, like the
Univerſe
:
In the middle of it was placed
19313That the Earth may be a Planet. perpetual veſtal Fire; by which he did repre-
ſent
the Sun in the Centre of the World.
All theſe Men were in their ſeveral times of
ſpecial
Note, as well for their extraordinary
Learning
as for this Opinion.
’Tis conſiderable, that ſince this Science of
114 Conſid. Aſtronomy hath been rais’d to any perfection,
there
have been many of the beſt skill in it,
that
have aſſented unto that aſſertion which
is
here defended.
Amongſt whom was the
Cardinal
Cuſanus, but more eſpecially Coper-
22De doctà
ignor
. lib. 2
cap
. 12.
nicus, who was a Man very exact and dili-
gent
in theſe ſtudies for above 30 years toge-
ther
, from the year 1500 to 1530, and up-
wards
:
And ſince him, moſt of the beſt A-
ſtronomers
have been of his ſide.
So that
now
, there is ſcarce any of note and skill,
who
are not Copernicus his followers;
and if
we
ſhould go to moſt voices, this Opinion
would
carry it from any other.
It would be
too
tedious to reckon up the names of thoſe
that
may be cited for it;
I will only mention
ſome
of the chief:
Such were Joachinus Rhe-
ticus
, an elegant Writer, Chriſtopherus Roth-
man
, Mestlin, a Man very eminent for his
ſingular
skill in this Science;
who though at
the
firſt he were a follower of Ptolomy, yet
upon
his ſecond and more exact thoughts,
he
concluded Copernicus to be in the right,
and
that the uſual Hypotheſis, 33 Pref. ad
Narr
at.
Rhetics
.
potiùs quàm ratione valet, do’s prevail more
by
preſcription than reaſon.
So likewiſe
Eraſmus
Reinholdus, who was the Man that
calculated
the Prutenical Tables from
19414That the Earth may be a Planet. nicus’s obſervations, and did intend to write
11Ibid. a Commentary upon his other Works, but
that
he was taken out of this Life before he
could
finiſh thoſe reſolutions.
Unto theſe
alſo
I might add the names of Gilbert, Keplar,
Gallilæus
, with ſundry others, who have much
beautified
and confirmed this Hypotheſis, with
their
new inventions.
Nay, I may ſafely af-
firm
, that amongſt the variety of thoſe Opi-
nions
that are in Aſtronomy, there are more (of
thoſe
which have skill in it) that are of this
Opinion
, not only than any other, but
than
all the reſt put together.
So that now
it
is a greater Argument of Singularity to
oppoſe
it.
’Tis probable, that many other of the
225 Conſid. Antients would have aſſented unto this Opi-
nion
, if they had been acquainted with thoſe
experiments
which later times have found
out
for the confirmation of it:
And there-
fore
Rheticus and Keplar do ſo often 33In Nar-
ratione
.
that Ariſtotle were now alive again.
Queſti-
onleſs
he was ſo rational and ingenious a
44Myſt.
Coſmogr
.
cap
. 1. Item
pref
. ad 4.
1
. Aſtr. Co-
pern
.
Man (not half ſo obſtinate as many of his
followers
) that upon ſuch probabilities as
theſe
, he would quickly have renounced his
ownPrinciples
, &
have come over to this ſide:
For in one place, having propoſed ſome
queſtions
about the Heavens, which were
55de Cal. l. 2.
c
. 12.
not eaſie to be reſolved:
He ſets down this
rule
, that in difficulties, a Man may take a
liberty
to ſpeak that which ſeems moſt like-
ly
to him:
And in ſuch caſes, an aptneſs to
gueſs
at ſome reſolution, for the
19515That the Earth may be a Planet. of our Philoſophical thirſt, does deſerve ra-
ther
to be ſtiled by the name of Modeſty,
than
Boldneſs.
And in another place, he
11Met. lib.
12
. cap. 8.
refers the Reader to the different Opinions
of
Aſtronomers, adviſing him to examin their
ſeveral
tenents, as well Eudoxus as Calippus;
and to entertain that (not which is moſt an-
tient
, but) which is moſt exact and agree-
able
to Reaſon.
And as for Ptolomy, ’tis his
22Alm. lib.
13
. cap. 2.
counſel, that we ſhould endeavour to frame
ſuch
ſuppoſitions of the Heavens, as might
be
more ſimple, being void of all ſuperflui-
ties
:
And he confeſſes, that his Hypotheſis had
many
implications in it, together with ſun-
dry
intricate and unlikely turnings;
and
therefore
in the ſame place, he ſeems to ad-
moniſh
us, that we ſhould not be too confi-
dent
the Heavens were really in the ſame
Form
, wherein Aſtronomers did ſuppoſe
them
.
So that ’tis likely, ’twas his chief in-
tent
to propoſe unto us ſuch a frame of the
Cœleſtial
Bodies, from which we might, in
ſome
meaſure, conceive of their different ap-
pearances
;
and according to which, we
might
be able to calculate their motions.
But
now
, ’tis Copernicus his endeavour, to pro-
pound
unto us, the true natural Cauſes of
theſe
ſeveral Motions, and Appearances:
It was the intent of the one, to ſettle the
Imagination
;
and of the other, to ſatisfie the
judgment
.
So, that we have no reaſon to
doubt
of his aſſent unto this Opinion, if he
had
but clearly underſtood all the grounds
of
it.
19616That the Earth may be a Planet.
’Tis reported of Clavius, that when lying
upon
his Death-bed, he heard the firſt News
of
thoſe Difcoveries which were made by
Gallilæus
his Glaſs, he brake forth into theſe
words
:
Videre Aſtronomos, quo pacto conſtituen-
di
ſunt orbes Cœleſtes, ut hœc Phœnomena ſalvari
poſſint
:
That it did behove Aſtronomers to
conſider
of ſome other Hypotheſis, beſide that
of
Ptolomy, whereby they might ſalve all thoſe
new
appearances.
Intimating that this old
one
, which formerly he had defended, would
not
now ſerve the turn:
And doubtleſs, if he
had
been informed how congruous all theſe
might
have been unto the Opinion of Coper-
nicus
, he would quickly have turned on that
ſide
.
’Tis conſiderable, that amongſt the
followers
of Copernicus, there are ſcarce any,
who
were not formerly againſt him;
and
ſuch
, as at firſt, had been throughly
ſeaſoned
with the Principles of Ariſtotle;
in
which
, for the moſt part, they have no leſs
skill
, than thoſe who are ſo violent in the
defence
of them.
Whereas on the contrary,
there
are very few to be found amongſt the
followers
of Ariſtotle and Ptolomy, that have
read
any thing in Copernicus, or do fully un-
derſtand
the Grounds of his Opinion;
and I
think
, not any, who having been once ſetled
with
any ſtrong aſſent on this ſide, that have
afterwards
revolted from it.
Now if we do
but
ſeriouſly weigh with our ſelves, that ſo
many
ingenious, conſidering Men, ſhould
reject
that Opinion which they were nurſed
up
in, and which is generally approved as
19717That the Earth may be a Planet. truth; and that, for the embracing of ſuch a
Paradox
as is condemned in Schools, and
commonly
cried down, as being abſurd and
ridiculous
:
I ſay, If a Man do but well con-
ſider
all this, he muſt needs conclude, that
there
is ſome ſtrong evidence for it to be
found
out by examination;
and that in all
probability
, this is the righter ſide.
’Tis probable, that moſt of thoſe Authors
117 Conſid. who have oppoſed this Opinion, ſince it hath
been
conſirmed by new Diſcoveries, were
ſtirred
up thereunto by ſome of theſe three
inſufficient
Grounds.
1. An over-fond and partial conceit of
their
proper Inventions.
Every Man is na-
turally
more affected to his own Brood, than
to
that of which another is the Author;
though perhaps it may be more agreeable to
reaſon
.
’Tis very difficult for any one, in
the
ſearch of Truth, to find in himſelf ſuch
an
indifferency, as that his Judgment is not
at
all ſway’d, by an overweening affection
unto
that which is proper unto himſelf.
And
this
perhaps might be the firſt reaſon that
moved
the noble Tycho, with ſo much heat,
to
oppoſe Copernicus, that ſo he might the
better
make way for the ſpreading of that
Hypotheſis
, which was of his own invention.

To
this I might likewiſe refer that Opinion
of
Origanus, and Mr.
Carpenter, who attri-
bute
to the Earth, only a diurnal Revolution.

It
does more eſpecially concern thoſe Men
that
are Leaders of ſeveral ſides, to beat
down
any that ſhould oppoſe them.
19818That the Earth may be a Planet.
2. A ſervile and ſuperſtitious fear of de-
rogating
from the Authority of the Anci-
ents
, or oppoſing that meaning of Scripture
phraſes
, wherein the ſuppoſed infallible
Church
hath for a long time underſtood
them
.
’Tis made part of the new Creed,
ſet
forth by Pius the Fourth, 1564.
That no
Man
ſhould aſſent unto any interpretation of
Scripture
, which is not approved of by the
Authority
of the Fathers.
And this is the
reaſon
why the Jeſuits, who are otherwife
the
greateſt affectors of thoſe Opinions,
which
ſeem to be new and ſubtil, do yet
forbear
to ſay any thing in defence of this;
but rather take all occaſions to inveigh a-
gainſt
it.
One of them does 11Serrari-
us
Com-
me
n in
J
oſ. c. 10.
Queſt
. 14.
condemn it for a Hereſy.
And ſince him,
it
hath been called in by two Seſſions of the Cardinals, as being an Opinion both ab-
ſurd
and dangerous.
And therefore like-
22So Lipſius
Phiſiol
l.2.
wiſe do they puniſh it, by caſting the De-
33An. Dom.
1616
. item
1633
.
fenders of it into the Pope’s trueſt Purga-
tory
, the Inquiſition:
But yet neither theſe
Councels
, nor any (that I know of) ſince
them
, have proceeded to ſuch a peremptory
cenſure
of it, as to conclude it a Hereſy:
fearing perhaps, leſt a more exact examina-
tion
, and the diſcovery of future times, ſind-
ing
it to be an undeniable Truth, it might
redound
to the prejudice of their Church,
and
its Infallibility.
And therefore he that
is
moſt bitter againſt it, in the heat and vio-
lence
of Oppoſition, will not call it a Here-
ſy
:
the worſt that he dares ſay of it,
19919That the Earth may be a Planet. That it is, Opinio temeraria, quæ altero ſal-
11Fromon-
dus
Anta-
riſt
cap. 5.
tem pede intr avit Hæreſios limen;
A raſh Opi-
nion
, and bordering upon Hereſy.
Though
unto
this likewiſe he was incited, by the ea-
gerneſs
of Diſputation, and a deſire of Vi-
ctory
;
for it ſeems many eminent Men of
that
Church before him, were a great deal
more
mild and moderate in their cenſures
of
it.
Paul the Third, was not ſo much offended
at
Copernicus, when he dedicated his Work
unto
him.
The Cardinal of Cuſa, does expreſly
maintain
this Opinion.
Schombergius, the Cardinal of Capua, did,
with
much importunity, and great approba-
tion
, beg of Copernicus the Commentaries
that
he writ in this kind.
And it ſeems the
Fathers
of the Council of Trent, were not
ſuch
conſident Defenders of Ptolemy’s Hy-
potheſis
againſt Copernicus, as many now are.
For ſpeaking of thoſe intricate Subtilties,
which
the Fancies of Men had framed to
maintain
the practice of the Church, they
compared
them to Aſtronomers, (who (ſay
they
) do fain Excentricks and Epicycles, and
ſuch
Engines of the Orbs, to ſave the Phæ-
nomena
;
though they know there are no ſuch
things
.
But now, becauſe this Opinion of
Copernicus
, in later times, hath been ſo ſtrict-
ly
forbidden, and puniſhed, it will concern
thoſe
of that Religion, to take heed of med-
ling
in the defence of it, but rather to ſub-
mit
the liberty of their Reaſon, unto
20020That the Earth may be a Planet. Command of their Superiors, and (which
is
very abſurd) even in natural Queſtions,
not
to aſſent unto any thing, but what Au-
thority
ſhall allow of.
3. A judging of things by Sence, rather
than
by Diſcourſe and Reaſon:
a tying of
the
meaning of Scripture, to the Letter of
it
;
and from thence concluding Philoſophi-
cal
Points, together with an ignorance of
all
thoſe grounds and probabilities in Aſtro-
nomy
, upon which this Opinion is bottomed.
And this, in all likelihood, is the reaſon why
ſome
Men, who in other things perhaps are
able
Scholars, do write ſo vehemently againſt
it
:
and why the common People in general
do
cry it down, as being abſurd and ridicu-
lous
.
Under this head I might refer the op-
poſition
of Mr.
Fuller, Al. Roſſ, & c.
But now, no prejudice that may ariſe from
the
bare Authority of ſuch Enemies as theſe,
will
be liable to ſway the judgment of an
indifferent
conſidering Man;
and I doubt
not
but that he who will throughly weigh
with
himſelf theſe Particulars that are here
propounded
, may find ſome ſatisfaction for
theſe
Arguments, which are taken from the
ſeeming
Novelty and Singularity of this
Opinion
.
20121That the Earth may be a Planet.
PROP. II.
That there is not any place in Holy Scrip-
# ture, from which (being rightly under-
# ſtood) we may infer the Diurnal Mo-
# tion of the Sun or Heavens.
IT were happy for us, if we could exempt
Scripture
from Philoſophical Controver-
ſies
:
if we could be content to let it be per-
fect
for that end unto which it was intended,
for
a Rule of our Faith and Obedience;
and
not
ſtretch it alſo to be a Judg of ſuch na-
tural
Truths, as are to be found out by our
own
induſtry and experience.
Though the
Holy
Ghoſt could eaſily have given us a full
reſolution
of all ſuch particulars;
yet he hath
11Eccleſ. 3.
10
, 11.
left this travel to the Sons of Men to be exerciſed
therewith
;
Mundum reliquit diſputationibus
Hominum
;
that being buſied, for the moſt
part
, in an inquiſition after the Creatures,
we
might find the leſs leiſure to wait upon
our
Luſt, or ſerve our more ſinful Incli-
nations
.
But however, becauſe our Adverſaries ge-
nerally
do ſo much inſult in thoſe Argu-
ments
that may be drawn from hence;
and
more
eſpecially, becauſe Pineda doth for this
22Comment.
in
Eccleſ.
c
. 1. v 4.
reaſon, with ſo many bitter and empty re-
proaches
, revile our learned
20222That the Earth may be a Planet. Dr. Gilbert, in that renewing of this Opi-
nion
, he omitted an anſwer to the Scripture-
Expreſſions
:
therefore ’tis requiſite, That
in
the proſecuting this Diſcourſe, we ſhould
lay
down ſuch ſatisfaction, as may clear all
Doubts
that may be taken thence:
eſpeci-
ally
ſince the prejudice that may ariſe from
the
miſapprehenſion of thoſe Scripture-
Phraſes
, may much diſable the Reader from
looking
on any other Argument, with an
equal
and indifferent mind.
The places that ſeem to oppoſe this, are
of
two kinds.
Firſt, Such as imply a Mo-
tion
in the Heavens:
Or, ſecondly, ſuch as
ſeem
to expreſs a Reſt and Immobility in the
Earth
.
Thoſe of the firſt kind ſeem to bear in
them
the cleareſt evidence, and therefore
are
more inſiſted on by our Adverſaries.
They may be referred unto theſe three
Heads
.
1. All thoſe Scriptures where there is any
mention
made of the Riſing or Setting of the
Sun
or Stars.
2. That Story in Joſhua, where the Sun
@@anding
ſtill, is reckoned for a Miracle.
3. That other Wonder in the days of
Hezekiah
, when the Sun went back ten de-
grees
in the Dial of Ahaz, All which places
do
ſeem to conclude, That the Diurnal Mo-
tion
is cauſed by the Heavens.
To this I anſwer in general;
That the Holy Ghoſt, in theſe Scripture-
expreſſions
, is pleaſed to accommodate
20323That the Earth may be a Planet. ſelf unto the conceit of the Vulgar, and the
uſual
Opinion:
whereas, if in the more
proper
phraſe it had been ſaid, That the
Earth
did riſe and ſet;
or, that the Earth
ſtood
ſtill, &
c. the People who had been
unacquainted
with that ſecret in Philoſophy,
would
not have underſtood the meaning of
it
, and therefore it was convenient, that they
ſhould
be ſpoken unto in their own Lan-
guage
.
Ay, but you will reply, It ſhould ſeem more
likely
, if there had been any ſuch thing,
that
the Holy Ghoſt ſhould uſe the trueſt
expreſſions
:
for then he would at the ſame
time
have informed them of the thing, and
reformed
them in an error:
ſince his Autho-
rity
alone had been ſufficient to have recti-
fied
the Miſtake.
I anſwer: 1. Though it were, yet ’tis be-
ſide
the chief ſcope of thoſe place, to inſtruct
us
in any Philoſophical Points, as hath
been
proved in the former Book ;
eſpecially
when
theſe things are neither neceſſary in
themſelves
, nor do neceſſarily induce to a
more
full underſtanding of that which is the
main
buſineſs of thoſe Scriptures.
But now
the
People might better conceive the mean-
ing
of the Holy Ghoſt, when he does con-
form
himſelf unto their Capacities and Opi-
nions
, than when he talks exactly of things
in
ſuch a proper phraſe, as is beyond their
reach
:
And therefore ’tis ſaid in Iſaiah, I
am
the Lord, which teacheth thee utilia, profi-
table
things:
where the gloſs has it, non
20424That the Earth may be a Planet. tilia, not ſuch curioſities of Nature as are
not
eaſily apprehended.
2. ’Tis not only beſides that which is the
chief
purpoſe of theſe places, but it might
happen
alſo to be ſomewhat oppoſite unto
it
.
For Men being naturally unapt to be-
lieve
any thing that ſeems contrary to their
ſenſes
, might upon this begin to queſtion
the
Authority of that Book which affirmed
it
, or at leaſt to wreſt Scripture ſome wrong
way
, to force it to ſome other ſence which
might
be more agreeable to their own falſe
Imagination
.
Tertullian tells us of 11* Præſcript
cap
. 17.
Hereticks, who when they were plainly con-
futed
out of any Scripture, would preſently
accuſe
thoſe Texts or Books to be Fallible,
and
of no Authority;
and rather yield
Scripture
to be erroneous, than forgo thoſe
Tenents
for which they thought there was
ſo
good reaſon.
So likewiſe might it have
been
in theſe Points, which ſeem to bear in
them
ſo much contradiction to the ſenſes
and
common opinion:
and therefore ’tis
excellent
advice ſet down by S.
Auſtin; 22* InGeneſ.
Addit
l. 2.
in
fine.
Quod nibil credere de re obſcurá temere debe-
mus
, ne forte quod postea veritas patefecerit,
quamvis
libris ſanctis, ſive Teſtamenti veteris,
ſive
novi, nullo modo eſſe poſſit adverſum, ta-
men
propter amorem noſtri erroris oderimus:
That we ſhould not haſtily ſettle our Opi-
nions
concerning any obſcure matter, leſt
afterwards
, the Truth being diſcovered,
(which however it may ſeem, cannot be
repugnant
to any thing in Scripture)
20525That the Earth may be a Planet. ſhould hate that, out of love to the Error
that
we have before entertained.
A little
reading
may inform us how theſe Texts have
been
abuſed to ſtrange and unmeant Alle-
gories
, which have mentioned any natural
Truth
in ſuch a manner as was not agree-
able
to Mens Conceits.
And beſides, if the
Holy
Ghoſt had propounded unto us any
Secrets
in Philoſophy, we ſhould have been
apt
to be ſo buſied about them, as to neg-
lect
other Matters of greater importance.
And therefore Saint Auſtin propoſing the
11Ibid. cap. 9 Queſtion, What ſhould be the reaſon why
the
Scripture does not clearly ſet down any
thing
concerning the Nature, Figure, Mag-
nitude
, and Motion of the Heavenly Orbs?
he anſwers it thus: The Holy Ghoſt being
to
deliver more neceſſary Truths, would
not
inſert theſe, leſt Men, according to the
pravity
of their Diſpoſitions, ſhould neglect
the
more weighty Matters, and beſtow their
thoughts
about the ſpeculative natural
Points
, which were leſs needful.
So that it
might
ſeem more convenient, that the Scrip-
ture
ſhould not meddle with the revealing
of
theſe unlikely Secrets, eſpecially when
it
is to deliver unto us many other Myſte-
ries
of greater neceſſity, which ſeem to be
directly
oppoſite to our ſenſe and reaſon.

And
therefore, I ſay, the Holy Ghoſt might
purpoſely
omit the treating of theſe Philo-
ſophical
Secrets, till time and future diſco-
very
, might with leiſure ſettle them in the
opinion
of others:
As he is pleaſed, in
20626That the Earth may be a Planet. things of a higher kind, to apply himſelf
unto
the Infirmity of our Apprehenſions, by
being
repreſented, as if he were a humane
Nature
, with the parts and paſſions of a
Man
.
So in theſe things likewiſe, that he
might
deſcend to our Capacities, does he
vouchſafe
to conform his Expreſſions, un-
to
the error and miſtake of our Judg-
ments
.
But before we come to a further illuſtra-
tion
, let us a little examine thoſe particular
Scriptures
, which are commonly urged to
prove
the motion of the Sun or Heavens.
Theſe (as was ſaid) might be diſtributed
under
theſe three Heads.
1. Thoſe places which mention the Ri-
ſing
or Setting of the Sun, as that in the
Pſalm, The Sun, like a Bridegroom, 11* Pſal. 19.
5
, 6.
out of his Chamber, and rejoiceth as a Gyant to
run
his Race:
His going forth is from the end
of
Heaven, and his Circuit unto the end of it,
and
there is nothing bid from the heat thereof.
22Ecclef. 1. 5. And that in Eccleſiaſtes, The Sun ariſeth, and
the
Sun goeth down, &
c.
In which Scriptures, we may obſerve di-
vers
Phraſes that are evidently ſpoken, in
reference
to the appearance of things, and
the
falſe opinion of the Vulgar.
And there-
fore
'tis not altogether unlikely, That this
which
they ſeem to affirm concerning the
Motion
of the Heavens, ſhould alſo be un-
derſtood
in the ſame ſenſe.
The Sun like a Bridegroom cometh out of his
Chamber
;
alluding perhaps unto the
20727That the Earth may be a Planet. of ignorant People, as if it took reſt all the
while
it was abſent from us, and came out
of
its Chamber, when it aroſe.
And rejoiceth as a Gyant to run his Race; be-
cauſe
in the morning it appears bigger than
at
other times;
and therefore in reference
to
this appearance, may then be compared
unto
a Giant.
His going forth is from the end of Heaven,
and
his Circuit unto the ends of it.
Alluding
again
unto the opinion of the Vulgar:
who
not
apprehending the roundneſs of the Hea-
vens
, do conceive it to have two ends;
one
where
the Sun riſeth, the other where it
ſetteth
.
And there is nothing bid from the heat there-
of
:
ſpeaking ſtill in reference to the com-
mon
miſtake, as if the Sun were actually
hot
in it ſelf;
and as if the heat of the
Weather
were not generated by reflection,
but
did immediately proceed from the body
of
the Sun.
So likewiſe, for that in Eccleſiaſtes, where
’tis
ſaid, The Sun riſeth, and the Sun goeth
down
, &
c. Which phraſes being properly
underſtood
, do import, that he is ſometimes
in
a higher place than at others:
where-
as
, in a circumference, there is no place
higher
or lower, each part being at the ſame
diſtance
from the Centre, which is the bot-
tom
.
But now underſtand the phraſe in
reference
to the Sun's appearance, and then
we
grant that he does ſeem ſometimes to
riſe
, and ſometimes to go down,
20828That the Earth may be a Planet. in reference to the Horizon, (which com-
mon
People apprehend to be the bottom,
and
in the utmoſt bounds of it to join with
the
Heavens) the Sun does appear in the
Morning
to riſe up from it, and in the
Evening
to go down unto it.
Now, I ſay,
becauſe
the Holy Ghoſt, in the manner of
theſe
expreſſions, does ſo plainly allude unto
vulgar
Errors, and the falſe appearance of
things
:
therefore 'tis not without probabi-
lity
, that he ſhould be interpreted in the
ſame
ſenſe, when he ſeems to imply a mo-
tion
in the Sun or Heavens.
2. The ſecond place, was that relation in
Joſhua
;
where 'tis mentioned as a Miracle,
That
the Sun did ſtand ſtill.
And Joſhua
11Joſh. 10.
12
, 14,
Galslæus

maintains

the
literal
ſenſe
of
this
place;
towards

the
end of
theat
trea-
tiſe
, which
he
calls
Nov
. An-
tig
. pat.
doctrina
.
ſaid, Sun, ſtand thou ſtill upon Gibeon, and
thou
Moon in the Valley of Ajalon.
So the
Sun
ſtood still in the midst of Heaven, and
haſted
not to go down about a whole day.
And
there
was no day like that, before it, or after
it
.
In which place likewiſe, there are di-
vers
phraſes wherein the Holy Ghoſt does
not
expreſs things according to their true
nature
, and as they are in themſelves;
but
according
to their appearances, and as
they
are conceived in common opinion.
As,
(I.) When he ſays, Sun, ſtand thou ſtill upoæ
Gibeon
, or over Gibeon.
Now the whole
Earth
being ſo little in compariſon to the
body
of the Sun, and but as a Point, in re-
ſpect
of that Orb wherein the Sun is ſuppo-
ſed
to move;
and Gibeou being, as it
20929That the Earth may be a Planet. but a Point of this Globe of Earth: therefore
the
words cannot be underſtood properly,
but
according to appearance.
'Tis proba-
11Toſtat. irs
locum
.
Quaſt
. 16,
17
.
Arias

Montanus

in
locum.
ble that Joſhua was then at Azecha, a little
Eaſt
from Gibeon, and the Sun being ſome-
what
beyond the Meridian, did ſeem unto
him
, as he was in that place, to be over
againſt
Gibeon;
and in reference to this ap-
pearance
, and vulgar conceit, does he com-
mand
it to ſtand ſtill upon that place.
(2.) And ſo, ſecondly, for that other ex-
preſſion
;
And thou Moon in the Valley of Aja-
lon
.
This Planet was now a little Eaſt from
the
Sun, it being about three or four days
old
, as Commentators gueſs.
Ajalon was
22Toſtat: it.
Quæſt
. 18.
Serrarius

in
Joſh. IO.
Quæſt
. 21,
22
.
three miles from Gibeon Eaſtward, and Fo-
ſhua
commanded the Moon to ſtand ſtill
there
;
becauſe unto him it did then ſeem to
be
over againſt that Valley;
whereas, ’tis cer-
tain
, if he had been there himſelf, it would
ſtill
have ſeemed to be as much diſtant from
him
.
Juſt as Men commonly ſpeak in ſhew-
ing
another the Stars;
we point to a Star
over
ſuch a Chimney, or ſuch a Tree, be-
cauſe
to us it appears ſo;
whereas the Star
in
it ſelf is not ſenſibly more over them, than
it
is over us.
So that in this phraſe likewiſe
the
Holy Ghoſt doth conform himſelf unto
the
appearance of things, and our groſſer
conceit
.
(3.) And the Sun ſtood ſtill in the midſt of
Heaven
.
Now to ſpeak properly, and as
the
thing is in it ſelf, Heaven has no midſt
but
the Centre;
and therefore, this
21030That the Earth may be a Planet. muſt be interpreted in reference to the opi-
nion
of the Vulgar, and by the midſt of
Heaven
, we are to underſtand ſuch a place
as
was not very near to either of the ends,
the
Eaſt or Weſt.
(4.) And there was no day like that, before it,
or
after it:
Which words are not to be un-
derſtood
abſolutely, for there are always
longer
days under the Poles:
but in reſpect
to
the opinion of the Vulgar, that is, there
was
never any day ſo long which theſe igno-
rant
People knew of.
3. As for this laſt place, concerning the
Sun
's returning ten degrees in the Dial of
112 King 20.
II
.
Iſa
. 38. 8.
Ahaz;
I think it may probably be affirmed,
That
it is to be underſtood only concerning
the
Shadow:
which though it do neceſſarily
happen
in all Horizontal Dials, for any La-
titude
betwixt the Tropicks:
And ſo con-
ſequently
in all Declining Dials, the Ele-
vation
of whoſe Pole is leſs than the Sun's
greateſt
Declination;
as Clavius, de Horol.
cap. 21. obſerves: Yet the Circumſtances of
this
relation in Scripture, makes the Event
to
differ from that other which is common
and
natural;
which againſt its nature did
ſeem
to go backwards, when as the Sun it
ſelf
was not in the leaſt manner altered from
its
uſual courſe.
Of this opinion were A-
barbinell
, Arius Montanus, Burgenſis, Vatablas
Sanctius
, &
c.
The Reaſons for it may be theſe:
1. The Miracle is propoſed only concern-
ing
the Shadow;
Wilt thou that the
21131That the Earth may be a Planet. ſhall aſcend or return by ten degrees? There
being
not in the offer of this Wonder, any
the
leaſt mention made concerning the Sun's
going
backwards.
2. 'Tis likely we ſhould have had ſome
intimation
concerning the extraordinary
length
of the Day, as it is in that of Joſhua;
but in this relation, the chief matter that
the
ſtory takes notice of, is the alteration
of
the Shadow.
3. Had it been by the ſuppoſed return of
the
Sun's Body, this had been a greater Mi-
racle
, than thoſe which were performed up-
on
more ſolemn occaſions;
it had been more
wonderful
than its ſeeming reſt in Joſhua's
time
;
than the ſupernatural Eclipſe at our
Saviour
's Death, when the Moon was in the
full
.
And then it is not likely, that the
Holy
Ghoſt, in relating of this Miracle,
ſhould
chiefly inſiſt in expreſſing how the
Shadow
returned, and that only in the Di-
al
of Ahaz.
4. This Sign did not appear in the Sun it
ſelf
;
becauſe in 2 Chron. 32. 31. 'tis ſaid,
That
the Embaſſadors of the King of Babylon
did
come unto Hezekiah, to enquire of the Won-
der
that was done in the Land;
and therefore
it
ſeems the Miracle did not conſiſt in any
change
of the Heavens.
5. If it had been in the Sun, it would
have
been as well diſcerned in other parts
of
the World, as in the Land of Judæa.
And then,
21232That the Earth may be a Planet.
1. What need the King of Babylon ſend
thither
to enquire after it?
If you reply,
becauſe
it was occaſioned by Hezekiah's Re-
covery
.
I anſwer, ’Tis not likely that the
Heathens
would ever believe ſo great a Mi-
racle
ſhould be wrought, meerly for a Sign
of
one Man's recovery from a Diſeaſe;
but
would
rather be apt to think that it was
done
for ſome more remarkable purpoſe,
and
that by ſome of their own Gods, unto
whom
they attributed a far greater power,
than
unto any other.
'Tis more probable,
that
they might hear ſome flying Rumour
of
a Miracle that was ſeen in Judea;
which,
becauſe
it hapned only in Hezekiab's Houſe
and
Dial, and that too upon his recovery
from
a dangerous ſickneſs, they might be
more
apt to believe that it was a ſign of
it
.
2. Why have we no mention made of it
in
the Writings of the Ancients?
It is no
way
likely, that ſo great a Miracle as this
was
(if it were in the Sun) ſhould have
been
paſſed over in ſilence;
Eſpecially, ſince
it
hapned in thoſe later Times, when there
were
many Heathen Writers that flouriſhed
in
the World, Heſiod, Archilochus, Symo-
nides
;
and not long after, Homer, with di-
vers
others;
and yet none of them have the
leaſt
mention of any ſuch Prodigy.
We
have
many relations of Matters that were
leſs
obſervable, which were done about that
Time
;
the Hiſtory of Numa Pompilius, Gy-
ges
;
the fight betwixt the three
21333That the Earth may be a Planet. with divers ſuch ſtories. And 'tis ſcarce
credible
, that this ſhould have been omitted
amongſt
the reſt.
Nay, we have (as many gueſs) ſome
hints
from prophane Antiquity, of the Mira-
cle
wrought by Joſhua.
Unto which, ’tis
thought
, the Ancients did allude, in the Fa-
ble
of Phaëton, when the Sun was ſo irregu-
lar
in his courſe, that he burnt ſome part of
the
World.
And queſtionleſs then, this
whith
hapned in later Times, would not
have
been ſo wholly forgotten.
'Tis an Ar-
gument
urged by Origen, That the 11* Tract it.
35
. in Mat.
at our Saviour's Paſſion was not univerſal,
becauſe
no prophane Author of thoſe times
mentions
it.
Which Conſequence is the ve-
ry
ſame with that which is urged in this
caſe
:
But by the way, his Antecedent was
falſe
, ſince Tertullian affirms, That it 22+ Apolog @.
cap
. 21.
recorded among the Roman Annals.
Now, as for that ſtory in Herodotus, where
33Lib. 2. A. after he had related the flight of Senacherib,
he
tells us, how the Sun did, four times in
the
ſpace of 10340 Years, invert his courſe,
and
riſe in the Weſt;
which would ſeem ſo
unto
other Nations, if he had only returned,
as
many conclude, from this Scripture.
As
for
this ſtory, (I ſay) it cannot well be ur-
ged
as pertinent to the preſent buſineſs, be-
cauſe
it ſeems to have reference unto Times
that
never were.
So that all theſe things being well conſi-
dered
, we ſhall find it more probable,
21434That the Earth may be a Planet. this Miracle doth conſiſt in the return of the
Shadow
.
If you Object, That the Scripture does
11Iſa. 38. 8.
Jona
. 4. 8.
expreſly ſay, The Sun it ſelf returned ten
degrees
.
I anſwer, 'Tis a frequent manner
of
ſpeech in Scripture, to put the Cauſe for
the
Effect;
as that in Jonas, where 'tis ſaid,
That
the Sun did beat upon the Head of Jonas;
22Jona 4. 8. that is, the Beams of the Sun. So that of
the
Pſalmiſt, The Sun ſhall not ſmite thee by
33Pſal. 121.
6
.
Day;
that is, the heat which proceeds from
the
Sun's reflection.
In the ſame ſenſe may
the
phraſe be underſtood in this place;
and
the
Sun may be ſaid to return back, becauſe
the
Light, which is the effect of it, did ſeem
to
do ſo;
or rather, becauſe theShadow, which
is
the effect of that, did change its courſe.
This later Scripture then, will not at all
make
to the preſent purpoſe:
as for thoſe
of
the two former kinds, I have already an-
ſwered
, That they are ſpoken in reference
to
the appearance of things, and vulgar Opi-
nion
.
For the further illuſtration of which,
I
ſhall endeavour to confirm theſe two parti-
culars
.
1. That the Holy Ghoſt, in many other
places
of Scripture, does accommodate his
Expreſſions
, unto the error of our Conceits;
and does not ſpeak of divers things as they
are
in themſelves, but as they appear unto
us
.
Therefore 'tis not unlikely, that theſe
Phraſes
alſo may be liable unto the ſame in-
terpretation
.
21535That the Earth may be a Planet.
2. That divers Men have fallen into great
Abſurdities
, whilſt they have looked for the
Grounds
of Philoſophy, from the words of
Scripture
;
and therefore it may be dange-
rous
, in this Point alſo, to adhere ſo cloſely
unto
the Letter of the Text.
PROP. III.
That the Holy Ghoſt, in many places of
# Scripture, does plainly conform his Ex-
# preſſions unto the Errors of our Con-
# ceits;
and does not ſpeak of divers
# things as they are in themſelves, but as
# they appear unto us.
THere is not any particular by which
Philoſophy
hath been more endamaged,
than
the ignorant ſuperſtition of ſome Men,
who
, in ſtating the Controverſies of it, do
ſo
cloſely adhere unto the meer words of
Scripture
.
Quamplurima occurrunt in libris
ſacris
ad natur am pertinentia, &
c. They are
the
words of Vatleſius.
‘There are 11Proa@.
ad
Phil.
Sacram
.
dry things in Holy Writ, concerning Na-
tural Points, which moſt Men think are not
ſo to be underſtood, as if the Holy Ghoſt
did intend to unfold unto us any thing in
that kind :
but referring all to the ſalva-
tion of our Souls, does ſpeak of other mat-
ters according to common Opinion.
21636That the Earth may be a Planet. a little after, Ego divina hæc eloquia, & c.
I for my part am perſuaded, that theſe
Divine Treatiſes, were not written by the
Holy and Inſpired Pen-Men, for the Inter-
pretation of Philoſophy, becauſe God left
ſuch things to be found out by Mens labour
and induſtry.
But yet, whatſoever is in
them concerning nature, is moſt true;
as
proceeding from the God of Nature, from
whom nothing could be hid.
And que-
ſtionleſs
, all thoſe things which the Scrip-
ture
does deliver concerning any natural
Point
, cannot be but certain and infallible,
being
underſtood in that ſenſe, wherein
they
were firſt intended;
but now that it
does
ſpeak ſometimes according to common
opinion
, rather than the true nature of the
things
themſelves, was intimated before;

wherefore
(by the way) Fromondus 11Veſt.
Trac
. 3.
cap
. 2.
triumph upon the latter part of this Quo-
tation
, is but vain, and to no purpoſe.
'Tis
a
good Rule ſet down by a learned 22Sanctius
sniſa
. 13.5
Item
in
Zachar
.
lib
.9.num.
45
.
mentator, to be obſerved in the interpreta-
tion
of Scripture:
Scriptura ſacra ſapè non
tam
ad veritatem ipſam, quam ad hominum opi
nionem
, ſermonem accommodat;
that it does
many
times accommodate its expreſſions,
not
ſo much to the Truth it ſelf, as to Mens
Opinions
.
And in this ſenſe is that Speech
of
Gregory concerning Images and Pictures,
attributed
by Calvin unto the Hiſtory 33Comment
in
Gen.1.
the Creation, viz.
Librum eſſe idiotarum;
That it is a Book for the ſimpler and igno-
rant
People.
For it being written to
21737That the Earth may be a Planet. form them, as well as others, 'tis requiſite
that
it ſhould uſe the moſt plain and eaſy
expreſſions
.
To this purpoſe likewiſe is that
of
Merſennus, Mille ſunt Scripturæ loca, &
c. 11In Gen.
c
. 1. v. 10.
art
. 6.
V
. Hiero.
in
Fer. 28.
Aquinas

in
Job 25.
7
There are very many places of Scripture,
which are not to be interpreted according
to the Letter;
and that for this reaſon,
becauſe God would apply himſelf unto our
capacity and ſenſe:
Preſertim in iis, quæ
ad
res naturales, oculiſque ſubjectas pertinent;
more eſpecially in thoſe things which con-
cern
Nature, and are ſubject to our Eyes.

And
therefore in the very ſame place, tho
he
be eager enough againſt Copernicus, yet
he
concludes that Opinion not to be an He-
reſy
;
becauſe (ſaith he) thoſe Scriptures
which
ſeem to oppoſeit, are not ſo evident,
but
that they may be capable of another In-
terpretation
:
Intimating, that it was not
unlikely
they ſhould be underſtood in refe-
rence
to outward appearance, and common
opinion
.
And that this manner of ſpeech is
frequently
uſed in many other places of
Scripture
, may be eaſily manifeſt from theſe
following
Examples.
Thus tho the Moon
may
be proved, by infallible obſervation, to
be
leſs than any of the viſible Stars;
yet
becauſe
of its appearance, and vulgar opi-
nion
, therefore doth the Scripture, in Com-
22Gen.1. 16.
Pſ
. 136. 7.
pariſon to them, call it one of the Great
Lights
.
Of which place, ſaith Calvin, Mo-
ſes
populariter ſcripſit, nos potius reſpexit quam
ſydera
.
Moſes did not ſo much regard the
Nature
of the thing, as our Capacity;
21838That the Earth may be a Planet. therefore uſes a popular phraſe: ſo as ordi-
nary
People, without the help of Arts and
Learning
, might eaſily underſtand him.
And in another place, Non fuit Spiritus
Sancti
concilium Aſtrologiam docere :
'It was
11Comment.
in
P1. 136.
not the purpoſe of the Holy Ghoſt to teach
us Aſtronomy :
but being to propound a
Doctrine, that concerns the moſt rude and
ſimple People, he does (both by Moſes
and the Prophets) conform himſelf unto
their phraſes and conceits :
leſt any ſhould
think to excuſe his own ignorance with the
pretence of difficulty;
as Men commonly
do in thoſe things which are delivered af-
ter a learned and ſublime manner.
Thus
Zanchy
likewiſe, Moſes majorem 22De ope-
ribus
Dei,
par
. 2. li.6.
cap
. 1.
habuit noſtri humanique judicii, &
c. 'When
Moſes calls the Moon a Great Light;
he
had a more eſpecial reference to Mens Opi-
nions of it, than to the truth of the thing
it ſelf, becauſe he was to deal with ſuch,
who do judg uſually, rather by their Senſe,
than by their Reaſon.
Nor will that di-
ſtinction
of Fromondus, and others, avoid
this
interpretation, when he tells us of Mag-
nus
Materialis;
which refers to the bulk and
quantity
of the Body:
and Magnum Formale,
which
imports the greatneſs of its Light.
For we grant, that it is really unto us a
greater
Light than any of the Stars, or than
all
of them together;
yet there is not any
one
of them, but is in it ſelf a bigger Light
than
this:
And therefore, when we ſay this
ſpeech
is to be underſtood according to
21939That the Earth may be a Planet. appearance. we do not oppoſe this to rea-
lity
;
but 'tis implied, that this reality is not
abſolute
, and in the nature of the thing it
ſelf
, but only relative, and in reference to
us
.
I may ſay, a Candle is a bigger Light
than
a Star, or the Moon, becauſe it is re-
ally
ſo to me.
However any one will think
this
to be ſpoken, only in relation to its ap-
pearance
, and not to be underſtood as if
the
thing were ſo in it ſelf.
But (by the
way
) it does concern Fromondus to maintain
11DeMeteor.
lib
. 4 c 2.
art
. 5.
the Scripture's Authority, in revealing of
natural
Secrets;
becauſe, from thence it is
that
he fetches the chief Argument for that
ſtrange
Aſſertion of his, concerning the hea-
vineſs
of the Wind;
where Job ſays, that
22Job 28.25. God makes the weight for the Wind.
Thus
likewiſe
, becauſe the common People uſual-
ly
think the Rain to proceed from ſome
Waters
in the Expanſum:
therefore doth
Moſes
, in reference to this erroneous Con-
ceit
, tell us of Waters above the Firmament,
and
the Windows of Heaven :
Of which,
ſaith
Calvin, Nimis ſerviliter literæ ſe aſtrin-
33Comment.
in
Pſalm.
148
. 4.
gunt, &
c. 'Such Men too ſervilely tie them-
ſelves unto the Letter of the Text, who
hence conclude, that there is a Sea in the
Heavens :
when as we know, that Moſes
and the Prophets, to accommodate them-
ſelves unto the capacity of ruder People,
do uſe a vulgar expreſſion;
and therefore
it would be a prepoſterous courſe, to re-
duce their phraſes unto the exact Rules of
Philoſophy.
Let me add, that from
22040That the Earth may be a Planet. miſtake, 'tis likely did ariſe that groundleſs
obſervation
of the ancient Jews;
who would
not
admit any to read the beginning of Ge-
neſis
, till he was arrived to thirty Years of
Age
.
The true reaſen of which, wa this;
not becanſe that Book was harder than any
other
;
but becauſe Moſes conforming his
expreſlion
to vulgar Conceits, and they exa-
mining
of them by more exact rules of Phi-
loſophy
, were fain to force upon them ma-
ny
ſtrange Allegories, and unnatural Myſte-
ries
.
Thus alſo, becauſe for the moſt part we
conceive
the Stars to be innumerable, there-
fore
doth the Holy Ghoſt often ſpeak of
them
in reſerence to this opinion.
So Jere-
my
:
As the Hoſt of Heaven cannot be num-
11Jer. 35. 22 bred, neither the Sand of the Sea meaſured ſo
will
I multiply the Seed of David.
So likewiſe
when
God would comfort Abraham with the
promiſe
of a numberleſs Poſterity, he bids
him
look up to Heayen, and tells him, that
his
Seed ſhould be like thoſe Stars for num-
22Gen. 15 5. ber:
Which, ſaith Clavius, 33In 1. cup.
Sphæræ
.
eſt ſecundum communem ſententiam vulgi, ex-
iſtimantis
infinitam eſſe multitudinem ſtellarum,
dum
eas nocte ſerena confusè intuetur;
is to be
underſtood
according to the common opi-
nion
of the Vulgar, who think the Stars to
be
of an inſinite multitude, whilſt they be-
hold
them all (as they ſeem confuſed) in
a
clear Night.
And though many of our
Divines
do commonly interpret this Speech
to
be an Hyperbole;
yet being well
22141That the Earth may be a Planet. we ſnall find that Abraham's Poſterity, in
ſome
few Generations, were far more than
there
are viſible Stars in the Firmament;
and
of
ſuch only does God ſpeak, becauſe he bids
Abraham
look up to the Heavens.
Now all theſe, even unto ſix differences of
Magnitude
, are reckoned to be but 1022.
True indeed, at the firſt viewing of the
Heavens
.
it may ſeem an incredible thing,
that
they ſhould be of no greater a num-
ber
;
but the reaſon of this is, becauſe they
appear
ſcattered and confuſed;
ſo that the
eye
cannot place them in any ſuch order, as
to
reckon them up, or take any diftinct ſur-
vey
of them.
Now 'tis a known truth,
Quod
fortius operatur pluralitas partium, ubi
11Sir F Bac.
Table
of
Colours
,
numb
. 5.
ordo abeſt;
nam inducit ſimilitudinem infiniti,
&
impedit comprehenſionem: That a plurality
of
parts, without order, has a more ſtrong
operation
, becauſe it has a kind of ſeeming
inſinity
, and ſo hinders comprehenſion.
And
then
beſides, there are more appearances of
Stars
many times, than there are bodies of
them
;
for the Eye, by reaſon of its weak-
neſs
and diſability, to diſcern any thing at
ſo
great a diſtance;
as alſo, becauſe of thoſe
Beams
which proceed from ſuch remote Bo-
dies
, in a twinkling and wavering manner,
and
ſo mix and confound themſelves at their
entrance
into that Organ:
it muſt needs re-
ceive
more repreſentations than there are
true
bodies.
But now, if a Man do but
leiſurely
and diſtinctly compare the Stars of
the
Heaven with thoſe of this number,
22242That the Earth may be a Planet. are noted in a Cæleſtial Globe, he ſhall ſcarce
find
any in the Sky which are not marked
with
the Globe;
nay, he may obſerve many
in
the Globe, which he can ſcarce at all diſ-
cern
in the Heavens.
Now this number of the Stars, is common-
ly
diſtributed into 48 Conſtellations;
in each
of
which, though we ſhould ſuppoſe ten
thouſand
Stars, (which can ſcarce be con-
ceived
) yet would not all this number equal
that
of the Children of Iſrael.
Nay, 'tis
the
aſſertion of Clavius, that Abraham's Po-
11In prim. c.
Sphæræ
.
ſterity, in ſome few Generations, were far
more
than there could be Stars in the Firma-
ment
, though they ſtuck ſo cloſe that they
touched
one another:
And he proves it thus;
A great Circle in the Firmament, does con-
tain
the diameter of a Star of the firſt Mag-
nitude
14960 times.
In the Diameter of
the
Firmament, there are contained 4760
Diameters
of ſuch a Star:
Now if we mul-
tiply
this for a Diameter, the Product will
be
71209600, which is the full number of
Stars
, that the eighth Sphere (according to
Ptolomy
's grounds) would contain, if they
ſtood
ſo cloſe that they touched one ano-
ther
.
The Children of Iſrael were reckoned, at
22Num.1.46 their going out of Egypt, 603550, of ſuch
as
were one and twenty Years old, and up-
wards
, and were able to go to War;
be-
ſides
Children, and Women, and Youths,
and
old Men, and the Levites;
which in
probability
, did always treble the other
22343That the Earth may be a Planet. ber. Now if they were ſo many at one
time
, we may well conceive, that in all thoſe
ſeveral
Generations, both before and ſince,
the
number was much augmented;
and long
before
this time, did far exceed this ſuppo-
ſed
multitude of the Stars.
From all which
we
may infer, that the Scripture-expreſſions
in
this kind, are to be underſtood according
to
appearance and common opinion.
Another place uſually cited for the ſame
purpoſe
, to ſhew that the Holy Ghoſt does
not
ſpeak exactly concerning natural Se-
crets
;
is that in the Kings and Chronicles,
111 Kin.7.23
2
Chro.4.2
which relates unto us the meaſure of Solo-
mon
's brazen Sea, whoſe Diameter was ten
Cubits
, and its circumference thirty;
where-
as
to ſpeak Geometrically, the more exact
proportion
betwixt the Diameter and the
Circumference
, is not as ten to thirty, but
rather
as ſeven to twenty two.
But againſt this 'tis objected by 22Roſſ. l.1.
ſect
. 1. c.8.
Adverſaries,
1. This Sea was not perfectly round, but
rather
inclining to a ſemicircular Form, as
Joſephus
affirms.
33Ant. Fud.
lib
. 8. c.2.
I reply: If it were ſo, yet this is ſo much
from
helping the matter, that it makes it
much
worſe;
for then the diſproportion
will
be far greater.
But ſecondly, Scripture, which is to be
believed
before Joſephus, does tell us in ex-
preſs
tearms, that it was round all about,
I
King 7.
23.
22444That the Earth may be a Planet.
2. The proportion of the Diameter to
11Roff. Ibid. the Circumference, is not exactly the ſame
as
ſeven to two and twenty, but rather leſs.
I anſwer, Though it be, yet ’tis nearer un-
to
that, than any other number.
3. The Scripture does but according to its
22Ibid. uſual cuſtom, ſuppreſs the leſs number, and
mention
only that which is bigger and more
full
.
So in ſome places, Abraham’s 33Gen. 15. ſterity is ſaid to remain in the Land of
4413.
Acts
7. 6.
Egypt for four hundred Years;
when as not-
withſtanding
other Scriptures tell us, 55Exod. 12. they tarried there thirty Years longer.
Thus
6641.
Gal
. 3. 17.
likewiſe in one place, the number of Ja- cob’s Houſe, who came into Egypt, is rec-
77Gen. 46.
27
.
koned to be ſeventy;
whereas 88 Act. 7. 4 they are ſaid to be ſeventy five.
I anſwer: All this is ſo ſar from deſtroy-
ing
the force of the preſent Argument, that
it
does rather confirm it, and more clearly
evidence
unto us, that the Scripture does
not
only, not ſpeak exactly in theſe ſubtil
and
more ſecret Points of Philoſophy, but
alſo
, in the ordinary obvious numbring of
things
, does conform unto common cuſtom,
and
often uſe the round number for the
whole
.
4. ’Tis yet objected by another 99 Fro-
mond
. Ve
ſta
. @, t a.
3
. c. 2.
ſary, That we have no reaſon to expect, the
Holy
Ghoſt ſhould reveal unto us this Se-
cret
in Nature, becauſe neither Archimedes,
nor
any other, had then found it out.
I
reply
, and why then ſhould we think that the
Scripture
muſt needs inform us of the
22545That the Earth may be a Planet. Motion; when as neither Pythagoras, nor
Copernicus
, nor any elſe, had then diſco-
vered
it?
5. In taking the compaſs of this Veſſel,
11Ibid. they meaſured ſomewhat below the brim,
where
it was narrower than at the top, and
ſo
the Circumference there, might be exactly
but
thirty Cubits;
whereof its Diameter
was
ten.
I anſwer: ’Tis evident this is a meer
ſhift
, there being not the leaſt ground for
it
in the Text.
And then beſides, why might
not
we affirm, That the Diameter was mea-
ſured
from that place, as well as the Circum-
ference
?
ſince ’tis very probable, that the
Holy
Ghoſt did ſpeak ad idem;
and not tell
us
the breadth of one place, and the com-
paſs
of another.
So that all our Adverſa-
ries
Evaſions cannot well avoid the force of
the
Argument that is taken from this Scrip-
ture
.
Again; Common People uſually conceive
the
Earth to be ſuch a Plain, as in its utmoſt
parts
is terminated by the Heavens, ſo that
if
a Man were in the farthermoſt Coaſts of
it
, he might touch the Sky.
And hence al-
ſo
, they think that the reaſon why ſome
Countries
are hotter than others, is, becauſe
they
lie nearer unto the Sun.
Nay, Strabo
tells
us of ſome Philoſophers too, who in
this
Point have groſly erred;
affirming, that
there
was a place towards the utmoſt Coaſts
of
Luſitania, where a Man might hear the
noiſe
that the Sun made, as he quench’d
22646That the Earth may be a Planet. Beams in his deſcent to the Ocean; which,
thought
it be an abſurd miſtake, yet we may
note
, that the Holy Ghoſt, in the expreſſion
of
theſe things, is pleaſed to conform him-
ſelf
unto ſuch kind of vulgar and falſe Con-
ceits
;
and therefore, often ſpeaks of the
Ends of the Heaven, and the Ends of 11Pſ 19. 6.
Mat
24. 31
World.
In this ſenſe, they that come from
22Pſal. 22.
27
, & c.
any far Country, are ſaid to come from the
End
of Heaven, Iſa.
13. 5. And in another
place
, From the Side of the Heavens, Deut.
4.
32. All which Phraſes do plainly allude unto
the
error of vulgar Capacities, (ſaith San-
33Comment.
in
lſa. 13. 5
ctius) which hereby is better inſtructed,
than
it would by more proper expreſ-
ſions
.
Thus likewiſe, becauſe ignorant People
cannot
well apprehend how ſo great a
weight
as the Sea and Land, ſhould hang a-
lone
in the open Air, without being founded
upon
ſome Baſis to behold it:
therefore in
this
reſpect alſo, does Scripture apply it ſelf
unto
their Conceits, where it often menti-
ons
the Foundations of the Earth.
Which
44Job 38. 4.
pſ
. 102. 25
Phraſe, in the Letter of it, does manifeſt-
ly
allude unto Mens Imaginations in this
kind
.
Thus alſo the common People uſually
conceive
the Earth to be upon the Water,
becauſe
, when they have travelled any way
as
far as they can, they are at length ſtopped
by
the Sea.
Therefore doth Scripture, in re-
ference
to this, affirm, That God stretched
55Pſ. 136. 6.
& 24. 2.
the Earth upon the Waters, founded the
22747That the Earth may be a Planet. upon the Seas, and eſtabliſhed it upon the Floods:
Of which Places, ſaith Calvin, Non diſput at
Philoſophicè
David, de terræ ſitu;
ſed popula-
riter
loquens, ad rudium captum ſe accommodat:

’T
was not David’s intent to ſpeak Philoſo-
phically
concerning the Earth's ſcituation;

but
rather, by uſing a popular Phraſe, to
accommodate
his Speech unto the Capacities
of
the ruder People.
In this ſenſe likewiſe are we to underſtand
all
thoſe places of Scripture, wherein the
Coaſts
of Heaven are denominated from the
relations
of Before, Behind, the right hand,
or
the left.
Which do not imply (ſaith
Scaliger) any abſolute difference in 11Subtil.
Exercit
.
67
.
places, but are ſpoken meerly in reference
to
Mens eſtimations, and the common opi-
nion
of thoſe People, for whom the Scrip-
tures
were firſt penned.
Thus becauſe it
was
the opinion of the Jewiſh Rabbies, that
Man
was created with his Face to the Eaſt:
therefore the Hebrew word םרק, ſignifies
Ante
, or the Eaſt;
רותא, Poſt, or the Weſt;
ן’מ’
, Dextra, or the South, לאמש, Sini-
ſtra
, or the North.
You may ſee all of
them
put together in that place of Job, Be-
hold
, I go forward, and he is not there;
and
22Job 23. 8,
9
.
backward, but I cannot perceive him;
on the
left
hand, where he doth work, but I cannot be-
hold
him.
He hideth himſelf on the right hand,
that
I cannot ſee him.
Which expreſſions,
are
by ſome Interpreters referred unto the
four
Coaſts of Heaven, according to the
common
uſe of thoſe original words.
22848That the Earth may be a Planet. hence it is, that many of the Ancients have
concluded
Hell to be in the North, which is
ſignified
by the left hand:
unto which ſide
our
Saviour tells us, that the Goats ſhall be
divided
.
Which opinion likewiſe ſeems to
11Mat. 25. 33 be favoured by that place in Job, where ’tis
ſaid
, Hell is naked before God, and deſtruction
22Job 26. 6, 7 hath no covering.
And preſently ’tis added,
He
ſtretched out the North over the empty place.
Upon theſe grounds, St. Jerome interprets
that
Speech of the Preacher, Eccleſ.
11. 3.
If
the Tree fall toward the South, or towards
the
North, in the place where the Tree falleth,
there
ſhall it be.
Concerning thoſe who ſhall
go
either to Heaven or Hell.
And in this
ſenſe
alſo do ſome expound that of Zacha-
ry
14.
4. where ’tis ſaid, that the Mount of
Olives
ſhall cleave in the midſt;
half of it ſhall
remove
towards the North, and half of it to-
wards
the South.
By which is intimated,
that
amongſt thoſe Gentiles, who ſhall take
upon
them the Profeſſion of Chriſt, there are
two
ſorts;
Some that go to the North, that
is
, to Hell;
and others to the South, that is,
to
Heaven.
And therefore it is (ſay they)
that
God ſo often threatens Evil out 33Jer. 1. 14,
15
. item c.
4
. 6 & 6. 1.
the North:
And upon this ground it is,
(ſaith Beſoldus) that there is no 44Li. de
nat
. popul.
ca
. 4.
that worſhips that way.
We read of the
Mahumetans
, that they adore towards the
South
;
the Jews towards the Weſt; Cbri-
ſtians
towards the Eaſt, but none to the
North
.
22949That the Earth may be a Planet.
But of this only by the way. However,
certain
it is, that the Holy Ghoſt does fre-
quently
in Scripture ſet forth the ſeveral
Coaſts
of Heaven by thoſe relative terms of
right
hand and left hand, &
c. which ex-
preſſions
do not denote any real intrinſecal
difference
between thoſe places, but are ra-
ther
fitted for the apprehenſion of thoſe
Men
, from whoſe fancy it is that they have
ſuch
denominations.
And though Ariſtotle
11De Cælo,
lib
. 2. c. 2.
concludes theſe ſeveral Poſitions to be natu-
ral
unto the Heavens, yet his Authority in
this
particular is not available, becauſe he
delivers
it upon a wrong ground, ſuppoſing
the
Orbs to be living Creatures, and aſſiſted
with
Intelligences.
We may obſerve, that the
meaning
of theſe Coaſts, by the relations of
right
hand and left hand, &
c. is ſo far from
having
any ground in the nature of thoſe ſe-
veral
places, that theſe relations are not on-
ly
variouſly applied unto them by divers Re-
ligions
(as was ſaid before) but alſo by
divers
Arts and Profeſſions.
Thus, becauſe
Aſtronomers
make their Obſervations towards
the
South parts of the Horizon, where there
be
moſt Stars that riſe and ſet;
therefore do
they
account the Weſt to be at their right
hand
, and the Eaſt their left.
The Coſmo-
graphers
, in taking the Latitude of Places,
and
reckoning their ſeveral Climates, muſt
look
towards the North Pole;
and there-
fore
, in their phraſe, by the right hand, is
meant
the Eaſt;
and by the left hand, the
22De pla-
cit
. Philoſ.
lib
. 2. c. 10.
Weſt:
And thus (ſaith Plutarch) are
23050That the Earth may be a Planet. to underſtand theſe expreffions in Pythago-
ras
, Plato, Ariſtotle.
The Poets count the
South
to be towards the left, and the North
the
right hand.
Thus Lucan, 11Lib. 3. of the Arabians coming unto Theſſaly, ſays:
Ignotum vobis Arabes veniſtis in orbem:
Vmbras mir ati nemorum, non ire ſiniſtr as. The Augures taking their Obſervations at
the
Eaſt, count the South to be at their
right
hand, and the North their left:
So
that
theſe Denominations have not any real
ground
in the nature of the things, but are
impoſed
upon them by the Scripture phraſe,
in
reference to the account and opinion of
the
Jews.
Thus alſo, becauſe heretofore it was ge-
22D. Hakwel
Apol
. l. 1,
c
. 1. ſect. 2.
nerally received, that the Heart was the
principal
Seat of the Faculties;
therefore
doth
the Spirit apply himſelf unto this com-
mon
Tenent;
and in many places, attributes
Wiſdom
and Underſtanding to the Heart.
33Prov. 8 5.
& 10. 8.
Eccl
. 1. 13,
16
, 17.
& 8. 5.
Whereas, to ſpeak properly, the reaſon and
diſcurſive
Faculties have their principal re-
ſidence
in the Head (ſaith Galen and Hippo-
crates
, together with the generality of our
later
Phyſicians) becauſe they are hindred
in
their Operations by the diſtempers of that
part
, and recovered by Medicines applied
unto
it.
So likewiſe are we to underſtand thoſe
other
places;
Iſa. 59. 5. where ſome Tran-
ſlations
read it, Ova Aſpidum ruperunt,
23151That the Earth may be a Planet. have broken the Vipers Eggs; alluding to
that
common but fabulous ſtory of the Vi-
per
, who breaks his paſlage through the
Bowels
of the Female.
So Pſal. 58. 4, 5.
where the Prophet ſpeaks of the deaf Ad-
der
, that ſtops her Ears againſt the Voice of
the
Charmer.
Both which relations (if we
may
believe many Naturaliſts) are as falſe
as
they are common:
and yet, becauſe they
were
entertained with the general opinion
of
thoſe days, therefore doth the Holy Ghoſt
vouchſafe
to allude unto them in Holy Writ.

’Tis
a plain miſtake of Fromondus, when in
11Veſta.
Tract
3.
cap
. 3.
anſwer to theſe places, he is fain to ſay,
that
they are uſed proverbially only, and do
not
poſitively conclude any thing.
For
when
David writes theſe words, that they
are
like the deaf Adder, which ſtoppeth her
Ears
, &
c. This affirmation is manifeſtly
implied
, That the deaf Adder does ſtop
her
Ears againſt the Voice of the Charmer:
which becauſe it is not true in the Letter of
it
, (as was ſaid before) therefore ’tis very
probable
, that it ſhould be interpreted in the
ſame
ſenſe wherein here it is cited.
In reference to this alſo, we are to con-
ceive
of thoſe other expreſſions;
Cold com-
eth
out of the North, Job 37.
9. And again,
Fair
Weather comes out of the North, ver.
22.
So ver. 17. Thy Garments are warm, when he
quieteth
the Earth by the South Wind.
And,
Prov
.
25. 23. The North Wind driveth away
Rain
.
Which Phraſes do not contain in
them
any abſolute general Truth, but
23252That the Earth may be a Planet. ſo ſar only be verified, as they are referred
to
ſeveral Climats:
and though unto us who
live
on this ſide of the Line, the North
Wind
being coldeſt and drieſt;
and on the
the
contrary, the South Wind moiſt and
Warm
, by reaſon that in one of theſe pla-
ces
, there is a ſtronger heat of the Sun to
exhale
moiſt Vapours, than in the other:
yet it is clean otherwiſe with the Inhabitants
beyond
the other Tropick;
for there the
North
Wind is the hotteſt, and moiſt;
and
the
South the coldeſt and dry:
So that with
them
, theſe Scriptures cannot properly be
affirmed
, that Cold, or that fair Weather com-
eth
out of the North;
but rather on the con-
trary
.
All which notwithſtanding, does not
in
the leaſt manner derogate from the truth
of
theſe Specches, or the omniſcience of the
Speaker
;
but do rather ſhew the Wiſdom
and
Goodneſs of the bleſſed Spirit, in vouch-
ſafing
thus to conform his Language unto the
capacity
of thoſe People unto whom theſe
Speeches
were firſt directed.
In the ſame
ſenſe
are we to underſtand all thoſe places
where
the Lights of Heaven are ſaid to be
11Joel 2. 31.
Item
c. 3.
15
.
darkned, and the Conſtellations not to give their
Light
, Iſa.
13. 10. Not as if they were ab-
ſolutely
in themſelves deprived of their
Light
, and did not ſhine at all;
but becauſe
of
their appearance to us:
and therefore,
in
another place anſwerable to theſe, God
ſays
, he will cover the Heavens, and ſo make
the
Stars thereof dark, Ezek.
37. 2. Which
argues
, that they themſelves were not
23353That the Earth may be a Planet. prived of this Light (as thoſe other Speeches
ſeem
to imply) but we.
In reference to this, likewiſe are we to
conceive
of thoſe other expreſſions, that the
Moon
ſhall bluſh, and the Sun be aſhamed,
Iſa
.
24. 23. That they ſhall be turned into
Blood
, Matth.
24. 29. Not that theſe things
ſhall
be ſo in themſelves, (ſaith S.
Jerome)
11Comment.
in
Joel 3.
but becauſe they ſhall appear ſo unto us.
Thus alſo, Mark 13. 25. The Stars ſhall fall
from
Heaven;
that is, they ſhall be ſo whol-
ly
covered from our ſight, as if they were
quite
fallen from their wonted places.
Or
if
this be underſtood of their real Fall, as
it
may ſeem probable by that place in Rev.

6
.
13. And the Stars of Heaven fell unto the
Earth
, even as a Fig-tree caſteth her untimely
Figs
, when ſhe is ſhaken by a mighty Wind:

then
it is to be interpreted, not of them
that
are truly Stars, but them that ap-
pear
ſo:
alluding unto the opinion of the
unskilful
Vulgar, (ſaith Sanctius) 22Commen.
in
Iſa. 13. 5
think the Meteors to be Stars.
And 33Commen.
in
Gen. 3.
v
. 10. art. 6.
ſennus, ſpeaking of the ſame Scripture, ſays,
Hoc
de veris Stellis minimè volunt interpretes
intelligi
, ſed de Cometis &
aliis ignitis Meteo-
ris
:
Interpreters do by no means under-
ſtand
this of true Stars, but of the Comets,
and
other fiery Meteors.
Though the fal-
ling
of theſe be a natural event, yet may it
be
accounted a ſtrange Prodigy, as well as
an
Earthquake, and the darkning of the Sun
and
Moon, which are mentioned in the verſe
before
.
23454That the Earth may be a Planet.
In reference to this, doth the Scripture
ſpeak
of ſome common natural effects, as if
their
true cauſes were altogether inſcruta-
ble
, and not to be found out, becauſe they
were
generally ſo eſteemed by the Vulgar.
Thus of the Wind it is ſaid, That 11Joh. 3. 8. know whence it cometh, nor whither it goeth.
In another place, God is ſaid to bring it 22Jer. 10. 13.
@iem
. c. 51.
16
.
of his Treaſures:
And elſewhere it 33Job
37
. 10.
called the Breath of God.
And ſo 44תממ wiſe of the Thunder; concerning which
Job propoſes this queſtion, The 55job 26.
14
.
of his Power who can underſtand?
And there-
fore
too David does ſo often ſtile it, 66Pſ. 2. 9.
& 3.4, & c.
@
Voice of God.
All which places ſeem to im-
ply
, that the cauſe of theſe things was not
to
be diſcovered, which yet later Philoſo-
phers
pretend to know:
So that according
to
their conſtruction, theſe phraſes are to be
underſtood
, in relation unto their ignorance
unto
whom theſe Speeches were immediatly
directed
.
For this reaſon is it: Why, tho there be
in
nature many other cauſes of Springs and
Rivers
than the Sea, yet Solomon (who was
77Eccl. 1.7. a great Philoſopher, and perhaps not igno-
rant
of them) does mention only this, be-
cauſe
moſt obvious, and eaſily apprehended
by
the Vulgar.
Unto all theſe Scriptures, I
88Job 9. 9.
Item
33.
51
.
might add that in Amos 5.
8. which ſpeaks
of
the Conſtellation, commonly called the
Seven
Stars;
whereas, later diſcoveries
have
found that there are but ſix of them
diſcernable
to the bare eye, as appears
23555That the Earth may be a Planet. Gallilæ{us} his Glaſs; the ſeventh of them be-
11Vide Fro-
mond
.
ing but a deceit of the eye, ariſing from
22Mite. l. 3.
c
. 1. art. 1.
their too great nearneſs;
and if a Man try,
in
a clear Night, to number them diſtinctly,
he
ſhall find that there will ſometimes appear
but
ſix, and ſometimes more.
True indeed, the original word of this
Scripture
המ’ב, does not neceſſarily imply
any
ſuch number in its ſignification, but yet
our
Engliſh Tranſlation renders it the ſe-
ven
Stars;
and if it had been expreſly ſo
in
the Original too, it might have ſpoken
true
enough, becauſe they are uſually eſteem-
ed
of that number.
And when it had been
ſaid
, He made the ſeven Stars, and Orion, we
might
eaſily have underſtood the words
thus
:
He made thoſe Conſtellations that
are
commonly known unto us under ſuch
names
.
From all theſe Scriptures, ’tis clearly ma-
nifeſt
, that it is a frequent cuſtom for the
Holy
Ghoſt to ſpeak of natural Things, ra-
ther
according to their appearance and com-
mon
opinion, than the truth it ſelf.
Now
it
is very plain, and our Enemies themſelves
do
grant it, that if the World had been
framed
according to the Syſteme of Coperni-
33Fromond. c{us}, Futurum eſſet ut vulg{us}, de Solis motu &

44Antar.
c
. 6.
Terræ ſtatu proinde ut nunc loquerctur.
The
vulgar
phraſe would have been the ſame as
now
it is, when it ſpeaks of the Sun's Mo-
tion
, and the Earth's ſtanding ſtill.
Wherefore ’tis not improbable, that ſuch
kind
of Scripture-expreſſions, are to be
23656That the Earth may be a Planet. derſtood only in relation to outward ap-
pearances
, and vulgar opinion.
PROP. IV.
That divers learned Men have fallen into
# great Abſurdities, whilſt they have
# looked for the Grounds of Philoſophy
# from the words of Scripture.
IT has been an ancient and common opi-
nion
amongſt the Jews, that the Law of
Moſes
did contain in it, not only thoſe things
which
concern our Religion and Obedience,
but
every Secret alſo that may poſſibly be
known
in any Art or Science;
ſo that there
11Schickard,
Bechin
.
Hapern
.
Diſp
. 5.
num
. 8.
is not a Demonſtration in Geometry, or
Rule
in Arithmetick;
not a Myſtery in any
Trade
, but it may be found out in the
Pentatcuch
.
Hence it was (ſay they) that
Solomon
had all his Wiſdom and Policy:
Hence it was that he did fetch his Knowledg
concerning
the nature of Vegetables, from
the
Cedar of Lebanon to the Hyſop that
grows
upon the Wall.
Nay, from hence,
they
thought a Man might learn the Art of
Miracles
, to removea Mountain, or recover
the
dead.
So ſtrangely have the learneder
ſort
of that Nation been befooled, ſince their
own
Curſe hath lighted upon them.
23757That the Earth may be a Planet.
Not much unlike this fooliſh ſuperſtition
of
theirs, is that cuſtom of many Artiſts a-
mongſt
us;
who upon the invention of any
new
Secret, will preſently find out ſome ob-
ſcure
Text or other to Father it upon;
as
if
the Holy Ghoſt muſt needs take notice of
every
particular, which their partial Fan-
cies
did over-value.
Nor are they altogether guiltleſs of this
Fault
, who look for any Secrets of Nature
from
the words of Scripture;
or will exa-
mine
all its expreſſions by the exact Rules of
Philoſophy
.
Unto what ſtrange Abſurdities this falſe
Imagination
of the learneder Jews hath ex-
poſed
them, may be manifeſt by a great mul-
titude
of Examples.
I will mention only
ſome
few of them.
Hence it is, that they
prove
the ſhin-bone of Og the Giant to be
11Schickard.
ib
. Diſp.6.
num
. 2.
above three leagues long:
Or (which is a
more
modeſt relation) that Moſes being
fourteen
Cubits in ſtature, having a Spear
ten
ells in length, and leaping up ten Cubits,
could
touch this Giant but on the Ancle.
All which, they can confirm unto you by a
cabaliſtical
interpretation of this ſtory, as
it
is ſet down in Scripture.
Hence it is, that
they
tell us of all thoſe ſtrange Beaſts which
ſhall
be ſeen at the coming of the Meſſi{as}:

as
firſt, the Ox, which Job calls Behemoth,
22Buxtor.
Synag
.
Juda
. c. 36.
that every day devours the Graſs on a thou-
ſand
Mountains;
as you may ſee it in the
Pſalm, where David mentions the 33Pſ.so.10. or @לא@’ררתב upon a thouſand Hills.
If
23858That the Earth may be a Planet. ask how this Beaſt does to find Paſture e-
nough
?
they anſwer, that he remains con-
ſtantly
in one place, where there is as much
Graſs
grows up in the Night, as was eaten
in
the Day.
They tell us alſo of a Bird, which was of
that
quantity, that having upon a time caſt
an
Egg out of her Neſt, there were beaten
down
by the fall of it, three hundred of the
talleſt
Cedars, and no leſs than threeſcore
Villages
drowned.
As alſo of a Frog, as big
as
a Town capable of ſixty Houſes;
which
Frog
, notwithſtanding his greatneſs, was
devoured
by a Serpent, and that Serpent by
a
Crow;
which Crow, as ſhe was flying up
to
a Tree, eclipſed the Sun, and darkned
the
World;
by which you may gueſs, what
a
pretty Twig that Tree was.
If you
would
know the proper Name of this Bird,
you
may find it in Pſal.
50. 11. where it is
called
ן’ןו, or in our Tranſlation, the Fowl
11V. Parap.
Chald
.
of the Mountains.
It ſeems it was ſome-
what
of kin to that other Bird they tell us
of
, whoſe Legs were ſo long, that they
reached
unto the bottom of that Sea, where
there
had been an Ax-head falling for ſeven
Years
together, before it could come to the
bottom
.
Many other Relations there are, which
contain
ſuch horrible Abſurdities, that a Man
cannot
well conceive how they ſhould pro-
ceed
from reaſonable Creatures.
And all
this
ariſing from that wrong Principle of
theirs
;
That Scripture did exactly
23959That the Earth may be a Planet. in it all kind of Truths; and that every
meaning
was true, which by the Letter of
it
, or by Cabaliſtical Interpretations, might
be
found out.
Now as it hath been with them, ſo like-
wiſe
hath it hapned in proportion unto o-
thers
;
who by a ſuperſtitious adhering un-
to
the bare words of Scripture, have expo-
ſed
themſelves unto many ſtrange Errors.
Thus S. Baſil holds, That next to the 11Enarrat.
in
Gen.
the Moon is bigger than any of the Stars,
becauſe
Moſes does call them only two great
Lights
.
Thus others maintain, That there are
Waters
, properly ſo called, above the ſtar-
ry
Firmament, becauſe of thoſe vulgar ex-
preſſions
in Scripture, which in their literal
ſenſe
do mention them.
Of this opinion
were
many of the Ancients, Philo, Joſeph{us};
and ſince them the Fathers, Juſtin 22Reſp.
ad
queſ. 93
Orthod
.
tyr, Theodoret, Auſtin, 33Queſt,
11
. ſup.
Gen
.
44DeCiv.
Dei
, lib. 11
cap
. ult.
55Hex-
am
.1.2.c.2
Baſil, and almoſt all the reſt.
66Homil.
3
. in Gen:
them, ſundry other learned Men, as Bede,
Strabo
, Damaſcen, Tho.
Aquinas, & c. If
you
ask for what purpoſe they were placed
here
?
Juſtin Martyr tells us, for theſe two
ends
:
Firſt, To cool the heat that might o-
therwiſe
ariſe from the motion of the ſolid
Orbs
;
and hence it is (ſay they) that Sa-
turn
is colder than any of the other Planets,
becauſe
tho he move faſter, yet he is nearer
to
theſe Waters.
Secondly, To preſs and
keep
down the Heavens, leſt the frequency
and
violence of Winds, might break
24060That the Earth may be a Planet. ſcatter them aſunder; which Opinion, to-
gether
with both its Reaſons, are now ac-
counted
abſurd and ridiculous.
S. Auſtin concludes the viſible Stars 11DeCivit.
Dei
, 1. 16.
c
. 23.
be innumerable, becauſe Scripture-phraſes
ſeem
to imply as much.
That the Heavens are not round, was the
opinion
of Juſtin Martyr, 22Re-
ſpon
. ad
queſt
. 93.
33Hex-
am
.l.1.c.6
Chryſoſtom, Theodoret, 44Homil.
14
. in Ep.
ad
Hebr.
55In ca.
8
. Hebr.
66In i-
dem
c.
lact;
doubted of by S. Auſtin, and 77 In
Gen
. ad
lit
. l 1 c.9.
Item
1. 2.
c
. 6.
vers others.
Nay, S. Chryſoſtom was ſo con-
fident
of it, that he propoſes the queſtion
in
a triumphant manner:
Π{οῦ} έι{οι}ν όι σφαι{ρω}
{ει}δῆ {οὐ}{ρα}νὸν {ἐι}ναὶ {πο}φαινό{μεν}οι.
Where
are
thoſe Men that can prove the Heavens to
have
a ſphærical Form?
The reaſon of
which
was this, Becauſe ’tis ſaid in one
Scripture
, that God ſtretched forth the Hea-
vens
as a Curtain, Pſal.
104. 2. and ſpreadeth
them
as a Tent to dwell in, Iſa.
40. 22. And
ſo
in Heb.
8. 2. they are called a Tent or Ta-
bernacle
:
which becauſe it is not ſphærical,
therefore
they conclude alſo, that the Hea-
vens
are not of that form;
whereas now,
the
contrary is as evident as Demonſtration
can
make a thing.
And therefore, S. 88Lib. 3.
Comment
.
in
Gal. 5.
rome in his time, ſpeaking of the ſame Er-
ror
, gives it this plain cenſure;
Eſt in Ec-
cleſia
ſtultiloquium, ſi quis Cœlum putet for-
nicis
modo curvatum, Eſaiæ quem non intelligit
ſermone
decept{us}:
’Tis fooliſh ſpeaking in the
Church
, if any, through miſapprehenſion
of
thoſe words in Iſaiah, ſhall affirm the
Heavens
not to be round.
24161That the Earth may be a Planet.
That the Seas not overflowing the Land,
is
a Miracle, was the opinion of 11Homil.
4
. He@am.
Chryſoſtom, Theodoret, 22Commen
in
Job.
33In Pſal.
103
.
44Hexam.
l
3. c.2,3.
Nazianzen;
and ſince them, 55Orat. 3466Aquin.
part
. 1.
queſt
. 69.
art
. 1.
nas, Luther, Calvin, Marlorat;
77Commen
in
Pſ. 24.
Item
in
Pſ
. 136 6.
ſundry others.
Which they proved from
theſe
Scripture-expreſſions;
that in Job 38.
8, 11. Who hath ſhut up the Sea with doors,
when
it brake forth, as if it had iſſued out of
the
Womb;
when I did break up for it my de-
creed
place;
and ſet bars and doors, and ſaid,
hitherto
ſhalt thou come, and no further, and
here
ſhall the pride of thy Waves be ſtaid.
So
likewiſe
, Prov.
8. 29. God gave to the Sea
his
Decree, that the Waters ſhould not paſs his
Commandment
.
And Jer. 5. 22. I have pla-
ced
the Sand for a bound of the Sea, by a per-
petual
Decree, that they cannot paſs it:
and th@
the
Waves thereof toſs themſelves, yet can
they
not prevail;
tho they roar, yet can they
not
paſs over, that they turn not again to cover
the
Earth.
In all which places (ſay they)
’tis
implied, that the Water of it ſelf, were
it
not with-held from its own natural incli-
nation
, by a more ſpecial Power of God,
would
overflow the Land.
Others infer the ſame concluſion from that
in
Eccleſiaſtes, where the Rivers are ſaid to
come
from the Sea;
which they could not
do
, unleſs that were higher.
I anſwer; They
ſhould
as well conſider the latter part of that
Scripture
, which ſays, that the Rivers re-
turn
to that place from whence they came,
and
then the force of this conſequence
24262That the Earth may be a Planet. vaniſh. To this purpoſe, ſome urge that
ſpeech
of our Saviour, where he bids Simon
11Luk. 5. 24.
’Eις
τὰ βα-
θ
{ος}
to launch forth into the deep;
the Latin
word
is, in altum;
from whence they ga-
ther
, that the Sea is higher than the Land.
But this ſavours ſo much of Monkiſh Igno-
rance
, that it deſerves rather to be laughed
at
, than to be anſwered.
But now if we conſider the true Proper-
ties
of this Element, according to the Rules
of
Philoſophy;
we ſhall find, that its not
overflowing
the Land, is ſo far from being
a
Miracle, that it is a neceſſary conſequence
of
its Nature;
and ’twould rather be a Mi-
racle
, if it ſhould be otherwiſe, as it was
in
the general Deluge.
The reaſon is, be-
cauſe
the Water of it ſelf muſt neceſſarily
deſcend
to the loweſt place;
which it can-
not
do, unleſs it be collected in a ſphærical
Form
, as you may plainly diſcern in this
Figure
.
8[Figure 8]
Where the Sea at D may ſeem to be higher
than
a Mountain at B, or C, becauſe
24363That the Earth may be a Planet. riſing of it in the midſt, does ſo intercept
our
ſight from either of thoſe places, that
we
cannot look in a ſtreight Line from the
one
to the other.
So that it may ſeem to be
no
leſs than a Miracle, by which the Sea
(being a heavy Body) was with-held from
flowing
down to thoſe lower places of B, or
C
.
But now, if you conſider that the aſ-
cending
of a Body, is its motion from the
Centre
;
and deſcent, is its approaching
unto
it:
you ſhall find, that the Sea to move
from
D, to B or C, is a motion of Aſcent,
which
is contrary to its nature, becauſe the
Mountain
at B, or C, are farther off from
the
Centre, than the Sea at D, the Lines
A
B, and A C, being longer than the other
A
D.
So that for the Sea to keep always
in
its Channel, is but agreeable to its Na-
ture
, as being a heavy Body.
But the mean-
ing
of thoſe Scriptures, is, to ſet forth the
Power
and Wiſdom of God;
who hath ap-
pointed
theſe Channels for it, and beſet it
with
ſuch ſtrong Banks, to withſtand the
fury
of its waves.
Or if theſe Men do ſo
much
rely in natural Points, upon the bare
words
of Scripture, they might eaſily be
confuted
from thoſe other places, where
God
is ſaid to have founded the Earth upon
the
Seas, and eſtabliſhed it upon the Floods.
From the literal interpretation of which,
many
of the Ancients have fallen into ano-
ther
Error;
affirming, the Water to be in
the
lower place;
and as a baſis, whereon the
the
weight of the Earth was born up.
24464That the Earth may be a Planet. this opinion were Clemens 11Recog. S Athanaſius, Hillary, 22Orat.
cont
. I do-
los
.
and others.
So that it ſeems, if a Man
ſhould
reſolutely adhere to the bare words
33In pſal.
136
. 6.
of the Scripture, he might find contradi-
44In pſ.
24
.
ction in it:
of which, the natural meaning
is
altogether incapable.
S. Jerome tells 55Commen.
in
Iſa. l. 13
of ſome who would prove Stars to have
underſtanding
, from that place in Iſa.
45.
12. My hands have ſtretched out the Heavens,
and
all their Hoaſt have I commanded.
Now
(ſay they) none but intelligent Creatures are
capable
of Precepts;
and therefore, the
Stars
muſt needs have rational Souls.
Of
this
opinion was Philo the Jew:
nay, 66De plant.
Noe
.
ny of the Rabbies conclude, that they do
every
hour ſing praiſes unto God, with an
77Toſtatus
in
Joſb.
c
. 10 queſt.
13
, 14.
audible real Voice.
But of that in Job 38.
7. which ſpeaks of the Morning Stars ſing-
ing
together.
And Pſal. 19. 3, 4. where ’tis
faid
of the Heavens, that there is no ſpeech
nor
language where their Voice is not heard, and
their
words are gone to the ends of the World.

And
whereas we tranſlate that place in the
tenth
of Joſhua, concerning the ſtanding ſtill
of
the Heavens;
the original word, םרר,
does
properly ſignify Silence;
and according
to
their opinion, Joſhua did only bid them
hold
their peace.
From ſuch grounds, ’tis
likely
did Origen fetch his Opinion, 88Tom. 1.
in
Joban.
the Stars ſhould be ſaved.
I might ſet down
many
other the like Inſtances, were it not
for
being already weary of raking into the
Errors
of Antiquity, or uncovering
24565That the Earth may be a Planet. nakedneſs of our Forefathers. That ex-
cuſe
of Acoſta, may juſtly ſerve to 11De nat.
novi
orbis,
lib
.1.c.2.
gate the Miſtakes of theſe Ancient Divines:
Facilè condonandum eſt patribus, ſi cum cognoſ-
cendo
colendòque Creatori toti vacarent, de
creaturâ
minus aptè aliqua ex parte opinati
ſunt
.
Thoſe good Men were ſo wholly bu-
ſied
about the Knowledg and Worſhip of the
Creator
, that they had not leiſure enough
for
an exact ſearch into the Eſſence of the
Creatures
.
However, theſe Examples that
have
been already cited, may ſufficiently
manifeſt
, how frequently others have been
deceived
, in concluding the Points of Phi-
loſophy
from the Expreſſions of Scrip-
ture
.
And therefore, ’tis not certain, but
that
in the preſent caſe alſo, it may be
inſufficient
for ſuch a manner of argu-
ing
.
24666That the Earth may be a Planet.
PROP. V.
That the Scripture, in its proper conſtru-
ction
, does not any where affirm the
Immobility
of the Earth.
THe ſame Anſwer which was inſiſted on
before
, concerning the conformity of
Scripture-expreſſions
, to Mens capacity and
common
opinion, may well enough ſatisfy
all
thoſe Arguments, which ſeem thence to
affirm
the Earth's ſetledneſs and immobili-
ty
;
ſince this is as well agreeable to out-
ward
appearance, and vulgar apprehenſion,
as
the other.
But now, for more full ſatisfaction, I
ſhall
ſet down the particular places that are
urged
for it;
which being throughly exa-
mined
, we may plainly diſcern, that none
of
them, in their proper meaning, will ſerve
to
infer any ſuch concluſion.
One of theſe ſayings, is that of the
11Valleſius
Sacr
. Phil.
c
.ip. 62.
Preacher, Eccleſ.
1. 4. One Generation com-
eth
, and another paſſeth, but the Earth en-
22Fuller,
Miſcell
.
l
.1.c.15
dureth for ever;
where the original word is,
תרטע
, and the vulgar, ſtat;
from whence
33Pineda,
Cimment
.
inlicum
.
our Adverſaries conclude, that it is moveable.
I anſwer: The meaning of the word, as
it
is here applied, is permanet;
or as
24767That the Earth may be a Planet. tranſlate it, endureth. For it is not the pur-
poſe
of this place, to deny all kind of mo-
tion
to the whole Earth:
but that of Ge-
neration
and Corruption, to which other
things
in it are liable, And though Pineda,
and
others, keep a great deal of imperti-
nent
ſtir about this Scripture, yet they grant
this
to be the natural meaning of it;
which
you
may more clearly diſcern, if you conſi-
der
the chief ſcope of this Book;
wherein
the
Preacher's intent is, to ſhew the extra-
ordinary
vanity of all earthly Content-
ments
, ver.
2. the utter unprofitableneſs of
all
a Man's Labours, ver.
3. And this he il-
luſtrates
, by the ſhortneſs and uncertainty
of
his Life;
in which reſpect, he is below
many
of his fellow Creatures, as may be
maniſeſted
from theſe four Compariſons.
1. From the Earth, which tho it ſeem to
be
but as the Sediment of the World, as the
Rubbiſh
of the Creation;
yet is this bet-
ter
than Man in reſpect of his laſtingneſs,
for
one Generation paſſeth away, and another
cometh
;
but the Earth, that abideth for ever,
ver
.
4.
2. From the Sun; who, though he ſeem
frequently
to go down, yet he conſtantly
ſeems
to riſe again, and ſhines with the ſame
glory
, ver.
5. But Man dieth and waſteth a-
11Job 14.
10
, 12.
way;
yea, Man giveth up the Ghoſt; and
where
is he?
He lieth down, and riſeth not, till
the
Heavens be no more.
3. From the Wind, the common Em-
blem
of Uncertainty;
vet it is more
24868That the Earth may be a Planet. ſtant than Man, for that knows its circuits,
and
whirleth about continually, ver.
6. whereas
11Pſ.78.39. our life paſſeth away as doth the V Vind, but re-
turneth
not again.
4. From the Sea; tho it be as uncertain
as
the Moon, by whom ’tis governed, yet is
it
more durable than Man and his Happi-
neſs
.
For tho the Rivers run into it, and
from
it, yet is it ſtill of the ſame quantity
that
it was at the beginning, verſ.
7. But
Man
grows worſer, as he grows older, and
ſtill
nearer to a decay.
So that in this re-
ſpect
, he is much inferior to many other of
his
fellow Creatures.
From whence it is manifeſt; that this con-
ſtancy
, or ſtanding of the Earth, is not op-
poſed
to its local motion, but to the chang-
ing
or paſſing away of divers Men in their
ſeveral
Generations.
And therefore, thence
to
conclude the Earth's Immobility, were as
weak
and ridiculous, as if one ſhould argue
thus
:
One Miller goes, and another comes,
22M. Car-
penter
's
Geog
. l 1.
c
. 4.
but the Mill remains ſtill;
ergo, the Mill hath
no
motion.
Or thus; one Pilat goes, and another
comes
, but the Ship remains ſtill;
ergo, the
Ship
doth not ſtir.
R. Moſes tells us, how that many of 33Perplex.
l
. 2. c. 29.
Jews did from this place conclude, that So-
lomon
thought the Earth to be Eternal, be-
cauſe
he ſaith it abideth, םלרעל, for ever;
and queſtionleſs, if we examine it impar-
tially
, we ſhall find that the phraſe ſeems
more
to favour this Abſurdity, than
24969That the Earth may be a Planet. which our Adverſaries would collect from
hence
, that it is without motion.
But Mr. Fuller urging this Text againſt Co-
pernicus
, tells us;
If any ſhould interpret
theſe
Phraſes, concerning the Earth's ſtand-
ing
ſtill, verſ.
4. and the Sun's motion,
verſ
.
5. in reference only to appearance and
common
opinion, he muſt neceſſarily alſo
underſtand
thoſe two other Verſes, which
mention
the motion of the Wind and Ri-
vers
, in the ſame ſenſe.
As if he ſhould ſay,
becauſe
ſome things appear otherwiſe than
they
are, therefore every thing is otherwiſe
than
it appears:
or, becauſe Scripture ſpeaks
of
ſome natural things, as they are eſteemed
according
to Man's falſe conceit;
therefore
’tis
neceſſary, that every natural thing men-
tioned
in Scripture, muſt be interpreted in
the
like ſenſe:
or, becauſe in one place we
read
of the ends of a Staff, 1 Kings 8.
8.
and in many other places, of the ends of
the
Earth, and the ends of Heaven:
There-
fore
the Earth and Heavens have as properly
ends
, as a Staff.
’Tis the very ſame Conſe-
quence
with that in the Objection.
Becauſe
in
this place of Eccleſiaſtes, we read of the
reſt
of the Earth, and the motion of the
Sun
;
therefore, theſe Phraſes muſt needs
be
underſtood in the ſame proper conſtru-
ction
as thoſe afterwards, where Motion
was
attributed to the Wind and Rivers.

Which
Inference you ſee is ſo weak, that the
Objector
need not triumph ſo much in its
ſtrength
as he doth.
25070That the Earth may be a Planet.
Another proof like unto this, is taken
from
St.
Peter, Epiſt. 2. Cap. 3. v. 5. where
he
ſpeaks of the Earth ſtanding out of the
Water
, and in the Water, {γῆ} συνεςῶσα;
and therefore the Earth is immoveable.
I anſwer: ’Tis evident that the word
here
is equivalent with fuit:
and the ſcope
of
the Apoſtle is, to ſhew, that God made
all
the Earth;
both that which was above
the
Water, and that which was under it.
So that from this expreſſion, to collect the
reſt
and immobility of the Earth, would be
fuch
an Argument as this other.
Such a
Man
made that part of a Mill-wheel;
or a
Ship
, which ſtands below the Water, and
that
part which ſtands above the Water;

therefore
thoſe things are immoveable.
To ſuch vain and idle Conſequences, does
the
heat of Oppoſition drive our Adver-
ſaries
.
A third Argument, ſtronger than either
of
the former, they conceive may be col-
111 Chron.
16
.30.
Pſal
.93.1.
Item
96.
10
.
lected from thoſe Scriptures:
where ’tis ſaid, The VVorld is eſtabliſhed, that it cannot
be
moved.
To which, I anſwer: Theſe places ſpeak
of
the World in general, and not particu-
larly
of our Earth;
and therefore may as
well
prove the immobility of the Heavens,
they
being the greateſt part of the World;
in compariſon to which, our Earth is but as
an
inſenſible Point.
If you reply, that the word in theſe pla-
ces
is to be underſtood by a Synechdoche,
25171That the Earth may be a Planet. being meant only of this habitable World,
the
Earth.
I anſwer: Firſt, This is only ſaid, not
proved
.
Secondly, David, but a little be-
fore
, ſeems to make a difference between the
World
and the Earth, Pſal.
90. 2. where he
ſays
, Before thou hadſt formed the Earth and
the
V Vorld.
But, thirdly, in another place,
there
is the ſame original word applied ex-
preſly
to the Heavens;
and which is yet
more
, the ſame place does likewiſe mention
this
ſuppoſed ſetledneſs of the Earth;
Prov.
3. 19. The Lord by Wiſdom hath founded the
Earth
:
and by Underſtanding, bath be eſtabliſhed
the
Heavens.
So that theſe places can no
more
prove an immobility in the Earth than
in
the Heavens.
If you yet reply, That by the Heavens
there
, is meant the Seat of the Bleſſed, which
does
not move with the reſt.
I anſwer: Tho by ſuch an evaſion, a Man
might
poſſibly avoid the force of this place:
yet, firſt, ’tis but a groundleſs ſhift: becauſe
then
, that Verſe will not contain a full enu-
meration
of the parts in the World, as may
ſeem
more agreeable to the intention of it;

but
only ſhew, that God created this Earth
where
we live, and the Heaven of Heavens.

So
that the Heaven of the Stars and Planets,
ſhall
be ſhifted out from the number of the
other
Creatures.
Secondly, There is ano-
ther
place which cannot be ſo avoided,
Pſal
.
89. 37. where the Pſalmiſt uſes this
expreſſion
, ןרב’, It ſhall be eſtabliſhed as
25272That the Earth may be a Planet. Moon. So Pſalm. 8. 3. The Moon and the
Stars
, התגגרב רשא, which [thou haſt eſta-
bliſhed
.
] Thus likewiſe, Prov. 8. 27. when be
eſtabliſhed
the Heavens:
And in the next
Verſe
, our Engliſh Tranſlation reads it,
when
he eſtabliſhed the Clouds.
And yet our
Adverſaries
will affirm the Moon, and Stars,
and
Clouds, to be ſubject unto natural Mo-
tions
:
Why then ſhould the very ſame ex-
preſſions
be counted as ſuſſicient Arguments
to
take it away from the Earth?
If it be replied; That by eſtabliſhing the
Heavens
, is meant only the holding of them
up
, that they do not fall down to us, (as
Lorinus
explains that in Pſal.
8. and quotes
11Lorinus
Comment
.
in
Pſ.8.
Euthymius for the ſame interpretation)
Fundandi
verbum ſignificat decidere non poſſe,
aut
dimoteri a loco ubi collocata ſunt.
I an-
ſwer
, Why may not we as well interpret
the
words thus of the Earth;
ſo that by
eſtabliſhing
of it, is meant only the keep-
ing
of it up in the vaſt places of the open
Air
, without falling to any other place.
From hence it is plain, That theſe Scrip-
tures
are to be underſtood of ſuch an im-
mobility
in the Earth, as may likewiſe a-
gree
with the Heavens:
the ſame original
word
being ſo promiſcuouſly applied to
both
.
I, but (you will ſay) there are ſome other
places
which do more peculiarly apply this
ſetledneſs
and eſtabliſhment to the Earth.
So Pſal. 1 19. 9. Thy Faithfulneſs is unto all
Generations
:
Thou haſt eſtabliſhed the
25373That the Earth may be a Planet. and it abideth. Thus likewiſe, Pſal. 104. 5.
Who laid the Foundations of the Earth, that it
ſhould
not be removed for ever.
The latter of
which
, being well weighed in its Original,
(ſaith Mr.
Fuller) does in three emphatical
11Miſcel l.1.
c
.15.
words, ſtrongly conclude the Earth's im-
mobility
.
As firſt, when he ſays, רט’ fundavit, he
hath
founded it:
wherein it is implied, that
it
does not change its place.
To which may
be
added all thoſe Texts, which ſo frequent-
ly
ſpeak of the Foundations of the Earth;
as
alſo
that expreſſion of the Pſalmiſt, where
he
mentions the Pillars of the Earth, Pſalm.
75. 3.
The ſecond word is (ה’גרבמ), tranſla-
ted
Baſis;
and by the Septuagint, {ἐπὶ} τ{ιὼ}
ασφάλ
{ει}αν ὰυτῦs;
; that is, he hath founded
it
upon its own firmneſs;
and therefore it is
altogether
without motion.
The third expreſſion is טומת♑לב, from
the
Root, טומ, which ſignifies declinare;
implying, that it could not wag with the
leaſt
kind of declination.
To theſe I anſwer ſeverally:
Firſt, For the word, רם’ fundavit, It can-
not
be underſtood properly, as if the natu-
tural
Frame of the Earth, like other artiſi-
cial
Buildings, did need any bottom to up-
hold
it;
for he hangeth the Earth upon no-
thing
, Job 26.
7. But it is a Metaphor, and
ſignifies
God's placing or ſcituating this
Globe
of Land and Water.
As David tells
us
of the Pillars of the Earth:
ſo Job
25474That the Earth may be a Planet. tions pillars of the Heavens, Job 26. 11. and
yet
that will not prove them to be immova-
ble
.
True indeed, we read often concerning
the
Foundations of the Earth:
but ſo we do
likewiſe
of the Ends, Sides, and Corners
of
the Earth;
and yet theſe Scriptures will
not
prove it to be of a long or ſquare form.
Beſides, we read alſo of the Foundations of
Heaven
, םטשח תולמוט, 2 Sam.
22. 8.
And
yet we muſt not hence infer, that they
are
without all motion;
As alſo of the plant-
ing
of the Heavens, Ifa.
51. 6. which may as
well
prove them to be immovable, as that
which
follows in the ſame Verſe concerning
the
Foundations oſ the Earth.
Which phraſe (if I have obſerved right)
in
ſeveral places of Scripture, is to be un-
derſtood
, according to theſe three Interpre-
tations
.
1. It is taken ſometimes for the lower
parts
of the Earth, as appears by that place
2
Sam.
22. 16. The Channels of the Sea ap-
11So Pſal.
18
. 15.
peared;
the Foundations of the VVorld were
diſcovered
.
2. Sometimes for the beginning and firſt
creation
of it, Iſa.
40. 21. Hath it not been
told
you from the beginning ?
have ye not un-
derſtood
from the Foundations of the Earth?
And in many other places, Before the Foun-
22Joh. 17.24
Ephef
.1.4.
dation of the VVorld was laid;
that is, before
the
firſt Creation.
Sometimes it ſignifies the Magiſtrates and
chief
Governors of the Earth.
So
25575That the Earth may be a Planet. interpret that place in Micah 6. 2. where ’tis
ſaid
, Hear, O ye Mountains, the Lord's Con-
troverſy
, and ye ſtrong Foundations of the
Earth
.
So Pſal. 82. 5. The Foundations of the
Earth
are out of courſe:
And in 1 Sam 2. 8.
they are called Pillars; For the Pillars of the
Earth
are the Lords, and he bath ſet the VVorld
upon
them.
Hence it is, that the Hebrews
derive
their word for Maſter, or Lord;

ſrom
a Root which ſignifies a Baſis, or Bot-
tom
, ןולא ab ןלא.
And the Greek word
11Etymol,
mag
.
for King, does, in its Primitives, import as
much
as the Foundation of the People, βά-
{οι}λ{οι}ς, quaſi βά{οι}ς τ{οῦ} λα{οῦ}.
But now,
none
of all the ſeveral interpretations of this
phraſe
, will in the leaſt manner conduce
to
the confirmation of the preſent Argu-
ment
.
As for the ſecond word, העובמ, Baſis
ejus
.
I anſwer, The proper ſignification of
it
, is, locus diſpoſitus, ſedes, or ſtatio, an
appointed
Seat or Station;
and according
to
this ſenſe, is it moſt frequently uſed in
Scripture
.
And thereſore, the Heavens are
ſometimes
called, ן'במ, the Seat of God's
Habitation
.
And for this reaſon likewiſe,
do
Aquila and Symmachus traſlate it by the
word
ἕδ{ὲα}, a Seat, or appointed ſcituati-
on
, which may as well be attributed to the
Heavens
.
The third expreſſion is טומתלב, that
it
ſhould not be moved from the Primitive
, טומ which does not ſignify barely to
25676That the Earth may be a Planet. but declinare, or vacillare, to decline or ſlip
aſide
from its natural courſe.
Thus it is
uſed
by David, Pſal.
17. 5. where he prays,
Hold
up my goings in thy Paths, ןטמגלב
that
my Foot-ſteps ſlide not.
He does
not
mean that his feet ſhould not move.
So
Pſal
.
121. 3. He will not ſuffer thy foot to be
moved
.
Thus likewiſe, Pſal. 16. 8. Becauſe
the
Lord is at my right band, I ſhall not be
moved
:
which laſt place is tranſlated in the
New
Teſtament, by the Greek word {οα-
11Act.2.25. λευω, which ſignifies fluctuare, or vacillare,
to
be ſhaken by ſuch an uncertain motion,
as
the Waves of the Sea.
Now, as David's
feet
may have their uſual motion, and yet
in
this ſenſe be ſaid not to move, that is,
not
to decline or ſlip aſide :
ſo neither can
the
ſame phraſe, applied to the Earth, prove
it
to be immovable.
Nor do I ſee any reaſon, why that of
Didacus
Aſtunica, may not be truly aſſir-
22Comment.
an
Job.
med, That we may prove the natural
motion
of the Earth, from that place in
Job
6.
9. Qui commovet terram è loco ſuo,
as
well as its reſt and immobility from
theſe
.
From all which, it is very evident, that
each
of theſe expreſſions, concerning the
founding
or eſtabliſbing both of Heaven or
Earth
, were not intended to ſhew the un-
movableneſs
of either, but rather, to ma-
niſeſt
the Power and Wiſdom of Provi-
dence
, who had ſo ſetled theſe parts of
25777That the Earth may be a Planet. World in their proper ſcituations, that no
natural
cauſe could diſplace them, or make
them
decline from their appointed courſe.
As for ſuch who do utterly diſlike all new
interpretation
of Scripture, even in ſuch
matters
as do meerly concern Opinion, and
are
not fundamental :
I would only pro-
poſe
unto them a ſpeech of S.
Hierome, con-
cerning
ſome that were of the ſame mind
in
his time;
Cum novas ſemper expetant vo-
luptates
, &
gulæ eorum vicina Maria non ſuf-
ficiant
, cur in ſolo ſtudio Scripturarum, veteri
ſapore
contenti ſunt?
Thus have I in ſome meaſure cleared the
chief
Arguments from Scripture, againſt this
Opinion
.
For which notwithſtanding, I
have
not thence cited any;
becauſe I con-
ceive
the Holy Writ, being chieſly intended
to
inform us of ſuch things as concern our
Faith
and Obedience :
we cannot thence
take
any proper proof for the conſirmation
of
Natural Secrets.
25878That the Earth may be a Planet.
PROP. VI.
That there is not any Argument from the
Words
of Scripture, Principles of Na-
ture
, or Obſervations in Aſtronomy,
which
can ſuſſiciently evidence the
Earth
to be in the Gentre of the Uni-
verſe
.
Our Adverſaries do much inſult in the
ſtrength
oſ thoſe Arguments which
they
conceive, do unanſwerably conclude,
the
Earth to be in the Centre oſ the World.
Whereas, if they were but impartially con-
ſidered
, they would be found altogether in-
ſufficient
for any ſuch concluſion, as ſhall
be
clearly manifeſted in this following
Chapter
.
The Arguments which they urge in the
proof
of this, are of three ſorts;
Either
ſuch
as are taken,
1. From expreſſions of Scripture.
2. From Principles of Natural Philoſo-
phy
.
3. From common appearances in Aſtro-
nomy
.
Thoſe of the firſt kind, are chiefly two:
The firſt is grounded on that common Scrip-
ture-phraſe
, which ſpeaks of the Sun as be-
ing
above us.
So Solomon often
25979That the Earth may be a Planet. humane Affairs, calls them, the VVorks
11Eccleſ. 1.
14
, &c.
which are done under the Sun.
From whence
it
appears, that the Earth is below it;
and
therefore
nearer to the Centre of the Uni-
verſe
than the Sun.
I anſwer : Though the Sun, in compari-
ſon
to the abſolute Frame of the World, be
in
the midſt;
yet this does not hinder, but
that
in reſpect to our Earth, he may be tru-
ly
ſaid to be above it, becauſe we uſually
meaſure
the height or lowneſs of any thing,
by
its being further off, or nearer unto this
Centre
of our Earth.
From which, ſince
the
Sun is ſo remote, it may properly be af-
firmed
, that we are under it ;
though not-
withſtanding
that be in the Centre of the
World
.
A ſecond Argument of the ſame kind, is
urged
by Fromondus.
’Tis requiſite, that Hell (which is in the
22Antar. c.
12
. item
Veft
.traft.
s
.c.2.
Centre of the Earth) ſhould be moſt re-
motely
ſcituated from the Seat of the Bleſ-
ſed
.
But now this Heaven, which is the
Seat
of the Bleſſed, is concentrical to the
ſtarry
Sphere.
And therefore it will ſollow,
that
our Earth muſt be in the midſt of this
Sphere
;
and ſo conſequently in the Centre
of
the World.
I anſwer : This Argument is grounded
upon
theſe uncertainties ;
1. That Hell muſt needs be ſcituated in
the
Centre of our Earth.
2. That the Heaven of the Bleſſed, muſt
needs
be concentrical to that oſ the Stars.
26080That the Earth may be a Planet.
3. That places muſt be as far diſtant in
ſcituation
, as in uſe :
Which becauſe they are taken for gran-
ted
, without any proof, and are in them-
ſelves
but weak and doubtſul:
therefore the
concluſion
(which always follows the worſer
part
) cannot be ſtrong, and ſo will not need
any
other anſwer.
The ſecond ſort of Arguments taken from
natural
Philoſophy, are principally theſe
three
:
Arg. 1. From the vileneſs of our Earth,
becauſe
it conſiſts of a more ſordid and baſe
Matter
than any other part of the World;
and therefore, muſt be ſcituated in the Cen-
tre
, which is the worſt place, and at the
greateſt
diſtance from thoſe purer incorrup-
tible
Bodies, the Heavens.
I anſwer : This Argument does ſuppoſe
ſuch
Propoſitions for Grounds, which are
not
yet proved;
and therefore not to be
granted
.
As,
1. That Bodies muſt be as far diſtant in
Place
, as in Nobility.
2. That the Earth is a more ignoble Sub-
ſtance
than any of the other Planets, con-
ſiſting
of a more baſe and vile Matter.
3. That the Centre is the worſt place.
All which, are, if not evidently falſe,
yet
very uncertain.
Arg. 2. From the nature of the Centre,
which
is the place of Reſt, and ſuch as in
all
circular Motions, is it ſelf immovable;
And therefore will be the fitteſt
26181That the Earth may be a Planet. for the Earth; which by reaſon of its hea-
vineſs
, is naturally unfit for motion.
I anſwer : This Argument likewiſe is
grounded
upon theſe two ſalſe Foundations:
As,
1. That the whole Frame oſ Nature does
move
round, excepting only the Earth.
2. That the whole Earth, conſidered as
whole
, and in its proper place, is heavy, or
more
unſit for a natural motion than any of
the
other Planets.
Which are ſo far from being ſuch general
Grounds
, from which Controverſies ſhould
be
diſcuſſed, That they are the very thing
in
queſtion betwixt us and our Adverſa-
ries
.
Arg. 3. From the nature of all heavy
Bodies
, which are to fall towards the loweſt
place
.
From whence they conclude, that our
Earth
muſt be in the Centre.
I anſwer: This may prove it to be a Cen-
tre
of Gravity, but not of Diſtance;
or
that
it is in the midſt of the World.
Yea,
(but fays our Adverſaries) Ariſtotle for this
urges
a Demonſtration, which muſt needs
be
infallible.
Thus, the motion of light
Bodies
, does apparently ténd upward to-
wards
the Circumference of the World :
but now the motion of heavy Bodies, is di-
rectly
contrary to the aſcent of the other ;

whereſore
it will neceſſarily follow, that theſe
do
all of them tend unto the Centre of the
World
.
26282That the Earth may be a Planet.
I anſwer: Though Ariſtotle were a Maſter
in
the Art of Syllogiſms, and he from whom
he
received the Rules of Diſputation;
yet
in
this particular, ’tis very plain that he
was
deceived with a Fallacy, whilſt his Ar-
gument
does but only ſuppoſe that which it
pretend
to prove.
That light Bodies do aſcend unto ſome
Circumſerence
which is higher and above
the
Earth, is plain and undeniable.
But
that
this Circumference is the ſame with that
of
the World, or concentrical unto it, can-
not
be reaſonably aſſirmed, unleſs he ſup-
poſes
the Earth to be in the Centre of the
Univerſe
, which is the thing to be pro-
ved
.
I would fain know from what grounds
our
Adverſaries can prove, that the deſcent
of
heavy Bodies is to the Centre;
or the
aſcent
of light Bodies, to the Circumference
of
the World.
The utmoſt experience we
can
have in this kind, does but extend to
thoſe
things that are upon our Earth, or in
the
Air above it.
And alas, what is this
unto
the vaſt frame of the whole Univerſe,
but
punctulum, ſuch an inſenſible Point,
which
does not bear ſo great a proportion
to
the whole, as a ſmall Sand does unto the
Earth
?
Wherefore it were a ſenſleſs thing,
from
our experience of ſo little a part, to
pronounce
any thing inſallibly concerning
the
ſcituation of the whole.
26383That the Earth may be a Planet.
The Arguments from Aſtronomy, are
chieſly
theſe four;
each of which are boaſt-
ed
of to be unanſwerable.
Arg. 1. The Horizon does every where
divide
all the great Circles of a Sphere in-
to
two equal parts :
So there is always half
the
Equinoctial above it, and half below.
Thus likewiſe, there will conſtantly be ſix
Signs
oſ the Zodiack above the Horizon, and
other
ſix below it.
And beſides, the Circles
of
the Heaven and Earth, are each way
proportionable
to one another;
as fifteen
German
miles on the Earth, are every where
agreeable
to one Degree in the Heavens;
and
one
Hour in the Earth, is correſpondent to
fifteen
Degrees in the Equator.
From whence
it
may be inferred, that the Earth muſt ne-
ceſſarily
be ſcituated in the midſt of theſe
Circles
;
and ſo conſequently, in the Centre
of
the World.
I anſwer : This Argument does rightly
prove
the Earth to be in the midſt of theſe
Circles
:
But we cannot hence conclude, that
it
is in the Centre of the World:
from which,
tho
it were never ſo much diſtant, yet would
it
ſtill remain in the midſt of thoſe Circles,
becauſe
it is the Eye that imagines them to
be
deſcribed about it.
Wherefore it were a
weak
and prepoſterous Collection, to argue
thus
, That the Earth is in the Centre of the
World
, becauſe in the midſt of thoſe Cir-
cles
;
or becauſe the Parts and Degrees of
the
Earth, are anſwerable in proportion to
the
Parts and Degrees in Heaven.
26484That the Earth may be a Planet. it follows rather on the contrary, That theſe
Circles
are equally diſtant and proportional
in
their parts, in reſpect of the Earth, be-
cauſe
it is our Eye that deſcribes them about
the
Centre of it.
So that though a far greater part of the
World
did appear at one time than at ano-
ther
;
yet in reſpect of thoſe Circles which
our
Eye deſcribes about the Earth, all that
we
could ſee at once, would ſeem to be but
a
perfect Hemiſphere:
As may be manifeſted
by
this following Figure.
9[Figure 9]
Where if we ſuppoſe A to be our Earth,
BCDE
one of the great Circles
26585That the Earth may be a Planet. we fancy about it, FGHI the Orb of fixed
Stars
, R the Centre of them.
Now though
the
Arch, G F I, be bigger than the other,
GHI
, yet notwithſtanding, to the Eye on
the
Earth A, one will appear a Semicircle as
well
as the other;
becauſe the Imagination
does
transfer all thoſe Stars into the leſſer
Circle
, BCDE, which it does fancy to be
deſcribed
above that Centre.
Nay, though
there
were a habitable Earth, at a far grea-
ter
diſtance from the Centre of the World,
even
in the place of Jupiter;
as ſuppoſe at
Q
, yet then alſo would there be the ſame
appearance
.
For though the Arch, KFL,
in
the ſtarry Heaven, were twice as big as
the
other, KHL, yet notwithſtanding, at
the
Earth Q, they would both appear but
as
equal Hemiſpheres, being transferred in-
to
that other Circle, MNOP, which is part
of
the Sphere that the Eye deſcribes to it
ſelf
about the Earth.
From whence we may plainly diſcern,
That
though the Earth be never ſo far di-
ftant
from the Centre of the World;
yet
the
Parts and Degrees of that imaginary
Sphere
about it, will always be propor-
tional
to the Parts and Degrees of the
Earth
.
Arg. 2. Another Demonſtration like un-
to
this former, frequently urged to the ſame
purpoſe
, is this:
If the Earth be out of the
Centre
of the World, then muſt it be ſci-
tuated
in one of theſe three Poſitions :
ei-
11Vid. Cars.
Greg
. l. x.
co
5.
ther in the Equator, but out of the Axis;
26686That the Earth may be a Planet. or, ſecondly, in the Axis, but out of the
Equator
;
or, thirdly, beſides both of them.
But it is not placed according to any of theſe
ſcituations
, therefore muſt it needs be in
the
Centre.
1. ’Tis not in the Equator, and beſide the
Axis
.
For then, firſt, there will be no E-
quinox
at all in ſome places, when the Days
and
Nights ſhall be of an equal length.
Se-
condly
, The Afternoons and Forenoons
will
not be of the ſame length;
becauſe,
then
our Meridian-Line muſt divide the He-
miſphere
into unequal parts.
2. ’Tis not in the Axis, but out of the
Equator
;
For then, firſt, the Equinox would
not
happen when the Sun was in the middle
Line
between the two Solſtices, but in ſome
other
Parallel, which might be nearer to one
of
them, according as the Earth did ap-
proach
to one 'Fropick more than another.
Secondly, There would not be ſuch a pro-
portion
between the increaſe and decreaſe
of
Days and Nights, as now there is.
3. ’Tis not beſides both of them: For
then
, all theſe Inconveniences, and ſundry
others
, muſt with the ſame neceſſity of con-
ſequence
be inferred.
From whence it will
follow
, That the Earth muſt be ſcituated
there
, where the Axis and Equator meet,
which
is in the Center of the World.
To this we grant, that the Earth muſt
needs
be placed, both in the Axis and Equa-
tor
;
and ſo conſequently, in the Centre of
that
Sphere which we imagine about it:
26787That the Earth may be a Planet. But yet this will not prove, that it is in the
midſt
of the Univerſe.
For let our Adver-
ſaries
ſuppoſe it to be as far diſtant from
that
, as they conceive the Sun to be;
yet
may
it ſtill be ſcituated, in the very con-
courſe
of theſe two Lines:
becauſe the
Axis
of the World is nothing elſe but
that
imaginary Line which paſſes through
the
Poles of our Earth, to the Poles of
the
World.
And ſo likewiſe the Equa-
tor
, is nothing elſe but a great Circle in the
midſt
of the Earth, betwixt both the Poles,
which
by imagination is continued even to
the
fixed Stars.
Thus alſo, we may affirm
the
Earth to be in the plane of the Zodiack,
if
by its annual motion it did deſcribe that
imaginary
Circle:
and in the plane of the
Equator
, if by its diurnal motion about its
own
Axis, it did make ſeveral Parallels, the
midſt
of which ſhould be the Equator.
From
whence
it appears, that theſe two former
Arguments
proceed from one and the ſame
miſtake
, whilſt our Adverſaries ſuppoſe the
Circumference
and Center of the Sphere, to
be
the ſame with that of the World.
Another demonſtration of the ſame kind,
11Arg. 3. is taken from the Eclipſes of the Sun and
Moon
;
which would not always happen
when
theſe two Luminaries are diametri-
cally
oppoſed, but ſometimes when they
are
leſs diſtant than a Semicircle, if it were ſo
that
the Earth were not in the Centre.
I anſwer: This Argument, if well conſi-
dered
, will be found moſt directly to
26888That the Earth may be a Planet. this concluſion, That in all Eclipſes, the Earth
is
in ſuch a ſtreight Line, (betwixt the two
Luminaries
) whoſe extremities do point
unto
oppoſite parts of the Zodiack.
Now tho
our
Adverſaries ſhould ſuppoſe (as Coperni-
cus
does) the Earth to be ſcituated in that
which
they would have to be the Sun's Orb;
yet would there not be any Eclipſe, but when
the
Sun and Moon were diametrically oppo-
ſite
, and our Earth betwixt them:
As may
clearly
be manifeſted by this Figure, where
you
ſee the two Luminaries in oppoſite Signs:

and
according as any part of our Earth is
ſcituated
by its diurnal Revolution, ſo will
every
Eclipſe be either viſible, or not viſible
unto
it.
10[Figure 10]
26989That the Earth may be a Planet.
Arg. 4. The laſt and chief Argument, is
11Ariſt. de
Cælo
. l. 2.
c
. 14.
taken from the appearance of the Stars;
which in every Horizon, at each hour of
the
Night, and at all times of the Year,
ſeem
of an equal bigneſs.
Now this could
not
be, if our Earth were ſometimes nearer
unto
them by 2000000 German miles,
which
is granted to be the Diameter of
that
Orb, wherein the Earth is ſuppoſed to
move
.
I anſwer: This Conſequence will not
22Copern.
l
.1.c.5,6.
hold, if we affirm the Earth's Orb not to
be
big enough for the making of any ſenſi-
ble
difference in the appearance of the fixed
Stars
.
Yea, but (you will ſay) ’tis beyond con-
ceit
, and without all reaſon, to think the
fixed
Stars of ſo vaſt a diſtance from us, that
our
approaching nearer unto them by
2000000
German miles, cannot make any
difference
in the ſeeming quantity of their
Bodies
.
I reply: There is no certain way to find
out
the exact diſtance of the ſtarry Firma-
ment
:
But we are fain to conclude of it by
Conjectures
, according as ſeveral Reaſons
and
Obſervations ſeem moſt likely unto the
Fancies
of divers Men.
Now that this Opi-
nion
of Copernicus does not make it too big,
may
be diſcerned from theſe following Con-
iderations
.
The words, great and little, are relative
tearms
, and do import a compariſon to
ſomething
elſe:
So that where the
27090That the Earth may be a Planet. ment (as it is according to Copernicus) is
ſaid
to be too big;
’tis likely, that this word
is
to be underſtood in reference to ſome o-
ther
thing of the ſame kind, the leaſt of
which
is the Moons Orb:
But now if its
being
ſo much bigger than this may be a ſuf-
ficient
reaſon, why it ſhould be thought too
great
, then it ſeems that every thing which
exceeds
another of the ſame kind, in ſuch
a
proportion, may be concluded to be of
too
big a quantity:
and ſo conſequently,
we
may aſſirm, that there is no ſuch thing
in
the World.
And hence it will follow,
that
Whales and Elephants are meer Chimæ-
ra
's, and poetical Fictions, becauſe they do
much
exceed many other living Creatures.
If all this eighth Sphere, (ſaith Gallilæus)
as
great as it is, were a light Body, and pla-
ced
ſo far from us, that it appeared but as
one
of the leſſer Stars, we ſhould then eſteem
it
but little;
and therefore, we have no rea-
ſon
now to thruſt it out from being amongſt
the
Works of Nature, by reaſon of its
too
great immenſity.
’Tis a frequent ſpeech
of
our Adverſaries, Tycho, Fromondus, and
others
, in excuſe of that incredible ſwift-
neſs
which they imagine in their Primum
Mobile
, That ’twas requiſite the Motion of
the
Heavens ſhould have a kind of inſinity
in
it, the better to manifeſt the infiniteneſs
of
the Creator.
And why may not we as
well
affirm this concerning the bigneſs of
the
Heavens ?
Difficilius eſt accidens præter
modulum
ſubjecti intendere, quàm
27191That the Earth may be a Planet. ſine accidente augere, (ſaith Kepler.) His
meaning
is, that ’tis leſs abſurd to imagine
the
eighth Sphere of ſo vaſt a bigneſs, as
long
as ’tis without motion, or at leaſt,
has
but a very ſlow one;
than to attribute
unto
it ſuch an incredible celerity, as is
altogether
diſproportionable to its big-
neſs
.
2. ’Tis the acknowledgment of Clavius,
11Comment.
in
sphær.
cap
. 1.
and might eaſily be demonſtrated, That if
the
Centre were faſtned upon the Pole of
the
World, the Orb wherein he ſuppoſes
the
Sun to move, would not be able to reach
ſo
far in the eighth Sphere, (being conſi-
dered
according to Ptolomy's Hypotheſis) as
to
touch the Pole-ſtar:
which notwith-
ſtanding
(ſaith he) is ſo near the Pole it
ſelf
, that we can ſcarce diſcern it to move:
Nay, that Circle which the Pole-ſtar makes
about
the Pole, is above four times bigger
than
the Orb of the Sun.
So that according
to
the opinion of our Adverſaries, though
our
Earth were at that diſtance from the
Centre
, as they ſuppoſe the Sun to be, yet
would
not this Excentricity make it nearer to
any
one part of the Firmament, than the
Pole-ſtar
is to the Pole, which according to
his
confeſſion, is ſcarce ſenſible.
And there-
fore
according to their opinion, it would
cauſe
very little difference in the appearance
of
thoſe Stars, the biggeſt of which does
not
ſeem to be of above five Seconds in its
Diameter
.
27292That the Earth may be a Planet.
3. ’Tis conſiderable, That the Spheres of
Saturn
, Jupiter, Mars, are, according to the
general
opinion, of very great extenſion ;
and yet each of them is appointed only to
carry
about its particular Planet, which are
but
very little in compariſon of the fixed
Stars
.
Now if for the ſcituation of theſe
fixed
Stars, there ſhould be allotted a pro-
portionable
part of the World, ’tis certain,
that
their Orb muſt be far bigger than it is
commonly
ſuppoſed, and very near to this
Opinion
of Copernicus.
4. We uſually judg the bigneſs of the
higher
Orbs, by their different motions.
As
becauſe
Saturn finiſhes his courſe in thirty
Years
, and Jupiter in twelve, therefore we
attribute
unto thoſe Orbs, ſuch a different
proportion
in their bigneſs.
Now if by this
Rule
we ſhould find out the quantity of the
eighth
Sphere, we ſhall diſcern it to be far
nearer
unto that bigneſs, which Copernicus
ſuppoſeth
it to have, than that which Pto-
lomy
, Tycho, and others, ordinarily aſcribe
unto
it.
For the ſtarry Heaven (ſay they)
does
not finiſh his courſe under 26000 Years;
whereas Saturn, which is next unto it, does
compaſs
his Orb in thirty Years.
From
whence
it will probably follow, that there is
a
very great diſtance betwixt theſe in place,
becauſe
they have ſuch different terms of
their
Revolutions.
But againſt this Anſwer: Unto the laſt
Argument
, our Adverſaries thus reply:
27393That the Earth may be a Planet.
1. If the fixed Stars be ſo far diſtant from
11Fromond.
Veſt
tract.
5
. cap. 1.
us, that our approaching nearer unto them
by
2000000 German miles, do not make a-
ny
ſenſible difference in their appearance,
then
Gallilæus his Perſpective could not make
them
ſeem of a bigger Form, than they do
to
the bare Eye, which yet is contrary to
common
experience.
2. From hence it may be inferred, That
22Ibid. the leaſt fixed Star is bigger than all this Orb
wherein
we ſuppoſe the Earth to move;
be-
cauſe
there is none of them but are of a ſen-
ſible
bigneſs in reſpect of the Firmament;
whereas this it ſeems is not.
3. Since God did at firſt create the Stars
for
the uſe of all Nations that are under the
whole
Heavens, Deut.
4. 19. it might have
33Ibid. argued ſome improvidence in him, if he had
made
them of ſuch vaſt magnitudes:
where-
as
they might as well beſtow their light and
influences
, and ſo conſequently be as ſer-
viceable
to that end for which they were ap-
pointed
, if they had been made with leſs
Bodies
, and placed nearer unto us.
And
’tis
a common maxime, that Nature in all her
Operations
, does avoid ſuperfluities, and uſe
the
moſt compendious way.
I anſwer:
1. To the firſt; whether the Perſpective
do
make the fixed Stars appear bigger than
they
do to the bare Eye, cannot certainly
be
concluded, unlefs we had ſuch an exact
Glaſs
, by which we might try the experi-
ment
.
But if in this kind we will truſt
27494That the Eartb may be a Planet. authority of others, Keplar tells us, 11* Aſtron.
Copern
.
l
.I. par.I.
the experience of skilful Men, that the bet-
ter
the Perſpective is, by ſo much the lefs
will
the fixed Stars appear through it, being
but
as meer Points from which the Beams of
Light
do diſperſe themſelves like Hairs.
And
’tis
commonly affirmed by others, that the
Dog-ſtar
, which ſeems to be the biggeſt
Star
amongſt thoſe of the firſt Magnitude,
does
yet appear through this Glaſs, but as a
little
Point no bigger than the fiftieth part
of
Jupiter.
Hence it is, that though the
common
Opinion hold the Stars of the firſt
Magnitude
to be two Minutes in their Dia-
meter
, and Tycho three;
yet 22Syſtem.
mundi
,
Coll
.3.
who had been moſt verſed in the Experi-
ments
of his own Perſpective, concludes them
to
be but five Seconds.
2. To the ſecond: Firſt, we affirm the
fixed
Stars to be of a vaſt Magnitude.
But
however
, this Argument does not induce any
neceſſity
that we ſhould conceive them ſo big
as
the Earth's Orb.
For it might eaſily be
proved
, that though a Star of the ſixth Mag-
nitude
, were but equal in Diameter unto
the
Sun, (which is far enough from the
greatneſs
of the Earth's Orb) yet the
ftarry
Heaven would be at ſuch a diſtance
from
us, that the Earth's annual Motion
could
not cauſe any difference in its appear-
ance
.
Suppoſe the Diameter of the Sun to be a-
33Vid Galil.
ibid
.
bout half a Degree, as our Adverſaries
grant
;
whereas a Star of the ſixth
27595That the Eartb may be a Planet. tude is fifty Thirds, which is comprehended
in
that of the Sun 2160 times.
Now if the
Sun
were removed ſo far from us, that its
Diameter
would ſeem but as one of that
number
whereof it now contains 2160, then
muſt
his diſtance from us be 2160 times
greater
than now it is:
which is all one, as
if
we ſhould ſay, that a Star of the ſixth
Magnitude
is ſevered from us by ſo many Se-
midiameters
of the Earth's Orb.
But now,
according
to common conſent, the diſtance
of
the Earth from the Sun, does contain 128
Semidiameters
of the Earth;
and (as was
faid
before) this ſuppoſed diſtance of the
fixed
Stars, does comprehend 2160 Semi-
diameters
of the Earth's Orb.
From whence
it
is manifeſt, that the Semidiametey of the
Earth
, in compariſon to its diſtance from the
Sun
, will be almoſt doubly bigger than the
Semidiameter
of the Earth's Orb, in com-
pariſon
to this diſtance of the Stars.
But
now
the Semidiameter of the Earth, does
make
very little difference in the appear-
ance
of the Sun, becauſe we ſee common
Obſervations
upon the Surface of it, are as
exactly
true to the ſenſe, as if they were
made
from the Centre of it.
Wherefore,
that
difference which would be made in
theſe
fixed Stars, by the annual courſe of
the
Earth, muſt needs be much more unob-
fervable
, or rather altogether inſenſible.
2. The Conſequence of this Argument, is
grounded
upon this falfe ſuppoſition, That
every
Body muſt neceſſarily be of an
27696That the Eartb may be a Planet. extenſion, to that diſtance from whence
there
does not appear any ſenſible difference
in
its quantity.
So that when I ſee a Bird
flying
ſuch a height in the Air, that my be-
ing
nearer unto it, or farther from it, by
ten
or twenty Foot, does not make it ſeem
unto
my Eyes either bigger or leſs;
then I
may
conclude, that the Bird muſt needs be
either
ten or twenty foot thick:
Or when I
ſee
the Body of a Tree that may be half a
mile
from me, and perceive that my ap-
proaching
nearer to it, by thirty or forty
paces
, does not ſenſibly make any different
appearance
, I may then infer, that the Tree
is
forty paces thick;
with many the like ab-
furd
Conſequences, that would follow from
that
Foundation upon which this Argument
is
bottom'd.
To the third, I anſwer: ’Tis too much
preſumption
, to conclude that to be ſuper-
fluous
, the uſefulneſs of which we do not
underſtand
.
There be many ſecret Ends in
theſe
great Works of Providence, which
humane
Wiſdom cannot reach unto;
and
as
Solomon ſpeaks of thoſe things that are
under
the Sun, ſo may we alſo of thoſe
things
that are above it, That no Man can
find
out the Work of God, for though a Man
11Eccl.8.17. labour to ſeek it out;
Yea, further, Though a
wiſe
Man think to know it, yet ſball be not be
able
to find it.
He that hath moſt inſight in-
to
the Works of Nature, is not able to give
a
ſatisfying reaſon, why the Planets or Stars
ſhould
be placed juſt at this particular
27797That the Eartb may be a Planet. ſtance from the Earth, and no nearer or far-
ther
.
And beſides, this Argument might as
well
be urged againſt the Hypotheſis of Pto-
lomy
or Tycbo, ſince the Stars, for ought
we
know, might have been as ſerviceable to
us
, if they had been placed far nearer than
either
of thoſe Authors ſuppoſe them.
A-
gain
, were there any force in ſuch a Conſe-
quence
, it would as well conclude a great
improvidence
of Nature, in making ſuch a
multitude
of thoſe leſſer Stars, which have
lately
been diſcovered by the Perſpective.
For to what purpoſe ſhould ſo many Lights
be
created for the uſe of Man, ſince his Eyes
were
not able to diſcern them?
So that our
diſability
to comprehend all thoſe ends
which
might be aimed at in the Works of
Nature
, can be no ſufficient Argument to
prove
their ſuperfluity.
Though Scripture
tells
us, that theſe things were made for
our
uſe, yet it does not tell us, that this is
their
only end.
’Tis not impoſſible, but that
there
may be elſewhere ſome other Inhabi-
tants
, by whom theſe leſſer Stars may be
more
plainly diſcerned.
And (as was ſaid
before
) why may not we affirm that of the
bigneſs
, which our Adverſaries do concern-
ing
the motion of the Heavens?
That God,
to
ſhew his own immenſity, did put a kind
of
infinity in the Creature.
There is yet another Argument to this
purpoſe
, urged by Al.
Roſſ. which was 11Lib. I.
ſect
. 2.6.I.
referred to any of the former kind, becauſe
I
could ſcarcely believe I did rightly
27898That the Eartb may be a Planet. ſtand it: ſince he puts it in the front of his
other
Arguments, as being of ſtrength and
ſubtilty
enough to be a Leader unto all the
reſt
;
and yet in the moſt likely ſenſe of it,
’tis
ſo extreamly ſimple to be preſſed in a
Controverſy
, that every freſh Man would
laugh
at it.
The words of it are theſe:
Quod minimum eſt in circulo debet eſſe centrum
illius
, at Terr a longè minor eſt Sole, &
Æqui-
noctialis
Terreſtris eſt omnium in Cælo circulus
minimus
, ergo, &
c.
By the ſame reaſon, it would rather fol-
low
, that the Moon, or Mercury, were in the
Centre
, ſince both theſe are leſs than the
Earth
.
And then, whereas he ſays, that the
Equinoctial
of the Earth, is the leaſt Circle
in
the Heavens, ’tis neigher true nor perti-
nent
, and would make one ſuſpect, that he
who
ſhould urge ſuch an Argument, did
ſcarce
underſtand any thing in Aſtronomy.
There are many other Objections like un-
to
this, not worth the citing:
The chief of
all
have been already anſwered;
by which
you
may diſcern, that there is not any ſuch
great
neceſſity, as our Adverſaries pretend,
why
the Earth ſhould be ſcituated in the
midſt
of the Univerſe.
27999That the Earth may be a Planet.
PROP. VII.
Tis probable that the Sun is in the Gentre
of
the World.
The chief Reaſons for the confirmation
of
this Truth, are implied in the con-
veniences
of this Hypotheſis above any other;
whereby we may reſolve the Motions and
Appearances
of the Heavens, into more eaſy
and
natural Cauſes.
Hence will the Frame of Nature be freed
from
that deformity, which it has accord-
ing
to the Syſteme of Tycho:
who though he
make
the Sun to be in the midſt of the Pla-
nets
, yet, without any good Reaſon, denies
it
to be in the midſt of the fixed Stars;
as if
the
Planets, which are ſuch eminent parts of
the
World, ſhould be appointed to move
about
a diſtinct Centre of their own, which
was
beſide that of the Univerſe.
Hence likewife are we freed from many of
thoſe
Inconveniences in the Hypotheſis of
Ptolomy
, who ſuppoſed in the Heavens, Epi-
cycles
and Eccentricks, and other Orbs, which
he
calls the Deferents of the Apoge and the
Perige
.
As if Nature, in framing this great
Engine
of the World, had been put unto
ſuch
hard ſhifts, that ſhe was fain to make
ufe
of Wheels and Screws, and
280100That the Eartb may be a Planet. the like Artificial Inſtruments of Moti-
on
.
There be ſundry other Particulars, where-
by
this Opinion concerning the Sun's being
in
the Centre, may be ſtrongly evidenced;
Which becauſe they relate unto ſeveral Mo-
tions
alſo, cannot therefore properly be in-
fiſted
on in this place.
You may eaſily e-
nough
diſcern them, by conſidering the
whole
Frame of the Heavens, as they are
according
to the Syſteme of Copernicus;

wherein
all thoſe probable Reſolutions that
are
given for divers appearances amongſt
the
Planets, do mainly depend upon this
Suppoſition
, that the Sun is in the Centre.

Which
Arguments (were there no other)
might
be abundantly enough for the confir-
mation
of it.
But for the greater plenty,
there
are likewiſe theſe Probabilities conſi-
derable
.
1. It may ſeem agreeable to reaſon, That
the
Light which is diffuſed in ſeveral Stars
through
the Circumference of the World,
ſhould
be more eminently contained, and
(as it were) contracted in the Centre of
it
, which can only be by placing the Sun
there
.
2. ’Tis an Argument of Clavius, 11In prim.
cap
.Sphær.
ſrequently urged by our Adverſaries, That
the
moſt natural ſcituation of the Sun's Bo-
dy
was in the midſt, betwixt the other Pla-
nets
;
and that for this Reaſon, becauſe
from
thence he might more conveniently di-
ſtribute
amongſt them both his Light
281101That the Eartb may be a Planet. Heat. The force of which, may more pro-
perly
be applied to prove him in the
Centre
.
3. ’Tis probable that the Planetary Orbs
(which are ſpecial parts of the Univerſe)
do
move about the Centre of the World,
rather
than about any other Centre which is
remote
from it.
But now ’tis evident, that
the
Planets Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Venus,
Mercury
, do, by their Motion, encompaſs
the
Body of the Sun.
’Tis likely therefore
that
this is ſcituated in the midſt of the
World
.
And as for the three upper Planets, ’tis
found
, by Obſervation, that they are always
neareſt
to the Earth, when in oppoſition to
the
Sun, and fartheſt from us, when in con-
junction
with it:
Which difference is ſo
eminent
, that Mars in his Perige does appear
ſixty
times bigger, than when he is in the
Apoge
, and at the greateſt diſtance.
Now, that the Revolution of Venus and
Mercury
alſo is about the Sun, may from
hence
be evidenced.
Firſt, Becauſe they are
never
at any great diſtance from him.
Se-
condly
, Becauſe they are ſeen ſometimes a-
bove
, and ſometimes below him.
Thirdly,
Becauſe
Venus, according to her different
ſcituations
, does change her appearance as
the
Moon.
4. There is yet another Argument, which
Ariſtotle himſelf doth repeat from 11De Cælo,
l
.2.c.13.
goras.
The moſt excellent Body ſhould have
the
beſt place:
but the Sun is the moſt
282102That the Eartb may be a Planet. cellent Body, and the Centre is the beſt
place
;
therefore ’tis likely the Sun is in the
Centre
.
In the Frame of Nature (which
is
ſuppoſed to be of an orbicular Form) there
are
but two places of any eminency, the
Circumference
and the Centre.
The Cir-
cumference
being of ſo wide a capacity, can-
not
ſo fitly be the peculiar Seat of a Body,
that
is ſo little in reſpect of it:
And beſides,
that
which is the moſt excellent part of the
World
, ſhould be equally preſerved in it
ſelf
, and ſhared in its Vertues by all the
other
parts, which can only be done, by its
being
placed in the midſt of them.
This is
intimated
unto us, in that frequent Speech
of
Plato, that the Soul of the World does
reſide
in the innermoſt place of it:
And
that
in Macrobius, who often compares 11Satur-
nal
. lib. I.
c
.17, &c.
Sun in the World, to the Heart in a living
Creature
.
Unto this Ariſtotle anſwers by a diſtincti-
on
:
There is medium magnitudinis, ſo the
Centre
is in the middle of the Sphere:
And
there
is medium naturæ, or informationis, which
is
not always the ſame with the other;
for
in
this ſenſe the Heart is in the middle of a
Man
;
becauſe from thence (ſaith he) as
from
the Centre, the vital Spirits are con-
veyed
to all the Members:
and yet we
know
that it is not the Centre of Magni-
tude
, or at an equal diſtance from all the
other
parts.
And beſides, the middle is the worſt place,
becauſe
moſt circumſcribed, ſince that
283103That the Eartb may be a Planet. more excellent, which does limit any thing,
than
that which is bounded by it.
For this
reaſon
is it, that Matter is amongſt thoſe
things
which are terminated, and Form that
which
does circumſcribe.
But againſt this anſwer of Ariſtotle, it is
again
replied:
1. Though it be true, that in living Crea-
11Keplar.
Aſtr
. Co-
pern
.lib.2.
par
.2.
tures, the beſt and chiefeſt part is not placed
always
juſt in the midſt;
yet this may be,
becauſe
they are not of an orbicular Form,
as
the World is.
2. Though that which bounds another
thing
, be more excellent than that which is
terminated
by it, yet this does not prove
the
Centre to be the worſt place, becauſe
that
is one of the Terms or Limits of a
round
Body, as well as the Circumfe-
rence
.
There are likewiſe other Arguments to
22Maſſin.
præ
. ad
Narrat
.
Rbettci
.
this purpoſe, much inſiſted on by eminent
Aſtronomers
;
taken from that Harmoni-
cal
Proportion which there may be be-
33Keplar.
myſterium

Coſmogra-
Phicum
.
twixt the ſeveral diſtances and bigneſs of
the
Orbs, if we ſuppoſe the Sun to be in
the
Centre.
For according to this (ſay they) we may
conceive
an excellent harmony, both in the
number
and the diſtance of the Planets;
(and if God made all other things, numero
&
menſurâ, much more then thoſe greater
Works
, the Heavens) for then the five Ma-
44Lib. 13.
prop
. 14,
15
, &c.
thematical Bodies, ſo much ſpoken of by
Euclid, will bear in them a
284104That the Earth may be a Planet. anſwerable to the ſeveral diſtances of the
Planets
from one another.
Thus a Cube will meaſure the diſtance be-
twixt
Saturn and Jupiter;
a Pyramis or Te-
traëdron
, the diſtance betwixt Jupiter and
Mars
;
a Dodecaëdron, the diſtance betwixt
Mars
and the Earth;
an Icoſaëdron, the diſtance
betwixt
the Earth &
Venus; and an Octoëdron,
the
diſtance betwixt Venus &
Mercury: that
is
, if we conceive a Circumference deſcri-
bed
immediately without the Cube, and a-
nother
within it, the diſtance between theſe
two
, will ſhew what proportional diſtance
there
is betwixt the Orb of Saturn, and
that
of Jupiter.
Thus alſo, if you con-
ceive
a Circumference deſcribed on the out-
ſide
of a Pyramis, or Tetraëdron, and ano-
ther
within it, this will ſhew ſuch a propor-
tional
diſtance, as there is betwixt the Orb
of
Mars, from that of Jupiter.
And ſo of
the
reſt.
Now if any ask why there are but ſix
Planetary
Orbs?
Keplar anſwers, Zuia non
oportet
plures quàm quinque proportiones eſſe,
totidem
nempè quot regularia ſunt in Matheſi
corpora
.
Sex autem termini conſummant hunc
proportionum
numerum:
Becauſe there are
but
five proportions, ſo many as there are
regular
Bodies in Mathematicks, each of
whoſe
Sides and Angles are equal one to
another
.
But now there are ſix terms re-
quired
to conſummate this number of pro-
portions
;
and ſo conſequently, there can
be
but ſix primary Planets.
285105That the Earth may be a Planet.
Thus likewiſe, by placing the Sun in the
Centre
, we may conceive ſuch a proportion
betwixt
the Bodies of the Planets, as will
be
anſwerable unto their ſevral Spheres:
Then Mercury, which has the leaſt Orb,
will
have the leaſt Body;
Venus bigger than
that
, but leſs than any of the other;
our
Earth
bigger than Venus, but leſs than the
reſt
;
Mars bigger than the Earth, but leſs
than
Jupiter;
Jupiter bigger than Mars, and
leſs
than Saturn;
Saturn being the higheſt,
ſhould
alſo be the biggeſt.
All which Har-
mony
would be diſturbed, by putting in
the
Sun amongſt them;
and therefore, it
may
be more convenient for him to ſit ſtill
in
the Centre.
There are ſundry other Arguments in
this
kind to be found out, by a conſiderati-
on
of this whole Hypotheſis:
He that does
rightly
underſtand it, may therein eaſily
diſcern
many ſtrong Probabilities, why the
Sun
ſhould be in the midſt of the World,
rather
than in any other Poſition.
286106That the Earth may be a Planet.
PROP. VIII.
That there is not any ſufficient reaſon to
prove
the Earth incapable of thoſe mo-
tions
which Copernicus aſcribes un-
to
it.
THe two chief Motions in the World,
which
are more eſpecially remarkable
above
the reſt, are the Diurnal, and An-
nual
.
The Diurnal, which makes the difference
betwixt
Night and Day, is cauſed by the
Revolution
of our Earth upon its own Axis,
in
the ſpace of four and twenty hours.
The Annual, which makes the difference
betwixt
Winter and Summer, is likewiſe
cauſed
by the Earth, when being carried
through
the Ecliptick in its own Orb, it ſi-
niſhes
its courſe in a Year.
The firſt is uſually ſtiled, Motus Revolu-
tionis
:
The ſecond, Motus Circumlationis :
There is likewiſe a third, which Copernicus
calls
, Motus Inclinationis:
But this being
throughly
conſidered, cannot properly be
ſtiled
a Motion, but rather an Immutability,
it
being that whereby the Axis of the Earth
does
always keep parallel to it ſelf;
from
which
ſcituation, it is not its Annual Courſe
that
does make it in the leaſt manner to de-
cline
.
287107That the Earth may be a Planet.
As for the Difficulties which concern the
ſecond
of theſe, they have been already
handled
in the ſixth Propoſition, where the
Earth
's Eccentricity was maintained.
So that the chief buſineſs of this Chap-
ter
, is to defend the Earth's Diurnal Moti-
on
, againſt the Objections of our Adverſa-
ries
.
Sundry of which Objections, to ſpeak
(as the Truth is) do bear in them a great
ſhew
of probability, and ſuch too (as it
ſeems
) was very efficacious, ſince Ariſtotle
and
Ptolomy, &
c. Men of excellent Parts,
and
deep Judgments, did ground upon them,
as
being of infallible and neceſſary conſe-
quence
.
I ſhall reckon them up ſeverally, and ſet
down
ſuch Anſwers unto each, as may yield
ſome
ſatisfaction to every indifferent ſeeker
of
Truth.
Firſt then, ’tis objected from our ſenſes;
If the Earth did move, we ſhould perceive
it
.
The Weſtern Mountains would then ap-
pear
to aſcend towards theStars, rather than
the
Stars to deſcend below them.
I anſwer: The ſight judges of Motion,
according
as any thing does deſert the Plane
whereon
it ſelf is ſeated:
which Plane
every
where keeping the ſame ſcituation and
diſtance
, in reſpect of the Eye, does there-
fore
ſeem immovable unto it, and the mo-
tion
will appear in thoſe Stars and parts of
the
Heaven, through which the Vertical
Line
does paſs.
288108That the Earth may be a Planet.
The reaſon of ſuch deceit may be this:
Motion being not a proper Object of the
Sight
, nor belonging to any other peculiar
Senſe
, muſt therefore be judged of by the
ſenſus
communis, which is liable to miſtake
in
this reſpect;
becauſe it apprehends the
Eye
it ſelf to reſt immovable, whilſt it does
not
feel any Effects of this Motion in the
Body
:
As it is when a Man is carried in a
Ship
;
ſo that Senſe is but an ill Judg of Na-
tural
Secrets.
’Tis a good Rule of Plato,
EIS
Τ ν{ου}ν ἀφορᾶνδ{εῖ} ΦιλόοοΦον {καὶ}μὴεις τ{ὴυ}
ὅψν
A Philoſopher muſt not be carried
away
by the bare appearance of things to
ſight
, but muſt examine them by reaſon.
If
this
were a good Conſequence, The Earth
does
not move, becauſe it does not appear
ſo
to us;
we might then as well argue, that
it
does move when we go upon the Water;

according
to the Verſe:
Provebimur portu, terræque, verbeſq; recedunt.
Or if ſuch Arguments would hold, it were
an
eaſy matter to prove the Sun and Moon
not
ſo big as a Hat, or the fixed Stars as a
Candle
.
Yea, but if the Motions of the Heavens
11Al. Roſſ.
be
only apparent, and not real, then the
l
. 1. ſect.1.
cap
.1.
Motion of the Clouds will be ſo too, ſince
the
Eye may be as well deceived in the one
as
the other.
I anſwer: ’Tis all one, as if he ſhould in-
fer
, that the ſenſe was miſtaken in
289109That the Earth may be a Planet. thing, becauſe it was ſo in one thing: And
this
would be an excellent Argument to prove
that
Opinion of Anaxagoras, that the Snow
was
black.
The reaſon why that motion which is
cauſed
by the Earth, does appear as if it
were
in the Heavens, is, becauſe the ſenſus
communis
, in judging of it, does conceive
the
Eye to be it ſelf immovable, (as was
ſaid
before) there being no ſenſe that does
diſcern
the effects of any motion in the Bo-
dy
;
and therefore, it does conclude every
thing
to move, which it does perceive to
change
its diſtance from it:
So that the
Clouds
do not ſeem to move ſometimes,
when
as notwithſtanding they are every
where
carried about with our Earth, by ſuch
a
ſwift revolution;
yet this can be no hin-
drance
at all, why we may not judg aright
of
their other particular Motions, for which
there
is not the ſame reaſon.
Though to a
Man
in a Ship, the Trees and Banks may
ſeem
to move;
yet it would be but a weak
Argument
, to conclude from thence, that
therefore
ſuch a one could not tell whether
his
Friend does really ſtir, whom he ſees to
walk
up and down in the Ship:
or that he
might
as well be deceived in judging the
Oars
to move, when they do not.
’Tis again replied by the ſame Objector,
That
it is not credible, the Eye ſhould be
miſtaken
in judging of the Stars and Hea-
vens
;
becauſe thoſe being light Bodies, are
the
primary &
proper Objects of that Senſe.
290110That the Earth may be a Planet.
I anſwer: The deceit here, is not con
cerning
the Light or Colour of thoſe Bodies
but
concerning their Motion;
which is nei-
ther
the primary nor proper Object of the
Eye
, but reckoned amongſt the Object a Com-
munia
.
2. Another common Argument againſt
this
Motion, is taken from the danger that
would
thence ariſe unto all high Buildings,
which
by this would quickly be ruinated and
ſcattered
abroad.
I anſwer: This Motion is ſuppoſed to be
natural
;
and thoſe things which are ac-
cording
to Nature, have contrary effects to
other
matters, which are by force and vio-
lence
.
Now it belongs unto things of this
latter
kind, to be inconſtant and hurtful;
whereas thoſe of the firſt kind muſt be re-
gular
, and tending to conſervation.
The
Motion
of the Earth, is always equal and
like
it ſelf;
not by ſtarts and fits. If a
Glaſs
of Beer may ſtand firmly enough in a
Ship
, when it moves ſwiftly upon a ſmooth
ftream
;
much leſs then will the Motion of
the
Earth, which is more natural, and ſo
conſequently
more equal, cauſe any danger
unto
thoſe Buildings that are erected upon
it
.
And therefore to ſuſpect any ſuch event,
would
be like the fear of Lactantius, who
would
not acknowledg the being of any
Antipodes
, leſt then he might be forced to
11Gilbert. de
Magn
. l. 6.
c
. 5.
grant that they ſhould fall down unto the
Heavens
.
We have equal reaſon to be afraid
of
high Buildings, if the whole
291111That the Earth may be a Planet. above us were whirled about with ſuch a
mad
celerity as our Adverſaries ſuppoſe;
for then there would be but ſmall hopes, that
this
little point of Earth ſhould eſcape from
the
reſt.
But ſuppoſing (ſaith * Roſſe) that this
11Lib. 1. ſect.
1
. cap. 3.
Motion were natural to the Earth, yet it is
not
natural to Towns and Buildings, for
theſe
are Artificial.
To which I anſwer: Ha, ha, ha.
3. Another Argument to this purpoſe, is
taken
from the reſt and quietneſs of the Air
about
us;
which could not be, if there were
any
ſuch ſwift Motion of the Earth.
If a Man
riding
upon a fleet Horſe, do perceive the
Air
to beat againſt his Face, as if there
were
a Wind, what a vehement Tempeſt
ſhould
we continually feel from the Eaſt, if
the
Earth were turned about with ſuch a
ſwift
revolution as is ſuppoſed?
Unto this ’tis uſually anſwered, That the
Air
alſo is carried along with the ſame mo-
tion
of the Earth:
For if the Concavity of
the
Moon's Orb, which is of ſo ſmooth and
glabrous
a Superficies, may (according to
our
Adverſaries) drive along with it the
greateſt
part of this Elementary World, all
the
Regions of Fire, and all the vaſt upper
Regions
of Air, and (as ſome will have it)
the
two lower Regions, together with the
Sea
likewiſe;
for from hence (ſaith Alex.
Roſſe, lib. 1. ſect. 1. cap. 3.) is it, that be-
twixt
the Tropicks there is a conſtant Eaſtern
Wind
, and a continual flowing of the
292112That the Earth may be a Planet. Weſtward: I ſay, if the Motion of the
Heavens
, which are ſmooth Bodies, may be
able
to carry with it ſo great a part of the
Elementary
World:
or if the rugged parts
of
the Moon's Body, be able to carry with
it
ſo great a part of the Air, as Fromondus
(Ant.
c. 16.) affirms; much more then may
our
Earth, which is a rugged mountanous
Body
, be able to turn about ſo little a part
of
the World, as that vaporous Air next
unto
it.
11[Figure 11]
Suppoſe the inward Circle to repreſent
the
Earth;
and the outward, the thicker
Air
which encompaſſes it.
Now it is eaſily
conceivable
, that the revolution of ſo great
a
Body as this.
Globe of Earth, may
293113That the Earth may be a Planet. about by its meer motion, (if there were
nothing
elſe) ſo little a part of the adjoin-
ing
Air, as is here repreſented:
And yet,
1. The diſproportion betwixt the thick-
neſs
of the Earth, and this Orb of Air, is
far
greater than could be expreſt in the Fi-
gure
, being but as twenty miles, which is
at
moſt the thickneſs of this Air, unto 3456
miles
, which is the Semidiameter of our
Earth
, and ſo is but as an inſenſible number
in
reſpect of this other.
2. Beſides the meer motion of the Earth,
which
in probability (being ſuch a rugged
Body
) might be enough to carry ſo little a
part
of the Air along with it;
there is alſo
(as we ſuppoſe) a magnetical vigour which
proceeds
from it, whereby ’tis more able to
make
all things that are near unto it, to ob-
ſerve
the ſame Revolution.
But if it be ſo (ſaith Alex. Roſſ.) 11Lib. 1.
ſect
. 1. c. 5.
not only the Man, but the Medium alſo, and
the
Object be moved, this muſt needs be
ſuch
a great hindrance to the ſight, that the
Eye
cannot judg exactly of any thing.
For
ſuppoſe
the Man alone to be in a motion, he
could
not ſee ſo well as when he is ſtill;
but
now
, if not only he, but his Spectacles,
and
Book, were all moved, he would not
be
able to diſcern any thing diſtinctly.
I anfwer: The Conſequence were perti-
nent
, if all theſe were ſeveral motions:
but
if
the Subject, and Medium, and Object,
were
all carried with one and the ſame equal
motion
, (as it is here ſuppoſed) this
294114That the Earth may be a Planet. be no impediment to the Act of ſeeing, but
it
would be all one with the reſt;
becauſe
by
this means, they are not ſevered from
one
another;
and therefore the ſpecies are
not
diſturbed.
’Tis an excellent ſaying of
Gallilæus, and may ſerve for the 11Syſt.
mundi
,
Colloq
. 2.
on of many ſuch Doubts as theſe;
Motus
eatenus
tanquàm motus operatur, quatenus rela-
tionem
habet ad eas res quæ ipſo deſtituuntur;
in
iis
verò rebus, quæ totæ æqualiter de eo partici-
pant
, nibil operatur, &
ita ſe habet ac ſi nul-
lus
eſſet.
If a Man be within ſome Room of
a
Ship, he may read altogether as eaſily
when
the Ship moves, as when it ſtands
ſtill
.
4. Another Argument againſt this circular
motion
of the Earth, is grounded upon that
common
Principle amongſt the Ariſtotelians;
Vnius corporis ſimplicis unus tantùm eſt motus:
One
kind of Body, has but one kind of Mo-
tion
.
But now, the Earth and Water hath
a
motion of deſcent:
the Air, a motion of
aſcent
;
and therefore none of them can
have
any circular motion natural unto
them
.
I anſwer: Firſt, Theſe right Motions of
Elementary
Bodies, belong only to the parts
of
them, and that too when they are out of
their
proper places;
ſo that the whole to
which
they belong, may, notwithſtanding
this
, have another Motion of its own.
But,
ſecondly
, this ſaying which Ariſtotle calls a
Principle
, will not conſiſt with other evi-
dent
Experiments of Nature.
Thus,
295115That the Earth may be a Planet. a Loadſtone, in reſpect of its matter and
condenſity
, naturally tends downward;
yet
this
does not hinder, but that in reſpect of
ſome
other qualities, as its deſire of union
and
coition to another Loadſtone, it may
alſo
naturally move upwards.
From
whence
it will follow, that the ſame Ele-
mentary
Body, may have divers natural
Motions
.
5. The gravity and magnitude of this
Earthy
Globe, do make it altogether unfit
for
ſo ſwift a Motion.
I anſwer: Firſt, Heavineſs can only be
applied
unto thoſe Bodies which are out of
their
proper places, or unto ſuch parts as
are
ſevered from the whole to which they
belong
.
And therefore the Globe of Earth,
conſidered
as whole, and in its right place,
cannot
truly be called heavy.
I deny not,
but
that there is in it, and ſo likewiſe in
the
other Planets, an ineptitude to motion,
by
reaſon of the matter and condenſity of
their
Bodies:
And ſo likewiſe there is, as
truly
, (though not according to the ſame
degrees
) in the leaſt particle of a material
condenſed
Subſtance:
ſo that this cannot
reaſonably
be pretended as a juſt Impedi-
ment
, why the Earth ſhould be incapable of
ſuch
a Motion.
Secondly, And though this
Globe
be of ſo vaſt a magnitude, yet, as
Nature
beſtows upon other Creatures (for
inſtance
, an Eagle and a Fly) Spirits, and
motive
Powers, proportionable to their ſe-
veral
Bodies:
ſo likewiſe may ſhe
296116That the Earth may be a Planet. the Earth with a motive Faculty anſwerable
to
its greatneſs.
Or if this may make the
Earth
incapable of ſo ſwift a motion as is
ſuppoſed
, much more then will the Heavens
be
diſabled for that greater ſwiftneſs which
is
imagined in them.
I might add, the Globe
of
the Sun, and Jupiter, are obſerved to
move
about their own Centres;
and there-
fore
the Earth, which is far leſs than either
of
them, is not, by reaſon of its too great
magnitude
, made unfit for ſuch a Revoluti-
on
.
Thirdly, As for the ſwiftneſs of the
Earth
's Courſe, it does not exceed (all
Circumſtances
well conſidered) the celeri-
ty
of ſome other Motions, with which we
are
acquainted;
as that of the Clouds,
when
driven by a tempeſtuous Wind;
that
of
a Bullet ſhot from a Canon, which in the
11Meſlin
prafat
. ad
Narrat
.
Rhet
.
ſpace of a minute flies four miles.
Or, as
another
hath obſerved, in the ſecond ſcru-
ple
of an hour, it may paſs the fifteenth
22Fromond.
Veſta
.
tract
. 1.
cap
. 3.
part of a German mile:
Than which, there
is
not any Point in the Earth's Equinoctial
that
moves faſter;
and though a Bullet be
much
ſlower in moving a greater diſtance,
yet
for ſo little a ſpace, while the force of
the
Powder is moſt freſh and powerful, it
does
equal the ſwiftneſs of the Earth.
And
yet
,
1. A Bullet, or Cloud, is carried in its
whole
Body, being fain to break its way
through
the Air round about it:
but
now
the Earth (in reſpect of this firſt Mo-
tion
) does remain ſtill in the ſame
297117That the Earth may be a Planet. ation, and move only about its own Cen-
ter
.
2. The Motion of a Bullet is violent, and
againſt
its Nature, which does ſtrongly in-
cline
it to move downwards.
Whereas
the
Earth being conſidered as whole, and in
its
proper place, is not heavy, nor does
it
contain any repugnancy to a Circular Mo-
tion
.
6. The chief Argument on which our
Adverſaries
do moſt inſiſt, is this:
If there
11Ariſtor. de
Cæbo
, l. 2.
c
. 13.
were ſuch a Motion of the Earth as is ſup-
poſed
;
then thoſe Bodies which are ſevered
from
it in the Air, would be forſaken by it.
The Clouds would ſeem to riſe and ſet as
the
Stars.
The Birds would be carried a-
way
from their Neſts.
No heavy Body
could
fall perpendicular.
An Arrow or Bul-
let
being ſhot from Eaſt to Weſt, by the
ſame
violence, will not be carried an equal
diſtance
from us, but we ſhould, by the re-
volution
of our Earth, overtake that which
was
ſhot to the Eaſt, before it could fall.
If
a
Man, leaping up, ſhould abide in the Air
but
one ſecond ſcruple of an hour, or the
ſixtieth
part of a minute, the Earth, in that
ſpace
, would withdraw it ſelf from him
almoſt
a quarter of a mile.
All theſe, and
many
other ſuch ſtrange Inferences, which
are
directly contrary to ſenſe and expe-
rience
, would follow from this motion of
the
Earth.
298118That the Earth may be a Planet.
There are three ſeveral ways moſt fre-
quently
uſed for the reſolving of theſe kind
of
Doubts.
1. From thoſe Magnetical Qualities,
which
all Elementary Bodies do par-
take
of.
2. From the like motions of other things
within
the room of a ſailing Ship.
3. From the like participation of motion
in
the open parts of a Ship.
1. For thoſe Magnetical Properties, with
which
all theſe Bodies are endowed.
For
the
better underſtanding of this, you muſt
know
, That beſides thoſe common Elemen-
tary
Qualities of Heat, Coldneſs, Drineſs,
Moiſture
, &
c. which ariſe from the pre-
dominancy
of ſeveral Elements;
there are
likewiſe
other Qualities (not ſo well known
to
the Ancients) which we call Magnetical,
of
which every Particle in the Terreſtrial
Globe
does neceſſarily participate:
and
whether
it be joined to this Globe by conti-
nuity
or contiguity;
or whether it be ſe-
vered
from it, as the Clouds in the ſecond
Region
, a Bird or Bullet in the Air;
yet
does
it ſtill retain its Magnetical Qualities,
together
with all thoſe Operations that pro-
ceed
from them.
Now from theſe Properties do we ſup-
poſe
the Circular Motion of the Earth to
ariſe
.
If you ask, What Probabilities there are,
to
prove that the Earth is endowed with any
ſuch
affections?
I anſwer: ’Tis likely,
299119That the Earth may be a Planet. the lower parts of this Globe, do not con-
ſiſt
of ſuch a ſoft fructifying Earth, as there
is
in the Surface, (becauſe there can be no
ſuch
uſe for it as here, and Nature does no-
thing
in vain) but rather of ſome hard
rocky
ſubſtance, ſince we may well conceive,
that
theſe lower parts are preſſed cloſe to-
gether
, by the weight of all thoſe heavy
Bodies
above them.
Now, ’tis probable,
that
this rocky Subſtance is a Loadſtone, ra-
ther
than a Jaſpis, Adamant, Marble, or
any
other;
becauſe experience teacheth us,
that
the Earth and Loadſtone do agree to-
gether
in ſo many Properties.
Suppoſe a
Man
were to judg the Matter of divers Bo-
dies
;
each of which ſhould be wrap'd up
in
ſome covering from his Eye, ſo that he
might
only examine them by ſome other
outward
ſigns:
If in this examination, he
ſhould
find any particular Body which had
all
the Properties that are peculiar to a
Loadſtone
, he would in reaſon conclude it
to
be of that Nature, rather than any other.
Now there is altogether as much reaſon why
we
ſhould infer, that the inward parts of
the
Earth do conſiſt of a Magnetical Sub-
ſtance
.
The agreement of theſe two, you
may
ſee largely ſet forth in the Treatiſe of
Dr
.
Gilbert. I will inſtance only in one Ex-
ample
, which of it ſelf may ſufficiently evi-
dence
, that the Globe of Earth does par-
take
of the like affections with the Load-
ſtone
.
In the Mariner's Needle, you may
obſerve
the Magnetical Motions of
300120That the Earth may be a Planet. on, Variation, Declination; the two laſt of
which
are found to be indifferent, according
to
the variety of places.
Now this diffe-
rence
cannot proceed from the Needle it
ſelf
, becauſe that is the ſame every where.
Nor can we well conceive how it ſhould be
cauſed
by the Heavens;
for then the Varia-
tion
would not be always alike in the ſame
place
, but diverſe, according to thoſe ſeve-
ral
parts of the Heaven, which at ſeveral
times
ſhould happen to be over it:
And
therefore
it muſt neceſſarily proceed from
the
Earth, which being it ſelf endowed with
Magnetical
Affections, does diverſly diſpoſe
the
Motions of the Needle, according to the
diſſerence
of that diſponent virtue, which is
in
its ſeveral Parts.
Now, to apply this unto the particular
Inſtances
of the Objection:
We ſay, though
ſome
parts of this great Magnet, the Earth,
may
, according to their Matter, be ſevered
from
the whole;
yet are they always joined
to
it, by a communion of the ſame Magne-
tical
Qualities;
and do no leſs obſerve theſe
kind
of Motions, when they are ſeparated
from
the whole, than if they were united
to
it.
Nor need this ſeem incredible, that
a
heavy Bullet, in ſuch a ſwift violent courſe,
ſhould
be able to obſerve this Magnetical
Revolution
of the whole Earth;
when as
we
ſee that thoſe great Bodies of Saturn,
Jupiter
, &
c. hanging in the vaſt ſpaces of
the
Ætherial Air, do ſo conſtantly and re-
gularly
move on in their appointed courſes.
301121That the Earth may be a Planet. Though we could not ſhew any ſimilitude of
this
Motion in theſe inferior Bodies, with
which
we are acquainted;
yet we muſt
know
, there may be many things which a-
gree
to the whole Frame, that are not diſ-
cernable
in divers parts of it.
’Tis natural
unto
the Sea to ebb and flow, but yet there
is
not this Motion in every drop or bucket
of
Water.
So if we conſider every part of
our
Bodies ſeverally, the Humors, Bones,
Fleſh
, &
c. they are all of them apt to tend
downwards
, as being of a condenſed Mat-
ter
;
but yet conſider them according to the
whole
Frame, and then the Blood or Hu-
mors
may naturally aſcend upvvards to the
Head
, as vvell as deſcend to any of the
lovver
parts.
Thus the vvhole Earth may
move
round, though the ſeveral parts of it
have
not any ſuch particular Revolution of
their
ovvn.
Thus likevviſe, though each
condenſed
Body being conſidered by it ſelf,
may
ſeem to have only a Motion of deſcent,
yet
in reference to that vvhole Frame, of
vvhich
it is a part, it may alſo partake
of
another Motion that may be natural un-
to
it.
But ſome may here object: Though the
Earth
vvere endovved vvith ſuch Magnetical
Affections
, yet vvhat probability is there
that
it ſhould have ſuch a Revolution?
I an-
ſvver
:
’Tis obſerved of thoſe other Mag-
netical
Bodies of Saturn, Jupiter, and the
Sun
, that they are carried about their ovvn
Centers
;
and therefore ’tis not
302122That the Earth may be a Planet. but that it may be ſo vvith the Earth alſo:
which if any deny, he muſt ſhevv a rea-
ſon
vvhy in this reſpect they ſhould be
unlike
.
Yea, but though the Earth did move
round
, vvhat ground is there to affirm, that
thoſe
Bodies vvhich are ſevered from it, as
a
Bullet, or the Clouds, ſhould follovv it
in
the ſame courſe?
I anſvver: Thoſe Spots vvhich are diſco-
vered
about the Sun, and are thought to be
Clouds
or Evaporations from his Body, are
obſerved
to be carried about according to
his
Revolution.
Thus the Moon is turned
round
by our Earth;
the four leſſer Planets
by
the Body of Jupiter.
Nay, thus all the
Planets
, in their ſeveral Orbs, are moved a-
bout
by the Revolution of the Sun upon
its
ovvn Axis (ſaith Keplar) and there-
fore
much more may an Arrovv, or Bul-
let
, be carried round by the Magnetical Mo-
tion
of our Earth.
The ſecond vvay, vvhereby ſome anſvver
unto
the Inſtances of this Argument, is,
by
ſhewing the like Motions of other
things
, within ſome Room of a ſailing Ship.
Thus Experience teaches, (ſay they) that
a
Candle, as alſo the Fumes that come from
it
, will always keep the ſame ſcituation, in
the
ſwifteſt motion of a Ship, as if it did
reſt
immovably, and the Flame will not
more
eſpecially bend one way, or have any
troubled
ſluctuation, but burn as ſtreight and
quietly
, as if it did ſtand ſtill.
Again,
303123That the Earth may be a Planet. has been found, (ſay thoſe that have been
verſed
in theſe kind of Experiments) that
the
ſame force will caſt a Body but an equal
diſtance
, whether or no the Body do move
with
, or againſt the motion of the Ship.
As alſo, that any Weight being let fall, will
deſcend
in as true a perpendicular, as if
the
Ship did ſtand ſtill.
If a Man, leaping
up
, do tarry in the Air one ſecond ſcruple
of
an hour, yet the Ship will not, in its
greateſt
ſwiftneſs (as it ſhould according to
the
calculation of our Adverſaries) be car-
ried
from him at leaſt fifteen foot.
If we
ſuppoſe
a Man to jump in ſuch a Ship, he
will
not be able to paſs farther, when he
jumps
againſt the motion of it, than when
he
jumps with it.
All which Particulars
may
argue, that theſe things are carried a-
long
together, by the common motion of
the
Ship.
Now if Bodies may be thus joint-
ly
moved by ſuch a preternatural motion,
much
more then will they accompany the
Earth
in its Diurnal Revolution, which
we
ſuppoſe to be natural unto them, and
as
a Law impoſed by God in their firſt Crea-
tion
.
If the Flame of a Candle, or the Smoke
that
comes from it, (things that are ſo ea-
ſily
moveable) are, notwithſtanding, carried
ſo
equally, and without and diſturbance, by
the
motion of a Ship;
then alſo the Clouds
in
the Air, and all other light Bodies, may
well
enough be turned about by the Revolu-
tion
of our Earth.
304124That the Earth may be a Planet.
If an equal force will caſt an heavy Bo-
dy
but at an equal diſtance, whether or no
it
move with, or againſt the motion of the
Ship
;
then may we eaſily conceive, that an
Arrow
, or B@llet, being ſhot with the ſame
violence
, will paſs but the ſame ſpace on the
Earth
, whether or no it be ſhot towards the
Eaſt
or Weſt.
If a heavy Body, while the Ship does move,
will
fall down in a ſtreight Line;
then it is
not
the Revol@tion of our Earth that can
hinder
a perpendicular deſcent.
If a Man, leaping up in a Ship, may a-
bide
in the Air one ſecond ſcruple of an hour,
and
yet this Ship, in its greateſt ſwiftneſs,
not
withdraw it ſelf fifteen foot;
then will
not
the Earth, in that ſpace, go from him
almoſt
a quarter of a mile.
But againſt this, ’tis Objected, That the
11Fromond.
Veſta
.
tract
. 2.
cap
. 2.
Earth has the ſimilitude of an open Ship, and
not
of any Room that is cloſe.
And tho it
be
true, that when the Roof and the Walls
do
all move together, the Air which is in-
cluded
betwixt them, muſt be carried along
by
the ſame motion;
yet it is not ſo with
the
Earth, becauſe that hath not any ſuch
Walls
or Roof, wherein it may contain and
carry
along with it the Medium.
And there-
fore
Experience will rather argue againſt
this
fuppoſed Revolution.
Thus ’tis ob-
ferved
, that a Stone being let fall from the
Maſt
of a Ship, that moves ſwiftly, will not
deſcend
to the ſame point, as if the Ship
did
ſtand ſtill.
From whence it will
305125That the Earth may be a Planet. that if our Earth had ſuch a Circular Mo-
tion
, then any heavy Body, being let fall
from
ſome high Tower, or other ſteep
place
, would not deſcend unto that point of
Earth
which was directly under it at the be-
ginning
.
To this we anſwer: That the Air which
moves
along with our Earth, is as well li-
mited
in certain bounds, as that which is in-
cluded
in a Room.
If you ask where theſe
Bounds
are terminated:
I anſwer, Neither
by
the utmoſt parts of the World, nor yet
by
the Concavity of the Moon's Orb, (as
Fromond
{us} would have us affirm) but by
the
Sphere of vaporous Air that encompaſſes
our
Earth;
or which is all one, by the Orb
of
Magnetical Vigour, which proceeds from
it
.
And beſides, ’tis conſiderable, that all
Earthly
Bodies are not only contained with-
in
theſe limits, as things are in a cloſe Room,
but
alſo as parts in that Whole to which
they
belong.
2. Though the carrying along of the Me-
dium
, may ſolve the motion of light Bodies
in
a Ship, as the Flame of a Candle, Smoke,
or
the like, yet this cannot concur to that
which
hath been ſaid of heavy Bodies, as a
Man
leaping up, a Bullet deſcending, &
c.
ſince it is not the motion of the meer Air
that
is able to make theſe partake of the
ſame
motion with the Ship.
Unto that
Argument
which he urges from the Experi-
ment
of a Stone falling in an open Ship:
We
anſwer
:
306126That the Earth may be a Planet. 1. Though the inſtance of a Ship, may
ſerve
as a proof for this opinion, it being
an
Argument, a minori ad majus, from an ac-
cidental
Motion, to a natural;
yet it will
not
ſerve againſt it.
For though it were
not
thus in accidental Motions, yet this
would
not hinder but that it might be ſo in
thoſe
that are ſuppoſed to be proper and
natural
.
2. As for that Experiment it ſelf, ’tis but
a
groundleſs imagination, and was never
yet
conſirmed by any particular Experience,
becauſe
’tis certain the Event would be clean
otherwiſe
, as ſhall be proved in the third
way
of anſwering.
3. The third and laſt way of clearing the
Doubts
in the ſixth Argument, is, by ſhew-
ing
the like participation of motion, in thoſe
things
that are in the open parts of a Ship.
To which purpoſe G allilæus urges thìs Ex-
11Syſt. Mun-
di
. Col-
loq
. 2.
periment:
If any one ſhould let fall a Stone
from
an high Maſt, he would find, Lapidem
in
eunde in ſemper Navis locum decidere, ſeu
conſiſtat
illa, ſeu quantacunque velocitate movea-
tur
:
That the Stone would always deſcend
unto
the very ſame place, whether or no
the
Ship did move or ſtand ſtill.
The Rea-
ſon
of which is, becauſe the Motion of the
Ship
is likewiſe impreſſed in the Stone:
which
Impreſſion
is not equally prevalent in a light
Body
, as a Feather, or Wool;
becauſe the
Air
, which has power over them, is not
carried
along by the ſame motion of the
Ship
.
Thus likewiſe will it be in this
307127That the Earth may be a Planet. experiment; If a Man upon a running
Horſe
, ſhould, in his ſwifteſt courſe, let
fall
a Bullet, or Stone, theſe heavy Bodies,
beſides
their own deſcent, would alſo parti-
cipate
that tranſverſe motion of the Horſe.
For as thoſe things that are thrown from us,
do
continue their motion when they are out
of
the hand in the open Air:
ſo likewiſe
muſt
it be, when the force is conferred by
that
motion which the Arm has from the
Horſe
.
While a Man is riding, his Arm is
alſo
carried by the ſame ſwiftneſs of the
Horſe
;
therefore, if he ſhould only open
his
Hand, and let fall any thing, it would
not
deſcend in a ſtrait Line, but muſt ne-
ceſſarily
be driven forward, by reaſon of
that
force impreſſed in it by the ſwiftneſs of
the
Horſe, which is alſo communicated to
the
Arm;
it being all one in effect, whether
or
no the Arm be moved by a particular mo-
tion
of its own, as it is in caſting of things
from
us, or by the common motion of the
Body
, as it is in dropping any thing from
us
, either when we are on the top of ſome
ſailing
Ship, as in the former, or on ſome
running
Horſe, as in the latter Inſtance.
What hath been ſaid concerning the Mo-
tion
of deſcent, is likevviſe appliable, both
to
that vvhich is upward, and that vvhich is
tranſverſal
.
So that vvhen ’tis objected, If
the
Earth did move, then a Bullet that
vvere
ſhot up perpendicularly, would be
forſaken
by it, and not deſcend to the place
from
whence it aroſe:
We anſwer;
308128That the Earth may be a Planet. the Cannon vvhich is upon the Earth, toge-
ther
vvith the Bullet in it, do partake of the
ſame
Circular Motion vvith the Earth;
and
this
perhaps our Adverſaries vvill grant,
vvhilſt
vve ſuppoſe the Bullet to remain
ſtill
in the Cannon, all the difficulty vvill
be
, to ſhevv hovv it muſt neceſſarily obſerve
the
ſame motion, vvhen it is ſhot out into
the
open Air.
For the better explication of this, you may
11Gallil. Syſt
Collaq
. 2.
note this follovving Figure.
12[Figure 12]
Where vve ſuppoſe AC to be a Cannon
perpendicularly
erected, vvith a Bullet in it
at
B;
vvhich if it vvere immovable, vve
grant
that the Bullet being diſcharged, muſt
aſcend
in a juft perpendicular.
But novv,
conceive
this Cannon to move along vvith
the
Earth, then in that ſpace of time, vvhile
the
Bullet, by the force of the Povvder, is
aſcending
to the top of the Bore, the
309129That the Earth may be a Planet. non will be transferred to the ſcituation D
E
, ſo that the Bullet muſt be moved ac-
cording
to the Line FG, which is not di-
rectly
upright, but ſomewhat declining.
Now, the motion of the Bullet in the Air,
muſt
neceſſarily be conformed unto that di-
rection
that is impreſſed in it by the Cannon
from
whence it is ſhot, and ſo conſequently
it
muſt be continued, according to the Line
F
G, and therefore will always keep per-
pendicularly
over the Point from which it
did
aſcend.
If you reply, That the motion of the
Bullet
in the Cannon, muſt needs be ſo
ſwift
, that the Earth cannot carry the Can-
non
from C to E, in the ſame ſpace of time
wherein
the Bullet does move from B to A.
I anſwer: ’Tis not material whether the
Earth
be of a greater or le@er ſwiftneſs than
the
Bullet, becauſe the Declination muſt al-
ways
be proportionable to the motion of
the
Earth;
and if we ſuppoſe this to be
ſlower
than the Bullet, then the Declina-
tion
of the Line F G, will be ſo much the
leſs
.
This Truth may yet further be illuſtrated
by
the practice of thoſe Fowlers, who uſe
to
kill Birds as they are flying:
Concerning
which
Art, ’tis commonly thought, that theſe
Men
direct their Aims to ſome certain ſpace
in
the Air, juſt before the Birds, where they
conceive
the Shot will meet with them in their
flight
;
whereas, the truth is, they proceed
in
this caſe, the very ſame way as if
310130That the Earth may be a Planet. Birds did ſtand ſtill, by a direct aiming at
their
Bodies, and following of their flight
by
the motion of the Piece;
till at length,
having
got a perfect aim, they diſcharge,
and
do hit altogether as ſurely, as if the
Birds
were ſitting upon a Tree.
From
whence
we may obſerve, that the motion of
the
Piece, as in our aiming, it is made to
follow
the Birds in their flight, (though it
be
but ſlow) yet is communicated to the
Bullet
in the Air.
But here it may ſeem very diſficult to give
any
reaſon, according to thoſe grounds con-
cerning
the flight of Birds;
which being a-
nimated
, have a liberty to fly here or there,
to
tarry, for a good ſpace of time, in the
open
Air;
and ſo ’tis not eaſy to conceive
what
means there is, by which they ſhould
participate
of the Earth's Diurnal Revolu-
tion
.
To this Gallilæus anſwers, That the mo-
tion
of the Air, as it does turn about the
Clouds
, ſo doth it alſo carry with it the
Birds
, together with ſuch other like things
that
are in it.
For if ſome violent Wind be
able
to drive, with ſuch ſwiftneſs, a full
laden
Ship, to throw down Towers, to turn
up
Trees, and the like;
much more then
may
the Diurnal Motion of the Air (which
does
ſo far exceed in ſwiftneſs the moſt tem-
peſtuous
Wind) be able to carry with it the
Bodies
of Birds.
But if all things be turned about by this
11Object. Revolution, then it ſhould ſeem there is
311131That the Earth may be a Planet. ſuch thing as a right Motion, whether of Aſ-
cent
or Deſcent, in a ſtreight Line.
I anſwer: The moving of heavy or light
11Sol. Bodies, may be conſidered in a double rela-
tion
.
1. According to the ſpace wherein they
move
, and then we grant their Motions not
to
be ſimple, but mixed of a direct and cir-
cular
.
2. According to the Body or medium
wherein
they move, and then they may pro-
perly
be ſaid to have right motions, becauſe
they
paſs through the medium in a ſtreight
Line
;
and therefore it is, that unto us they
ſeem
directly to aſcend or deſcend.
Ariſto-
tle
himſelf would not deny, but that Fire
may
aſcend in a ſtreight Line unto its Sphere,
and
yet participate alſo of that Circular
Motion
which he ſuppoſes to be communica-
ted
from the Heavens, unto the upper part
of
the Air, and its own Region.
So like-
wiſe
muſt it be for the deſcent of any thing.
Suppoſe a Ship in its ſwifteſt motion, and a
Man
in it, having ſome Veſſel filled with Wa-
ter
, ſhould let fall into it a little Ball of
Wax
, or ſome other matter which may be
ſlow
in its ſinking, ſo that in one minute it
ſhould
ſcarce deſcend the ſpace of a Cubit,
though
the Ship (it may be) in the ſame
time
may paſs at leaſt a hundred Cubits;

yet
would this ſtill ſeem unto the eye to de-
ſcend
in a ſtreight Line;
and the other mo-
tion
, which is communicated unto it by the
Ship
, would not at all be diſcernable to it.
312132That the Earth may be a Planet. And though in this caſe, the motion were
in
it ſelf compoſed of a circular and direct;
yet in reſpect of us it would appear, and ſo
might
be ſtiled exactly ſtreight.
Now if it be thus in thoſe which are ge-
nerally
granted to be preternatural Moti-
ons
;
we need not doubt then the poſſibility
of
the like effect in that Motion which we
conceive
to be proper and natural, both
to
the Earth, and the things that belong
unto
it.
There is yet another Objection to this
purpoſe
urged by Malapertius, a late 11Auſtria-
ca
Syder.
par
. 2.
prop
. 25.
ſuit, who though he does with much eager-
neſs
preſs this Argument concerning a Bullet
or
Stone, againſt the Opinion of Copernicus;
yet he grants that it might eaſily be reſol-
ved
, if the defenders of it would affirm
that
the Air did move round with the Earth.

But
this (ſaith he) they dare not avouch;

for
then the Comets would always ſeem to
ſtand
ſtill, being carried about with the
Revolution
of this Air, and then they could
not
riſe or ſet, as experience ſhews they
do
.
To this it may be anſwered, That moſt
Comets
are above that Sphere of Air which
is
turned round with our Earth, as is mani-
feſt
by their height.
The motion that ap-
pears
in them, is cauſed by the Revolution
of
our Earth, whereby we are turned from
them
.
As for thoſe which are within the Orb of
our
Air, theſe do ſeem to ſtand ſtill.
313133That the Earth may be a Planet. a one was that mentioned by 11De bello
Judaico
,
l
. 7. c. 12.
Dion
. 1. 54.
which did conſtantly hang over Jeruſalem;
and that likewiſe which appeared about the
time
of Agrippa's death, and for many days
together
did hang over the City of Rome.

Wherefore
Seneca does well diſtinguiſh 22Nat. Qu.
l
. 7. c. 6.
of Epigenes, betwixt two ſorts of Comets,
the
one being low, and ſuch as ſeems immo-
vable
;
the other higher, and ſuch as did
conſtantly
obſerve their riſings and ſettings,
as
the Stars.
I have done with all the Arguments of any
note
or difficulty, that are urged againſt this
diurnal
motion of the Earth.
Many other
Cavils
there are not worth the naming,
which
diſcover themſelves to be rather the
Objections
of a captious, than a doubtful
mind
.
Amongſt which, I might juſtly paſs
over
thoſe that are ſet down by Alex.
Roſſe: 33Lib. 1.
ſect
. 2. c. 6.
But becauſe this Author does proceed in
his
whole with ſo much ſcorn and triumph,
it
will not be amiſs therefore to examine
what
infallible evidence there is in thoſe Ar-
guments
upon which he grounds his boaſt-
ings
.
We have, in one Chapter, no leſs th@n
theſe
nine.
Arg. 1. If the Earth did move, then
would
it be hotter than the Water, becauſe
motion
does produce heat;
and for this rea-
ſon
likewiſe, the Water would be ſo hot
and
rarified, that it could not be congealed;
fince that alſo does partake of the ſame mo-
tion
with the Earth.
314134That the Earth may be a Planet.
Arg. 2. The Air which is next the Earth,
would
be purer, as being rarified with Mo-
tion
.
Arg. 3. If the Earth did move the Air, it
would
cauſe ſome ſound;
but this is no more
audible
, than Pythagoras his Harmony of the
Heavens
.
Arg. 4. ’Twould have been in vain for
Nature
to have endowed the Heavens with
all
conditions requiſite for motion, if they
had
been to ſtand ſtill:
As, firſt, they have
a
round Figure.
Secondly, They have nei-
ther
gravity nor levity.
Thirdly, They
are
incorruptible.
Fourthly, They have
no
contrary.
Arg. 5. All ſimilary parts are of the ſame
nature
with the whole:
But each part of
the
Earth does reſt in its place;
therefore
alfo
doth the whole.
Arg. 6. The Sun in the World, is as the
Heart
in a Man's Body:
But the Motion of
the
Heart ceaſing, none of the Members do
ſtir
;
therefore alſo if the Sun ſhould ſtand
ſtill
, the other parts of the World would be
without
motion.
Arg. 7. The Sun and Heavens, do work
upon
theſe inferior Bodies by their Light
and
Motion.
So the Moon does operate up-
on
the Sea.
Arg. 8. The Earth is the Foundation of
Buildings
;
and therefore muſt be firm and
ſtable
.
Arg. 9. ’Tis the conſtant opinion of Di-
vines
, that the Heavens ſhall reſt after
315135That the Earth may be a Plant. Day of Judgment; which they prove from
iſa
.
60. 20. Thy Sun ſhall no more go down,
neitber
ſhall thy Moon withdraw it ſelf.
So
likewiſe
, Rev.
10. 6. The Angel ſwears, that
there
ſhall be time no longer:
and therefore
the
Heavens muſt reſt, ſince by their motion
it
is that Time is meaſured.
And st. Paul
ſays
, Rom.
8. 20. That all the Creatures are
made
ſubject to Vanity.
Now this can be no
other
in the Heavens, than the Vanity of
Motion
, which the Wife Man ſpeaks of,
Eccleſ
.
1. 4. The Sun riſeth, and the Sun goeth
down
, &
c.
To theſe it may be anſwered:
Ad 1, & 2. In the firſt you may note a
manifeſt
contradiction, when he will have
the
Earth to be hotter than the Water, by
reaſon
of this motion;
when as notwith-
ſtanding
he acknowledges the Water to
move
along with it;
and therefore too, in
the
next Line, he infers that the Water,
becauſe
of that heat and rarefaction which
it
receives from this motion with the Earth,
muſt
be incapable of ſo much cold, as to
be
congealed into Ice.
But unto that which may be conceived to
be
his meaning in this and the next Argu-
ment
:
I anſwer, If he had fully underſtood
this
Opinion which he oppoſes, he would
eaſily
have apprehended, that it could not
be
prejudiced by either of theſe Conſequen-
ces
.
For we ſuppoſe, that not only this
Globe
of Earth and Water, but alſo all the
vaporous
Air which invirons it, are
316136That the Earth may be a Planet. along by the ſame motion. And therefore,
though
what he ſays concerning the heat,
which
would be produced by ſuch a moti-
on
, vvere true;
yet it vvould not be perti-
nent
, ſince our Earth and Water, and the
Air
next unto them, are not by this means
ſevered
from one another, and ſo do not
come
vvithin the compaſs of this Argu-
ment
.
If any reply, That this vvill notwith-
ſtanding
hold true, concerning the upper
part
of the Air, vvhere there is ſuch a ſe-
paration
of one Body from another;
and
ſo
conſequently, an anſvverable heat.
I an-
fvver
;
1. ’Tis not generally granted, That mo-
tion
in all kind of Bodies does produce heat;
ſome reſtrain it only to ſolid Bodies; af-
firming
, That in thoſe vvhich are fluid, it
is
rather the cauſe of coldneſs.
This is the
reaſon
(ſay they) vvhy running Waters
are
ever to our ſenſe the cooleſt:
And vvhy
amongſt
thoſe Winds vvhich proceed from
the
ſame Coaſts of Heaven, about the ſame
time
of the Year, the ſtrongeſt alvvays is
the
coldeſt?
If you object, that running
Waters
are not ſo ſoon frozen as others:

They
anſvver, This is not becauſe they are
thereby
heated;
but becauſe unto congela-
tion
, it is requiſite that a Body ſhould ſettle
and
reſt, as vvell as be cold.
2. If vve ſhould grant a moderate heat
in
thoſe parts of the Air, vve have not any
experiment
to the contrary, nor vvould
317137That the Earth may be a Planet. Prejudice the preſent Opinion, or common
Principles
.
Ad 3. As the ſound of this Motion is not
more
heard, than the Harmony of the Hea-
vens
:
ſo neither is there any reaſon vvhy
this
Motion ſhould cauſe a ſound, more than
the
ſuppoſed Motion of the Heavens, vvhich
is
likevviſe thought to be continued unto the
Air
hard by us.
Ad 4. This vvill prove the Earth to move
as
vvell as the Heavens;
For that has, firſt,
a
round Figure, as is generally granted.
Secondly, Being conſidered as vvhole, and
in
its proper place, it is not heavy, as vvas
proved
before:
and as for the tvvo other
conditions
, neither are they true of the
Heavens
;
nor if they vvere, vvould they
at
all conduce to their Motion.
Ad 5. This Argument vvould prove
that
the Sea did not ebb and flow, becauſe
there
is not the ſame kind of motion in eve-
ry
drop of Water:
or that the whole Earth
is
not ſpherical, becauſe every little piece of
it
is not of the ſame Form.
Ad 6. This is rather an Illuſtration than
a
Proof;
or if it do prove any thing, it may
ſerve
as well for that purpoſe unto which it
is
afterward applied, where the motion of
every
Planet is fuppoſed to depend upon the
revolution
of the Sun.
Ad 7. That the Sun and Planets do work
upon
the Earth by their own real daily mo-
tion
, is the thing in queſtion;
and there-
fore
muſt not be taken for a common
Ground
.
318138That the Earth may be a Planet.
Ad 8. We grant, that the Earth is firm
and
ſtable from all ſuch motions, whereby
it
is jogged, or uncertainly ſhaken.
Ad 9. 1. For the authority of thoſe Di-
vines
, which he urges for the interpretation
of
theſe Scriptures;
this will be but a weak
Argument
againſt that Opinion which is al-
ready
granted to be a Paradox.
2. The Scriptures themſelves, in their
right
meaning, will not at all conduce to the
preſent
purpoſe.
As for that in Iſaiah, if we conſult the
coherence
, we ſhall find that the ſcope of
the
Prophet, is to ſet forth the Glory of
the
Church Triumphant.
Wherein (he
ſays
) there ſhall not be any need of the Sun
or
Moon, but God's preſence ſhall ſupply
them
both:
For the Lord ſhall be unto thee an
everlaſting
Light, and thy God thy Glory,
verſ
.
19. and as for this Sun and Moon, it
ſhall
not go down, or withdraw it ſelf;
but
he
ſhall be an Everlaſting Light, without in-
termiſſion
.
So that ’tis evident, he ſpeaks
11Vid. Rev.
21
.13. i-
tem
c. 22.
ver
. 5.
of that Light which ſhall hereafter be, in-
ſtead
of the Sun and Moon.
As for that in the Revelations, we yield,
that
Time ſhall ceaſe;
but to ſay that this
depends
upon the ceſſation of the Heavens,
is
to beg the Queſtion, and to ſuppoſe that
which
is to be proved, viz.
that Time is
meaſured
by the Motion of the Heavens,
and
not of the Earth.
Perrerius 22Gen. c. 1.
l
. 2. quæſt. 6
whom this laft Argument was borrowed
without
acknowledgment) might have
319139That the Earth may be a Planet. him, in the very ſame place, that Time
does
not abſolutely, and univerſally depend
upon
the Motion of the Heavens, ſed in mot@
&
ſucceſſione cujuſlibet durationis, but in any
fuch
ſucceſſion, by which duration may be
meaſured
.
As for that in the Romans, we ſay, that
there
are other Vanities to which the Hea-
venly
Bodies are ſubject.
As firſt, unto
many
changes and alterations, witnefs thoſe
Comets
, which at ſeveral times have been
diſcerned
amongſt them;
and then like-
wife
to that general corruption, in which
all
the Creatures ſhall be involved at the laſt
Day
.
When they ſhall paſs away with a great
112 Pet. 3.
10
, 12.
noiſe, and the Elements ſhall melt with fervent
beat
.
Thus you ſee, there is not any ſuch in-
vincible
ſtrength in theſe Arguments, as
might
cauſe the Author of them to tri-
umph
before-hand with any great noiſe of
victory
.
Another Objection like unto theſe, is ta-
ken
from the Etymology of ſeveral words.
Thus the Heavens are called Æthera, ab
ἀεὶ
θεῖν, becauſe they are always in motion;

and
the Earth Veſta, quia vi ſtat, becauſe of
its
immobility.
To which I anſwer: ’Twere no difficult
matter
to find ſuch proofs for this opinion,
as
well as againſt it.
Thus we may ſay, that the Hebrew word
ערא
, is derived from עער, quia currit;
and
Terra
, non quod teratur, ſed quod
320140That the Earth may be a Planet. curſu omnia terat, ſaith Calcagnius. How-
ever
, though we fuppoſe the Etymology to
be
never fo true and genuine, yet it can at
the
beſt but ſhew what the more common
opinion
was of thoſe times when ſuch names
were
firſt impoſed.
Ob. But ſuppoſe all this were ſo, That
the
Earth had ſuch a diurnal Revolution;
yet how is it conceivable, that it ſhould
at
the ſame time have two diſtinct Mo-
tions
.
I anſwer: This may eaſily be apprehend-
ed
, if you conſider how both theſe Motions
do
tend the ſame way, from Weſt to Eaſt.
Thus a Bowl being turned out of the hand,
has
two Motions in the Air;
one, whereby
it
is carried round;
the other, whereby it
is
caſt forward.
From what hath been delivered in this
Chapter
, the indifferent Reader may gather
ſome
ſatisſaction for thoſe Arguments which
are
uſually urged againſt this Diurnal Moti-
on
of the Earth.
321141That the Earth may be a Planet.
PROP. IX.
That it is more probable the Earth does
move
, than the Sun or Heavens.
A Mongſt thoſe many Arguments that
may
be urged for the conſirmation of
this
Truth, I ſhall only ſet down theſe five.
1. If we ſuppoſe the Earth to be the
cauſe
of this Motion, then will thoſe vaſt
and
glorious Bodies of the Heavens, be freed
from
that inconceivable, unnatural ſwift-
neſs
, which muſt otherwiſe be attributed
unto
them.
For if the Diurnal Revolution be in the
11Vid. Mæſt.
Epit
. Aſtr.
l
. 1. in fine.
Heavens, then it will follow, according to
the
common Hypotheſis, that each Star in
the
Equator, muſt in every hour move at
the
leaſt 4529538 German miles.
So that
according
to the obſervation of 22De Prop.
l
. 5 prop. 58
who tells us, that the Pulſe of a well-tem-
pered
Man, does beat 4000 times in an
hour
;
one of the Stars in that ſpace, whilſt
the
Pulſe beats once, muſt paſs 1132 Ger-
man
miles (ſaith Alphraganus):
Or, ac-
cording
to Tycho, 732 German miles.
But
theſe
numbers ſeem to be ſomewhat of the
leaſt
;
and therefore many others do much
enlarge
them, affirming that every Star
322142That the Earth may be a Planct. the Equator, in one beating of the Pulſe, muſt
move
2528 of theſe miles.
’Tis the Affertion of Clavius, that 11Commen.
in
prim.
cap
.Sphær.
the diſtance of the Orbs, and ſo conſe-
quently
their ſwiftneſs, ſeem to be altoge-
ther
incredible;
yet it is rather far greater
in
it ſelf, than Aſtronomers uſually ſuppoſe
it
;
and yet (ſaith he) according to the
common
Grounds, every Star in the Equa-
tor
, muſt move 42398437 {1/2} miles in an hour.
And though a Man ſhould conſtantly travel
40
miles a day, yet he would not be able to
go
ſo far as a Star does in one hour, under
2904
Years:
Or if we will ſuppoſe an Ar-
row
to be of the ſame ſwiftneſs, then muſt
it
compaſs this great Globe of Earth and
Water
1884 times in an hour.
And a Bird
that
could but fly as faſt, might go round
the
World ſeven times in that ſpace, whilſt
one
could ſay, Ave Maria, gratia plena, Do-
minus
tecum.
Which though it be a pretty round pace,
yet
you muſt conceive that all this is ſpoken
only
of the eighth Sphere;
and ſo being
compared
to the ſwiftneſs of the Primum
Mobile
, is but a ſlow and heavy Motion.
For (ſaith the ſame Author) the thick-
neſs
of each Orb is equal to the diſtance of
its
concave Superſicies from the Centre of
the
Earth.
Thus the Orb of the Moon does
contain
as much ſpace in its thicknefs, as
there
is betwixt the neareſt part of that
and
the Centre.
Thus alſo the eight
323143That the Earth may be a Planet. is as thick as that whole ſpace betwixt the
Centre
of the Earth, and its own concave
Superficies
.
So likewiſe muſt it be in thoſe
three
other Orbs, which he ſuppoſes to be
above
the ſtarry Heaven.
Now if we pro-
portion
their ſwiftneſs according to this
difference
in their bignefs, you may then
conceive
(if you can) what a king of cele-
rity
that muſt be, by which the Primum
Mobile
will be whirled about.
Tycho makes the diſtance of the Stars to
be
much leſs, and their motion ſlower;
and
yet
he is fain to confeſs, that it is omni cogi-
tatione
celerior.
Clavius likewiſe, ſpeaking concerning the
ſwiftneſs
of the Starry Orb, does acknow-
ledg
, Quod velocitas ejus captum humani inge-
nii
excedit.
What then could he think of
the
primum Mobile?
Dr. Gilbert being (it ſeems) aſtoniſhed
11De mag-
nete
lib. 6.
cap
. 3.
at the conſideration of this ſtrange ſwift-
neſs
, ſays of it, that it is motus ſupra omnes
cogitationes
, ſomnia, fabulas, &
licentias poeti-
cas
inſuperabilis, ineffabilis, incomprehenſibilis.
A man may more eaſily conceive the poſſibi-
lity
of any Fable or Fiction, how Beaſts and
Trees
might talk together, than how any
material
Body ſhould be moved with ſuch a
ſwiſtneſs
.
Not but that ’tis poſſible for God to turn
them
about with a far greater velocity.
Nay,
’tis
poſſible for Art to contrive a motion,
which
ſhall be equally ſlow in that propor-
tion
as this is ſwiſt.
But however,
324144That the Earth may be a Planet. queſtion here is, not what can be done, but
what
is moſt likely to be done, according to
the
uſual courſe of Nature.
’Tis the part
of
a Philoſopher, in the reſolution of natural
Events
, not to fly unto the abſolute Power
of
God, and tell us what he can do, but
what
, according to the uſual way of Provi-
dence
, is moſt likely to be done, to find out
ſuch
cauſes of things, as may ſeem moſt eaſy
and
probable to our reaſon.
If you ask, What repugnancy there is in
the
Heavens, unto ſo great a ſwiftneſs?
We
anſwer
;
Their being ſuch vaſt, material
condenſed
Subſtances, with which this in-
conceivable
Motion cannot agree.
Since Motion and Magnitude are two ſuch
Geometrical
things, as bear a mutual pro-
portion
to one another;
therefore it may
ſeem
convenient, that ſlowneſs ſhould be
more
agreeable to a great Body, and ſwift-
neſs
to a leſſer :
and ſo it would be more
conſonant
to the Principles of Nature, that
the
Earth, which is of a leſſer quantity,
ſhould
be appointed to ſuch a Motion, as is
ſomewhat
proportionable to its bigneſs,
than
that the Heavens, that are of ſuch a
vaſt
magnitude, ſhould be whirled about
with
ſuch an incredible ſwiftneſs, which
does
ſo far exceed the proportion of their
bigneſs
, as their bigneſs does exceed this
Earth
, that is but as a Point or Centre to
them
.
’Tis not likely that Nature, in theſe
conſtant
and great Works, ſhould ſo much
deviate
from that uſual Harmony and
325145That the Earth may be a Planet. portion which ſhe obſerves in leſſer Matters.
If this Globe of Earth only were appointed
to
move every day round the Orb of the
fixed
Stars, though it be but a little Body,
and
ſo more capable of a ſwift motion;

yet
that ſwiftneſs would be ſo extreamly
diſproportionable
unto it, that we could
not
with reaſon conceive it poſſible, accord-
ing
to the uſual courſe of Nature.
But now,
that
the Heavens themſelves, of ſuch ſtrange
bigneſs
, with ſo many Stars, which do ſo
far
exceed the Magnitude of our Earth,
ſhould
be able to turn about with the ſame
celerity
;
Oh! ’tis altogether beyond the
fancy
of a Poet, or a Madman.
For anſwer unto this Argument, our Ad-
verſaries
tell us, that there is not in the
Heavens
any repugnancy to ſo ſwift a Mo-
tion
;
and that whether we conſider the na-
ture
of thoſe Bodies;
or, ſecondly, the
ſwiftneſs
of this Motion.
1. For the Nature of thoſe
\\
Bodies, either their} Qualities.
\\ Quantity.
1. There is not in them the Qualities of
lightneſs
or heavineſs, or any the leaſt con-
trariety
that may make them reluctant to
one
another.
2. Their Magnitude will help them in
11Roff.lit. ii
ſect
. 1. c.1.
their ſwiftneſs :
For the greater any Body
is
, the quicker will it be in its motion, and
that
not only when it is moved by an inward
Principle
, as a Millſtone will deſcend
326146That the Earth may be a Planet. than a little Pebble ; but alſo when its Mo-
tion
does proceed from ſome external A-
gent
, as the Wind will drive a great Cloud,
or
a heavy Ship, when it is not able to ſtir a
little
Stone.
2. As for the ſwiftneſs of this Motion,
the
poſſibility of it may be illuſtrated by o-
ther
Particulars in Nature :
As,
1. The ſound of a Cannon, in a little
11Idem lib. 2
ſect
. 1.c.5.
time, is carried for twenty miles diſtance.
2. Though a Star be ſcituate ſo remote-
ly
from us;
yet the Eye diſcerns it in a mo-
ment
, which is not without ſome motion,
either
of the Species of the Star, or the
Rays
of the Eye.
Thus alſo the Light does
22Idem lib. 1
ſect
. 1.c.2.
in an inſtant paſs from one ſide of the Hea-
ven
to another.
3. If the force of Powder be able to car-
ry
a Bullet with ſo great a ſwiftneſs, we need
not
doubt then, but that the Heavens are
capable
of ſuch a celerity, as is uſually at-
tributed
unto them.
Unto theſe it may be anſwered:
1. Where they ſay that the Heavenly Bo-
dies
are without all gravity;
we grant it, in
the
ſame ſenſe as our Earth alſo, being con-
ſidered
as whole, and in its proper place,
may
be denied to be heavy :
ſince this Qua-
lity
, in the exacteſt ſenſe, can only be aſcri-
bed
unto ſuch parts as are ſevered from the
whole
to which they belong.
But how-
ever
, ſince the Heavens, or Stars, are of a
material
Subſtance, ’tis impoſſible but there
ſhould
be in them ſome ineptitude to
327147That the Earth may be a Planet. on; becauſe Matter is of it ſelf a dull and
ſluggiſh
thing;
and by ſo much the more, as
it
is kept cloſe and condenſed together.
And though the followers of Ptolomy, do
with
much confidence deny the Heavens to
be
capable of any reluctancy to motion;

yet
it were eaſy to prove the contraby, out
of
their own Principles.
’Tis not conceiv-
able
, how the upper Sphere ſhould move
the
nether, unleſs their Superficies were full
of
rugged parts, ( which they deny:)
or
elſe
one of the Orbs muſt lean upon the o-
ther
with its weight, and ſo makeit partake
of
its own Motion.
And beſides, they tell us,
that
the farther any Sphere is diſtant from
the
Primum Mobile, the leſs is it hindred by
that
in its proper courſe, and the ſooner
does
it ſiniſh its own Revolution.
From
whence
it will eaſily follow, that theſe Bo-
dies
have reſiſtancy from one another.
I have often wondred, why amongſt the
inchanted
Buildings of the Poets, they have
not
fained any Caſtle to be made of the ſame
Materials
with the ſolid Orbs, ſince in ſuch a
Fabrick
, there would have been theſe emi-
nent
Conveniences.
1. It muſt needs be very pleaſant, by rea-
ſon
of its perſpicuity, becauſe it is more
diaphanous
than the Air it ſelf, and ſo the
Walls
of it could not hinder the proſpect
any
way.
2. Being ſo ſolid and impenitrable, it
muſt
needs be excellent againſt all violence
of
Weathers, as alſo againſt the aſſaults
328148That the Earth may be a Planet. the Enemy, who ſhould not be able to
break
it with the moſt ſurious Batteries of
the
Ram , or pierce it with any Cannon-
ſhot
.
3. Being void of all heavineſs, a Man
may
carry it up and down with him, as a
Snail
does his Houſe:
and ſo, whether he
follow
the Enemy, or fly from him, he has
ſtill
this advantage, that he may take his
Caſtle
and Defence along with him.
But then again, there are on the other
ſide
as many inconveniences.
For,
1. Its perſpicuity would make it ſo open,
that
a Man ſhould not be able to retire
himſelf
into any private part of it.
And
then
,
2. Being ſo extreamly ſolid, as well as in-
viſible
, a Man ſhould be ſtill in danger of
knocking
his head againſt every Wall and
Pillar
;
unleſs it were alſo intangible, as ſome
of
the Peripateticks affirm.
3. Its being without all gravity, would
bring
this inconvenience, that every little
puff
of Wind would blow it up and down;
ſince ſome of the ſame Sect are not aſhamed
to
ſay, that the Heavens are ſo utterly de-
void
of Heavineſs, that if but a little Fly
ſhould
juſtle againſt the vaſt Frame of the
Celeſtial
Spheres, he would move them out
of
their places.
A ſtrong Fancy, that could be at leiſure,
might
make excellent ſport with this Aſtro-
nomical
Fiction.
329149That the Earth may be a Planet.
So that this firſt evaſion of our Adverſa-
ries
, will not ſhelter them from the force of
that
Argument, which is taken from the in-
credible
ſwiftneſs of the Heavens.
2. Whereas they tell us, in the ſecond
place
, that a bigger Body, as a Millſtone,
will
naturally deſcend ſwifter than a leſs, as
a
Pebble.
I anſwer : This is not becauſe
ſuch
a great Body is in it ſelf more eaſily
movable
;
but becauſe the bigger any thing
is
which is out of its own place, the ſtron-
ger
will be its natural deſire of returning
thither
, and ſo conſequently the quicker its
motion
.
But now thoſe Bodies that move
circularly
, are always in their proper ſcitu-
ations
, and ſo the ſame reaſon is not apply-
able
unto them.
And then, whereas ’tis
ſaid
, that Magnitude does always add to the
ſwiftneſs
of a violent motion, (as Wind
will
move a great Ship ſooner than a little
Stone
):
We anſwer, This is not becauſe a
Ship
is more eaſily movable in it ſelf than a
little
Stone:
For I ſuppoſe, the Objector
will
not think he can throw the one as far as
the
other, but becauſe theſe little Bodies
are
not ſo liable to that kind of vio-
lence
, from whence their Motion does pro-
ceed
.
As for thoſe Inſtances which are cited
to
illuſtrate the poſſibility of this ſwiftneſs in
the
Heavens, we anſwer:
The paſſage of a
Sound
, is but very ſlow in compariſon to
the
motion of the Heavens.
And then be-
ſides
, the ſwiftneſs of the Species of
330150That the Earth may be a Planet. or Sight, which are Accidents, are not fit
to
infer the like celerity in a material ſub-
ſtance
.
And ſo likewiſe for the Light which
Ariſtotle himſelf, and with him the 11De Ani-
ma
.l.2.c.7
rality of Philoſophers, do for this very rea-
ſon
prove not to be a Body, becauſe it
moves
with ſuch ſwiftneſs, of which (it
ſeems
) they thought a Body to be incapa-
ble
.
Nay, the Objector himſelf, in ano- ther place, ſpeaking of Light in reference
22Roff. l.2.
ſect
.1.c.4.
to a Subſtance, does ſay ;
Lumen eſt acci-
dens
, ſic ſpecies rei viſæ, &
alia eſt ratio ſub-
ſtantiarum
, alia accidentium.
To that of the Bullet, we anſwer : He
might
as well have illuſtrated the ſwiſtneſs
of
a Bullet, which will paſs four or five
miles
in two minutes, by the motion of a
hand
in a Watch, which paſſes two or three
inches
in twelve hours;
there being a grea-
ter
diſproportion betwixt the motion of
the
Heavens, and the ſwiftneſs of a Bul-
let
, than there is betwixt the ſwiftneſs of
a
Bùllet, and the motion of a Hand in a
Watch
.
Arg. 2. Another Argument to this pur-
poſe
, may be taken from the chief end of
the
Diurnal and Annual Motions, which is
to
diſtinguiſh betwixt Night and Day, Win-
ter
and Summer;
and ſo conſequently, to
ſerve
for the Commodities and Seaſons of
the
habitable World.
Wherefore it may
ſeem
more agreeable to the Wiſdom of
Providence
, for to make the Earth as well
the
efficient, as the final cauſe of this
331151That the Earth may be a Planet. tion : Eſpecially ſince nature in her other
Operations
does never uſe any tedious dif-
ficult
means, to perform that which may
as
well be accompliſhed by ſhorter and eaſier
ways
.
But now, the appearances would be
the
ſame, in reſpect of us, if only this lit-
tle
Point of Earth were made the ſubject of
theſe
Motions, as if the vaſt Frame of the
World
, with all thoſe Stars of ſuch num-
ber
and bigneſs, were moved about it.
’Tis
a
common Maxim, Múdev ’Elxũ Púorv È?
-
11Galen. γὰ@ευαι.
Nature does nothing in vain, but
in
all her courſes does take the moſt com-
pendious
way.
’Tis not therefore (I ſay)
likely
, that the whole Fabrick of the Hea-
vens
, which do ſo much exceed our Earth
in
magnitude and perfection, ſhould be put
to
undergo ſo great and conſtant a Work in
the
ſervice of our Earth, which might more
eaſily
ſave all that labour, by the Circumvo-
lution
of its own Body;
eſpecially, ſince
the
Heavens do not by this motion attain
any
farther perfection for themſelves, but
are
made thus ſerviceable to this little Ball
of
Earth.
So that in this caſe it may ſeem
to
argue as much improvidence in Nature
to
imploy them in this motion, as it would
in
a Mother, who in warming her 22Lansberg would rather turn the Fire about that, than
that
about the Fire.
Or in a Cook, 33Kep'ar. would not roaſt his Meat, by turning it a-
bout
to the Fire;
but rather, by turning
the
Fire about it.
Or in a Man, 44Gallilæ-
us
.
332152That the Earth may be a Planet. aſcending ſome high Tower, to ſave the
labour
of ſtirring his Head, ſhould rather
deſire
that all the Regions might ſucceſſively
be
turned before his Eye, that ſo he might
eaſily
take a view of them.
We allow every Watch-maker ſo much
wiſdom
, as not to put any Motion in his
Inſtrument
, which is ſuperfluous, or may be
ſupplied
an eaſier way :
And ſhall we not
think
that Nature has as much providence
as
every ordinary Mechanick?
Or can we
imagine
that She ſhould appoint thoſe nu-
merous
and vaſt Bodies, the Stars, to com-
paſs
us with ſuch a ſwift and reſtleſs Mo-
tion
, ſo full of confuſion and uncertain-
ties
, when as all this might as well be
done
by the Revolution of this little Ball of
Earth
?
Arg. 3. Amongſt the ſeveral parts of
the
World, there are ſix Planets which are
generally
granted to move.
As for the Sun
and
the Earth, and the fixed Stars, it is
yet
in queſtion, which of them are natu-
rally
indowed with the ſame condition.
Now common reaſon will dictate unto us,
that
Motion is moſt agreeable to that which
in
kind and properties is moſt near to thoſe
Bodies
that undoubtedly are moved.
But
now
there is one eminent qualification,
wherein
the Earth does agree with the Pla-
nets
;
whereas the Sun, together with the
fixed
Stars, do in the ſame reſpect differ
from
them :
and that is Light, which all
the
Planets, and ſo too the Earth, are
333153That the Earth may be a Planet. to borrow elſewhere, whilſt the Sun and the
Stars
have it of their own.
From whence
it
may be probably concluded, that the Earth
is
rather the Subject of this Motion than the
other
.
To this it may be added, that the
Sun
and Stars ſeem to be of a more excellent
Nature
than the other parts of the World,
and
therefore ſhould in reaſon be endowed
with
the beſt qualifications.
But now Mo-
tion
is not ſo noble a condition as Reſt:
that is but a kind of weariſom and ſervile
thing
, whereas this is uſually aſcribed to God
himſelf
:
Of whom ’tis ſaid;
Immotus ſtabiliſq; manens dans cuncta moveri.
11Bott. de
Coxſol
.
Phil
. l.3.
Arg. 4. Ariſtotle tells us, ’Tis 22De Cælo,
l
.2.c.10.
agreeable to reaſon, that the time appoin-
ted
for the Revolution of each Orb, ſhould
be
proportionable to its bigneſs.
But now
this
can only be, by making the Earth a
Planet
, and the Subject of the Annual and
Diurnal
Motions.
Wherefore ’tis proba-
ble
, that this does rather move than the Hea-
vens
.
According to the common Hypotheſis, the
Primum
Mobile will move round in a day.
Saturn in thirty Years. Fupiter in twelve.
Mars
in two.
The Sun, Venus, and Mercu-
ry
, which have ſeveral Orbs, yet will agree
in
their Revolutions, being each of them a-
bout
a Year in finiſhing their Courſes:

Whereas
, by making the Earth a Planet,
there
will be a juſt proportion betwixt
334154That the Earth may be a Planet. bigneſs of the Orbs, and the time of their
Motions
:
For then, next to the Sun, or
Centre
, there will be the Sphere of Mercu-
ry
;
which as it is but narrow in its Diame-
ter
, ſo likewiſe is it quick in its Motion,
running
its Courſe in eighty eight days:
Venus, that is next unto it, in 224 days:
The
Earth in 365 days, or a Year:
Mars
in
687 days:
Jupiter in 4332 days: Saturn
in
10759 days.
Thus likewiſe is it with
thoſe
Medicean Stars that encompaſs Jupi-
ter
.
That which is loweſt amongſt them,
finiſhes
his Courſe in two and twenty hours;

the
next in three days and an half;
the third
in
ſeven days;
and the fartheſt in ſeventeen
days
.
Now as it is (according to Ariſto-
tle’s
conſeſſion) more likely that Nature
ſhould
obſerve ſuch a due proportion betwixt
the
Heavenly Orbs;
ſo is it more probable,
that
the Earth ſhould move, rather than the
Heavens
.
Arg. 5. This may likewiſe be confirmed
from
the appearance of Comets:
Concern-
ing
which, there are three things common-
ly
granted;
or if they were not, might be
eaſily
proved:
namely,
1. That there are divers Comets in the
Air
, betwixt the Moon and our Earth.
2. That many of theſe Comets do ſeem
to
riſe and ſet as the Stars.
3. That this appearing Motion is not pro-
perly
their own, but communicated unto
them
from ſomewhat elſe.
335155That the Earth may be a Planet.
But now, this Motion of theirs cannot
be
cauſed by the Heavens;
and therefore it
muſt
neceſſarily proceed from the Revoluti-
on
of our Earth.
That the Moon's Orb cannot carry along
with
it the greater part of the Air wherein
theſe
Comets are placed, might eaſily be
proved
from the common Grounds.
For
the
Concave Superficies of that Sphere, is
uſually
ſuppoſed to be exactly terſe and
ſmooth
;
ſo that the meer touch of it can-
not
turn about the whole Element of Fire,
with
a Motion that is not natural unto it.
Nor could this Elementary Fire, which they
imagine
to be of a more rarified and ſubtil
Nature
, communicate the ſame Motion to
the
thicker Air, and that to the Waters (as
ſome
affirm):
For by what means could
that
ſmooth Orb take hold of the adjoining
Air
?
To this Sarſius anſwers, that there are
great
Gibboſities, and mountainous Inequa-
lities
, in the Concavity of the loweſt Sphere,
and
by theſe is it enabled to carry along
with
it the Fire and Air.
But 11Antariſt.
cap
16.
tells him, Fictitia iſta, &
ad fugam reperta
ſunt
.
And yet his own Conjecture is ſcarce
ſo
good, when he affirms, that this Motion
of
the Ætherial Air, as alſo of that Ele-
mentary
Air hard by us, is cauſed by that
ruggedneſs
which there is in the Bodies of
the
Planets;
of which Opinion, we may,
with
as good reaſon, ſay as he ſays to
Sarſius
:
Fictitia iſta, & ad fugam reperta;
Theſe things are meer Fictions,
336156That the Earth may be a Planet. ted for ſhifts, and without any probable
ground
.
But now, this appearance of the Comets
may
eaſily be reſolved, if we ſuppoſe the
Earth
to move.
For then, though they did
ſtill
remain in their wonted places;
yet this,
by
its Diurnal Revolution, ſucceſſively with-
drawing
it ſelf from them, they will appear
to
riſe and ſet.
And therefore, according
to
this common natural Experiment, it is
more
probable that the Earth ſhould move,
than
the Heavens.
Another Argument urged by ſome, to
prove
that this Globe of Earth is eaſily
movable
, is taken from the Opinion of thoſe
who
affirm, that the acceſs of any Weight
unto
a new place, as ſuppoſe an Army, does
11Vid. Vaſq.
l
. 1. diſp. 2.
eap
. 816.
make the Earth poiſe it ſelf afreſh, and
change
the Centre of Gravity that it had be-
fore
;
but this is not generally granted, and
therefore
not to be inſiſted on as a common
ground
.
To this purpoſe likewiſe is that Inference
of
Lansbergius, who from Archimedes his
ſaying
, that he could move the Earth, if he
knew
where to ſtand and faſten his Inſtru-
ment
;
concludes, that the Earth is eaſily
movable
:
whereas it was the intent of Ar-
chimedes
, in that Speech, to ſhew the infi-
nite
power of Engines;
there being no
Weight
ſo great, but that an Inſtrument
might
be invented to move it.
Before we finiſh this Chapter, ’tis requi-
ſite
that we enquire what kind of
337157That the Earth may be a Planet. that is, from which theſe Motions that Co-
pernicus
aſcribes unto the Earth, does pro-
ceed
.
Whether or no it be ſome Animal
Power
that does aſſiſt (as Ariſtotle), or in-
form
(as Keplar thinks), or elſe ſome other
natural
motive Quality which is intrinſical
unto
it.
We may obſerve, That when the proper
genuine
cauſe of any Motion is not obvious,
Men
are very prone to attribute unto that
which
they diſcern to be the moſt frequent
Original
of it in other things, Life.
Thus
the
Stoicks affirm, the Soul of the Water to
be
the cauſe of the ebbing and flowing of
the
Sea.
Thus others think the Wind to
11Sen. Nat.
Qu
. lib. 5.
cap
. 5,6.
proceed from the Life of the Air, whereby
it
is able to move it ſelf ſeveral ways, as
other
living Creatures.
And upon the
ſame
grounds do the Platonicks, Stoicks, and
ſome
of the Peripateticks, affirm the Hea-
vens
to be animated.
From hence likewiſe
it
is, that ſo many do maintain Ariſtotle his
Opinion
concerning Intelligences:
which ſome
of
his Followers, the School-men, do con-
firm
out of Scripture;
from that place in
Matth
.
24. 29. where ’tis ſaid, The Powers
of
the Heavens ſhall be ſhaken.
In which
words
, by Powers, (ſay they) are meant
the
Angels, by vvhoſe power it is that the
Heavens
are moved.
And ſo likewiſe in that,
Fob
9.
13. vvhere the Vulgar has it, Sub
quo
curvantur, qui portant orbem;
that is,
the
Intelligences.
Which Text, might ſerve
altogether
as vvell to prove the Fable
338158That the Earth may be a Planet. Atlas and Hercules. Thus Cajetan concludes
from
that place in Pſalm 136.
5. where ’tis
ſaid
, God by wiſdom made the Heavens:
Or,
according
to the Vulgar, Qui fecit Cælos in-
tellectu
, That the Heavens are moved by an
intelligent
Soul.
If we conſider the Original of this Opi-
nion
, we ſhall find it to proceed from that
miſtake
of Ariſtotle, who thought the Hea-
vens
to be Eternal;
and therefore to re-
quire
ſuch a moving cauſe, as being of
an
immaterial Subſtance, might be ex-
empted
from all that wearineſs and in-
conſtancy
, vvhich other things are liable
unto
.
But now this ground of his is evidently
ſalſe
, ſince ’tis certain, That the Heavens
had
a beginning, and ſhall have an end.
How-
ever
, the imploying of Angels in theſe Mo-
tions
of the World, is both ſuperfluous and
very
improbable.
1. Becauſe a natural Power, intrinſical
to
thoſe Bodies, will ſerve the turn as well.
And as for other Operations, which are to
be
conſtant and regular, Nature does com-
monly
make uſe of ſome inward princi-
ple
.
2. The Intelligences being immaterial, can-
not
immediatly vvork upon a Body.
Nor
does
any one tell us vvhat Inſtruments they
ſhould
make uſe of in this buſineſs.
They
have
not any hands to take hold of the Hea-
vens
, or turn them about.
And that Opi-
nion
of Aquinas, Durand, Soncinas,
339159That the Earth may be a Planet. other School-men, ſeems to be vvithout all
reaſon
;
who make the Faculty, whereby
the
Angels move the Orbs, to be the very
ſame
with their Underſtandings and Will:
So that if an Angel do but meerly ſuſpend
the
Act of willing their Motion, they muſt
neceſſarily
ſtand ſtill;
and on the contrary,
his
only willing them to move, ſhall be e-
nough
to carry them about in their ſeveral
Courſes
.
Since it were then a needleſs
thing
for Providence to have appointed
Angels
unto this buſineſs, which might have
been
done as well by the only Will of God.

And
beſides, how are the Orbs capable of
perceiving
this Will in the Intelligences?

Or
if they were, yet what motive Faculty
have
they of themſelves, which can inable
them
to obey it?
Now, as it would be with the Heavens;
ſo likewiſe is it with the Earth, which may
be
turned about in its Diurnal Revolution,
without
the help of Intelligences, by ſome
motive
Power of its own, that may be in-
trinſical
unto it.
If it be yet inquired, What cauſe there
is
of its Annual Motion?
I anſwer: ’Tis
eaſily
conceivable, how the ſame Principle
may
ſerve for both theſe, ſince they tend the
ſame
way, from Weſt to Eaſt.
However, that Opinion of Keplar is not
very
improbable, That all the Primary
Planets
are moved round by the Sun,
which
once in twenty five, or twenty
340160That the Earth may be a Planet. days, does obſerve a Revolution about its
own
Axis, and ſo carry along the Planets
that
encompaſs it;
which Planets are
therefore
ſlower or ſwifter, according to
their
diſtances from him.
If you ask, By what means the Sun can
produce
ſuch a Motion?
He anſwers: By ſending forth a kind of
Magnetick
Virtue in ſtreight Lines, from
each
part of its Body;
of which there is
always
a conſtant ſucceſſion:
ſo that as
ſoon
as one Beam of this Vigor has paſſed a
Planet
, there is another preſently takes hold
of
it, like the Teeth of a Wheel.
But how can any Virtue hold out to ſuch
a
diſtance?
He anſwers: Firſt, as Light and Heat,
together
with thoſe other ſecret Influences,
which
work upon Minerals in the Bowels of
the
Earth:
ſo likewiſe may the Sun ſend
forth
a Magnetick Motive Virtue, whoſe
Power
may be continued to the fartheſt Pla-
nets
.
Secondly. If the Moon, according to
common
Philoſophy, may move the Sea,
why
then may not the Sun move this Globe
of
Earth?
In ſuch Queries as theſe, we can conclude
only
from Conjectures, that Speech of the
Wiſe
Man, Eccleſ.
3. 11. being more eſpe-
cially
verified of Aſtronomical Queſtions,
concerning
the Frame of the whole Uni-
verſe
, That no Man can find out the Works
341161That the Earth may be a Planet. God, from the beginning to the end. Though
we
may diſcern divers things in the World,
which
may argue the infinite Wiſdom and
Power
of the Author;
yet there will be al-
ways
ſome Particulars left for our diſpute
and
enquiry, and we ſhall never be able,
with
all our induſtry, to attain a perfect
comprehenſion
of the Creatures, or to find
them
wholly out, from the beginning to the
end
.
The Providence of God having thus con-
11Valleſ.
Sacr
. Phi-
lof
. c. 64.
trived it, that ſo Man might look for ano-
ther
Life after this, when all his longing
and
thirſt ſhall be fully ſatisfied.
For ſince
no
natural Appetite is in vain, it muſt ne-
ceſſarily
follow, that there is a poſſibility of
attaining
ſo much knowledg, as ſhall be com-
menſurate
unto thoſe deſires;
which becauſe
it
is not to be had in this World, it will
behove
us then to expect and provide for
another
.
342162That the Earth may be a Planet.
PROP. X.
That this Hypotheſis is exactly agreeable to
common
appearances.
IT hath been already proved, that the Earth
is
capable of ſuch a ſcituation and moti-
on
, as this Opinion ſuppoſes it to have.
It
remains
, that in the laſt place, we ſhew how
agreeable
this would be unto thoſe ordinary
ſeaſons
of Days, Months, Years, and all
other
appearances in the Heavens.
1. As for the difference betwixt Days and
Nights
:
’tis evident, That this may be cau-
ſed
as well by the Revolution of the Earth,
as
the Motion of the Sun;
ſince the Heavenly
Bodies
muſt needs ſeem after the ſame man-
ner
to Riſe and Set, whether or no they
themſelves
by their own Motion do paſs by
our
Horizon and Vertical Point;
or whether
our
Horizon and Vertical Point, by the Revo-
lution
of our Earth, do paſs by them.
Ac-
cording
to that of Ariſtotle, {οὐ}υιν 11 De Cælo,
lib
, 2. c. 8.
{κι}ν{εἶ}ν τη;
ν ὅψιν το ὸρώμενον There will not
appear
any difference, whether or no the
Eye
be moved from the Object, or the Ob-
ject
from the Eye.
And therefore I cannot
chuſe
but wonder that a Man of any
343163That the Earth may be a Planet. Or Sence ſhould make choice of no better an
Argument
to conclude his Book withal, than
that
which we reade at the latter end of
Al
.
Roſſ. where he infers, that the Earth does
not
move, becauſe then the ſhadow in a Sun-
Dial
would not be altered.
2. As for the difference of Months, we ſay,
That
the divers Illuminations of the Moon,
the
different bigneſs of her Body, her re-
maining
for a longer or ſhorter time in the
Earth
's ſhadow, when ſhe is eclipſed, &
c.
may well enough be ſolved by ſuppoſing her
to
move above our Earth, in an Eccentrical
Epicycle
.
Thus,
13[Figure 13]
344164That the Earth may be a Planet.
In which kind of Hypotheſis there will be a
double
difference of Motion.
The one cauſed
by
the different ſcituation of the Moon's Bo-
dy
in its own Eccentrick.
The other by the
different
ſcituation of the Moons Orb in the
Earth
's Eccentrick:
which is ſo exactly an-
ſwerable
to the Motions and Appearances of
this
Planet, that from hence Lansbergius draws
an
Argument for this Syſtem of the Heavens,
which
in the ſtrength of his confidence he
calls
, Demonſtr ationem ’ζπιςηγεονιυUlot;
ù, cui nullâ
ratione
poteſt contradici.
4. As for the difference betwixt Winter
and
Summer;
betwixt the number and length
of
Days, which appertain to each of thoſe
Seaſons
:
the ſeeming motion of the Sun from
one
Sign to another in the Zodiack:
All this
may
eaſily be ſolved, by ſuppoſing the Earth
to
move in an Eccentrical Orb about the Sun.
Thus,
14[Figure 14]
345165That the Earth may be a Planet.
Suppoſe the Earth to be at C, then the
Sun
at A, will ſeem to be in the Sign , and
at
the greateſt diſtance from us, becauſe the
Earth
is then in the fartheſt parts of its Ec-
centrick
.
When after, by its Annual Moti-
on
, it hath paſſed ſucceſſively by the Signs
, at length it comes to the other
Solſtice
at B, where the Sun will appear in ,
and
ſeem biggeſt, as being in its Perigie, be-
cauſe
our Earth is then in the neareſt part of
its
Eccentrick.
As for all other Appearances of the Sun,
which
concern the Annual Motion, you may
ſee
by the following Figure, that they are
exactly
agreeable to this Hypotheſis.
15[Figure 15]
Where you have the Earth deſcribed
346166That the Earth may be a Planet. the Sun at A, in the four chief Points of
the
Zodiack;
namely, the two Equinoctials
at
and , and the Solſtices at and .
Through all which Points, the Earth does
paſs
in its Annual Motion, from Weſt to
Eaſt
.
The Axis, upon which our Earth does
move
, is repreſented by the Line BC;
which Axis does always decline from that of
the
Ecliptick, about 23 degres, 30 minutes.

The
Points BC, are imagined to be the Poles,
B
the North Pole, and C the South.
Now if we ſuppoſe this Earth to turn a-
bout
its own Axis, by a Diurnal Motion,
then
every Point of it will deſcribe a Paral-
lel
Circle, which will be either bigger or
leſſer
, according to its diſtance from the
Poles
.
The chief of them are the Equino-
ctial
DE.
The two Tropicks, FG, and HI.
The two Polar Circles, MN the Artick,
and
KL the Antartick:
of which, the Equi-
noctial
only is a great Circle, and therefore
will
always be equally divided by the Line of
Illumination
, ML;
whereas the other Pa-
rallels
are thereby diſtributed into unequal
parts
.
Amongſt which parts, the Diurnal
Arches
of thoſe that are towards B, the
North
Pole, are bigger than the Nocturnal,
when
our Earth is in , and the Sun appears
in
.
Inſomuch, that the whole Artick Cir-
cle
is enlightned, and there is day for half a
Year
together under that Pole.
Now when the Earth proceeds to the other
Solſtice
at , and the Sun appears in ,
347167That the Earth may be a Planet. that Hemiſphere muſt be involved in darkneſs,
which
did before partake of Light.
And
thoſe
Parallels towards the North and South
Poles
, will ſtill be divided by the ſame ine-
quality
.
But thoſe bigger parts, which were
before
enlightned, will now be darkned, &

vice
verſa.
As when the Earth was in N, the
Artick
Circle MN was wholly enlightned,
and
the Antartick KL altogether in the
dark
.
So now, when it is in A, the Antar-
tick
KL, will be wholly in the Light, and
the
other MN, altogether obſcured.
Where-
as
the Sun before was vertical to the Inhabi-
tants
at the Tropick FG.
So now is he in the
ſame
ſcituation to thoſe that live under the
other
Tropick HI.
And whereas before the
Pole
did incline 23 degrees 30 minutes to-
wards
the Sun, ſo now does it recline as much
from
him.
The whole difference will amount
to
47 degrees, which is the diſtance of one
Tropick
from the other.
But now, in the two other Figures, when
the
Earth is in either of the Equinoctials ,
the
Circle of Illumination will paſs through
both
the Poles;
and thereſore muſt divide
all
the Parallels into equal parts.
From
whence
it will follow, that the Day and
Night
muſt then be equal in all places of the
World
.
As the Earth is here repreſented in , it
turns
only the enlightned part towards us;
as it is in , we ſee its Nocturnal Hemiſphere.
So that according to this Hypotbeſis, we
may
eaſily and exactly reconcile every
348168That the Earth may be a Planet. pearance concerning the difference betwixt
Days
and Nights, Winter and Summer, to-
gether
with all thoſe other varieties which
depend
upon them.
If you would know how the Planets (ac-
cording
to the Syſteme of the Heavens) will
appear
Direct, Stationary, Retrograde;
and
yet
ſtill move regularly about their own
Centres
, you may plainly diſcern it by this
following
Diagram.
16[Figure 16]
349169That the Earth may be a Planet.
Where ſuppoſe the Sun to be at A, the
Circle
(BGM) to be the Orb of the Earth's
Motion
;
and that above it, noted with the
ſame
Letters, to be the Sphere of Jupiter;
and the uppermoſt of all, to be a part of
the
Zodiack in the Starry Heaven.
Now if you conceive the Letters, BCD
EFGHI
KLM, and abcdefghiklm,
to
divide the Earth’s Orb, and that of Ju-
piter
, into ſeveral parts, proportionable to
the
ſlowneſs or ſwiftneſs of their different
motions
, (Jupiter finiſhing his Courſe in
twelve
Years, and the Earth in One) then
ſuppoſing
the Earth to be at the Point (B),
and
Jupiter likewiſe in his Orb to be ſcitua-
ted
at (b), he will appear unto us to be in
the
Zodiack at the point (r).
But after-
wards
, both of them moving forward to the
Letter
(Cc), Jupiter will ſeem to be in the
Zodiack
at (v), as having paſſed directly
forward
according to the order of the Signs.
And ſo likewiſe each of them being tranſ-
ferred
to the places (Dd) (Ee), Jupiter
will
ſtill appear Direct, and to have moved
in
the Zodiack unto the Points (yz).
But
now
vvhen the Earth comes to be more im-
mediatly
interpoſed betwixt this Planet and
the
Sun;
as vvhen both of them are at the
Letter
(Ff), then vvill Jupiter bediſcerned
in
the Zodiack at (x).
So that all the
vvhile
the Earth vvas paſſing the Arch (E
F
), Jupiter did ſtill remain betwixt the
Points
(z) and (x), and therefore muſt
ſeem
unto us as if he vvere Stationary;
350170That the Earth may be a Planet. aftervvards, both of them being carried to
(Gg), then Jupiter vvill appear at (s),
as
if by a haſty motion he had returned
from
his former Courſe the ſpace (xs):
Both of them paſſing to (Hh), this Planet
vvill
ſtill ſeem to be ſvviftly Retrograde, and
appear
in the Point at (p);
but vvhen they
come
to the Points (Ii), Jupiter vvill then
ſeem
to be ſlovver in this Motion, and to
have
only paſſed the ſpace (pn).
Both of
them
being transferred to (Kk), Jupiter
vvill
then appear in the Zodiack at (o), as
being
again Direct, going forvvard accord-
ing
to the order of the Signs;
and vvhile
the
Earth did paſs the Arch (IK), Jupiter
then
remain’d betvveen the Points (no),
and
ſo conſequently, did again ſeem to be
Stationary
.
Both of them coming to (Ll),
and
thenceto (Mm), Jupiter vvill ſtill ap-
pear
Direct, and to have gone forvvard in
the
Zodiack from (q) to (t).
So that all
the
ſpace vvherein Jupiter is Retrograde, is
repreſented
by the Arch (nz).
In vvhich
ſpace
, he himſelf moves in his ovvn Orb, the
Arch
(ei), and ſo the Earth in its Orb, a
proportional
ſpace (EI).
As it hath been ſaid of this Planet, ſo like-
vviſe
is it appliable to the other.
Saturn,
Mars
, Venus, Mercury;
all vvhich are thus
made
to appear direct, ſtationary, and retro-
grade
, by the motion of our Earth, vvith-
out
the help of thoſe Epycicles and Eccen-
tricks
, and ſuch unneceſſary Wheel-vvork,
vvherevvith
Ptolomy hath filled the Heavens.
351171That the Earth may be a Planet. Inſomuch that here Fromondus is fain 11Antariſt.
cap
. 18.
Veſt
.tract.
4
. cap. 3.
confeſs, Nullo Argumento in ſpeciem probabi-
liori
, motum terræ annuum a Copernicanis a-
ſtrui
, quam illo ſtationis, directionis, regreſſio-
nis
Planitarum.
There is not any more pro-
bable
Argument to prove the Annual Moti-
on
of the Earth, than its agreeableneſs to the
ſtation
, direction, and regreſſion of the Planets.
Laſtly, That Copernicus's Syſteme of the
Heavens
, is very anſvverable to the exacteſt
Obſervations
, may be manifeſt from this
follovving
deſcription of it.
17[Figure 17]
352172That the Earth may be a Planet.
Suppoſe the Sun to be ſcituated at A. Now
becauſe
Mercury is found by experience to
be
always very near the Sun, ſo that he does
for
the moſt part lie hid under his Rays.
As
alſo
becauſe this Planet hath a more lively
vigorous
Light than any of the other;
there-
fore
we may infer, that his Orb is placed
next
unto the Sun, as that at B.
As for Venus, ’tis obſerved, That She
does
always keep at a ſet diſtance from the
Sun
, never going from him above forty de-
grees
, or thereabouts;
that her Body ap-
pears
, through the Perſpective, to be forty
times
bigger at one time than at another;
that when ſhe ſeems biggeſt and neareſt un-
to
us, we then diſcern her as being perfectly
round
.
Therefore doth this Planet alſo
move
in a Circle that incompaſſeth the Sun:

Which
Circle does not contain the Earth
within
it, becauſe then, Venus would ſome-
times
be in oppoſition to the Sun;
whereas,
’tis
generally granted, that ſhe never yet
came
ſo far as to be in a Sextile.
Nor is this Circle below the Sun, (as Pto-
lomy
ſuppoſeth) becauſe then this Planet, in
both its Conjunctions, would appear 11Matuti-
na
, Veſper-
tina
.
ned, which ſhe does not.
Nor is it above the Sun, becauſe then ſhe
would
always appear in the Full, and never
horned
.
From hence it will follow, that this Orb
muſt
neceſſarily be betwixt the Earth and the
Sun
, as that at C.
As for Mars, ’tis obſerved, That he
353173That the Earth may be a Planet. appear ſixty times bigger when he is near
us
, than at his greateſt diſtance;
that he is
ſometimes
in oppoſition to the Sun.
From
whence
we may conclude, that his Orb does
contain
our Earth within it.
’Tis obſerved
alſo
, that he does conſtantly appear in the
Full
, and never horned;
from whence likewiſe
it
is manifeſt, that the Sun is comprehended
within
its Orb, as it is in that which is re-
preſented
by the Circle E.
And becauſe the like appearances are ob-
ſerved
in Jupiter and Saturn, (though in leſs
degrees
) therefore we may with good rea-
ſon
conceive them to be in the Heavens, after
ſome
ſuch manner as they are here ſet down
in
the Figure, by the Circles F G.
As for the Moon; becauſe ſhe is ſome-
times
in oppoſition to the Sun;
therefore muſt
her
Orb comprehend in it the Earth;
be-
cauſe
ſhe appears dark in her Conjunction,
and
ſometimes eclipſes the Sun, therefore
that
muſt neceſſarily be without her Orb, as
it
is in that Epicycle at H.
In the Centre of
which
, the Earth muſt neceſſarily be ſcitua-
ted
according to all thoſe appearances men-
tioned
before.
So that the Orb of its an-
nual
Motion, will be repreſented by the
Circle
D.
All which appearances, cannot ſo well be
reconciled
by Ptolomy, Tycho, Origanus, or
by
any other Hypotheſis, as by this of Co-
pernicus
.
But the application of theſe to
the
ſeveral Planets, together with ſun-
dry
other particulars, concerning the
354174That the Earth may be a Planet. rical part of Aſtronomy, you may ſee more
fully
ſet down by thoſe who have purpoſely
handled
this Subject, Copernicus, Rheticus,
Galilæus
;
but more eſpecially Keplar, unto
whom
I do acknowledg my ſelf indebted for
ſundry
Particulars in this Diſcourſe.
I have done with that which was the chief
purpoſe
of the preſent Treatiſe;
namely,
the
removal of thoſe common Prejudices
that
Men uſually entertain againſt this Opi-
nion
.
It remains, that by way of Conclu-
ſion
, I endeavour to ſtir up others unto theſe
kind
of Studies, which by moſt Men are
ſo
much neglected.
’Tis the moſt rational way, in the proſe-
cution
of ſeveral Objects, to proportion
our
love and endeavour after every thing,
according
to the excellency and deſireable-
neſs
of it.
But now, amongſt all Earthly
Contentments
, there is nothing either bet-
ter
in it ſelf, or more convenient for us, than
this
kind of Learning;
and that, whether
you
conſider it according to its general Na-
ture
, as a Science;
or according to its more
ſpecial
Nature, as ſuch a Science.
1. Conſider it as a Science. Certain it is,
that
amongſt the variety of Objects, thoſe
are
more eligible, which conduce unto the
welfare
of that which is our beſt part, our
Souls
.
’Tis not ſo much the pleaſing of
our
Senſes, or the increaſing of our For-
tunes
, that does deſerve our induſtry, as
the
information of our Judgments, the im-
provement
of our Knowledg.
355175That the Earth may be a Planet. the World may think, yet it is not a vaſt
Eſtate
, a Noble Birth, an eminent place,
that
can add any thing to our true real
Worth
;
but it muſt be the degrees of that
which
makes us Men, that muſt make us
better
Men, the endowments of our Soul,
the
enlargement of our Reaſon.
Were it
not
for the contemplation of Philoſophy,
the
Heathen Seneca would not ſo much 11Præf. ad
lib
. 1. Nat.
Quæſt
.
thank the Gods for his Being;
Niſi ad hæc
admitterer
non fuit opere pretium naſci.
De-
trahe
hoc ineſtimabile bonum, non eſt vita tanti,
ut
ſudem, ut æſtuem.
Take but away this
benefit
, and he would not think Life worth
the
ſweating for.
So much happineſs could
he
diſcern in the Studies of Nature.
And
therefore
as a Science in general, it may ve-
ry
well deſerve our Love and Induſtry.
2. Conſider it as ſuch a particular Sci-
ence
, Aſtronomy:
The word ſignifies, the
Law
of the Stars;
and the Hebrews (who
do
not ordinarily admit of compoſition)
call
it, in two words, ם'טש תוקח, Cœ-
22Job 38. 53
Jer
. 33. 25.
lorum ſtatuta, or the Ordinances of Heaven;
becauſe they are governed in their Courſes
by
a certain Rule, as the Pſalmiſt ſpeaks, in
Pſal
.
148. 6. God has given them a Law which
ſhall
not be broken.
Now this, of all other natural Sciences,
may
beſt of all challenge our Induſtry;
and
that
, whether you conſider it,
1. Abſolutely, as it is in it ſelf: Or,
2. As it ſtands in reference to us.
356176That the Earth may be a Planet.
1. As it is in it ſelf. The excellency of
any
Science may be judged of (ſaith the Phi-
loſopher
) firſt, by the excellency of the
Object
.
Secondly, By the certainty of its
Demonſtrations
.
(1.) For the Object. It is no leſs than the
whole
World (ſince our Earth alſo is one
of
the Planets) more eſpecially thoſe vaſt
and
glorious Bodies of the Heavens.
So
that
in this reſpect, it far exceeds all thoſe
barren
, empty Speculations, about Materia
Prima
, or Univerſale, and ſuch-like Cob-
webs
of Learning;
in the ſtudy of which,
ſo
many do miſplace their younger Years.
And for the ſame reaſon likewiſe is it to be
preferr’d
before all thoſe other Sciences,
whoſe
Subjects are not either oſ ſo wide an
extent
, or ſo excellent a Nature.
(2.) From the Demonſtrations of Aſtrono-
my
, they are as infallible as Truth it ſelf,
and
for this reaſon alſo does it excel all
other
Knowledg, which does more depend
upon
conjectures and Uncertainty.
They
are
only thoſe who want skill in the Princi-
ples
of this Science, that miſtruſt the Con-
cluſions
of it.
Since therefore in theſe re-
ſpects
, it is one of the moſt excellent Scien-
ces
in Nature, it may beſt deſerve the indu-
ſtry
of Man, who is one of the beſt Works
of
Nature.
Other Creatures were made
with
their Heads and Eyes turned down-
wards
:
Would you know why Man was not
created
ſo too?
Why it was, that he might
be
an Aſtronomer.
357177That the Earth may be a Planet.
Os homini ſublime dedit, Celumq; tueri
Juſſit
, &
erectos ad Sydera tollere vultus.
God gave to Man an upright Face, that be
Might
view the Stars, and learn Aſtronomy.
2. Conſider it in reference to us, and ſo
it
is;
1. Moſt Uſeful.
2. Moſt Pleaſant.
1. Moſt Uſeful, and that in ſundry re-
ſpects
.
It proves a God and a Providence,
and
incites our Hearts to a greater admira-
tion
and fear of his Omnipotency.
We may
underſt
and by the Heavens, bow much mightier
he
is that made them;
for by the greatneſs and
beauty
of the Creatures, proportionably the Maker
of
them is ſeen, ſaith the Book of Wiſdom, Ch.
13. 4,5. ’Twas hence Ariſtotle fetch’d his chief
Argument
to prove a primus Motor.
’Twas
the
conſideration of theſe things that ſirſt led
Men
to the Knowledg and Worſhip of God,
(ſaith Tully);
Hæc nos primum ad 11Tuſcul. 1
Item
Plut.
de
Plæcit.
Phil
. l. 1.
c
6.
rum cultum, tum ad modeſtiam, magnitudinemq;
animi erudivit. And therefore when God by
the
Prophet, would convince the People of
his
Deity, he bids them lift up their Eyes on
high
;
and behold who hath created thoſe things,
that
bringeth out their Hoſt by Number, that
calleth
them all by their Names, &
c. Iſa. 40. 26.
Which
occaſioned that ſaying of Laetantius;

Tanta
rerum magnitudo, tanta diſpoſitio, tanta
22Inſtit. l. 2.
c
.5.
in ſervandis ordinibus, temporibuſq;
358178That the Earth may be a Planet. non potuit aut olim ſine provido artifice oriri,
aut
conſtare tot ſæculis ſine incola potente, aut
perpetuum
gubernari ſine perito &
ſciente re-
ctore
, quod ratio ipſa declar at.
Such a great
order
and conſtancy amongſt thoſe vaſt Bo-
dies
, could not at ſirſt be made, but by a
wiſe
Providence, nor ſince preſerved without
a
powerful Inhabitant, nor ſo perpetually
governed
without a skilful Guide.
True indeed, an ordinary view, and com-
mon
apprehenſion of theſe Celeſtial Bodies,
muſt
needs manifeſt the Excellency and Om-
nipotency
of their Maker;
but yet a more
accurate
and diligent enquiry into their Na-
tures
, will raiſe our Underſtandings unto a
nearer
Knowledg, and greater Admiration
of
the Deity.
As it is in thoſe inferior
things
, where the meer out-ſide of a Man,
the
comelineſs and majeſty of his Counte-
nance
, may be ſome Argument from whence
to
infer the excellency of his Creator.
But
yet
the ſubtil Anatomiſt, who ſearches more
deeply
into this wonderful Structure@ may
ſee
a clearer evidence for this, in the conſi-
deration
of the inward Fabrick, the Muſ-
cles
, Nerves, Membranes;
together with
all
thoſe ſecret Contrivances in the Frame of
this
little World.
Thus alſo is it in the
great
Univerſe, where the common appre-
henſion
of things is not at all conſiderable,
in
compariſon to thoſe other Diſcoveries,
which
may be found out by a more exact
enquiry
.
As this Knowledg may conduce to
359179That the Earth may be a Planet. proving of a God, and making Men reli-
gious
;
ſo likewiſe may it ſerve to confirm
unto
us the Truth of the Holy Scriptures;
ſince the Sacred Story, in the order of its
Narrations
, does ſo exactly agree with the
Converſions
of Heaven, and Logiſtical Aſtro-
nomy
.
It may alſo ſtir us up to behave our ſelves
anſwerably
, unto the noble and divine Na-
ture
of our Souls.
When I conſider the Hea-
ven
, the Works of thy Fingers;
the Moon and
the
Stars which thou haſt ordained:
What is
11Pſal.8. 3,6 Man, that thou art ſo mindful of him?
as to
create
ſuch vaſt glorious Bodies for his Ser-
vice
.
Again, when I conſider with my ſelf, the
ſtrange
immenſity and bigneſs of this great
Univerſe
;
in compariſon to which, this Earth
of
ours, is but as an undiſcernable Point:
When I conſider that I carry a Soul about
me
, of a far greater worth than all this,
and
Deſires that are of a wider extent, and
more
unbounded capacity, than this whole
Frame
of Nature;
then me-thinks it muſt
needs
argue a degenerateneſs and poverty
of
Spirit, to buſy my Faculties about ſo
ignoble
, narrow a Subject, as any of theſe
earthly
things.
What a folly is it in Men to have ſuch
high
conceits of themſelves, for ſome ſmall
Poſſeſſions
which they have in the World
above
others, to keep ſo great a busſle
about
ſo poor a Matter.
Hoc eſt
360180That the Earth may be a Planet. quod inter tot gentes ferro & igni dividitur.
11Sen. Nat.
Quæſt
. l. 1.
Nonne
&
terrena
a-
nimalia

conſider
a-
tis
, quibus
præſidere

videami-
ni
? Nam
ſi
inter
mures
vi-
deres
u-
num
ali-
quem
, jus
ſibi
ac po-
teſtatem

præ
cæteris
vindican-
tem
, quan-
to
movere-
ris
cha-
chinno
,
&c.
Boëius
de
Conſol
.l.2.
’Tis but a little Point, which with ſo much
ado
is diſtributed unto ſo many Nations
by
Fire and Sword.
What great matter is
it
to be a Monarch of a ſmall part of a Point?
Might not the Ants as well divide a little
Mole-hill
into divers Provinces, and keep as
great
a ſtir in diſpoſing of their Govern-
ment
?
Punctum eſt illud in quo Navigatis, in
quo
Bellatis, in quo Regna diſponitis.
All this
place
wherein we War, and Travel, and
diſpoſe
of Kingdoms, is but a Point far leſs
than
any of thoſe ſmall Stars, that at this
diſtance
are ſcarce diſcernable.
Which when
the
Soul does ſeriouſly meditate upon, it
will
begin to deſpiſe the narrowneſs of its
preſent
Habitation, and think of providing
for
it ſelf a Manſion in thoſe wider Spaces
above
, ſuch as may be more agreeable to the
Nobleneſs
and Divinity of its Nature.
Why ſhould any one dream of propaga-
ting
his Name, or ſpreading his Report
through
the World?
when as though he had
more
Glory than Ambition can hope for;
yet as long as all this habitable Earth is but
an
inconſiderable Point, what great matter
can
there be in that Fame which is included
within
ſuch ſtrait contracted Limits?
Quicunq; ſolam mente præcipiti petit
22Boëtius
Ibid
.
Summumq; credit gloriam, Late patentes ætheris cernat plagas, Arctumq; terrarum ſitum.
361181That the Earth may be a Planet.
Brevem replere non valentis ambitum,
# Pudebit aucti nominis.
He that to Honour only ſeeks to mount,
# And that his chiefeſt end doth count;
Let him behold the largeneſs of the Skies,
# And on the ſtrait Earth caſt his Eyes;

He
will deſpiſe the glory of his Name,
# Which cannot fill ſo ſmall a Frame.
Why ſhould any one be taken up in the
admiration
of theſe lower out-ſides, theſe
earthly
Glories?
Reſpicite Cœli ſpatium, fir-
11Idem l. 3. mitudinem, celeritatem, &
aliquando deſinite
vilia
mirari.
He that rightly underſtands
the
Nature of the Heavens, will ſcarce e-
ſteem
any other thing worth his notice, much
leſs
his wonder.
Now when we lay all this together, that
he
who hath moſt in the World, hath almoſt
nothing
of it;
That the Earth it ſelf, in
compariſon
to the Univerſe, is but an incon-
ſiderable
Point:
And yet that this whole
Univerſe
does not bear ſo great proportion
to
the Soul of Man, as the Earth does unto
that
:
I ſay, when a Man, in ſome retired
thoughts
, ſhall lay all this together, it muſt
needs
ſtir up his spirits to a contempt of
theſe
earthly Things, and make him place
his
love, and endeavour upon thoſe Com-
forts
that may be more anſwerable to the
excellency
of his Nature.
Without this Science, what Traffick could
we
have with Forreign Nations?
362182That the Earth may be a Planet. would become of that mutual Commerce,
whereby
the World is now made but as one
Common-wealth
.
Voſq; mediis in aquis Stellæ, pelagoq; timendo,
Decretum
monſtratis iter, totiq;
dediſtis,
Legibus
inventis hominum, commercia mundo.
’Tis you bright Stars, that in the fearful Sea
Does
guide the Pilot through his purpos’d way.
’Tis your direction that doth Commerce give,
With
all thoſe Men that thro’ the World do live.
2. As this Science is thus profitable in theſe
and
many other reſpects:
ſo likewiſe is it
equally
pleaſant.
The Eye (ſaith the Phi-
loſopher
) is the ſenſe of Pleaſure, and
there
are no delights ſo pure and immate-
rial
, as thoſe which enter through that
Organ
.
Now to the Underſtanding, which
is
the Eye of the Soul, there cannot be any
fairer
proſpect, than to view the whole Frame
of
Nature, the Fabrick of this great Vni-
verſe
, to diſcern that order and comelineſs
which
there is in the magnitude, ſituation, mo-
11Wiſd. 7.
18
, 19.
tion of the ſeveral parts that belong unto it;
to ſee the true cauſe of that conſtant varie-
ty
and alteration which there is in the diffe-
rent
Seaſons of the Year.
All which muſt
needs
enter into a Man’s thoughts, with a
great
deal of ſweetneſs and complacency.

And
therefore it was that Julius Cæſar, in
the
Broils and Tumult of the Camp, made
choice
of his delight:
363183That the Earth may be a Planet.
Media inter prælia ſemper,
11Lucan.
l
.10.
Stellarum, Cœliq;
plagis, ſuperiſq; vacavit.
He always leiſure found, amidſt his Wars,
To
mark the Coaſts of Heav’n, &
learn the ſtars.
And for this reaſon likewiſe did Seneca,
amidſt
the continual noiſe and busſle of the
Court
, betake himſelf to this Recreation:
O quam juvabat, quo nihil majus, parens
Natura
gennit, operis immenſi artifex,
Cœlum
intueri Solis, &
curros ſacros
Mundiq
;
motus, Solis alternas vices,
Orbemq
;
Pheobes, Aſtra quem cingunt vaga
Lateq
;
fulgens ætheris magni decus. O what a pleaſure was it to ſurvay
Natures
chief Work, the Heavens;
where we may
View
the alternate Courſes of the Sun,
The
ſacred Chariots, how the World does run;
The Moons bright Orb, when ſhe’s attended by
Thoſe
ſcattered ſtars, whoſe light adorns the sky.
And certainly thoſe eminent Men, who
have
this way beſtowed a great part of their
imploiment
, ſuch as were Ptolomy, Julius Cæ-
ſar
, Alphonſus King of Spain, the Noble Ty-
cho
, &
c. have not only by this means pitched
upon
that which for the preſent was a more
ſolid
kind of pleaſure and contentment, but
alſo
a ſurer way to propagate their memo-
ries
unto future Ages.
Thoſe great
364184That the Earth may be a Planet. Pyramids which were built to perpetuate
the
memory of their Founders, ſhall ſooner
periſh
and moulder away into their Primi-
tive
Duſt, than the Names of ſuch Wor-
thies
ſhall be forgotten.
The Monuments
of
Learning are more durable than the Mo-
numents
of Wealth or Power.
All which Encouragements may be abun-
dantly
enough to ſtir up any conſidering
Man
, to beſtow ſome part of his time in the
ſtudy
and inquiſition of theſe Truths.
Fœlices animæ, quibus hæc cognoſcere primum,
# Inq;
domos ſuperas ſcandere cura fuit.
FINIS.
Books ſold by John Gellibrand, at the
# Golden Ball in St.
Pauls Church-Yard.
BOneti Anatomia. 2 Vol. ir Folio.
Zodiacus Medico-Gallicus, pro 3 Annis. 40
Bp
VVilkins Sermons, and Beauty of Provi-
# dence.
In Octavo.
Pluturch’s Morals, tranſlated from the Greek
# by ſeveral Hands.
In Oetavo.
Remarks upon the deplorable Fall of the
# Emperor Julian.
In Zuarto.
A Triennial Viſitation-Sermon, preach’d at
# Reading, before Seth L.
Biſhop of Salisbury.
# By John Barrow Prebend of VVindſor.
Baudrandi Geographia ordine literarum diſpo-
# ſita.
2 Vol. in Fol. Paris. 1682.
365
[Empty page]
366
[Empty page]
367
[Empty page]
368
[Empty page]
369
[Empty page]